Tf 3111 TfS 1 905' CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY DATE DUE rniNTCOINU'S.A. PF 3111.?4T"l90r""' '■"'"^ 3 1924 026 549 273 Cornell University Library The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924026549273 C Of%t\l £ LL. UmI, THE LIFE AND WORKS OF SCHILLER By Prof. Calvin Thomas. 481 pp. ismo. $1.50 nft» "An eminently sympathetic study, which will com- mend itself to the general reader (ox its avoidance of the minor pedantries into which writers on German subjects — not excluding; Carlyle — are prone to fall. Particularly interesting is Professor Thomas's discus- sion of the philosophy of Schiller." —N Y. Evening Post. GERMAN READER AND THEME BOOK By Calvin Thomas and W. A. Hervey. 438 pp. ]2mo. jii.oo net. exercises based on the text. SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES To accompany Thomas's Practical German Grammar. (Based in Part on the Reading Lessons and Colloquies.) By W. A. Hervey, Imtructor in Columbia University. With vocabulary. 124 + 54 pp. i2mo. 2SC. net. HENRY HOLT & CO., Publishers NEW YORK CHICAGO PRACTICAL GERMAN GRAMMAR BY CALVIN THOMAS Professor ob Germanic Languages and Iatbratures in Columbia University FOURTH EDITION, CAREFULLY REVISED AND PRINTED FROM NE W PL A TBS NEW YORK HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY KB TF Copyright, 1895, i8g8, 1901 BY HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY Copyright, 1905 BY HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY PREFACE Ik preparing this new edition of my German Grammar I have taken advantage of the resetting of the type to subject the work to a careful revision from beginning to end. My aim has been to bring the book up to date and improve it in matters of detail without in any way changing its essential character. Aside from the correcting of some trifling errors which either had escaped my notice hitherto or were of such a character that they could not be corrected in the stereo- type plates, I have tried to improve the form of presentation, simplifying or amplifying according as the one process or the other seemed to be required. I have sought to profit by the very numerous suggestions that have come to me during the past ten years from, teachers in all parts of the country. To all these helpful critics, who have taken an interest in improving the book, I wish to return my thanks. I have, of course, introduced the official German spelling, according to the convention of 1901, and I have also adopted the few simplified English spellings recommended by the National Educational Association in 1898. If it was my 'duty, as the author of a German grammar, to take cogni- zance and help spread the knowledge of what the Germans are doing for the improvement of their spelling, it seemed to me that it was no less my duty, as an American teacher, to support such well-directed and authoritative efforts as are being made in our country for the improvement of English spelling, where the need of improvement is so much more pressing. iv PREFACE As is intimated above, I have not tried to make a new- book of a different sort, but to revise the old one in matters of detail. The general plan and arrangement of the gram- mar, even the paragraph numbers, to which teachers have become accustomed, and which are referred to in other extant publications, remain unchanged. The exercises and vocabu- laries of Part I have been left substantially as they were, be- cause they were prepared originally with very great care, and I saw no reason to believe that I could improve upon them. On the other hand, the exercises at the end of Part II have been much more radically dealt with, for there I found that I had made a mistake. In selecting sentences from the clas- sics for their illustrative value I had been guided too much by literary, and not enough by practical considerations. The consequence was that many of the sentences, while admir- ably illustrative of syntax, were not well adapted for trans- lation into German by students unacquainted with the clas- sics. In revising I have endeavored to get rid of such sentences and to replace them with others better suited to the needs of the learner. The principles upon which the book was originally built were set forth in the preface to the first edition (1895), as follows : " This book is divided, on pm-ely pedagogical grounds, into two parts. Part I is designed as a beginner's manual, and embodies those ideas of method which commend them- selves to the author after some fifteen years of constant at- tention to the subject. I am of the opinion that learners who have passed the age of childhood should have grammar- lessons from the first, or at least after a sufiicient preliminary drill upon pronunciation. At the same time it has to be remembered that the object of study is the language, not the grammar. The latter is only the means to an end. The learner should accordingly begin at once to read, hear and use the language, letting the grammatical textbook save his time by systematizing his knowledge and showing him what to look for. This means that the beginner's grammar-Ies- PREFACE V sons should deal only with matters of fundamental impor- tance and should avoid all confusing details. And the knowledge gained should be applied at once in the reading, memorizing and repetition of appropriate exercises upon the language. " Part I of this work, therefore, aims to present the fun- damental facts of the grammar without omitting anything necessary, or including anything unnecessary, to a bird's-eye view of the subject such as will fit the learner to begin read- ing easy prose. All minutiae of grammatical scholarship, word-lists that do not need to be learned, and syntactical principles that can best be studied in connection with the reading of literature, are postponed to Part II. The order of presentation is that usually followed in scientific grammars, it being my conviction that for students who have reached the high-school age, a systematic treatise has decided advan- tages over a lesson-book in which the matter is presented in arbitrary installments. " Great care has been bestowed upon the exercises, since it is here, as it seems to me, that the existing grammars fail to meet the present demand. What the learner of a living language most needs to develop is a sensitive and trustworthy feeling for the language. This is of more importance than anything else, whatever the object in view may be, whether speaking, writing, reading or scholarship. From this it fol- lows that he should occupy his mind and store his memory with nothing but natm-al forms of expression as they occur in use. Anything else is not German. He should be taught that the sentence, not the word, is the real unit of language, and that he must learn German by learning sentences such as Germans use. He should not waste his time upon mechan- ical Ollendorfiian preparations, such as are never heard or seen outside the schoolroom, nor should he get the idea that he can make German of his own by piecing together words with the help of his grammar and dictionary. His task and his ideal of progress should be simply to reproduce, orally and in writing, what he hears and reads ; first to reproduce Ti PREFACE it intelligently with the aid of his grammar, and then t< reproduce it frequently, until it becomes second nature. This means that for a long time his efforts at translating from English into German should be confined to easy variations upon a German original. I am fully persuaded that the dis- connected, vacuous, often puerile sentences with which the most of the school grammars require the beginner to conceni himself do more harm than good. They blight the sense for idiom, lead to mechanical habits of translating, whicli are difficult to break up, and furnish nothing valuable for the memory to appropriate." After the lapse of ten years, during which textbooks have multiplied and the literature of method has greatly increased, I find in this earlier confession of faith nothing that I wist to recant or to modify. There is no doubt room for differ- ent kinds of books, varying with the age and ability of the pupil and with the idiosyncrasy of the teacher. Such a thing as the best method does not exist, and it is unwise to pin one's faith too strenuously to any routine or set of dogmas The capable teacher will always wish to prove all things and hold fast to that which he personally finds to be good. ] am convinced, however, that for learners who take up the serious study of German under the conditions ordinarily pre- sented by our American high schools and colleges — where the problem is the best use of a limited time — a bool planned on the general lines above described will prove mosi sarviceable. As for the grammatical statements in Part I, there is noth- ing that I have so much aimed at as simplicity and clearness I do not think it possible to present the essentials of Germar grammar in simpler language — there is of course room foi some difference of opinion as to what the essentials are — except by dividing the subject up into smaller bits, more oi less arbitrarily an-anged, as is done in the lesson-books. Bu1 what is by that means gained in simplicity as the studeni advances from day to day is lost later when he looks bad and tries to get a general view. He then finds that frag- PREFACE vii ments of subjects that belong together have been treated fragmentarily here and there. He does not know what he has learned nor where to find things. His knowledge is not clear and well ordered. It lacks Ubersiohtlichkeit. With respect to the exercises in Part I, finally, I wish to say that I should not myself think of using all of them with any one class. They have been made numerous and diversi- fied in character in order to meet different requirements. I have wished to give the teacher an opportunity to test the value of different kinds of drill, all of which have their ad- vantages and their advocates, to determine for himself what is best for his pupils, to vary the lessons from year to year or with different classes, and to jjrogress more or less rapidly according to the amount of time that is to be devoted to a first survey of German grammar. CALVIN THOMAS. New York, May, 1905. TABLE OF CONTENTS PART FIRST PAGl INTEODUCTORY Pronhnciation < Vowels I Diphthongs 1^ Consonants 1< Accentuation 2i THE PABTS OF SPEECH AND THEIR VARIATIONS . . 2i The Article 2i The Noun 3i Strong Declension 3< Weak Declension 5: Mixed Declension 5f Declension of Proper Names 6; The Adjective : Inflection 6' Comparison 71 The Numerals 8^ The Pronoun 8! Personal, Reflexive, and Intensive Pronouns . . . . 9( Possessive Pronouns . 9- Demonstrative and Determinative Pronouns .... 10; Relative Pronouns 10( Interrogative Pronouns li; Indefinite Pronouns and Pronominal Adjectives . . .11' The Verb : Conjugation ' 12( Weak Conjugation 13; Strong Conjugation 13i Modal Auxiliaries and lutffcn 15i Passive Voice 161 Reflexive Verbs I7, Impersonal Verbs 171 Compound Verbs Igi The Particles igt Recapitulation or the Rules of Word-Obder . . , .19; TABLE OF CONTENTS U PART SECOND PAGE TBODUCTOBT 197 IE Articles : Use 199 IE NonN 207 Grender 207 Number 212 Syntax of the Cases : The Nominative 215 The Genitive 216 The Dative 227 The Accusative 233 Apposition 238 Declension : Supplementary Details 240 The Strong Declension 240 The Weak Declension 244 The Mixed Declension 246 Foreign and Anomalous Declensions 248 Inflection of Proper Names 249 IE Adjective : Syntax 251 Use of the Numerals ■ 260 IE Pkonoun : Syntax 262 Personal Pronouns 262 Possessive Pronouns 267 Demonstrative Pronouns 269 Interrogative Pronouns 271 Relative Pronouns 272 Indefinite Pronouns 274 IE Verb 278 Supplementary Details on Conjugation 278 List of Strong Verbs 284 Use of the Modal Auxiliaries 293 Impersonal Verbs 298 Compound Verbs 299 Use of the Passive Voice 802 Syntax of Number and Person 304 Use of the Tenses 305 Use of the Modes 308 The Subjunctive 308 The Conditional and Imperative 316 Use of the Infinitive 318 Use of the Participle 323 ^ TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGI The Adverb : Syntax . . ■ • ^^^ The Preposition : Syntax 32^ The Conjunction : Syntax .....•■•• "^^ The Interjection °^S Word-Formation ^^^ Derivation of Nouns 351 Derivation of Adjectives 35fi Derivation of Verbs 360 Derivation of Pronouns and Particles 366 Word-Combination : 366 Compound Nouns • • 366 Compound Adjectives 36S Compound Verbs, Pronouns, and Particles 370 The Sentence 371 Dependent Clauses 373 Word-Order 376 Position of Adjuncts 383 Exercises in Syntax 387 Appendix I : Orthography • . 402 Appendix II : English-German Cognates 40S Appendix III : The German Script 413 Vocabularies .... 41!; Index .477 GERMAN GRAMMAR PART FIRST INTRODUCTORY 1. German and English. German and English are ister languages. Both descend from a language spoken y an Aryan people who, long before the beginning of he Christian era, had settled in north-central Europe, inhere its Tarious tribes became known to the Romans nder the collective name of Germani. In the fifth entury A.D. Germani from the northwestern lowlands ccupied Britain and introduced there their own lan- uage, which came to be known as 'English.' Those escendants of the continental Germani that have re- lained in the old home now speak various languages, f which the most important is the one called ' German ' y us, but Deidsch by those who use it. It is the lan- uage of the entire German Empire, of a large part of Lustria and Switzerland, and of numerous colonies. 1. Deufsch is historically the same word as our 'Dutch,' ut the latter term has come to be applied exclusively to le language of Holland. Dutch is not German, nor a ialect of German, but a distinct language. 2. Owing to their common origin German and English ave in common a great many words that- belonged to the mguage from which both descend. Such words are called 1 2 INTEODUCTOKY 'cognates.' Cognates may resemble each other closely form and meaning, or they may not. Thus the Germs word Bruder is cognate with brother and means brotht while Baum is cognate with beam, but means tree. 3. On the otner hand, in spite of this common origi German grammar seems at first to have little resemblan to English grammar. This is because English has lo nearly all those grammatical distinctions which were on common to both languages, whereas German has preserv< them more fully. 2. The German Alphabet. The Germans often prii their language in Roman letters like those employt for English ; more commonly, however, they use the s called 'German' characters, which developed out of tl Roman previous to the invention of printing. Tl letters and their German names, by which it is advisab that they be always called, are as follows : German Roman German German Roman German form form name form form name % a A a ah di n N' n en 35 B B b bay D oh e c C c tsay ? P P P pay ® b D d day €i q Q q koo © e E e ay m r R r er (very) S f F f efi © M S s ess @ g G g gay Z t T t tay ^ I) H h hall . U u U u 00 3 t I i ee » b V V fow {iow 3 i J J yot m h) W w vay ^ t K k kah 3£ J X X ix S I L 1 el d ^ Y y ipsilon mm M m em 3 5 Z z tset INTRODUCTORY 3 1. Of the two forms f and §, the latter, called ' final s,' i used at the end of a word, or of a stem-syllable ; else- where the 'long s' is used. Thus: ba§, the, and baSfelbe, he same; toeife, wise, but ffieiS^eit, wisdom. a. In foreign words and proper names the form g is pre- 3rred at the end of a syllable before other consonant? dan ^j, t or f; thus ^PreSb^ter, 5Di§!ur§, SiSmard, 3§Ianb, ut gflefpeft, m'ci\t\t, Softon, efjenj. (But see Appendix I.) 2. To the above list of alphabetic characters should be dded: (1) the digraphs (| = ch, (f = ck, ng = ng, ^3f=pf, ^ = ph, ^ = ss, t^ = th, and ^ = tz ; (2; the trigraph fd^ = sch ; 3) the diphthongs at = ai, an = au, et ei, eu = eu ; and i) the vowels with umlaut, a = a or se, o = o or ce, it = ii or e, and au = Sxl or seu. a. The digraphs, trigraph and diphthongs are named by jmbining the names of their component parts (thus d^ is illed tsay-hah) ; the vowels with umlaut by pronouncing le sounds they denote, or by saying ' a=umlaut,' ' o=umlaut,' tc. They are also called 'modified a,' 'modified o,' etc. 3. The character ^, called ess-tset, takes the place of fS t the end of a word and of ff before t or after a long vowel r a diphthong ; thus, toiffen, to know, but hJu^te, k7iew, and } toet^, / know ; ©d^u^, shot (with short u), plural ©d^iiffe, it ^u^, foot (with long u), plural ^^ii^e. In Roman letters appears variously as ss, sz, fz, or B. The ofiicial rules (see }low) recommend B, but the learner is advised to use ss )th for ff and for ^. 3. Orthography. There has long been in German, as . English, more or less difference of usage in the speU- g of certain words and classes of words. In recent iars several of the German governments have adopted Bcial rules regulating doubtful points. At an impor- nt conference held in 1901 a general agreement was ached, so that we now have a uniform official spelKng 4 I N TROnV C TO KY aoi'opted in all t>oiinunv aiui also in Austria and Swit/tn^ land. riiis o-ninin\ar follows tlu> now otlioial spoiling, ¥ov an uooonnt of if, in iis rolation to oldor or divorgonl spolling-s, whioh will often bo mot with in print, se€ Appondix 1. 4. Initial Capitals. (lornian. liko lMi>;lish. usos n oapital lt>ttor at tho booinuino; of sontoiioos. linos of pootry, diroot quotations, propor nouns and most ad- jeotivos dorivod from thousand adjootivos of titlo. Tlio important prineiplos poouliar to Dornian aro as follows: 1. Kvory noun and woixl iisod as a noun lioiiiiis with a capital; as ba\< vauvS, ffic /mK.-tr : bii\S ^duMic, ffif l>fauf\f)il ; ba^ OiclHMl, ffirhi;/ ; otUM\< (.*hlti\^, somrf/ihi;/ ijoofL a. Hut a noun-foru> not usod substautix oly takos a small initial; as Slbcnb, eroiiiiuj. but iilHMib\S, >u the (•rrniiiir : %\m-, />(iii\ but ciit yiaar 'Hiimitcii, n ffir mini(f,-.<. Tho s;inio is truo of nouns forming a jiart of oorlain phrasos; as Jcil, part, but tcihichmcu, jxirticifiate ; c^tatt, /'/('(•(■, but ftattfin» boa, tdki' /)/iliv, but not to tho rotloxivo (idi. With rogard to bu, f/ioii, bcin, t/n/, and tlioir oaso-foims, usago varios ; but it is o>istomary to writo thoui with a oapital in lott\\i aiucvi; fauifd^e 'IhiU, tfir Anicririni /irop/c. 5. Syllabication, Words aro dividod at tho end of a lino in aooordanoo with tho following prinoiplos : 1. !>ot\voon two viiwols any siniplo oonsouantal sion, or any I'ond.ination (oxoopt ufl) donoting a simple cousonantal INTEODUCTORY 6 lund, goes with the following vowel. Examples : ge:6en, =^ert, la=d)in, gvu=^en, t;a4cf)en, rci=3cn, s^(--i;.i, ©tab=te ; but ugen, §im=gev. "2. Of two or more consonants occurring between two jwels only the last goes with the following vowel. Ex- nples: ^lUtev, 3lV=fel, fvat=5cn, ,S{nof=tJe or ^noS=^c, ©tiif=fe or (3tuc=fe, d being ahyays resohed into f=f). 3. Excepted from these rules are (1) compounds, which lould keep their parts intact, and ('2) cases in which a rict application of the rules would result in breaking up natui-al sound -group ; thus bar=in, not ban"iu, therein ; aum=aft, not 33au=maft, liranch of a tree ,• ge=|)flcgt, not i^f=Iegt, from Jjflegen. So also one writes 3l=)3ri=fofe, sftroMiom, 3)lt=fvo=ffcH3, ®i=ytint=tioii. 6, Punctuation. The ordinary marks of punctuation ■e the same in German as in English, but the comma used more freely to set ofE subordinate clauses of all inds. The hyphen is a double stroke (=) and is em- loyed, in addition to the uses familiar in English, to ,ke the place of a suppressed member of a compound ; lus 2anb= unb SSaffertterc, land-animals and water- limals. In ordinary compoimds the hyphen is not ied ; e.g. ^enfterfc^eibe, vnndow-pane. Quotation-marks ■dinaxily appeal" thus: „@itbe gut, alk^ gut," aWs well at ends well. Emphasis is indicated by spaced type ; g. bebenfe erft ba$ SB i e , baiin ba^S 2B a r it m , think first ' the HOW, then of the why. 7. The German Script. Tiiere is a peculiar script, or ritten alphabet, which is employed by most Germans their ordinary writing, tlio they also read and write e Roman script. The letters are as follows : * * It is not important that a beginner learn tlie German script at once, ) he should certainly learn it sooner or later. Script texts for practice in idlng wlU he found in Appendix III. Capitals Small Boman ..^^ J" --^^ PRONUNCIATION Capitals Small Roman Capitals Small Eoman .^^^ .^i^ ^ r PEONUNCIATION 8. The Standard. Since German has a long history and is spoken over a large area, the pronunciation of the language naturally varies considerably in different localities. This is especially true of the less educated, whose local dialects differ greatly from one another and from the speech of the more refined. The best standard is not the dialect of any one locality, but rather the average pronunciation of educated and careful speakers in all parts of Germany. In general such speakers try to avoid all distinctively provincial or dialectic pecul- iarities. THE VOWELS 7 1. 'The standard' is thus only a name for what is sup- posed to be the prevailing practice. Where good usage varies there is no court of appeal whose authority is gen- erally recognized. The student must he prepared for con- siderable differences of opinion as to what 'the best German' is. Some recommend the pronunciation heard on the stage in the serious drama as the best model foi imitation ; the ground being that actors give careful atten- oion to their utterance and, playing in all parts of Ger- niany, tend to rid their pronunciation of all peculiarities that might give offence anywhere. 9. Learning to Pronounce. The beginner is sure to pronounce at first with a marked English 'accent,' which it should be his aim to get rid of. This he may hope to do only by long practice in the imitation of good models. Even then, unless the practice begins in in- fancy, one's foreign ' accent ' seldom disappears entirely, tho it is possible for any careful student to acquire a pronunciation so good that it will not offend even a fastidious German ear. What is called 'accent,' or 'brogue,' is mainly due to slight errors in adjusting the organs of speech to the foreign sounds. Hence it is a great help in learning to pronounce to know just how the foreign sounds are produced and how they differ from the English sounds with whicL they are most likely to be confounded. 1. We therefore proceed to describe the German sounds in detail ; but since several of them are not heard in English, we can not describe them adequately by means of English key-words. Moreover, the pronunciation of English itself differs greatly in different parts of the English-speaking world. These facts necessitate the use of a few technical terms which the student should master if he is not already familiar with them. First, however, attention may be called to 8 PRONUNCIATION 10. A General Rule. Excepting 'i), medial or final, and e in the digraph te = long i, there are no silent let- ters in genuine German words. Every letter is to be pronounced ; e. g. the ^ in Stnabe, the ® in ®nabe, and the final e in both. THE VOWELS 11. Rounded Vowels. Let the learner pronounce ah, and then, while uttering a continuous vowel-sound, gradually round the lips to the position required for the 00 of pool. He will thus produce a series of vowel- sounds as follows : (1) a in ah ; (2) aw in awe ; (3) a in poetic ; (4) o in note ; (5) u in full ; (6) oo in pool. This process is called ' rounding ' ; and since rounding brings the lips closer together, a vowel which is more 'rounded ' is also said to be 'closer' or 'less open.' 12. Fronted and Raised Vowels. Returning to the ah position, pronounce a continuous vowel-sound while gradually raising the front part of the tongue to the position required for the ee in eel. A series of vowel- sounds will be produced as foUows : 0.) a in ah ; (2) a in hat; (3) e in met; (4) ay in day ; (5) * in it; (6) ee in eel. This process is called 'fronting,' and in- volves also an act of ' raising.' The e in met is said to be ' higher ' than the a in hat, and ' lower ' than tbe i in it. And since raising the tongue closes the air- passage above it, a vowel that is ' higher ' is also said to be 'more close,' and one that is 'lower' is also called 'more open.' 13. Slurred Vowels. In English we tend to pass very lightly over any vowel in the syllable next after a strongly accented syllable. By this process, which is called ' slurring,' we deprive the vowel of its distinctive THE VOWELS 9 cHaracter, and convert it into an ' obscure ' sound resem- bling that of u in but. Note the identical sound of the unaccented a, e, i, o, u in the penult of separate, celery, visible, ebony, awfully. 1. In German no vowel except unaccented e should ever be obscured. 14. Quantity of Vowels. The quantity of a sound, properly speaking, is simply the relative length of time taken in uttering it; in common usage, however, the words 'long' and 'short' imply quahty as well as quantity, a short vowel being usually more open than the corresponding long. In German, as in Enghsh, vowel-quantity is often indicated by the spelling of the word. The important rules are these : 1. A vowel doubled or followed by ^ is thereby shown to be long. Examples: 3la[, Stl^te, Seet, ge^t, i^n, Soot, ©tu^l, fu^n. a. The only vowels ever doubled are a, e and o, and even with these the inserted ^ is the more usual device for indicating length. I jng ; appears as i^ only in some pro- nouns and proper names ; elsewhere usually as ie. b. Vowels brought together by composition are not to be regarded as doubled vowels, but are pronounced sep- arately ; e. g. 6ee^ren, to honor, as if written be=e^ren. 2. An accented vowel that ends a syllable, or is followed by a single consonant, is generally long ; if followed by two consonants, it is short ; thus the vowel is long in bu, ^pian, rot, but short in bumm, Sanb, Stoft ; it is long in the accented syllable of SBe'fen, l^o'Ien, Oebe't, 33erbo't, but short in that of toe'ffen, fo'tten, gebe'ttet, berfto'rben. But a long stem- vowel remains long in derived forms; thus the first vowel being long in le'gen, lay, and e'bel, noble, it is also long in legte, laid, and ebler, nobler. 10 PRONUNCIATION a. A syllable ending in a vowel is said to be 'open ; one ending in a consonant, 'closed.' It is an iniportant rule that the vowel of an accented open syllable is long. b. Observe, however, that 6^, ng and \ij, tho each denotes a simple consonantal sound, can not be doubled. Before d^ the vowel may be short, as in brec^en, or long, as in brad^en. Before fcf) it is short, as in mif^en (unless it be a diph- thong, as in raufc^ en). Before ng it is always short. X=f§, ^ ^ jj^ and d = fl, count as two consonants. Before ^ the vowel may be short, as in Su^, lii^te, or long, as in ©ru^, grii^te. c. Other exceptions to the rule in § 14, 2, are not un- common, especially among monosyllables; thus the vowel is short in an, mit, ob ; long in 93art, 3[)tagb, ftet§ ; long in biifter, SBiifte ; short in ©ramma'tif, £aj3i'tel. 15. 31. 21 has but one sound, which, however, may be long or short. Long a is like a in ah; short a is the same sound uttered more quickly.* 1. 2t should never be raised, rounded or slurred. Thus pronounce the a of man, al§, langfam, each time as a quick a in ah, not like the sounds heard in Tnan, alter, handsome. 2. Do not prolong short a : distinguish clearly between lann, can, and ^aljn, boat. 16. @. © has three sounds : (1) an open short sound like that of e in met ; (2) a close long sound like that of ay in day; (3) an 'obscure' sound more or less like that of a in mature. The first two are heard in accented, the third in unaccented, syllables. 1. Do not change the quality of open short e before r : pronounce ber, §err, ^erj with the vowel as in herring, not as in her. 2. Do not make a diphthong of close e by raising it during the act of utterance, thus giving it a vanishing ♦ For examples to practice on see Exercise 1 below. THE VOWELS 11 i-sound. (Many speakers of English habitually make a diphthong of the so-called 'long a' in day, fate). 3. Do not fail to slur unaccented e : make ®e'cEe rime with Mecca, not with fleckj/ ; ^o'f^ with sofa; e'bet with ladle ; gu'tem with shoot 'em ; lei'ten with frighten ; 3i'miner with glimmer. Give the same sound also in ^a'nbetn, ]^a'n= belte, toa'nbern, toa'nberte. The obscure somid is heard especially when final, or before t, m, n, r, and in final e§ (neueS riming with joyous). In other positions unaccented e sometimes approaches a sound between e and i ; thus make beteft rime with latest, rebet with made it. So also be in beei'Ien. 4. Final e is never silent except in some borrowed words, as SRetiue (=9?et)u). 17. 3. S tas two sounds: (1) an open short, like that of i in hit ; (2) a close long, like that of i in "police. 1. Do not slur unaccented t, nor change its character be- fore r : distinguish between §irttn, shepherdess, and §trten, shepherds, and make neither of them rime with certawi. 2. Long i usually appears as ie ; e. g. in tief, nieber, rim- ing with chief, feeder. At the end of borrowed words this ie is generally accented, and has then its regular sound ; e. g. g^emie', §armonie', 5)S^iIofo|)]^ie'. But some words throw the accent back, and the ie is then pronounced in two syllables as t=e (e obscure) ; thus g^ami'Iie (?ya=tni'4i=e), Si'Iie (£i'4t=e), Stu'bie (®tu'=bi=e). a. A similar difference appears in borrowed words in ier. In most of them this syllable rimes with cheer, as Dffi= jie'r, Sarbie'r ; but others drop the r and separate ie into i=e', as SSanquier (33an=!i=e'), ^ortier (51Sor=ti=e'). 18. D. O has two sounds : (1) an open short, not heard in standard English in accented syllables, and intermediate in roundness between the aiu of awe and the of note ; (2) a close long, like the of note. 12 PRONUNCIATION 1. Do not fail to round short o and do not round it toe much : tott must not rime with doll, nor with toll, but lie be^ tween the two. 2. Do not make a diphthong of long o by rounding it dur- ing the act of utterance, thus giving it a vanishing w-sound (Many speakers of English habitually make a diphthong ol the 'long ' in note, know). 3. Do not slur unaccented o : pronounce ®o'ftor with twc short o's, not with the sounds heard in doctor. 19. U. U has two sounds: (1) an open short, like that of u in full ; (2) a close long, like that of oo in pool. 1. Never give to u the sound of English u in union, cube. 2. Do not slur unaccented u : pronounce g^o'luS, ©lo'bus with a duly rounded short u. • 20. D, 9) occurs only in proper names and borrowed words, and has the sound of it (§ 24). 1. But it is also proper to give to t) the sound of t, es- pecially in common words and where it is not accented; e. g. g^Ii'nber, tall hat. 21. The Vowels with Umlaut, or Modified Vowels. The term umlaut (some prefer the name 'mutation') is applied to a peculiar modification of the vowels a, o, w and the diphthong au, due originally to the influence ol an i or j in the next syllable. The effect of this i or j was to make the preceding vowel more like itself, i. e, to raise and front it. 1. The sign of umlaut was at first an e written above the vowel affected, but in time this e became reduced to twc dots; thus: a, b, il, du. In the old spelling 3{, D, il, and Siu were often written 2le, De, Ue, SCeu. In Roman letters one often sees sb. m. ue and np.n. THE VOWELS 13 2. Umlaut was once a living principle in English. We owe to it such variations as man — men, mouse — mice, full — fill, cool — chilli/. 22. 3t. 91 has two sounds: (1) an open short, iden- tical with open short e, as in ^tinbe, which rimes exactly with (£nbe ; (2) an open long, like that of ei in their, as in SSdter. The latter is more open than close e, but not quite so open as short e. 1. Distinguish between Q,^xt, honor, and 2tj)re, ear of corn ; between ine{)ren, increase, and 3Raf)ren, mares. 23. £). D has two sounds, neither of which is heard in English: (1) an open short, (2) a close long. To get the long sound, as in ^Hijit, pronounce the a of day with the lips in position for the o ol pole. The sound is a rounded long e, or a fronted long o. The open short sound is the same, only a little less rounded. 1. Do not fail to round o properly: distinguish between fennen, know, and lonnen, be able; between §o{)Ien, caves, and ^e£)Ien, hide. 2. Do not fail to front 5 properly: distinguish between lonnte, was able, and lonnte, might be able ; between ^o^Ien, a case-form of I^dIjI, hollow, and ^ol^Ien, caves. 24. ii. U has two sounds, neither of them heard in English: (1) an open short, (2) a close long. To get the latter, as in iiber, pronounce the ce of eel with the lips in position for the oo of jiool. The sound is a rounded long t or a fronted long u. The short sound is similar, but a little opener. 1. Do not fail to round u properly : distinguish between liegen. He {recline'), and liigen, lie, {speak falsely) ; between ^iffen, cushion, and iu\\m, kiss. 14 PKONUNCIATION 2. Do not fail to front ii properly: distinguish betweei mu^te, had to, and mii^te, would have to ; between gluffe anc g^Iiiffe, both case-forms of ^'ufl/ nver. 25. Nasal Vowels. These occur only in words bor rowed from the French ; but since the words containing them are both numerous and common, the sounds re quire explanation. A vowel is made nasal by lowering the veil of the palate during the act of utterance, thui allowing the vocal current to vibrate in the nasa passage. There are four such vowels having respec tively the tongue-position of (1) a in man, as in 95a[[t'n (2) a in ah., as in Somme'nt ; (3) aw in awe, as ii SSaUo'n ; (4) m in hut, as in ^arfu'm. 1. In German, as in English, speakers unacquainted witl French often pronounce the nasal vowels as ordinary ora vowels followed by ntj ; calling 33affin, hassa'ng, ©aifon, say zo'ng, etc. But this is hardly to be approved. THE DIPHTHONGS 26. Nature of the Diphthongs. The diphthongs an combinations of certain vowels with a short i or u, th^ two elements being uttered as one syllable. The firs element is always phonetically an a-sound or an o-sound ei being pronounced as oi, and eu as oi. Thus the fiv signs at, au, ct, eu and au really represent but thrC' different diphthongs, dit being the same as eu. 27. 9(t. Sn consists of short a plus short i. It sound is like that of % in 'pinc. 1. In French words at has the sound of a, as in 3[ffai're ©aifon. 28. 3tu. 9tu consists of short o plus short u. It sound is that of o in now, as pronounced with a quid a, as in ah, for its first element. THE CONSONANTS 15 1. Do not raise the first element of au to a sound like that of a in man. (This is a common pronimciation of the oia in now.) 2. In French words an and eau have the sound of o, as in e^auffee', ijjlateau'. 29. @i. @t is pronounced like at. 1. @t^ and ai) were once common for ei and at, but are now used only in proper names. 30. @u. (gu consists phonetically of short o plus short t. Its sound is like that of oi in oil, save that the first element is a little more rounded. 1. Pronounce eu with a pure short o as its first element not exactly as in English oil, which is usually made to sound like aw-il. 31. silt. ^U is the umlaut of au and has the sound of eu. 32. Non-diphthongal Combinations. Those just de- scribed are all the true diphthongs that occur in Ger- man, but there are certain other vowel-combinations that require notice. Except in the interjections ^ut and \s\m, pronounced hwee, 'pfwee (but see § 49), ua, ue, ui and uo occur in native German words only after q ; for their sound see under q (§ 50). In French words the u of these combinations is usually silent, as in ©uita'rre, SBouque't. Dt and ou occur mostly in French words, oi sounding like wah., as in SEoile'tte, and ou like long u, as in %xi\xt, 93ouque't. THE CONSONANTS 33. Definitions. A 'stop' is a consonantal sound pro- duced by a complete closure of the oral passage at some point, as A, d, p ; it consists always of a slight explosion 16 PRONUNCIATION and can not be prolonged. A 'fricative' or 'spirant is produced by a nearly complete closure, as s, v, ill ; it is made by the rubbing of the breath against the walls of a narrow gateway and can always be prolonged. L and T are sometimes called 'liquids,' m, n and ng 'nasals.' 1. A consonantal sound produced with the vocal chords vibrating, as rj, d, z, v, is said to be ' voiced' ; if produced with the chords quiescent, as k, t, s,f, it is 'voiceless.' 2. A consonant produced between the back part of the tongue and the opposite portion of the soft palate, as g in go, ck in duck, is called a ' guttural ' ; produced in a similar way, but farther forward, it is a 'palatal'; produced between the fore part of the tongue and the upper teeth or gums, as d, th, s, it is a 'dental'; produced between the lips, as^, b, it is a 'labial' or 'bilabial,' and produced between the lips and teeth, as/, v, a ' labio-dental.' 34. General Rules. Of the two following rules, the first is applicable to English as well as German, the second to German only : 1. Doubled consonants are to be pronounced like the corresponding single consonants ; e. g. the tt in bitter just Uke the t in mit. a. The doubling of a consonant is simply a device (as in English) to indicate that the preceding vowel is short. The only consonants never doubled are &j, j, \&j^ b and to. h. The rule does not apply to two consonants brought together by composition ; pronounce the tt in mitteilen as in cat-tail, not as in hitter. 2. A voiced consonant when final becomes voiceless; thus oil, as if written aj) ; ^ob, as if %ot. a. In applying this rule a consonant is to be understood as 'final' not only when it ends a word, but when it ends a stem-syllable that is followed by a suffix beginning with a con- THE CONSONANTS 17 35. SB. © has two sounds : (1) when initial or medial, that of & in hy, as in fieben, alfiern ; (2) when final, that of p in pen, as in ah, tiebticf). 36. (£. S occurs only in borrowed words and has three sounds: (1) before low vowels (a, o, u, au) and before consonants, that of k, as in Saf^, Elique ; (2) be- fore high vowels (e, t, X), a, 6), that of j = ts, as in Seber, (J^U'nber ; (3) before e in a few French words, that of voiceless s, as in St)ance. 1. A foreign c which is to sound like ! is often written f, and one which is to sound like 3 is written 3. In some cases, however, usage is unsettled and the official rules are not consistent. Thus we have 6trcu§ or 3irfu§, Somite or ^omitee ; ^ommo'be, but goujje. 2. The combination d always sounds like f. 37. ®^, (£^ has in native German words two sounds, neither of them heard in English : (1) after a low vowel (a, 0, u, au), that of a guttural fricative, as in ®ac^, aiicE) ; (2) after a high vowel (e, i, a, 6, it, eu, au) or a consonant, that of a palatal fricative, as in id), burdj. To pronounce iSad) utter English dock, but without the complete closure necessary for the final click. Instead of the click let the breath make an audible sound of rubbing Dr rasping. To pronounce id) press the tip of the tongue firmly against the lower teeth and try to say ish. 1. Avoid making guttural ^ either a ! or a silent ^ : dis- iinguish the final sounds of rO(^, xd^, StocE . 2. Avoid making palatal d^ either a f or an f c^ : distin- guish the final sounds of bid^, bid and SEifd^. 3. In words from the Greek c^ before a, 0, I or r is usually )ronounced like f, as in g^ara'fter, (Sf)Dr, S^ro'nif ; before e )r i, fike d^ in ic§, as in 6{;emie', S^iru'rg. 18 PRONUNCIATION 4. In words from the French d) sounds like fd^, as in Qi)a'moi§, S^auffee'. 5. gf)§ belonging to one and the same stem sounds like E, as in ^ud^g, Dc^fe ; but when the f belongs to a suffix d; has its separate fricative sound, as in ioad^fatn. 38. 35. 2) has two sounds : (1) when initial or medial, that of d in do, as in bu, SSibber ; (2) when final that of t in to, as in S:ob, lanblici), 2StIbni^. 1. 3)t sounds hke t, as in ©tabt. 39. 55. g is always like English / in for ; e. g. falfd^, offcn, tief. 40. @. ® has in native German words five sounds : (1) when initial, or before a consonant, or doubled, that of a guttural stop like English g in go, as in get)en, ©liid, S)ogge; (2) when final after a low vowel (a, o, u), that of a voiceless guttural fricative = guttural c^, as in Sag, flog, fc^Iug ; (3) when final after a high vowel (e, i, ei) or a consonant, that of a voiceless palatal fricative = palatal (^, as in ^onig, S^eig, 93erg ; (4) when medial after a low vowel, that of a voiced guttural fricative, as in S^oge, 8auge ; (5) when medial after a high vowel or a con- sonant, that of a voiced palatal fricative, as in Sontge, S3e[d)aftigung, 93erge. 1. There is good usage in favor of pronouncing g always as a stop, and giving it the sound of /c (instead of d^) when final or before a voiceless consonant ; thas 2^ag, 3ug, 33erg, fagte, as %oX, 3u!, Serf, fafte, and not as STad^, 3ud}, 33erd^, fat^te. This pronunciation is common in South Gennany and is favored by the stage ; but the use of the fricative g, as described above, is far more common, especially in the northern and midland provinces. 2. The voiced spirants are somewhat difficult. To get the g in lagen first pronounce lac^en ; then learn to voice THE CONSONANTS 19 the sound by keeping up the glottal buzz of the a. By- placing the finger against the glottis (just above the . ' Adam's apple ') the buzz will be distinctly felt if the con- sonant is properly voiced. 3. In words from the French g before e has usually the sound of « in azure, as in ©enie', ^afja'ge, Dra'nge ; and g with following n that of ni in union, as in 6f)amj3a'gner. 41. .!^. ^ at the beginning of a word or a suffix sounds like h in his, as in §err, greitieit ; after a vowel it is silent and serves to indicate that the vowel is long, as in 211) te, fef)r. Between vowels t) has the effect of a dieresis ; thus ru^ig = ru'ig. 42. 3(« S taa the sound of y in yes, as in |e, Saf)r. 1. In a few French words j sounds like z in azure ; e. g. ^ourna't. 43. S. ^ has the sound of It, in liiss, as in Iof)I, (Stud (d being written for double !). 44. £. S is nearly like the English I in let, but should be very clearly articulated, with the front part of the tongue lifted high and the lips opened; e. g. &6en, S5aa. 1. Do not drop I in any position; e. g. not in £)alf, Dualm, ^alme. 2. In words from the French IT sounds like Hi in Wil- liam, as in StUe't, Souttlo'n. 45. 3Jt. 5K is like English m in met, as in me^r, 46. SW. 9? is regularly like English w in wo, as in nte, an. 1. 3fj before I sounds, as in English, Hke ng ; thus fin!en = fingfen, just as in English thinh = thingk. 20 PRONUNCIATION 2. In words from the French, n after a vowel (except be- tween vowels) is not pronounced as a consonant, but serves to indicate nasality in the vowel (§ 25) ; e.g. ©aijo'n. 47. 9Jg. 9tg is not a compound of n and g, but a simple sound. It is always like ng in singer, never like ng in linger. Examples : (ang, longer. Pronounce sep- arately in compounds, as u'n=gern, a'n=gef)t. 48. ^. ^ is always like p in pen, as in 5|3ecf), 9Ka:|)pe. 1. 5pf) occurs only in borrowed words and sounds like f, as in ©t)l^)^, ^£)i(DfD^3£)ie'. 49. 5Pf. ^f is like English pf in cupful. Initially the combination does not occur in English, but is com- mon in German. Examples : ^Pflanje, ^feit, ^fropf. 50. Q. G occurs, as in English, only before u, the combination qii being pronounced like fro, the to being sometimes bilabial and sometimes labio-dental (§ 58). Examples: QueKe, erqm'cfeiT. 1. German qu is not exactly like g'w in quit, nor Uke kv in black cest. It differs from the former in that the lips are less rounded, and from the latter in that the labial ele- ment is weaker, that is, produced with less friction. Pro- nounce duett at first as kvell rather than like quell (see § 58). 51. Ct. There are several ways of pronouncing r: (1) The 'trilled' r, made in the front part of the mouth by the vibration of the tip of the tongue ; (2) the ' uvular ' or ' velar ' r, made in the back part of the mouth by the vibration or flapping of the uvula between the tongue and the soft palate; (3) the 'glottal' r, made in the throat by a very slow vibration of the vocal chords. 1. The ti-illed r is the approved stage pronunciation and is often heard off the stage, but the velar r is now far more THE CONSONANTS 21 common ; is, in fact, the usual r. The learner may safely ignore the glottal r, but should try to learn both the others. The fi-ont r differs from the ordinary English r in red, true, only in that the vibratory trill should be distinctly heard. The velar r is known in England as the 'Northumbrian burr.' It is hard to acquire after childhood and must be learned by imitation. 2. In parts of Germany, notably in Berlin, it is very common to drop final r, or convert it into obscure e, as many speakers do with final r in Enghsh. In this pro- nunciation, which seems to be growing in favor, there is no difference between bar and ba, SKeffer and 3Jlefje ; nur be- comes nue, 33ier rimes with fiefje, bor with hoa, etc. 52. S, @ has three sounds : (1) when final, or medial with a consonant following, that of s in sit, as in ha^i, tft ; (2) when initial before a vowel, or between two vowels, that of z in zeal (only a little less forcibly voiced), as in @ede, Slofe, langfam ; (3) before p or t at the begin- ning of a word, that of a quickly uttered fd) = sh, as in ©tonb, ©pro^e. 1. The voiced f is never doubled, whence \\ and ^ are al- ways voiceless. 2. A voiced f occurring between vowels, as in 9iof e, Jlafe, SBeife, becomes almost voiceless in derivatives such as 9?og= lein, SRciSc^en, SBeig^eit ; that is, it is there 'final' (§ 34, 2, a), and hence written g. 53. (Sc^. ©(^ sounds like sh in ship, as in f(f)nell, 3?aufc^. 1. But where d^ begins a sufiix, as in 3ta§cl()en, from 3Jafe, c^ has its separate palatal sound. 54. Z^ % in native German words has always the sound of t in tin, as in mit, treten. 1. In words from the Latin t before unaccented i sounds like ts; e. g. 9iatio'n, Jjartia'I; but not when following f, as in beftia'lifd^. 22 PRONUNCIATION 55. If). 3:{) has always the sound of t, never that of EngMsh th in this or in thin ; e.g. SLt)ea'ter, Sifjeologte'. 1. S^ appears in some foreign words like 'itifan, thane, including Greek words, in which it represents 0, but in genuine German words it is now everywhere replaced by t ; hence tun, not tf)un, 2:Dr not Jl^or, and SCee rather than 2;^ee. 56. X^, Stj is simply double j arid has the same sound, namely, that of ts ; e.g. @d^a^, [t^en. 57. SB. 33 has in native German words the sound of f, as in SBater, t)Cir. 1. But in words from the French or Latin, except when final, i) sounds like v in vat, as in 3Saf e, ^ulDer ( but hke f in Brat), ©rebiti't)). 58. 2S. 9S has two sounds : (1) when initial, or after a vowel, that of a labio-dental fricative like v in vat, as in 2BeIIe, SiJtoe; (2) after a consonant, that of a bilabial fricative, as in jttjei, (3(i)tt)eKe. 1. The bilabial to sounds at first much like EngUsh tv in win, but differs from it in that the lips are less rounded. The student will do best to pronounce jtoei, ©d^toelle, as also DueHe, 'at first with a v-sound rather than a w-sound, the latter being the harder to correct. In large parts of Middle and South Germany the bilabial to is the only one used. 59. 3E. X is like English x in fox; e. g. in 2ljt, Xenien. 60. 3. 3 h^s always the sound of ts in fits, as in ju, ^erj, figen (§ being the written form of 33). ACCENTUATION 61. Kinds of Accent. Accent is special stress in pro- nunciation. Word-accent is special stress upon one or more syllables of a word ; sentence-accent (often called ACCENTUATION 23 'rhetorical accent,' or simpty 'emphasis') is special stress upon one or more words of the sentence. 1. Word-accent is either strong or weak, and there are different degrees of weakness ; thus in constitutionality the strong stress is upon al, and there is a weak stress upon tu, and a still weaker one upon con. Such shades and more are heard also in German, but the beginner may safely ig- nore all but two and think of every syllable as having either chief stress ('), weak stress (^), or no stress at all; e.g. j^reu'be, joy ; freu'blo' §, joyless ; greu'bto' figfei't, joylessness. 62. Simple Words. An uncompounded word, if of native German stock, has the chief stress on the root- syllable, and not on any suffix ; e. g. f)a'nbeln, act; ^o'n= belte, acted; Sto'niginnen, qioeens; 21'Itertumer, antiquities. 1. This statement does not apply to words that are wholly or partly of foreign origin. These are apt to accent the last syllable, or the penult of a dissyllabic ending : thus ftubte'ren, sp^otogra'^)^, Satla'be. See § 64. 2. Even in native words there are a few anomalous excep- tions to the general rule : as lebe'nbig, from 2e'Ben ; i»al)r= l^a'ftig, fro™L toa'^rfjaft. 63. Compounds. German forms compounds very freely and in great variety, and their accent can not be brought under any simple rules. The beginner will do best to be guided at first by English analogy, which will cover multitudes of cases; e.g. gra'c^tju'g, fre'igld-train; SBIu'menga'rten, flo'wer-ga-rden; ge'ftla'nb, mai'n-la' nd ; ro'tfa'rbig, re' d-co" lored ; SSergi'gmeinni'c^t, forge' t-me-noH. Then let the following points be noted : 1. Compound particles generally accent the second mem- ber; as ^erau'f, (Aere)i«p; baru'nter, thereunder; ftroma'6, downstream. 2. The six prefixes be, ent (em^), er, ge, ber and jer are never accented. 24 PEONUNCIATION 3. The prefix un, un, is very often, but not always, accented; e.g. u'ntreu, untni'e; u'ngern, unwil'lingly ; but une'nblic^, une'ndlng. 64. Borrowed Words. In the very numerous words derived from other languages, especially from the Latin, Greek and French, the tendency is to accent the ultima, or the penult of a dissyllabic suffix. The following ex- amples are tj'pical : ©tiibe'nt, student ; Slftrono'm, astron- omer ; ®tntia'l, general ; Wtta.'^, metal ; '^oXa.'ii, palace; ^Progra'mm, program ; SKebiji'n, medichie ; %m\'\i, jurist ; W\x\\'i, music; 'Slaixo'n, nation; ^artie', party ; Sitanei', litany ; SSaga'ge, haggage ; Simona'be, lemonade ; ^prinje'ffe, princess; StoOe'He, novelette; Sptfo'be, episode; I^iima'n, humane; etega'nt, elegant ; famo'^, famous; abfolu't, ab- solute ; ^lauft'bel, plausible ; familio'r, familiar. 1. But not a few borrowed words, especially those in or, cl, er, and some of those in if and te, are exceptions; as So'ftor, doctor; 33e'[tie, heast; j^-ami'Iie, family; M'x'^tx, body ; 2^i'tel, title ; ©ramma'tif, grammar ; 9t§eto'rif, rhetoric. EXERCISE 1 Pronunciation of Vowels Note. — Accent the first syllable rmless the accent Is marked. "Words connected hy an English hyphen are to be carefully distinguished in pronunciation. Long 0.— 2lal, §al^n, ®ra{)t, Iaf)m, %xo5^, Sart, %ice - (g^te, 3Jla^ren - me^ren, ®ale-©eete, toa^ren-toe^ren. iow^' i ancZ ie. — 3Jlir, ^gel, i^nen, ^ier, biel, gcbie'nt. ^Aor;; t.— 3ft, mit, irren, ®ebi'|, ^nfe'lt, gebi'ffen. Long 0. — SSoot, D^r, o£»ne, 3JIod§, rot, gelo'bt, 5?atio'n. Short 0. — %c:\l, Sod, fort, ®ogge, ©offe, %o\a,t, SKorgen, berbo'rben, gelo'nnt, Dffijte'r, foCen - ©o^Ien, 3lotten - roten. Long u. — 2)u, tun, §u()n, 'Sbxiji, 33ube, ®ru^, gebu'^It. /SAorf tt. — ^u^, Sruft, bun!el, ®u^enb, gemu'rrt. Long 0, — fil, bofe, {^oren, gefro'nt, grower; (3b^nen-fe^= nen, lefen - lijfen, bote - 33ote - Seete - bate, 9Jlot)ren - SJld^ren - me()ren - Sflbl^ren. yS^Aori 0. — 39otf e, Corner, S^o^jfer, ^brfter, ®eS»o'Ife ; lonnen - f ennen, ^otte - §eKe, fbnnte - fonnte - !ennte. Long it. — iiber, tniibe, griin, ©efiil^I ; f )3ulen - f^Jtelen - fjjulen. Sho7-t it. — 33Men, miiffen, tniirbe, §uKe, biirgen; Siifte- Sifte, mufiten-tnu^ten- mitten, ^uff e - liiffen - ^iff en. %iandt\, — Sai, §ain, Seil, leimen, ©i'telfei't ; fei - fie, Uebli^ - tetbtid^, reiten - rieten. 9ltt. — Saum, au§, SOJauI, faufen, au'fgebau't. (£u awe? Su. — j^i^fui'f/ Saume, 33eute, SKaufe, @ule ; baute- SBeute, ^eute - ^aute. Nasal vowels. — gomme'nt, ipenfio'n (ott not nasal), Dra'nge, Sattfie'r (r silent), Saffi'n, ©atni'n, SaEo'n, ©arQo'n, iparfu'm. EXERCISE 2 Pronunciation of Consonants SB, voiced. — SSibel, beben, &ibt, ©ebo't, SBerba'ttb. S5, voiceless. — 2lb, ob, liebt, liebli^, lie'bret'c^, So'bre'be. 6 = 1. — 6afug, gobej, goufi'ne, garrte're, §0^36. g = J. — 6ir!ug, geffio'n, gicero, Siga'rre, g^Ii'nber, central. S^ as voiceless guttural fricative. — 2lc^, aud^, Sud^, boc^, lac^en, ma^en, fu^en, beba'd^t, aiau'd^Io"^ ; toad^en - toafd^en, roc|) - ro^ - 3fiocf, rauben - rauc^en - raufd^en. 26 PRONUNCIATION 6^ as voiceless palatal fricative. — ®c^t, id^, Sad^e, 93u(i^er, eud^, nid), teud^tet, baud)tet, bur(^, ^tld), manner, 5Rabd^en, gried^ifc^; bid^-bicf, £o^er - leder, ^irc^e - ^irf^e, fre^- frifd^, ra(^en-9?erfen. 6^ == f. — 6f)ao§, (Eifaxa'iUx, &)ox, g^olera, d^roma'tifd^, g^ronologie'. Sfj = f(^. — 6^amoi§, (S.^ampa'QWX, Sfjauffee', d^arma'nt, g^ica'ne, c^oKe'ren. 6:p = j. — 2td^fe, 5Dad^§, Dd^fe ; toad^fen-toafd^en-toad^en. 2), voiced. — Su, benn, ebel, ober, SfBibber, gere'bet. 2), voiceless. — gib, Stob, unb, 2tbenb, reblid^, SKab^en, 6e= re'bfant, SL^obfeinb. @ as voiced guttural stop. — ©anj, ®ru^, j^Iagge, gliil^en. @ as voiceless guttural fricative. — 2^ag, 93ug, flog, 3^Iug, SRagb, ragt, tnagt, getau'gt, genu'g, Sefu'gnig. @ as voiceless palatal fricative. — ^onig, einig, rul^tg, 2;eig, fliegt, beugt, fagt, liigt, S3alg, S8erg, genii' gt. @ as voiced guttural fricative. — STage, 33ogen, Slugen, fIo= gen, trugen, lagen, SCugenb, ^ugenb, Sauge, SCau'geni'i^tS. @ as voiced palatal fricative. — ^onige, einige, rul^ige, flie= gen, beugen, fagen, liigen, Salge, Serge, SKorgen, Sefd^a'fs tigung. @ as voiced f^. — Saga'ge, ©ta'ge, i^affa'ge, ®enie', ©elee', ©enba'rm, Dra'nge. 9ig. — @ng, bang, lang, fingen, jjinger, Sanger. «Pf. — ^pfa^t, ^Pflanje, 3t)3fel, ^ii^jfen, ^Pfro^fen^te'Iier. Qtt. — Quarf, Quelle, quer, erqui'cEen. 9}. — er, ber, ^er, rot, riigen, Srot, grower, ^art, §erj, ©irne, ^^itrften, garter, beri'rren. orf ^eit, diminutive of ®orf, village, which is cognate with thorp, now preserved in proper names only. Observe that the suffixes d)en and Iciu when appended to a noun cause umlaut of the root-vowel. The sufBx i^en is cognate with kin in lambkin. — " @e6itge, from i8tx^,mouniain. The prefix @e here denotes a number or mass taken together ; hence 'collection of mountains,' 'mountain-range.'— s ^i^ bcfuc^e, I am visiting ; German has not the 'progressive' tense-forms of English, so that, e. g., id) getje must be translated by I go, or by I am going, according to the connection. ^- * SSruber, in apposition with^ Diitef, with which it must agree in case. — ^ beS SBoterS, my father (Ex. 4, n. 4). — « ©c^rtftftetter, a writer (Ex. 4, n. 6). — ' nnrf| trans- lates Eng. to before names of places and points of the compass. — ' bent Sitbcn, with na&), to the south, southward. One might also say ^naU} ©iiben, the def . art. being usually omitted in this phrase. , So also nad) (bem) Often, to the east, nad) (bem) SIBcfteii, to the west, etc, — *! into a convent ; idiom requires in«, instead of in etjt. — ^ to-morrowi 88 THE NOUN the adv. morgcn comes directly after the verb. — ii most-ly ; this mode of printing means that the root meift is cognate with most, while the ending en9 is not cognate with the ending ly. EXERCISE 6 Colloquy : Steono Nouns, First Class 1 2Ber ift ba§ g^raulein tm ©arten bort ? S5a§ ift g^raulein Serta, bie SCod^ter be§ ©artnerg, Unb ba§ 3)Jabc^en ba am g^enfter beg §augci^en§ — toer ift fie? ©ie ift Mxi) eine %o6)ttx be§ ®artner§ ; er l^at jtuei ^^od^ter. ^ennen ©ie^ bie 3Jlutter ber SJlabd^en? 9Jur ein toenig ; aber id^ lenne ben SSater fel^r gut. 2 Who lives in the cottage yonder ? That is the gardener's cottage. And who are the young ladies at the window? They are ^ the gardener's daughters.' Do you know the girls ? Only a little ; but I know the father and mother * very well, EXERCISE 6 a 1. 2Ber XotlijXiX in bem §au§d^en? 3. SBer finb ©ie? 3. aSer finb fie? 4. 3Ser ift fie? 5. 5Der ©arten ge^ort bem ^lofter. 6. 3)ie ©arten gel^oren ben Setoo^nern beg 3)orfc^eng. 7. ,^ennen ©ie bag 5Kabc^en ? 8. §at ber ©cirtnet eine %oi^-- ter? 9. ®ie sh)ei 5Wabc^en finb STod^ter beg ©artnerg. 10. 2Ber gefit ' ba im ©arten ? 11. ©ie gel^t in ben ©arten. 12. 5Dag SKab^en ^at jtoei SrUber. 13. SBir ^aben ein ©ommerl^aug= d^en im ©arten. 14. 5Der ©artner ift nid^t nur ©artner ; er ift au^ ein toenig' ©c^riftfteHer. EXERCISE 6 b 1. The girls are daughters of a workingman. 2. The girl is in the garden. 3. The little house has otily two DECLENSION 39 windows. 4. The life of a gardener is very interesting. 5. Do you know the girl's brother ? 6. We have a cottage in the mountains. 7. The young ladies are daughters of a gardener. 8. The girl's father is an Englishman. 9. The father and mother of the girl are yonder in the garden. 10. I know the mother but not the father. Vocabulary an, prep. (dot. and acc.),^ on, bo§ §ou§c^en, s.^ little house, by, at. cottage. au^, adv. also, too [eke]. fennen, v. know [ken]. ba§, pron. (dem.) that. ba§ aJJobc^en, s.' girl, maid-en. bort, adv. yonder, there. ®ie, pron. you ; fie, she, they, bal genfter, s.' window. bte Soc^ter, s.' {pi. o), daughter. ber ©arten, «.i (pi. a), gar- loenig, adj. little ; ein mentg, a den. little, ber @)ortner, s.' gardener. tcer, pron. (inter.) who. gut, adj. good; as adv. well. jluei, num. two. Notes. — i Bennett ®te, do you know. ®ie is used for you in speaking to any one who is not a relative nor a very intimate friend. It takes its verb in the 3. pers. pi. Notice, therefore : @te Jennen, you know ; fie tennen, they know ; fte tennt, she knows. — ^ They are, fie finb, or, better, baS ftnb, those are. ®a8, tho neut. sing., can be used without reference to the gender or number of the predicate noun. — 3 the gardener's daughters ; either beg ©ottnerS Kod^ter, or bte Soc^ter beS ®ortnev8, or, making a compound, tie @iirtner«tod)ter, but not tie OortnerS Kodjtcr. So above, the gardener's cottage = beS ©artnerS §au8d^en, or baS §au«c^en beS ©ortnerS, but never ba« @'axU nerS ^ousd^en. — * the father and mother ; the article must be repeated (see Ex. 4, n. 2). — ^ very well, (ef)r gut, rather than fe^r ttiof)(. — « ge^t ; here = is walking. — ' ein Ivenig, something of, on a small scale. — 8 an ; when a prep, takes both dat. and ace, the dat. is used in answer to the question ' where ? ' and the ace. in answer to the question ' whither ? ' Second Class, Steong Declension 83. Membership. The second class embraces: (1) a very large number of monosyllabic nouns, mainly mas- culine, but with a few feminines and some neuters ; 40 THE NOUN (2) nouns ending in ig, ing, ling, ni§, fal, and some other not very common suffixes. 1. The phrase 'monosyllabic nouns' must be understood to include compounds in which the iinal element would be- long to this class if uncompounded ; e. g. Bw'flK, accident, and 3Sor'[tabt, suburb, as well as %o&, case, and 6tabt, city. 2. Nouns in ig and ling are masculine ; those in ni§ and fat are mainly neuter, but a few are feminine. 3. This class is, then, pre-eminently the class of mono- syllabic masculines. 84. The Genitive and Dative Singular. The genitive has the ending eg or g ; the dative the ending e or no ending at all. 1. The ending e§ is used regularly with monosyllables, but may always be reduced to simple § unless the stem ends in an s-sound ( g, ^, 3, ^, fd; ) ; thus 93aum, tree, has usually 33aume§, but very often S3aum§, while ^ylu^, river, always has gluffeS. The ending § belongs regidarly to words of more than one syllable that do not end in an s-sound ; thus ^onig, king, ^itngling, youth, have ^bnigg, ^unglingS. 2. The use of e in the dative is largely optional, being dependent on habit or the sense of euphony. In general, monosyllabic words are aj)t to have it, other words to be without it ; hence, normally, bem %a%t, bem SBaume, but bem ^onig, bem SJlonat. 85. Formation of the Plural. The nominative plural always has the ending c, with umlaut of the root-vowel in some words, without it in othei-s. The dative plural adds n to the nominative plural. 1. Of the monosyllabic nouns all the feminines and th( most of the masculines have umlaut in the plm-al if th( vowel admits it. Of the neuters only three or four havt umlaut. For lists see § 275. DECLENSION 41 a. Nouns having aa or do in the stem drop one vowel when they undergo umlaut, as ©aal, hall, pi. ©ale ; Soot, boat, pi. SBoote or Sote. 2. Nouns in nig double the § in inflection ; e. g. SiinbrtiS, covenant, gen. 93unbniffe§, pi. Siinbniffe. 86. Examples. 1. Without umlaut in the plural : S^ag, day; ^Jlo'nat, month; ^a^r, year. Singular Nom. ber 2;ag ber SJtonat ba§ '^ai/x Gen. be§ Sageg be§ a)tonat§ be§ 3af)re§ Dat. bcm Slage bem 3)lonat bem ^al)re Ace. 'ben %(xa, ben SKonat ba§ ^af^r PZitraZ Nom. bie STage bie SHonate bie ^al)re Gen. ber 2;age ber SKonate ber 3a^« Dat. ben S^agep ben 3Jionaten ben ^a^ren Ace. bie 2:^age • bie 3Konate bie ^a^re a. So also ba§ Siinbnil, covenant, be§ Siinbmfjeg, bie a3unb= niffe ; bie SBtlbniS, wilderness, ber SBilbnig ( § 77, 1), bie SBilbniffe ; bag or bie SCriibfal, affliction, be§ %xnh\aU, or ber Sriibfal, bie SEriibfale. 2. With umlaut in the plural : SSaunt, tree ; 3(tac^t, nic/ht; 6f)or, choir. Singular Nom. ber SBaum bie 3la(i}t ba§ g^or Gen. bel S3aume§ ber 3la^t be§ ©^ore§ Dat. bem S3aume ber 5Ra(it bem E£)orf Ace. ben 33 aunt bie 9iac^t Plural ba§ 6^or Nom. bie Sdume bie 9ta(^te bie 61)ore Gen. ber Saume ber S'iadjte ber Sl)6re Dat. ben SBciumen ben ?iadE)ten ben g^oren Ace. bie Saume bie 3la^ti bie 6^6re 42 THE NOUN 87. Rule of Order I : The Inverted Order.* If a sen- tence begins with any other element than the subject, the subject must follow the verb ; e. g. bo ift er, there he is ; "baS: Uerfte^e id) niii^t, that I do not understand ; \6)m ift fie nic^t, beautiful she is not. 1. This order, verb before subject, is called 'inverted,' the 'normal' order being subject before verb, as in er ift ha ; ic£) berfte^e bag ni^t. 2. Inversion occm-s in English, e. g. in said I, great is Mammon ; but while it is somewhat rare in EngUsh, it is ex- ceedingly common in German. German tends to begin the sentence with that element which is most prominent in the speaker's thought ; and when this is done and the word so put first does not happen to be the subject, inversion must follow. In translating do not imitate the German inverted order at the expense of English idiom. 3. The general connectives unb, abet and benn constitute an important exception to the above rule. They do not cause inversion. EXERCISE 7 Beading Lesson : Strong Nouns, Second Class %&i bin ^ nun jitiei Stage "^ in einer ©tabt. ^^ ^o^t ein 3™= • mer mit einem Dfen, einem Stifc^e unb ein ^jaar' ©tiil)!en. 5Dur(^§ ^yenfter fie^t* man einen ^arl tnit aKerlei SBaumen. Sie ©tabt liegt an* einem ?5Iuffe. 2luf * bem j^luffe fiel^t man {jeute ein ^3aar ^al^ne. 2Bir finb am Slnfang beg §erl6fte§, aber bie Suft ift nod^ immer * toarm. EXERCISE 7 a 1. §aben ©ie einen ^al)n? 2. ^^ Itabe jtoei ^a^ne auf bem ^Jluffe. 3. aSerift baSinbem ^al)ne bort? 4. Ser ©tabtjsari liegt am g^Iuffe. 5. 2Bir tjaben einen 2;ifc§ unb ein )^(xax Stiil^U * The important rules ol word-order win be inserted as they are needed lol tlie Exercises. They will be found together at the end of Part I. DECLENSION 43 tm ®arten. 6. ®er ^aften liegt auf bent SCifd^e. 7. ^tn ^erbfte ge^en toir nac^ ber Stabt. 8. SCm 3(nfang be§ ©om= tnerg getien toir in§ (Sebirge. 9. ^d^ bin nun jtoei ^a^re unb etnen Monat in ber ©tabt. 10. ^m $ar! fie^t man allerlei Saume. 11. 2Bir l^aben nur nod^ ein paav 2:age beg §erbfte§. 12. 2)ie 2lrbeiter tooi^nen meifteng in ben ©tabten. EXERCISE 7 b 1. The days are long in the summer. 2. In the summer the nights are short. 3. I write this time from the city. 4. I am living in a little house by the river. 5. In the gar- den are tables and chairs. 6. I am writing at a table in the garden. 7. Yonder one sees the river and all sorts of boats. 8. One sees also the beginning of the park. 9. Father has a boat on the river. 10. In a few days I am going into the tnountains. Vocabulary ^ Q^Herlci', adj. all sorts of. r^man, pron. (indef.) one [man]. / ber 91'nfa^ng, s.' (pi. ci), hegin-^ mi\, prep, (dat.) with. ning. y^noii), adv. yet, still (of time), /auf, prep. (dat. and ace.) on, i/ nun, ac?y. now, well. up-on. ^ ber Ofen, «.' {pi. o), stove [oven]. /bmdiiprep. (ace.) thru. / ha§ S|3aar, s.^ pair; ein ijiaax, a / ber glufe/ ^-^ ipl- -iiffe), river. few. ' ber §erbft, s.^ autumn [har- ,, ber ^arl, s.^ (§ 76, 3, a),/iar*. vest]. ^^ bie ©tobt, s." {pi. '&), city, fieute, adv. to-day. ber ©tut|t, s.^ {pi. ii), chair ber Satin, s.= {pi. a), boat, row- [stool]. boat. ber S:i(c^, s." table [dish], liegen, v. lie, be situated. roorm, adj. warm. bte Suft, s.^ {pi. ii), air. ,'■ bo§ ^i'n'ner, s.' room [timber]. Notes. — '^^i''^ fiii't -f^o^^ ieen. German uses the present tense, generally with an adverb referring to present time, to denote that which has been and still is. In such a case EngUsh uses the perfect. — ^ Sage, ace. of measute ; duration of time is expressed by the ace. — 'ein ^aat ; §§ 4, l, a and 73, 1. — * fie^t, sees ; from fe^en, which changes its root-vowel in the 2. and 3. pers. sing., the inflection being as follows : id) fe^e, bu ftefjft, er ftel)t, rair |e^en, i^r fe^t, fie fe^en. See 44 THE NOUN § 184. — ^ on, nuf ; both these words mean on, aitf in the sense of over and upon., and an in that of close to. Thus a boat is a u f bem gti'ffe, a city a n bem gtuffe. On the spellmg gtug — Stuffe, as compared with gitg — gitge, see § 2, 3. — " nod) immcr ; the two words together mean still, even now; said of that which has been and still is. EXERCISE 8 Colloquy : Strong JSTouns, Second Class 1 S)er ^axt i[t f^on am 2lbenb/ nic^t tca^r?^ ^a iBoJjP; fe|en toir un§* einen StugenblicE. ®a tft eine 33an! unter bem Saume bort. ©e£)r gern^; abet getjen ©ic nod^ l^eute abenb' nid^t tn§ ^onjert ? 9BoJ)I ni^t ; bie ^Ia|e finb ju teuer. 2lm ©(^luffe be§ 3!)lonatg bin ic^ immer arm. ®a§ ift alfo' ba§ §inbcrm§ ! 9iun, jum ©liid * fjabe id^ jtcet Silfette.' ^ommen ©ie nur mit." 2 It is lovely in the park to-night, isn't it ? '^ Yes indeed ; let* us sit down a moment. There are chairs yonder. Very -well"; but only a moment. I am going to the concert yet this evening."^ Have you a seat already ? " Yes, I have two tickets. Pray come along. EXERCISE 8 a 1. Ste 2tbenb!on5erte im ^avt finb fe^r gut. 2. ^^ fomme in einem Slugenblid. 3. §aben ©ie ein 53iIIet jum ^onjert? 4. Ser 3lrbeiter ^at aUtxki §inbermffe im Seben. 5. 3)er ^aften liegt unter bem SCifc^e. 6. Sie ^pia^e finb fe^r teuer, nic^t iDa^r ? 7. 21m ©c^luffe be§ SEageS fie^t man atrerlei 3tr= beiter auf ben Sanfen im $arf. 8. 5lommen ©ie mit ung in ben $arf ; eg ift fef)r fd;on unter ben 33aumen. 9. ^d^ bin nut am 2;age im 3immer, ni^t in ber JJad^t. DECLENSION 45 EXERCISE 8 b 1. In the daytime tlie air is very -warm. 2. He lives two months of the year in a little house on the river. 3. I see Fraulein Berta yonder under the trees. 4. We are already a,t the beginning of the end. 6. Come^° along to the con- 3ert; luckily I have two seats. 6. Are the tickets very Bxpensive ? 7. There is^^ still a place at the table. 8. Here you have a chair and yonder are two seats on the bench. 9. I see difficulties right at the'^^ beginning. Vocabulary ber 9I6enb, s.' even-ing. boS Son^e'rt, .s.^ concert. it(o, adv. so, then [also]. bev 5|5Iafe, s.^ (pi. a), place, seat. ixm, adj. -poor. , ber ©c^tu^, s.^ (pZ. ©(flliiffe), end, ber 9tu'genHi'ct, S.2 moment. close. bie SSatil, s.^ {pi. a), bench. . f(£|on, adv. already, quite. ba§ SStKe't, s.* (pi. Sitlette, also i fdjijn, adj. beautiful, lovely SBiHetS), ticket. [sheen]. E§, pron. it, there. ' fegen, v. set, seat. 3ern, adv. willingly, gladly. f teuer, adj. dear, expensive. ba§ ©liicf, s.= {no plural), luck, unS, pron. (dat. and ace.) us. fortune. • Uttter, prep. (dat. and ace.) un- )o§ ^t'nbernii, s." hindr-ance, der, among. difficulty. ^ Wa^r, adj. true, a, adv. yes. 3U, prep, (dat.) to, at, for; as lomtnen, v, come. adv. too. Notes. — i am 9l6eit&, in the evening ; so, also, am Sage, in the iaytime.—'^ ittl^t wa^t, isn't it? for ift e8 nid)t ira^r, is it not true? I very common phrase, implying that an affirmative answer is ex- pected. —^ 3o h)Ol)t, yes indeed; n)ot|( is often added to break the ibruptness of a simple ja. — * feijeit >wir un§, Jei us sit down; literally, teat we us. The verb is subjunctive, 1. pers. pi., best translated by et. — 6 ©e^r oent, all right, very well. — « ^eilte ofieilb, this evening 1 4, X, a). ' 2)o§ ift nifo, so that is; remember that alfo never means ilso. — 8 jum ©liief, Juciiiy ; literally, /or luck. ®iM is for ®e=lii(I ; t is only 4M that is cognate with luck. — » SBittette ; t doubled to nark the preceding vowel as short (§ 14, 2, and 34, 1, a). Pronounce BiUyit-e. — i" Sommcn ©tc mir mit, pray come along. The verb is mperative, 2. pers. pi "With this form of address @te can not be 46 THE NOUN omitted as you is in English. 9f ur with an imperative means just or pray. — J^ Very well, not (ef)r ttiot)(, nor fe^r gut (see note 5 above), 12 1 am going, etc. The order Sa: I go yet this evening to, etc. — 1' already ; the order : Have you already, etc. — " There is ; bo ifi, if 'there' means 'in that place,' otherwise e8 ift. — i* right at the, fc^on am. Thied Class, Stkojtg DscLEisrsioN 88. Membership. The third class embraces : (1) a large number of monosyllabic nouns, mainly neuter, hut with a few masculines; (2) all nouns in turn ; (3) a few neuters of foreign origin with accent on the ultima ; e. g, @^)ita'(, hospital, pi. ©pita'Ier. 1. Note that this class contains no feminines. It is pre-eminently the class of monosyllabic neuters. See § 276, 1. 2. Nouns in turn (cognate with dam in kingdom) are neuter; but note the exceptions, ber 3tei(^tum, riches, and ber ^i^rtunt, err-or. 89. The Genitive and Dative Singular. The genitive has the ending e§ or g, the dative the ending e or no ending at all, precisely as in the second class. 90. Formation of the Plural. The nominative plural always has the ending cr, to which the dative adds n. The vowel preceding er always has umlaut, if capable of it, nouns in turn making the plural in turner. 1. A number of nouns belong both to the third and to the second class, having two plm-als, one in cr, the other in e, usually with difference of meaning ; thus baS 93anb means either hand or ribbon, but in the plural Sanbe means bonds^ while Sanber means ribbons. See § 276. 91. Examples. SRatin, man; ^a\i.&, house; 2t(tertum, antiquity. DECLENSION Singular Nom. ber Mann ba§ §au8 ba§ 3IItertum Gen. be§ 5Jlanne§ be§ §aufe§ be§ aitertumS Dat. betn SKanne bem §aufe bem 3lttertum Ace. ben Mann ba§ §au§ Plural ba§ atltertum Nom. bie SOianner bie §aufer bie 3lltertumer Gen. ber Scanner ber §aufer ber airtertiimer Dat. ben SKannern ben §aufern ben Stitertiimern Ace. bie SJlanner bie §aufer bie ailtertUmer EXERCISE 9 47 Learn the inflection of fein and to0^nen in the preterit tense. The latter will serve as a model for the very large class of verbs called ' weak.' ic^ tear, I was bu iBarft, tJiou wast er tear, he was toir toaren, we were xi)x toaxt, you were fie toaren, they were id^ tool^nte, I lived bu tool^nteft, thou livedst er too^nte, he lived toir tool^nten, we lived xijX tool^ntet, ijou lived fie toofjnten, they lived Reading Lesson : Strong Nouns, Third Class 5Die Seute J)ier im §aufe^ finb fe^r freunbli^. SDer SBirt ift ^aufmann ^ unb ein 2Rann Don ©eift unb ©emut. 2lIfo ift er natiirlid^ ein greunb t)on Sitd^ern^ unb Silbern. (gr ^at jtoei ^inber, einen ©o^n unb eine S^od^ter. ^dE) toar geftern mit ben ^inbern auf bem Sanbe* unb Befud^te ba§ Si^to^ eineS (lbel= tnanng. SSom SEurme be§ ©c^toffeS fiel^t man iiber Sciler unb aSalber 6ig an§ ©ebirge. EXERCISE 9 a 1. ®ie Siid^er auf bem 2:ifc^e ge^oren einem greunbe be§ §aufe§. 2. ®a lommen jtoei SRanner burc^ ben 2BaIb. 3. ©ie 48 THE NOUN ift bie SJlutter toon jhjei £inbern. 4. ®a§ §au§ eincS Sbelman: neS ift ein ©d)Iop. 5. gbetteute finb nic^t immer ^inber bei ©litcEeS unb hjofjnen ni(^t immer in ©c^loffern. 6. 2Ber hjo^nt in ben §aufern am g^tuffe? 7. ©ie Sehjo^ner ber §aufer finb meiftenS 2lr6eiier. 8. ®er 3[nfang beSSud^eSift fef)rintereffant; ben ©d^Iu^ fenne id^ nod() nic^t. 9. Sag Sitberbuc^ gefiort ben i^inbern. 10. ®ie Scaler unb 9Ba(ber be§ ®ebirglanbe§ finb fe§r f(^Dn im §erbfte. EXERCISE 9 b 1. That is the i^ieture of a friend. 2. Those are pictures of ' friends. 3. She has two sons and two daughters. 4. People of ^ intelHgenoe are always friends of the country. 5. I see a few houses in the valley. 6. He has the intelligence of a man, the feeling of a child. 7. He has two castles in the country. 8. Do you see the castle yonder with the two towers ? 9. The books and pictures belong to the man-of- the-house.° 10. Are you a friend of^ children? 11. I know the men ; they are friends of my father. Vocabulary Note. — Since all nouns ol tlie third class have umlaut in the plural, if possible, the modification of the vowel does not need to be specially in- dicated for words of that class. bn§ S8ilb, s.' picture. >. bn§ Sanb,'s.=-3 land, country. bis, prep, (ace.) up to, until ; ^- Scute, pi. only, people. bi§ an, clear to, as far as. ^ natiir(id), adv. of course, natur- ba§ S8uc^, s.= book. ally. ber (Sbclmann, s.^ noble-man. / baS ©(1)106, «•" (P^- =Bff=), castle, ber gvcunb, «.' friend. ,■ ber ©ofm, «.» (pi. o), son. trcunblid), adj. friendly, kind, v bag STol, s.^ valley, dale. ber @eift, s.' intelligence, spirit, y ber Jurat, s.= (pi. ii), tower. ghost. , iibev, prep. (ace. and dot.) over, bag ©emitt, s.' feeling, soul. about, geftcrn, adv. yester-day. ^ non, prep, (dat.) from, of. ber Slaufmann, s.' merchant y ber SBalb, s.' forest [wold]. [chapman]. ^ ber SSivt, «.» landlord, man-of- bag Slinb, «.' child. the-house. DECLENSION 49 Notes. — i Jfm ^aitfe, in the house ; ax home=lYi §oufc.— ^ Snuf= mamt ; this and some other compounds of SjJlamt have two plurals, one in =inaiinet, the other m =Ieute, the latter being -without reference to sex; thus J?oufmonner, merchants, tradesmen; jfoufleute, trades- people. — 3 Bon SBiic^eru, of books; Don with a dat. may take the place of a gen., cut greunb Bon Siidjern, being = fin gteunb bcr SSiii^cv. One could not say cin .grjunb Siic^ev. — * nuf bent Sonbe, in the country, as opposed to in the city. 3m Sanbe means in the country taken as a whole, including the cities. — ' of, tton. — * man-of-the-house ; words thus joined by hyphens are to be translated in German as one word. — ' Snnb ; the usual plural of 8anb is Scinbet ; f anbe is poetic, or used in compounds, as bie SJieberlanbe, the Netherlands. EXERCISE 10 Colloquy : Strong Nouns, Third Class 1 2Bte [!pat ift e§ IodI^I?^ ®ef)en toir nic^t bdb nad^ §aufe?^ (Sg ift h)o{)I ° jiemlic^ jjjat ; ic^ fe^e fd^on Sifter in ber ©tabt bort. ^a, eg toirb * fd^on bunlet, unb ber 2Beg burd^ ben SBalb ift jiemlid^ lang. Sltfo geJ)en toir quer burd^ bie ^yelber. ©e^r gem ; a6er toag ift bag 2)ing bort am Stanbe beg ^oljeg ? ^ ^d^ toei^ nid^t ; ein ©ef|)enft bietteid^t. 2)a bift bu too^t tm ^rrtum ; fiir bie ©eifter ift eg nod^ ju frii^ am Stbenb. 2 Let us go ^ home ; it is getting late. Yes, there is a light in the little house yonder already.'' It is pretty dark in the woods ; do you know ^ the way ? Not very well ° ; let us go across thru the field. Very well ; but what is that thing yonder among " the leaves ? I do not know ; perhaps it is a spook. It is pretty early in the evening for spooks, isn't it ? EXERCISE 10a 1. gd^ fe^e ein Sid^t huxi) bie Slatter ber 33aume. 2. 5Die Singe auf bem 3:ifd^e ge^ijren ben ^inbern. 3. ©el^en toir burd^g 50 THE NOUN gelb ober burc^ ben 2Balb ? 4. ^c^ fefie Sid^ter in ben '^m'\tm beg ©c^Iofje§. 5. ^c^ fennejtDei 2Bege bon £)ier na(^ ber ©tabf 6. S)a§ S3u^ ^at attcrlei Silber am Slanbe ber Slatter. 7. © finb attertei ^rrtiimer in bem Suc^e. 8. ®er SBeg burd^S SEa ift fef)r gut Big an ben 9tanb be§ SBalbeg. 9. ^c^ ^a6e ba< S3u(^ unb bie S3itber Don einem greup^^e. 10. S)ie ©eifter bes ©ebirgeg [inb freunblid^, EXERCISE 10 b 1. I am going home. 2. Father is not at home. 3. Mother is in the house. 4. I see you know " very Uttle of ^^ books and pictures. 5. For the mother the children are the light of the house. 6. Do you know * the way thru the fields ? 7. The thing is among the books on the table. 8. What do you know ^^ of ^^ ghosts and spooks ? 9. The spirit of the book is good, but it has a few errors. 10. How long is the way from here to ^^ the edge of the woods ? Vocabulary / Bolb, adv. soon [bold]. ■/ ber SRonb, s.' edge, border. / ba§ SB [att, s.^ leaf [blade]. / iptii, adv. adj. la,te. / bQ§ ®ing, S.2 thing. / l)ie[lei'cl)t, adv. perhaps. / bunfe(, adj. dark. y \va§, pron. (inter.) what. / bog Selb, S.3 field. i/ ber 3Scg, s.' way. / frii^, adv. adj. early. y loevben, v. become ; eS rotrb, it / fiir, prep, (ace.) for. is becoming. ^ bog (5)ci>e'nft, s.' ghost, spook. /^ luie, adv. how, as [why]. i/ bag §ol3, S.3 wood, forest. ^ luiffen, r. know ; id) meife, I know i/ ber Qrrtutn, s.' error. [to wit]. ^ bog aic£)t, s.' light. jicmUc^, adv. pretty, tolerably. / quer, adv. across. Notes. — i hio^J, 7 wonder. — 2 not^ ^aitfc, ^ome. — s mo])!, proii- a6Zy, no doubt, I presume, I reckon, I guess.—* eg t»irb, it is getting; 3. pers. sing. pres. of njerben, which inflects thus : id) ttierbe, bu rairfl, cr tnirb, inir iverben, it)r merbet, ftc luerbcii. — "^ ^oIjcS ; here = Sffiolb, woods. The more common sense is wood, as a material. « Let us go, gefien trir (see Ex. 8, n. 4). — f already, fd)8n ; directly after ijl.- 8 do you know, fennft bu ; the use of bu in this exercise, instead d DECLENSION 51 @le, presupposes that the speakers are very intimate friends. — ' Not very well, nidjt fef)i- gut ; but in the next sentence very well = fe^r gem. — i" among, unter, with dat. — "you know, bu roeigt ; do you know, meigt bu. The pres. of tniffen inflects irregularly as follows : id^ tDcig, bu treigt, er meig, loir ttiffen, it)r migt, fie itiiffen. — 12 of, »on ; note that of with a verh, as in know of, speak of, etc., cannot be translated by the genitive. — ^^ tp^ jfg (jj,^ -,(,5^11 ace. The Weak Declension 92. Membership. The weak declension embraces : (1) a considerable number of monosyllabic nouns, mainly- feminine, but with a few masculines ; (2) nearly all the feminines of more than one syllable ; (3) masculines that end in e; (4) many foreign masculines that have the accent on the ultima. 1. There are no neuter nouns of the weak declension. While it contains numerous masculines, it is chiefly made up of feminines of more than one syllable, the only nouns of the latter class that do not belong to it being SJlutter, 2;od^ter, and a few in nig, fal and funft. 93. A Rule of Gender. The suffixes et, |ett, feit, in, fd)aft and ung invariably form feminine nouns of the weak declension. 1. This, rule covers a very large number of words. The ending i)dt, cognate with hood in .m.anhood, forms a multi- tude of abstracts from adjectives, as %xiii)iit, freedom, from frei, free; feit has a similar function (§ 387, 7) ; in forms feminines that correspond to masculines, as Sijnig, kinff, ^onigin, queen ; fd^aft is cognate with ship in friendship = g^reunbfd^aft, and ung with ing in warning = 2Barnung. 2. The foreign suffixes ie, if and ion also form feminine nouns. 94. Formation of the Cases. Masculines add (e)n to the nominative singular to form all the other cases, sin- gular and plural. Feminines add (,e)n thruout the plural. 52 THE NOUN 1. The case-ending is n if the noun ends in e, el, er or otherwise it is en. But §err, gentleman, sir, Mr., genen has in the singular §errn, in the phiral §erren. 2. Feminines in in have the plural in innen. 3. No weak noun has umlaut as a plural-sign. 95. Examples. 9Kenfd), man, mankind; ^nabe, h grau, wife, Mrs. ; 93Iume, floiver. Singular N. ber m.tn\&i ber ^nabe bie %xcM bie Slum G. be§ SKenfditen be§ ^naben ber g^rau ber Slun D. bem SKenf^en bem ^naben ber j^rau ber Slun A. ben SKenfd^en ben £naben Plural bie %xa\x bie Slum N. bie 9)ienf^en bie ^naben bie grauen_ bie Slum G. ber aJtenfc^en ber ^naben ber g^rauen ber Slun D. ben SJlenfc^en ben ^naben ben grauen ben Sluti A. bie ?Kenf($en bie ^naben bie j^rauen bie Slum 1. So also ber ©tube'nt, the student : beg ©tubenten, S ©tubenten, ben ©tubenten, pi. in all cases, ©tubenten. 96. Rule of Order II: Position of Adverbs. In normal order an adverb must not come between the s ject and the verb ; thus / hardly know, vj) toetfe faum ; never goes to church, er geljt nie in bie ^irdje. 1. An adverb of time usually takes precedence of ot adverbs; thus / kneiv him very well at that time, \iS) far i^n bamal§ fe^r gut ; he is usually at home evenings, et abenbg getoijj^nlirf) ju §aufe. EXERCISE 11 Reading Lesson : Weak Nouns ^c^ bin fd^on jef^n 3Bod^en in ber j^rembe/ unb bie 3eit i gel^t mir fe^r fc^neE iiber ber 2lrbeit. ^(^ l^abe tagli^i DECLENSION 53 ©pra(^ftunbe ^ unb jitei ©tunbcn tood^enttic^ in bcr 9Jlufif. %ux bie ©Jjrac^e ijobt 'v&f etrten £e{)rer, fiir bie SOlufi! eine Secretin.' U6er ^ bie g^amilie, befonberg iiber ben §au§l^errn ^ unb bie ^in= ber, fd^rieb" \&j neulic^ cin ^jaar geilen. Sie grau 2Birtin' ift eine SBettbame * unb ge^t biel in ©efellfc^aft. EXERCISE 11 a 1.- S^ \:iaU atrbeit auf jtoei SBo^en. 2. Sa§ Seben beS^" SKenfc^en ift furj. 3. Ser" Menfcf) ift immer ba§ linb ber Beit. 4. ®ie'°5Kenfd^en finb tinber ber geiten. 5. 2Ber ift ber SSater be? £naben? 6. ^ft bie SDame eine %xau ober ein graulein ? 7. Sennen 6ie bie 2Jtutter ber ^naben ? 8. (gg ift bie 3«it ber " Slumen. 9. Sie Same ift eine ^^reunbin ber %a= milie. 10. ®ie SKabd^en finb g^reunbinnen ber SDlufi!. 11. S)ie g^amilie ge^t nad; jlBci SBoc^en in bie ^rembe. 12. ®a§ ift 2tr= beit fiir eine ®ame, nic^t fiir einen §errn. 13. ^c^ fc^reibe bie§= tnal nur ein ^jaar 2)^\kn ; id^ l^abe toenig ^t\t. EXERCISE 11 b 1. Work^i is good for man.^^ 2. The lady is the mother of " ten children. 3. Two of '^ the ten children are boys. 4. The man-of-the-house is a friend of society .^^ 5. What do you know " of " the language of flowers ? " 6. The time is too short for a music-lesson. 7. Well, how goes it with the language-lessons ? 8. The boy's mother is a teach- er. 9. He is a student and knows ^* all sorts of languages. 10. The weeks pass very quickly; it is already the begin- ning of the autumn-time. Vocabulary bie SIvbeit, w. work. ■/ ber Se'^rer, s.' teacher, i/ befonberS, adv. especially. >/ nttr, pron. (dat.) to me, for me. / bie ®otne, w. lady, dame. ^, bie 9)Juft't, w. music. / bie Sfatni'Iie, w. family. j/neultcf), adv. lately [newly]. / bie gvetnbe, w. foreign land. o, interj. O, oh. / bie ©efeflfd^aft, w. society. ^ fd§nell, adj. swift; as adv. swiftly. 54 THE NOUN bit • time [tide]. / bie SBett, w. world. Notes. — i ill ber grembc, abroad. — ^ ©^jra^fhinbe, languag lesson; a compound of ©prac^c (with c dropped) and ©tunbe.- ^ fic'ftreri^li, woman teacher, Setter heing always a man teacher.- * itber, in the sense of concerning, about, takes the ace. — ' ^ou i^errn, man^of-the-house. — « f (^rieb i^, I wrote ; inverted because ; adverbial phrase precedes. This verb belongs to the class calli ' strong, ' which form th eir preterit by means of internal vowel-chang The inflection runs : id^ f(f)ticb, bu fd^riebft, er \i)x\eh, Wit jc^rieben, i fdjriebt, fte fc^rieben. — '' bie f^rau 2Birtin, my landlady ; §err and gri often precede titles for courtesy's sake. When thus used they shou not be translated. — ' 2Be(tbame, woman of the world, i. e. of fashio — ° auf ; here = for. — 1» be§, ber ; see Ex. 4, n. 8. 2)Jpnjd) = ' mai in distinction from animals ; SCfann = ' man ' in distinction fro woman. — " Use the generic article. — i^ gf^ (,0j,_ — is ^q you knoi totffen @ie, or tueigt bu. — " knows, tcnnt. EXERCISE 12 Colloquy : Weak Nouns 1 9Jun, toaS gibt e§ in ber 3«ttu"g ? 31id^t biel ; nur eine SKenge ' ^Ieintg!eiten. es ift' bod^ too^I ettoag barin iiber' ipolitif, iifeer bie SBa^Iet ©e^r iBenig ; aber bie JJad^rid^ten beuten auf einen 6ieg f bie ©emofraten. 5)teinen ©te in ber Station iiber^au^jt, ober nur in ber ©tab 3^ meine in ber 9?ation ; aber bie ier in ber ©tab ©ie l^aben eine SWe^r^eit tion ettoa jlcei^unbert ©timmen. 2 I see you have a paper. How is * the election going ? The evening papers '^ have not much about politics. DECLENSION 55 But they sorely have " reports from the city, have they not? Oh, yes ; luck ' is on the side ' of the democrats. How large is the majority? According to ° the papers they have a majority of about two hundred votes. EXERCISE 12 a 1. 35ie SKe^r^ett ber Slrbetter ftnb ®emo!raten. 2. 3)ie. ©tabt I)at ettoa je^n 3eitungen : ein Slbenbblatt " unb cine 9JJmge 3Rorgenblatter. 3. @g ift bie 3eit ber ©tabttoaJjlen, aber ic^ toei^ fe^r toenig bon ber ^5olittf. 4. Sie SSege ber ^olitif ftnb meiftenS fe^r bunlel. 5. §ier finb ©lumen in 3)Jenge" unb fiir eine ^leimgfeit ju ^aben.^^ 6. ®er g^riebe ift nid^t immer ein ©lu(f '« im Seben ber 9Jationen. 7. (Sg gibt eine 3!Kenge ©efeE= fd^aften unter ben ©tubenten. 8. 2Bie fd^neK Uergelien bie 3;age unb SQBoc^en ! 9. 5Die 3lad)ntiol)I. — ' jj(,jj i^otitif, on {abt politics. Observe that the English plurals in -ics, e. g. polit physics, mathematics, are not plural in German. — * is . . . goi gel)t (see Ex. 5, n. 3). — ^ evening paper, 3Ibenbjeitung. — ^ They sui have . . . have they not, man I)at bod) raoiji . . . nit^t nja^v?— ' li ba8 @Iiid. — * on the side, auf ber ©eite. — ^ According to, nai^, v dat. — 1° 9I6cnb6Iatt ; Statt is a common word for journal, gazette ^1 in 9Jlcnge, in abmidance, in quantity. — ^^ j|, ijggeit^ to be had *' ®IM, piece of good fortune, blessing. — i* There are, e8 gibt. ' present of gebett inflects thus : id) gcbe, bu gibft, ev gibt, unv gc i^r gebt, fte gebett. On the spelling gibt, instead of giebt, see pendix I. — 15 i3 there, gibt e8. — >' language of flowers, ©prad)e Sfutnen, or S81umenf()roci^e. The Mixed Declensiox 97. Membership. The mixed declension comprise number of masculine and neuter nouns (no feminin that inflect the singular after the manner of the str( declension, but the plural after the manner of the we To it belong : 1. A small group of words having no common charac istic of form and represented below by ber Staat and ba§ 3ti 2. Nine or ten masculines in e which add nS for genitive singular and n for all other cases. a. The ending tni appears also in the genitive of ba§ § heart, the real stem being ^crjen ; the intlection rvms : n and ace. §erj, gen. ^erjenS, dat. ^erjen, pi. ^erjen. DECLENSION 57 3. Latin nouns in unaccented or, with plural in o'ren. 4. A number of Latin and Greek neuters which make the plural in en, or ien if the Latin plural ended in ia. 98. Examples, ©taat, state; 9kme, name; Softer, doctor ; Stuge, eye ; S)ramo, drama ; ©tubium, study. Singular Nom. ber Staat ber 3Jame ber ®oftor Gen. be§ etaateg be§ ^RamenS beg SDoftorS Dat. bem ©taate bem ^Ramen bem ©oltor Ace. ben ©taat ben 5Jamen Plural ben 2)o!tor Nom. bie ©taaten bie 9lamen bie Softoren Gen. ber Staaten ber 3tamen ber Softoren Dat. ben ©taaten ben 9lamen ben ©oftoren Ace. bie Staaten bie Stamen Singular bie SDoftoren Nom. bag Sluge bag Srama bag ©tubium Gen. be§ 3tuge§ be§ 5Drama§ beg Stubiumg Dat. bem 2luge bem 5Drama bem ©tubium Ace. ba§ 2luge bag 5Drama Plural bag ©tubium Nom. bie 3lugen bie 5Dramen bie ©tubien Gen. ber aiugen ber S)ramcn ber ©tubien • Dat. ben 2lugen ben SDramen ben ©tubien Ace. bie 2lugen bie SJramen bie ©tubien EXERCISE 13 READiNa Lesson : Nouns op the Mixed Declension aSon %aa, ya. %aa, ^ mad^e id^ attertei Sefanntfc^aften untcr ben SRad^barn. ©eftern abenb tear id^ ju 3;ifd^e ^ 6ei einem §errn SfZamenS ©d^mibt, einem Setter meiner ° 2Birtin. §err ©^mibl / 58 THE NOUN ift Softer^ ber 5p^iIofo|3^ie unb ^Profeffor an^ber Umberj'tta ®ie ©efcUfc^aft beftanb aug tauter Softoren, ^Profefforen ut ©tubenten. 3Jlan rebete ° bid Don Siicl^ern unb ©tubien, ai aufi) toon SlngelegenJieiten be§ ©taate§. ®a§ ^ntereffe fiir ^ litif ift je^t fe^r le6f)aft. 2Bir leben noc^ im g^rieben, aber bic leici^t ift bie 3eit be§ j^riebenS beina^e ju ©nbe. EXERCISE 13a 1. ®a8 ©ebaube ge^brt bem ©taate, nid^t ber ©tabt. 2. (Sii 3lation befte^t au§ einem ©taate, ober au§ einer 3Jlenge ©taatei 3. ^ennen ©ie bie 9Zamen ber Seute am %i^^i bort ? 4. 3 fci^reibe ein (saar 3«il«" it" Xiamen beg ©oftorg. 5. ©ie fjat b aiugen unb bie ©timme ber SRutter. 6. 25ag Sntereffe fiir be SJrama unb fiir bag ©tubium beg ©ramag ift je|t fefjr teb^af 7. ®er §err S)oftor ^at eine 3Kenge SBettern 9Jameng ©d^mib 8. 5Dag ift bie 3(rbeit eineg aSetterg ' Don bem ^Profeffor. 9. SDc ift getci^ ber Stnfang beg (Snbeg. 10. 2tn ben @nben beg 3^" merg fie^t man Silber cug ' bem g^amilienleben. EXERCISE 13 b 1. Wliat is the gentleman's name ? 2. That is the son ( a neighbor. 3. The neighbors are very friendly. 4. TIi professor is writing a book on^° the study of the dram: 5. Music ^^ is the language of the heart. 6. That is in tb interest of the city, not of the state. 7. The interests ( the majority are always on the side of peace." 8. Tb universities are here an affair of the states. 9. The ey( are the windows of the heart. 10. I am making a numbf of acquaintances among the students of the university. Vocabulary bie STngete'gen^eHt, MJ. affair. v^befte'^en (aug), v. consist (of] bei, prep, {dat.) by, at, at the pret. bcftanb, house of. ^ (£nbe mx. {gen. -8), end. beina'^c, adv. almost [by-nigh], j, ber griebe, ma;. (5ren.-n§),peaci bie S8eta'nntfc{)aft, w. acquaint- bng Qntere'ffe, mx. (gen. -§), ti ance. terest. DECLENSION 59 / jegt, adv. now. / ber 9Jac^6ar, mx. neighbor. , tauter, arfu. exclusively. bit '?^^lo\opi)k', w. philosophy. leben, v. live. bet 5|5rofe'f)Dv, mx. professor. / Ufi^aft, adv. live-ly. ^/ leben, v. talk ; pre^. rebete. / macfien, v. make. y bie Unitierfiia't, w. university. mein, pron. (^poss.) my. , ber SSetter, mx. cousin. Notes. — ^ Hon !£ofl §U Sdfl ; in this phrase the e of the dat. is gen- erally omitted. — ^ ju Sift^c, at table; i. e. in this case, at supper. — 8 meiner SBictin, of my landlady ; mein is declined in the singular like cin. — * Jioftot ; see Ex. 4, n. 6. — ' on ; observe the preposition ; one is a professor a n einet UniBerfitfit, but a student a u f eitter Unii)cr= fttcit. — 'won rcbetc Biet, they talked much. 8({eben inflects like. tt)o^« nett in the preterit, except that it has a connecting-vowel e. — ' fiir $oltttf, IN politics. — 8 SJetterS ; or one might say : igon eincm Setter bca !profeffor8. It is better to avoid two genitives (etne8 Setters bes !Profeffor8). See § 247, 3. — ^ nitS, from, i. e. pertaining to. — i" on, iiber, with ace. — ^i Use the generic article. EXERCISE 14 Colloquy : Nouns op the Mixed Declension Sft §err ©oftor ©(^mtbt ju §aufe ? 3a hjol^l ; aber er liegt nod^ im Sette. 3Sa§ touttfd^en ®ie ? 3c| fomme tregcn eine§ 2tugenteiben§.^ 3tber mein 33ater ift lein 2(rjt ; er ^at ntd^tg mit 3lugenlranf= l^eiten ju tutt.'' aSirfac^ ? er ^at boc^ ben Sitel SJoftor. atid^ttg, a6er er ift Sioftor ber ^l^ilofojs^ie. ^at er toielleid^t einen Sruber ober einen JlamenSbetter ° in bet ©tabt? 3a, freilid^ ; id^ lenne einen 2lrjt 9iamen§ ©d^ntibt. ©r ift ein aSetter beS SSaterg. 2 Is this the residence of Professor ■* Schmidt ? Yes, but he is not at home ; he is away on business ^ of state. You are perhaps the professor's son ? 60 THE NOUN Yes ; do you wish something from father ? " You are student, I presume.' No, I come from the museum ; I am the son of the directo Perhaps then you have something for father. Correct ; the box here contains a quantity ' of minera and fossils. EXERCISE 14 a 1. 2)a§ iDar getoi^ bie 6timme be§ ^erjenS. 2. 6r ift tcie ein ^inb unb lennt bie §erjen ber ^inber. 3. Bennett ©ie b« §errn Sireftor be§ SJiufeumS ? 4. SReinen Sie bag ©tabtmi feutn? @§ gi6t jtoei 5)lufeen unb jhiei Sireftoren. 5. ®a§ jir ©tubenten ber Uniberfitat. 6. 2Bunfd)en Sie ein ^it^mer m ein em" S3ette ober mit jtcei SSetten? 7. §ier lebt ber Stubei nid^t unter ben Slugen be§ ^rofefforS. 8. ®er 3^riebe ift immi ein ®IM fiir bie 5Jationen ber SIBelt. 9. Q'md ^imrmx b( 9Kufeum§ entf)alten 9)tineralien unb g^offilien. 10. S>er £afte ge^ort in^* bie 2Bo^nung be§ 3)ireftDr§. EXERCISE 14 b 1. I wish a room with two windows and two beds. 2. W have two castles and two museums in the city. 3. Phj sicians are always doctors, but doctors are not always phj sicians. 4. The windows are too large, the beds too shor 5. That is the affair of a workingman, not of a studen 6. Yonder is the residence of the director. 7. I am goin home on account of the illness of my mother. 8. Whj have I to do with minerals and fossils ? 9. It is a time ( suffering among the workingmen. 10. The children ai cousins. VOCABULARY / ber Slrjt, s." (pi. a), physi- ,, fort, adr. away. cian. bn§ goffi'l, mx. (pi. =ien), /ossS / baS SBett, ?Hx. bed. . freilicfi, «r/r., to be sure. ^ ik^,pron. {dem.) this. ^,, bn§ ®efcf)aft, s.= business. ^' ber ®ire'ftor, mx. director. , fein, pron. adj. no, not a, none entfia'lten, v. contain ; entt)alt, , bie iMnf^eit, w. sickness, di ' contains [-hold]. ease. DECLENSION 61 ^ bo§ Seiben, s.' suffering, trouble/' tun, v. do. [loathe]. / ber SCitel, s.' fi(?e. "isaSi SDltnero'I, mx. {pi. =ien), y itiegen, ;jrep. (gen.) on account mineral. of. baS aKufe'utn, mar. (jjZ. sen), mu- ,,. toirMidj, arfu. really. seum'. ,y bie SBo^nung, w. dwelling, resi- ' nein, arfy, no [none]. dence. / nid)t§, pron. nothing. ^' roiinfd^en, u. wish. / ridjtig, adj. right, correct. Notes. — i StttflCltleibeilS, eye-trouble, trouble with {my) eyes. — '■ ^ Jtt tint, to do. A dependent infinitive usually comes at the end of the sentence ; see § 187. — ^ 9Icmcn§Better, namesake, in the sense of ' one having the same name.' — * of Professor, be« §ettn *)3rofeffor. — ^ on business of state, in ©efc^Sftelt beS @taote8, or in @taat«gefif|aften. — ^ from father, »om 3Sater (Ex. 4, n. 5). — ' are a student, I presume, ftnb tro^t Stubent. — ^ a quantity of, eine SKenge (without prep.). — » ttiie, like. — i" einetn ; here = one ; see § 116, 3. — " geprt in, be- longs in. The box is not in place ; so the ace. tells whither it must be taken to be where it ' belongs.' Declension of Peopee Names 99. Names of Persons. Names of persons have, in general, no inflection except in tlie genitive singular; in all other cases the form remains the same, the article being used, if necessary, for the sake of clearness ; e. g. t(J) tefe (ben) ©chiller, 1 am reading Schiller ; tm Sanbe ber SJfojart unb ber SBagner, in the land of the Mozarts and the Wagners. 1. The genitive singular has the ending g — the rule ap- plies to feminine as well as to masculine names — unless the name ends in an s-sound, when an apostrophe is commonly used ; e. g. ©emitter? SBerJe, or bie 3Berfe ©drillers, Schiller's works, the works of Schiller ; 2JJarie§ ©Item, Marie's parents; D)3t|' ®ebi(^te, Opitz's poems. The ending en§, as in 2)la= rienS ©Item, iDl3i|ett§ ©ebid^te, is going out of fashion, tho still often used. a. But the ending § is omitted if the name is preceded by an article or pronoun in the genitive (an intervening ad- 62 THE NOUN jective or noun makes no difference) and is not followed 1 the noun on which the genitive depends ; e. g. bie 2Bei eincg ©c£)iHer, beg ®icf)terg ©c£)i[Ier, beg jungcn ®i)iaer, mein geliebten ©(f)iller, the works of a Schiller, of the poet Schilk of the youthful Schiller, of my beloved Schiller ; but b jungen i2cf)tl(erg SBerfe, the young Schiller's works. 100. Names of Places. Names of towns and cou: tries are mostly neuter nouns, used without the artic unless an adjective precedes. They have no inflectic except an g in the genitive singular, and the use of th follows the rule given above for names of persons ; e. i bie aSauern 9?om§, the walls of Borne-; but bie 9Kauern b' alteit 9tom, ber ©tabt 9iom, the walls of ancient Rome, i the city of Rome. 1. If the name ends in an s-sound the genitive is be replaced by bon with the dative, unless one prefers an a( jective construction ; e. g. bie ©tra^en Don ^arig, or bie $ rifer ©tra^en, the streets of Paris. 2. But some names of countries, provinces, mounta: districts, etc., and all names of rivers, are regularly use with the article. Such names, if masculine or neuter, oft< retain the g of the genitive even after the article ; e. g. b ©i^jfel beg ©rodeng, the summit of the Brocken ; bie Ufer b $R^eing, the hanks of the Rhine. Feminine names of coti tries are, of course, without inflection ; e. g. bie Serge t ©C^tDeij, the mountains of Switzerland. EXERCISE 15 Reading Lesson : Proper Xouns ^^ tear neuli^ im SE^eater 6ei einev SSorftcIIung bon ©d^ill( „2BiI^eIm Sett." @tn ©^aufpieler 5Rameng gjjuttcr fjsiette ! SRoHe beg 3:ett, ein ^raulein Svaun bie 9toIIe ber 93erta. 3 aSorfteHung tear fef)r gut, befonberg ber at^jfelfd^ujj Setig unb i SCob ©e^lerg. 9Jur 'mox bie Siebegfcene^ jtoifd^eit Serta u DECLENSION 63 3iubenj ettoa? fatt, benn'' SertaS Sttmme tear unangenel^m. ^n 2)eutfc^Ianb, bem Sanbe ber 2Bagner unb ber Seetftoben, tear bie SRufif naturU(^ aui) gut. ^t^ I^ff i«^t Sd^itlerS SBerfe ; er tft gro^, aber er l^at nic^t bie ^raft eineS ©{jafesjjcare.* 3n ein ))aar SCagen ma(^e ^ id^ etne 9?eif e iiber ^ SBeimar nad^ Seijjjig " unb 5Dre§ben. SBeimartoar Dor Ijunbert 3a£)ren' ber SBo^nort ber ©tester ©oettje unb ©c^Uter. (S§ liegt an ber ^Im, einem 9?ebenf(uffe ber Baak. EXERCISE 15 a 1. I am reading Schiller's dramas. 2. I have also the works of Goethe. 3. Germany is a land of music. 4. The journey from Gottingen to * Weimar is not very interesting. 6. This evening there is ^ a performance of Shakespeare's Hamlet. 6. An actress from Dresden plays the part of Ophelia.'"' 7. Weimar is interesting on acount of the poets Goethe and Schiller. 8. The park of Weimar belongs among 1^ the works of Goethe. 9. There is** a Life of Schiller by ^^ Thomas Carlyle. 10. Werther's Sufferings is the title of a book by ^^ Goethe. Vocabulary ber aipfel, s.' {pi. 'a), apple. ,- ber ©cfttfufpteler, s.' actor, "benn, conj. adv. for, then. ^ ber ©cJ)u^, s." (pi ©^iiffe), shot. ®eutjd)Ianh, Germany. / JlJieten, v. play ; pret. fpielte. ber ®td|ter, s.^ poet. ba§ S^ea'ter, s.> theater. fait, adj. cold. ^ ber Sob, s.' {no pi.), death, bie Sroft, s.' {pi. 0), strength,^ u'na'ngene^m, adj. unpleasant. force [craft]. . ,/ bor, prep. {dat. and ace.) before refen, v. read. [fore], bie Siebe, w. love. / bie aJo'rfteHung, w. performance, ber DJebenflul, «•= (;)Z. =fluffe), t. bag 5!Berf, s.= work. tributary. ,y ber SBo^nort, s.^ abode, dwelling- bie Keife, w. iourney [rise]. place. bie SRoUe, w. role, part. ^/smtfcljen, prep. (cfa!. and ace.) be- bie ©cene, w. scene. tween. Notes. — i SiebeSfceiie ; pronounce «je'ne. A feminine noun in composition sometimes takes the ending «, thus constituting an excep- 64 THE ADJECTIVE tion to § 77, 1. — 2 ienn at the beginning of a sentence means for, e where ifteu. On the order see § 87, 3. — « ©^afe8»)en»e ; pronou as in English. — < moc^e it^, I shall make, I am going to make; pres. tense denoting here a present purpose. — ^ jjjjj^ i,y yjay oj * ficipjis, Leipsic. But some prefer to use in English the Gen form Leipzig. Other names of cities which have an English n; differing from the Gennan are Sffiien, Vienna; 9}fiiud)en, Mum ^o(n, Cologne; ®enf, Geneva. In most cases the form of the nam the same in hoth languages. — ' Bor ^unbert StvA\i), meaning the German language, is indeclinable, but the adjective beutfd) is declined like any other adjective. EXERCISE 17 Colloquy : Strong Adjectives 1 ©uten^ ^Jlorgen. Sd^oneS SSetter l^eute, nic^it toal)r? @§ ift ein ^irac^ttger %a.a,. 2Ba§ fagen ©ie ju einem ©jsajters gang? ©in guter ©ebanfe ; tc^ l^abe fortft nid^t§ SBic^tigeS ju tun. SfJun, ttiaS gibt'S '^ ^leueS ? ©ie finb offenbar in frofter 6ttm= mung. ^a, bag bin ic^, unb ic^ ^abe guten ©runb ; mein alter g^reunb SKaj lommt ^eute nac^ ber Stabt. 5Dag ift freilid^ eine gro^e greube fiir Sie. sRid^t toa^r ? ©r ift ein Jira^tiger ^erl. 2 Where are you living " now ? Have you a good room ? Not a ^ very good one. I am living * at No. 2 Konig- strasse.^ 70 THE ADJECTIVE I think I know ' the house ; it is an old, low buildii isn't it ? Well,' it is not a' royal palace, to be sure, but t rooms are cheap. Do you have good fare ? That is an important point. No, the fare is bad too ; good coffee is not to be had.^" Poor fellow 1 That is a miserable life. EXERCISE 17a 1. ein guteS SBud; tft immer eine toal^re j^^reube. 2. Si lommen 3^rt| unb fein fleiner 3Setter, — ein ^iibfc^eS 5jSaar, nii toaltr? 3. SBir f)ahen fd^on jtoei Stage fc^Iec^teS 2Bett( 4. SSon meinem j^enfter fte£)t man ein altcS ©(^lo^ mit ^srac^tig Slitrmen. 5. ®r tear getci^ gro^ al§ 3Jienjci^, abtx fein grof ©d^riftfteHer. 6. ®a too^nt ein getoiffer §err TOiitler, ein n ^er ^aufmann. 7. ^h^'f^^" ^^^ ©tabt unb bem ©ebirge lieg fc^one 2;aler unb gro^e bunfte 2Batber. 8. 3lod) immer reb (5ie Son beutf^er ^olitil ! Sommen wir nun ju ettoaS 3leueti 9. ©etir gern, mein guter jjreunb, aber hjiffen ©ie benn ctto S^JeueS? 10. 2)ag ift ju teuer ; fo ettoag" ift nid^t fiir art Seute. EXERCISE 17b 1. It is a beautiful evening. 2. Here is a new book ; contains all sorts of good ideas. 3. Wretched fellow ! I is always in the society of low people. 4. What you si gives me ^^ great pleasure. 5. That was a long walk f such a'° little child. 6. That is no great piece-of-luck for us. 7. I go in (a)^' short time, perhaps to-morro' 8. We are having very cold weather. 9. They have tv lovely daughters. 10. You write very good Germa 11. I go with happy heart. 12. At Frau Miiller's^^ oi has good society, but bad ooffee. Vocabulary ben!en, v. think. fro^, adj. happy. elenb, adj. wretched. ber eiebonte, mx. (gen. =it bie 5reube, w. joy, pleasure. thought, idea. INFLECTION 71 ber @)runb, s." (pi. ii), ground. ber «)5unft, s." point. ber ^affee, s. (nopL), coffee. fagen, v. say. ber ^erl, s." fellow [churl]. fo, adv. so. toniglict), a\ feine gute ©eele [fein guteS §erj] Plural K feine guten ^opfe, ©eelen, §erjen G. feiner guten M'^\t, ©eelen, §erjen D. feinen guten KB^fen, ©eelen, ^erjen A. feine guten ^ojjfe, ©eelen, ^erjen 108. The Adjective used Substantively. Adjective are often used substantively, and when so used the^ IKFLECTION 73 have the capital initial of a noun, but the inflection of an adjective ; as ber 3llte, the old man ; bie 3ltte, the old woman; hit 'Ultitl, the old people ; ba§ Sttte, the old, that which is old. 1. As the examples indicate, the masculine and feminine singular and the plural of a substantive adjective designate persons. The neuter singular generally denotes the quality abstractly, and has to be translated in different ways ; e. g. er Iie6t ba§ ©c^one, he loves the beautiful (bie Voaxt (ie[t), that would he best ; bie ©egenb i[t am fc^onften tm Sunt, the region is loveliest in June. 1. The phrase with am sometimes takes the place of a predicate nominative with ber ; e. g. unter ben brei l?naben ift ^arl am alteften (instead of the more correct ber altefte), of the three boys Karl is the oldest. 2. The superlative of an adverb is regularly formed by means of the phrase with am, or else a jihrase with aufg ; e. g. fie fingt am beften, she sings best ; fie fang aufg befte, she sang her best. (See § 294, 5, and § 375, 2). 113. Comparison by Means of Adverbs. Adjectives are sometimes compared by means of the adverbs me!^r, more., and am meiften, most. 1. An absolute superlative, i. e. one which does not imply comparison with other objects, is formed by means of the adverbs l^ot^ft, most highly, or au^erft, exceedingly ; e. g. ba§ ift ein l^od^ft intereffanteS 93ud^, that is a most interesting book. 2. Degrees below the positive are denoted by the ad- verbs toeniger or minber, less, and am toenigften, am minbeften. 80 THE ADJECTIVE 114. Irregular and Defective Comparison. A few ai jectives are compared irregularly and certain othe: lack one or more degrees. Tlius : 1. @ut, good, and biel, much, have change of stem : gu beffer, beft ; ml, mefjr, meift. 2. §oc^, high, and naij, near, are compared : ^oc^, I)D^e I>D(f)ft ; naij, na^er, na(^ft. 3. ®rb^, great, has gro^t, rarely gro^eft, in the supe: lative. 4. Some adjectives, mostly from adverbs and prepos tions, lack the positive ; e. g. £)inter, hinder, from the pr( position {)inter, behind; ohix, iqjj^er, horn, the adverb obei above. 5. @rft, Jirst, and Ie|t, last, are isolated superlative They are, however, sometimes compared vs^ith er as if the were positives, ber ei'[tere and ber le^tere being quite commo in the sense of the former and the latter. 6. As in English, some adjectives are, from their meai ing, incapable of comparison ; e. g. gang, all ; tagtic^, dail^ EXERCISE 20 Reading Lesson: Comparison of Adjectives Siebfter g^reunb ! ®ie %ix\tn finb ju @nbe, unb td^ bin fd^c Icingere ^ ^t\i toieber ju §aufe. S)ie Heine 9teife tear mir i ^Dd^[ten ®rabe jutrciglic^. ^^ bin t)iel ftarJer unb Inciter alg Dor einem 5!)l0nat ; audf) l:jabt \i) je^t einen befjeren Segri bom mittleren^ ®eutfrf)Ianb. Son Set^^jig ging' ic^ junac^ nad^ Sregben unb blieb bort meJirere 2^age. 2)re§ben ift nic biel grower all Sei^jjig, aber e§ i)oA eine fd^bnere Sage. (SI lie namlic^ in einem ^jrac^ttgen Stale ju beiben Seiten ber (SIbe, b altere unb grb^cre 2;eil auf bem linlen Ufer. Unter ben ©e^en tourbigteiten ber Stabt ift bie gro^e SBilbergalterie am berii^ml ften. 5Dieje ^ tear fiir mi^, toie fiir bie meiften g^remben, b COMPARISON 81 intercftantefte ^unlt in 5Dre§ben. 2Bettere§ ^ iiber metne aBan= berungen fd^reibe tc^ tiieltet^t in meinem nad^[ten Sriefe. EXERCISE 20 a 1. e§ ift !alt ^eute, ttiel falter aU ge[tcrn. 2. SBir £)aben je^t geici^ ba§ laltefte SBettcr be§ ^a^reS. 3. §crr SBirt, i^ tDunf^ie ein gro^ereS dimmer, mit ^o^eren g^enftern unb befferem Sid^te. 4. SBir l^aben leine grij^eren dimmer; bieg ift ba§ gro^te im §aufe. 5. SOBo^nen ©ie in bem alteren ober in bem neuerm %nk ber ©tabt? 6. @§ gibt fiirjere 9Bege bon ^ier nad^ §aufe, aber bieS" ift ber befte. 7. ^u biefer ^atjreSjeit finb bie 2^age am langften unb am fd^onften. 8. ®r ift ein bef= ferer Slrjt, aber toeniger berit^mt aU fein jiingerer Sruber. 9. 2llg altefter ©o^n ber g^amilie ^at er ein gro^ereg SSermogen aU feine jitngeren Sriiber. 10. ®ag Seben in ®eutf(^Ianb ift je|t teurer ' alg in frii^eren 3eiten. 11. ©oet^e tear ein gro^e= rer ©id^ter aU ©d[)itter, aber fein befferer SSJlenfc^. 12. 3<^ fenne feine f^sateren SfBerfe am beften. EXERCISE 20 b 1. He is two years older than I. 2. She is my dearest friend. 3. The days are becoming shorter. 4. I know ' a shorter way. 5. You are evidently in a more cheerful mood. 6. Where do you find stronger men or more beau- tiful women? 7. This is the beginning of better days. 8. Among Schiller's later plays " Wilhehn Tell is the best. 9. As poet Schiller is strongest in the drama. 10. That is the highest tower in the world. 11. Fraulein Berta is more pretty ^° than beautiful. 12. This is sm-ely the coldest day of the year. 13. Death ^^ is the beginning of a better life. Vocabulary al§, conj. than, when, as. ber SBrief, s." letter, ber SSegriff, s."^ idea, conception, bie f5"etien {pi. only), vacation, betbe, ^ora. adj. both, two. fremb, adj. strange, foreign, bleiben, v. remain ; pret. blieb, bie ©aUevie', w. gallery. [-leave]. ber ®rab, s.^ degree, grade. 82 THE ADJECTIVE ^eiter, adj. cheerful. ftarf, adj. strong [stark]. bie Sage, w. situation [lay]. bex Sell, s.^ part, [deal]. linf, adj. left. bn§ Ufer, s.' bank, shore. meEirere, adj. several. bie aSanberung, w. wanderi mic£), ;;ro)i. (ace.) me. [say. travel. nSmlid), ado. namely, that is to juna'cfift, adv. first. bie @e'f|en§n)it'i"bigfei4, w. sight. ju'tra'glic^, adj. beneficial. Notes. — Uttngcre ^t\t, some time, a considerable length of ti The comparative sometimes denotes simply a moderate degree, can not then be translated literally ; e. g. cine iiltere ®antc, an eld lady. — 2 mittlcrcn, central. — ' Bi"B» went; pret. 1. and 3. sing gef|en. — *2)icfc, this; fem. of bieS referring to SBilbetgaUerie. — ^g; ttttS, further {details). — ^ bicS, instead of biefer (agreeing in gei with SBeg), which would also he correct. — 'teurcr instead of teue: see § 111, 3. — 8 know, lennen. — ^ plays, ©ramen. — i" more pre mef)t t)ii6f(f), rather than I)iibfd^cr. — ^^ death ; use the def. article. EXERCISE 21 Colloquy : Weak Adjectives 1 ©ie itaren too^I ben gro^ten 'Zdl be§ ©ommerS in (Sngtai 3a, aber nur in ben !leineren ©tabten ; erft im §er&fte c id^ nac^ Sonbon. 2Baren ©ie Icingere 3eit in Sonbon, ober nur ein )paax ^a ^m ganjen ettoa brei SBodjen ; i^ blieb ettoag langer in ■ ri§, am Idngften aber in Serlin. 2Ba§ benfen ®ie benn je^t bon ben brei gro^ten ©tabten xofa^ ? giir mid^ rtar $ari§ am intereffanteften. 2)ag ift f)D(^ft fonberbar ; bie meiften 2tmeri!aner ^aben * ' Sonbon am liebften. 2)a§ ift moglid^, aber meine ©^m^jatl^ien finb me^r franjfi' ali englifd^. 2 Why did you not go ^ to London at once ? That is most interesting place in England, is it not? Yes, to be sui-e, but not the pleasantest in the hot seas COMPARISON 83 For my part ' I always like the large cities best. That is not my taste. Peoijle * live too fast in the large cities. I love a more quiet life. No doubt one needs ^ a pretty long time ^ for ' the sights of London. Yes, indeed ; it is a most interesting * city. What do you think of the London weather ? ' It is the worst ^^ in the world, is it not ? Oh no; the weather is no^^ worse in London than here at home. EXERCISE 21a 1. ©ie fd^rei6t l^iid^ft intereffante SBriefe. 2. Unter ben neu= eren2)id^ternlefe^''i^©(i^ttteram lieSften. 3. 5Die ©efellfd^aft toar langtoeilig tm I^od^ften ©rabe ; e§ icarennur ditere Seute bo. 4. ^^ h)ei| ni^tg SSeffereS ju tun. 5. 2)ie ®re§bener Silber= gatterte ift bie berill^mtefte in ganj ®eutf^Ianb. 6. ^n ber Up ten 3eit " 'i)attin " toir au^erft unangene^meS 2Better. 7. 5Diefe8 ®uc^ ift ju gro^ ; id^ toiinf^e ein fletnereg. 8. ®er erfte SCeil be§ SBerfeS ift Don gro^tem ^ntereffe. ' 9. 5Die beften il^eater finben fid^" metfteng nur in ben gro^eren ©tcibten. 10. ^c^ finbe bag ©ebirge am fd^onften im §erbfte. 11. ®ie 6eru]^m= teften ©c^riftfteller finb nic^t immet bie gro^ten. 12. ®er §err ^rofeffor rebete aufg freunblid^fte iiber fein neuefteg SBerf, EXERCISE 21 b 1. He is a teacher of the modern ^^ languages. 2. That is the most interesting part of the whole story. 3. The fa- ther is an elderly " gentleman with a white beard. 4. I am reading a most interesting story. 5. The hills and valleys are at their loveliest ^' in the autumn. 6. That is an exceed- ingly rare book. 7. No better man lives. 8. (The) Faust is Goethe's greatest work. 9. A poet has to do with the higher interests of life. 10. One finds the best thoughts in her last work. 11. I have nothing better. 12. His great advantage is his rare knowledge of modern " philosophy. 13. Tbe last part of the work is the least " interesting. 84 THE ADJECTIVE a'ngene^tn, adj. pleasant. 6raud)en, v. need [brook], btei, num. three. englifcft, adj. English. fraiisb'ftfd), adj. French, bet @cfd)mact, s.^ taste [-smack] ^ei^, adj. hot. lieben, v. love. Vocabulary Ite6 t)a6en, v. like [have lief]. mijglic^, adj. possible, ber Ort, s.^-' place, rni'd), adj. fast [rash], fofo'rf, adc. at once, bie Sljmpnt^ie', «>. sympathy. ber SSorjug, s.^ (^/. ii), advantage inaru'in, adv. (inter.) why. Notes. — ^^abett . . . am liedftcn, like . . . best; lit. have, i. e. holi dearest. — ^ ■w'hy did you not go to L. at once? SBarum gingen ©ie nii^ fofort nadi S. ? — ^For my part, fiir mcin (not meinen) SEctl ; SeK ii this phrase heing neuter. — * People, bie Seiite. — ^no doubt one needs mail brau^t tnoliL — ^a pretty long time, Idngere 3eit or eine jiemlic lange 3^*. — 'for, fiir. — * a most interesting, eine t)bd)ft intereffotite one could not say eine intcreffanteftc. — ^ of the London weather, Co: bem Sonbonet SJBctter. — i°the worst, bag jd^Iec^tefte. — '^no, nid^t. - 12 lefc . . . om licbften, like best to read. As adv. am liebften is th superlative of gem. — ^^in . . . 3cit, of late. — ^^Ijotten Wir ; translat here we have had. — ^^ {iiiben fid), are found, lit. Jind themselves. - 16 modern ; = newer. — i' elderly ; = older. — 18 at their loveliest, at fc^onften. — i^the least, am iDenigjlen, or am minbefleii. THE NUMEKALS 115. The Cardinals. The fundamental numbers am the mode of forming the others appear from the follow ing table : 1 ein(§) 13 breijelin 50 fiinfsig 2 jiBei 14 bierje^n 60 fec^jig 3 brei 15 fiinf jet)n 70 fieb(en)3ig 4 bier 16 fec^je^n 80 ac^tjig 6 fiinf 17 fieb(en)je^n 90 neunjig 6 fe^S 18 ad^tjeljit 100 fiunbert 7 fieben 19 neunjel^n 120 ^unbert unb shjanjig 8 ad^t 20 stoansig 121 l^unbert einunbjtDanjift 9 neun 21 einunbjhjanjig 150 ^unbert unb fiinf jig 10 iii)n 22 jtBeiunbshjanjig 200 stcei^unbevt 11 elf 30 brei^ig 1,000 taufenb 12 jtoblf 40 bierjig THE NUMERALS 85 1. The number 1,121, for example, is read taufenb ein^n= bevt einunbstcanjig ; 1,000,000 is eine mUion ; 1,000,000,000 eine 3Dti(tiarbe ; 1,000,000,000,000 eine Siltion. 2. For A hundred, a thousand, German has simply ^un= bert, taufenb, ein being used only where English would have ONB hundred, one thousand. 116. Inflection and Use of cin. "When it agrees with a noun expressed, and is not preceded by ber, the nu- meral ein is inflected like the article ein ; e. g. icir [inb e i n 3}olf , we are one people ; toir [inb e i n e § $8Iut§, we are of one hlood. 1. But if it is used without a noun it takes the ending er in the nominative singular masculine, and e§ in the nomina- tive and accusative singular neuter ; e. g. einer tion un§ l)at unrec^t, one of us is ivrong ; einer ber ^naben, one of the hoys ; eineg ber SJtabc^en, one of the girls. 2. Preceded by ber (bie§ or jen-), ein has the inflection of a weak adjective and forms a plural, bie einen, with the sense of some ; e. g. ber eine ober ber anbere f)at unred^t, the one or the other is ivrong. 3. (Sin, one, is distinguished from ein, a, when necessary, by spaced type, or by a capital initial ; less often by an ac- cent. See examples in § 116. 117. The Numbers above ein. The numbers above ein are usually uninflected. 1. But jtcei and brei sometimes foi-m a nominative and accusative in e, a genitive in er and a dative in en. Some of the nun;iber8 above brei may also take the ending e, especially when no noun follows. 118. The Ordinals. From one to twenty the ordinal stems are formed by suffixing t to the cardinal ; e. g. ciert, fourth; breijel^nt, thirteenth. From twenty on 86 THE ADJECTIVE they are formed by suffixiug [t to the tens; e.g. jtoan ^igft, twentieth ; fiinfunbbret^tgft, thirty-fifth. 1. But^^r-s* is er[t, third is britt (not breit), and eighth ii ad^t (not ac^tt). 2. Such forms as jtneit, jtoanjigft, have only a theoretioa existence. Like the superlatives fd^onft, beft, etc. the ordi nalc are only used after ber or a pronominal modifier, and have then the inflection of an adjective ; e. g. fein britte: ©o^n, his third son; am 21ften (= einunbjtoanjigften) Sljjril, on the 21st of April. 3. The partitive ordinals are formed by suffixing tel, ai abbreviation of Slett, part, to the ordinal stem, the preced- ing t being dropped; e. g. ein SDrittel, a third; ein ©ec^Stel, a sixth. The words are neuter substantives. a. Half is l/alh, as adjective, or bie §alfte, as noun; e. g ber f)aI6e ffieg, half the way ; ein ^albel ®u^enb, half a dozen ; bie §alfte be§ Sljifefe, half of the apple. §aIB is alec used substantively, without inflection, in fractional num- bers ; e. g. brei unb ein£)alb '^ai)Xi, three and a half years. h. A peculiar formation is the so-called dimidiative, made by suffixing ^alb to the ordinal stem with connecting vowel e, the number thus denoted being less by one-half than the ordinal ; e. g. brittet)alb, two and a half, i. e. (two compleU and the) third {only) half. Instead of jhjeite^alb, anbert l^alb is used for one and a half. The dimidiatives are no: inflected. EXERCISE 22 Reading Lesson : Numerals (Sin beutf(^e§ ®t?mnajtum ^ ^at einen ^urfuS toon neun '^aiixm. 3n ber unterften piaffe, ber fogenannten ©eila/ finb bie Sc^tiile tm 2)urc^fcf)mtt neun big jefjn ^aiixt alt. S)er ©chiller bottenb« ben ^urfuS alfo im neunjet^nten ober jtoanjigften ^a^re feine Seben§. Sin ©filler im ad^ten ober neunten ^a^re beg ^urfu ^ei^t ein ^rimaner/ im fedttften unb fiebenten Sal^re, ein ©e!ur baner, u. f. Id." 3n ben ^o^eren j^taffen J^/at ber ©chiller mei THE NUMERALS 87 ften§ brei^ig ©tunben bie SBod^je, alfo tm SDurd^fd^mtt fiinf ©tunben taglic^. S)ie ©c^ule beginnt urn 7 lltjr Dormittagg tm ©ommer, urn 8 llfjr im 2Binter. 2)a§ ©d^uljal^r beginnt tm grueling ad^t 2:age ttad^ Dftern uttb jerfallt in mx SCermitte. 2)a§ erfte SSiertelia^r bauert bt§ jum 24. ^uni, ba§ jtoeite bi§ @nbe ©e^jtember, bag britte big 5Bei^nac^ten. ®ie §erien be= tragcn im ganjen je^rt big jtoblf SBod^en, alfo ettoa 21 ^jgrojent ^ beg Safjreg. Slu^erbem gibt eg me^rere befonbere^ ^^eiertage, je^t unter anberert ben 2. (Se|)tember, ben ^ajjregtag ' ber grojjen ©^lac^t bei ©eban am 2. Bipt. 1870. EXERCISE 22 a 1. A week consists of seven days. 2. The year has twelve months, the month thirty days and the day twenty- four hours. 3. "With us * the most important holidays are Christmas, New Year's, ' the 22d of February ^^ and the 4th of July. 4. Schiller's Wallenstein is divided into three parts. 5. The first part contains eleven scenes and one thousand one hundred and five lines. 6. The second part contains two thousand six hundred and fifty-one lines. 7. The entire work contains seven thousand six htindred and twenty-two lines. 8. The 23d of April," 1897, was the two hundred and eighty-first anniversary of the death of Shakespeare. 9. Eight and seven is fifteen. 10. Three times ^^ nine is twenty-seven. 11. Five-sixths of thirty is twenty-five. Vocabulary Qtiber, pron. adj. other. bie ^fa|"fe, w. class. aufeerbcm, adv. besides. ber furfu§ (pi. SurfuS or Surfe), beginnen, v. begin. course. betragen, v. amount to. Dftern, pi. Easter. bauern v. last, continue. bie ©djtatfit, w. battle. ber ®ur(f)fcl)nitt, s.= average. bie ©rfiule, w. school. ber getertag, s.' holiday. ber ©c^iiler, s.' scholar, pupil. ber gri:|(ing, s." spring. fo'gena~nnt, adj. so-called. bag ®t|mnaftunt, mx. gymnasium. ber 'Xermi'n, s.^ term. fieiften, v. be called [hight]. bie U§r, w. clock [hour]. 88 THE ADJECTIVE um, prep, (ace.) at, about. SBei'^noc^tert, pi. Christmas, unter, adj. lower [under]. ber SBinter, s.' winter. toolte'nben, v. complete, finish. jerfn'Ken (in, ace.), v. be divided tio'rtniHtagS, adv. forenoons. (into) ; 3. sing. jerfdHt. Notes. — i @)t)mitnfilttn ; the name given in Germany to a particular kind of preparatory school. — ^©cjto, sexta ; i. e. 'sixth class' or ' form,' from Latin sexia classis. After @cjta come Ouinta and Ouarta, each one year ; then Settia, ©ffunba and optima, each two years. — ^'JSrilttn'lier, i. e. a prima-boy. There is no corresponding English word. — ■> u. f . ni. = unb fo meiter, and so forth. — ^ ^to^ent ; the German says pro cent, instead of percent. — ^^fiefonbere, special. — ' Sa^reStag, year-day, i. e. anniversary. — * With us, bei iiti8. — « New Year's, SFfeujaljt. — i" February, gc'bruar. — "April, Slpri't.— 12 Three times, breimal ; so einmal, once, jweimaf, twice, etc. EXERCISE 23 Colloquy : Numerals 1 2Bie bier U^r ^ ift el ? Ungefa^r ^alh 9 V 3ti\n, eg ift erft 20 SKinuten mi) 8. 2lber ineS^alb fragen Sie? Um brei Siertel ' 10 ge^e ic^ nai) bem S3aI)nf)ofe. ©rtoarten ©ie benn jemanb ? 3a, i^ ertoarte meine beiben ©(^toeftern mit^ bem nac^ften ©ie ^aben alfo jtoei ©i^toeftern ? ^d^ iou^te nur t»on ber etnen, ber Ileinen SSerta. 3a, id^ i)ahe nod^ eine.^ ©ie fjei^t Mark, unb ift ettoa an-- bert^alb ^afjre jiinger alg ii^. Unb tcie alt finb ©ie benn? 3(^ bin beinaf^e jtoanjig. SKein ©eburtstag i[t l^eute iiber a(^t«3:age, am 29. g^ebruar. ©ie i)abin alfo nur aHe bier ^a^re' ©eburtgtag. Sag ift bo^ fonberbar. 2 How late is it, I wonder ? About a quarter to 10 ? No, it is only half past 9. But why do you ask ? THE PRONOUN 89 At ^ 10 I am going to the station. My sister Marie is coming home to-day. Is it possible ? Why, to-day is only the 20th.' There are four ^° days yet before Christmas. Yes, but my birthday is on ^^ the 22d. Oh that's it^^ — a family festival.^' How old are you, pray? I am in my ^* twenty-first year. Is your sister older or younger than you? Marie is about two years and a half " younger than I. Vocabulary ad), interj. oh, ah. jemanb, /iron, some one. qQ, pron. adj. all, every. juttg, adj. (comp. ii), young. ber S8at|nf|Df, s.^ {pi. o), station, bie TOinu'te, w. minute. depot. bie ©c^roefter, w. sister. ertDortcn, v. expect. u'ngefa"t}r, adv. about. ba§ (Jeft, s.^ festival, /eosf. tt)e§^o(6, /iron. why. fragen, v. ask. iru^te, v. knew; pret. o/miffen. bie ©eburt, w. birth. ber 3ug» «-^ (jpl- % train [tug]. Notes. — i2Bte Bid U^r, whai o''clock. — ^\\a\i 9, half past 8 ; so also ^aI6 einS, half past twelve, etc. — ^ jj^t bret SBtertel 10, at a quar- ter to 10. The preposition auf = to (i. e. on the way toward, begin- ning at 9) is understood before 10. Sin SJiertel (auf) 10 = a quarter past 9. — * tntt, hy. In German one is said to travel m i t bet @ifcn» bat)n, BY rail. — *ito^ eine, another ; another in the sense of an addi- tional one is always noii^ cin. — ^ Ijente iiSer or^t £age, a week from to- day. — ' oUe Bier jfo^re, every four years. — « At, urn. — ' Why, to-day is only, ^cute ift bo^ erft ; boc^ = why. — '" There are . . . before, e8 fmb no^ .. . Bis. — "on, an. — i^Oh that's it, ad) jo! — "family fes- tival, gami'ticnfeft. — "in my, int. — i^two years and a half; either jWei unb einl)alb 3ol)re, or britte{)alb 3a^re. THir PKOisrouisr 119. Classification of Pronouns. The pronouns are of six kinds : personal, possessive, demonstrative, relative, interrogative and indefinite. 90 THE PRONOUN THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS 120. The Forms. The personal pronouns are tc^, of the first person ; bu, tho^i., of the second, and er, fie, e he, she, it, of the third. With these are classed the i flexive fid), and the intensive felbft, which are indecli able. The others are inflected as follows : Singular Common Gender Masc. Fern. Neut. N. ic^ bu er fie e§ G. meiner beiner feiner if)rer feiner (mein) (bein) (fein) (fein)(e§) D. mir bir i^m i^r i^m A. tnidE) bi(^ Plural fie e§ Common Gender Common Gender N. toir i^r fie G. unfer euer i^rer D. un§ tu&l i^nen A. un§ euc() fie 1. The forms in parenthesis are rare or poetical. 121. The Pronouns of Address. The pronouns of a dress now employed in the language of every-day li are bu and @te, both of them ordinarily to be translat by you. S)u is used in speaking to a member of om own family, to an intimate friend, a young child, one the lower animals, or any inanimate object. It is a] used in addressing God. ©ie is used in addressi strangers, acquaintances and less intimate friends. 1. The form ©ie is simply the pronoun fie = they, used polite address, and distinguished, in that use, liy a capit for which reason it takes its verb in the third person pliu 2. The foregoing statements do not describe the usage the past, nor of poetry (see § 301). THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS 91 122. Non-personal Uses in the Third Person. Al- tho called ' personal' pronouns, er and fie do not always refer, and e§ seldom refers, to a pei-son. 1. Any masculine noun is regularly referred to by er, a feminine by fie and a neuter by eS ; e. g. ber 9?0(f pa^t nic^t, er ift ju eng, t/ie coat does not fit, it is too tight ; i^ lenne bie ©tette, fie finbet ftc^ bei ©filler, / know the passage, it is found in Schiller. a. But such neuter nouns as 2BeiB, ivoman, j^^raulein, young lady, 2Jlab(^en, girl, are usually referred to, in accord- ance with the natural gender, by fie instead of e?. 2. The pronouns ev, fie, e§ are not used in the genitive, or after a preposition, in referring to an inanimate object, a demonstrative or a compound of ba (before vowels bar) be- ing substituted ; e. g. ba§ ift meine ©ad^e, unb ©ie E)aben nid}tS bamtt (not mit iJjr) ju tun, that is my affair and you have nothing to do with it ; ba§ S3uc^ ift le^rreid^, aber ber ©til begfelben (not ber ©tit t)on i^m, nor ber @til feiner) ift fc^Iec^t, the book is instructive, but the style of it is bad. In the last example it would also be correct to say fein ©til, or beffen ©til, its style. a. The substitution of a demonstrative for a personal pronoun is quite common, even when the pronoun refers to persons or is not governed by a preposition. 3. The neuter e§ is often used (somewhat like English there, but more freely) to anticipate a logical subject which for any reason it is desired to have come after the verb ; e. g. e§ finb i^rer brei, there are three of them; e§ irrt ber SKenfd^, man errs. a. For other special ases of e§ see § 303. 123. The Reflexive. A reflexive pronoun denotes the subject in an objective relation. 1. In the third person dative and accusative of all gen- ders and both numbers, the reflexive is fid). It is to be 92 THE PKONOUXS translated by himself, herself, itself, themselves; as reflex- ive of ©ie (see § 4, I) by yourself; e. g. er ^a^t fic^ (ace), he hates himself; er fc^metd^ett fi^ (dat.), he flatters him- self; jie maifien fid) (©ie macfien fid^) gro^e ?Dtuf)e, theij give themselves {you give yourself) great pains. 2. In the first and second persons, and in the genitive of the third, there is no separate reflexive, the proper form of the personal pronoun being used instead ; as ic^ fjaffe mic§, / hate myself; iJjr- fc^meic^elt eud;, yoii flatter yourselves. 3. In the plural fii^ is sometimes used with reciprocal force, and is then equivalent to each other, one another; e. g. fie toaren ef)ematg g-reunbe, aber je^t {jaffen fie fief), they ivere once friends, but now they hate each other (or one another). Un§ and euc^ may be used in the same way. 124, The Intensive. The pronoun fetOft or felOer, both forms indeclinable, may be used after any form of a personal pronoun, or after fid), for the sake of emphasis ; e. g. er ift fcI6ft ®tc£)ter, he is a poet himself ; er betriigt fid) fetbft, he deceives himself. EXERCISE 24 Reading Lesson : Personal Pronouns 3;eure ^Wutter ! 2)ein ^ lieber Srief tiom 23. le^ten ^ 5)lonat§ lam mir' erft geftern* ju §anben. Su bift in Unruf)e ioegen meitier ©efunbbeit, aber 2)u* braui^ft Sid^'^ ni^t bariiber ju angftigen. W\x gefjt e§ gut, aber tcie eg fc^eint, ift ba§ nirf)t ber ^att bei (£u^ ^ ju §aufe. ®er Heine UnfatI ber ©cfiitieftcr mad^t mir immer noc^ bange. 3Bar er benn tcirflic^ fo unbebeu: tenb? SBie befinbet fie ftd^ je^t? S3itte, fc^reibe' mir aSeitereS bariiber. %&i f)atte fetbft Dor ein Jjaar J^agen ein fteine§ 2tbenteuer. 2lm le^ten ©onnabenb namli^ faJ3 ' id; ru^ig in meincm ^intm^t unb Ia§ ' in einer 3«'tw"9 ; «^ '^^■'^ un^ f)alb 10 sormittagg. 2luf einmal " f loJ)fte " eg an bie Siire ; id) bffnete, unb ba ftan* THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS 93 ben jtoei ^Polijiften bor mir. ,Mim §err," f agte ^^ ber eine ber= felben/' „ f)aben ©ie Sljren ©elbbeutel bei fid^ ?" „®eit)i^/' ant= icortete i^ erftaunt unb [tedte bie §anb in bie SCafd^e. 2tber ber SBeutel tear nid^t ba. EXERCISE 24 a 1. I find myself again at home. 2. Tlie book belongs to me. 3. We are Americans. 4. She means us. 5. He has nothing to do with us. 6. She thinks only of " herself. 7. She is only^^ playing with him. 8. She finds herself among friends. 9. I expect her by" the next train. 10. They are coming with her. 11. She is going with them. 12. Here is the letter ; I had it in my pocket. 13. There is the evening paper, but there is " nothing in it. 14. The book is tedious, especially the last part of it. 15. We know each other already. 16. They do not know each other. Vocabulary baS Sl'benteu'er, s.' adventure. bie §anb, s.' (pi. a), hand. augftigen (fid)), v. torment one's flopfen, v. knock ; pret. Uop\te. self, be anxious. Bffnen, v. open ; pret. offnete. a'ntroo'rten, v. answer ; pret. ber ipoliji'ft, w. policeman. antmortete. fcfieinen, v. seem, shine. lbana(e), adv. anxiously ; bange fifsen, v. sit ; pret. fafe. ma^en , with dat. to trouble. ber ©onnabenb, s.^ Saturday ber SSeutel, s." purse. [eve of Sun-day], ei'nmat, adv. once ; einma'I, just, ftecfen, v. put, stick ; pret. ftecfte. pray. -fte^en, v. stand ; pret. ftanb. erftou'nt, pple. astonished. bie %a\&it, w. pocket, ber gaU, s.'' {pi. o), case [fall]. bie a;iir(e), w. door. boS ©elb, s? money [yield]. u'nbebeuHenb, adj. insignificant, bie Siefunb^eit, w. health ber U'nfaH, s." (j>l.) a, accident. [-sound-]. bie U'nru'^e, w. unrest, concern. Notes. — i Scin, your, the possessive corresponding to ®u, which the writer uses in addressing his mother. — 2 {e^ten 9RonatS, of last month. Notice the weak adjective, § 104, a ; but one might also say be8 le^ten SDbnatS. — ' font mir . . . ju ^iinben, came into my hands, came to hand; mir takes the place of a possessive agreeing with §an» ben. Som is pret. of lommen. — * erft geftern, only yesterday. — e 2)tt, 94 THE PEONOUN Stc^ ; all pronouns of address are written witli a capital in lette (see § 4, 2). ®ic^ is object of fiiigftigett ; ®u braui^ft ®id) nid)t ; ongftigen = you do not need to trouble yourself. — ^ 6ei @u^, with yo\ i. e. the family. — 'fc^retbc, write; imperative, 2. pers. sing. — ^fj i^, I was sitting (see Ex. V, n. 3). — " laS, was reading ; pret. of (cfe: — '" ttttf ei'uiiml, all at once. — ^i ((ofifte cS, there was a knock. - i^fagte, said; pret. of (agra. — ^^ bcrfeltien, of them (§ 134, 1). — "o an, with ace. — i^ only ; see § 96. — i^ by, mit. — " tnere is, eS ift. THE POSSESSIVES 125. Strong Forms. The possessives which correspon to the various personal pronouns are as follows : e§ : fein, its totr : unfer, our i^x : euer, your fie : if)r, their ^fjr, your ©ein also stands for the indefinite possessive one's. 1. The possessives, when they agree with a noun, are de clined in the singular like the article ein, in the plural Uk any strong adjective ; thus : Singular Plural ■r^ : mein, my bu : bein, thy er : fein, his fie : it;r, her ©ie Masc. Fern. \ Neut. N. mein meine mein G. meineS meiner meineS D. meinem meiner meinem A. meinen meine mein N. euer eure euer G. eure§ eurer eureS D. eurem eurer eurem A. euren eure euer eure eurer euren eure 2. But when no noun follows (except sometimes in th predicate), the possessives, like !ein and the numeral ein take the ending er in the nominative singular masculine, am the ending eS in the nominative and accijsative singula THE POSSESSIVES 9! neuter ; e. g. fein SSater ift ^aufmann, meiner ift Slrgt, his fa ther is a merchant, mine is a physician. 126. Weak Forms. Any of the above mentioned pos sessives may be preceded by ber, and take, then, the reg ular inflection of a weak adjective ; e. g. feine (Sltei'ti ftnl reicf), bie nteinen [inb arm, his parents are rich, viine ar poor. 1. Each of the possessives forms, further, a derivativi stem in ig (unfer and euer losing their e before the suffix) which is used only after ber and has also the inflection of i weak adjective ; thus instead of meiner and bie meinen, in th* last two examples, one might say ber meinige and bie meini gen. Neither of the weak forms of the possessive can b- used with accompanying noun. a. Observe that the forms described in the last thre paragraphs correspond to the English mine, thine, hers, etc which take the place of a noun limited by a possessive ad jective. But mine, thine, etc. may be represented in th predicate by the uninflected mein, bein, etc. 2. Sa§ SDleine, bag 3)leinige, etc. (as substantives) refer t^ property ; bie ?!Jletnen, bie SReinigen, etc. to friends, relatives partisans, or the like ; e. g. er f)at ba§ ©eine (ba§ ©einige' berfc^toenbet, he has squandered his property,- ic^ grille bid unb bie ®einigen, I greet you and yours. 127. Possessive Compounds. Each of the possessiv( stems, amplified by the syllable et, enters into composi tion with the three prepositions l)aI6 (£)aI6er, f)aI6en), o? hehalf of, ttiegen, on account of, and urn . . . iBtllen, fo'. the sake of, giving the forms metnetluegen, on my account for aught I care, meinetf)aI6, on my account, um meinettoil len, for my sake, etc. 1. SKeinettoegen, on my account, beinett^alben, on your be half, etc. take the place of toegen meiner, on account of me 96 THE PRONOUN betner ^aI6en, on behalf of you, etc. On the origin of these forms see § 806. 2. Each of the possessives, in the genitive singular mas- culine, strong form (meineS, tf)re§, etc.), enters into compo- sition with gleic^en, from the adjective gleic^, like, giving the forms meineggleid^en, f/ie like of me, Qf^reggUic^en, the like of you, etc. These forms are invariable. 128. Congruence of the Possessive. Tlie possessive fein corresponds, in the singular number, to masculine and neuter nouns, if)r to feminines ; e. g. ber 9}aunt I)at feine Slcttter Oerloren, the tree has lost its leaves ; felbft bie greifjett l)at iljre ®efa[)ren, even freedom has its dangers. 1. But with neuter nouns whose natural gender is femi- nine the possessive is apt to be i^r ; e. g. iiai ^JJcibd^en Bat \i)XZ 5Rutter bertoren, the girl has lost her mother. 2. "With a neuter collective noun the possessive is regu- larly fein, tho English may require their; e. g. ba§ Solf 6c= ftanb auf feine Slec^te, the people insisted upon their rights. EXERCISE 25 Reading Lesson : Personal and Possessive Pronouns „^ft bieS ^fjr (Sigentum ?" fragte er nun, unb bamit (egte er einen Seutet bor mir^ auf ben 3;if(^. „®er Seutel ift c&a-- bingg mein," anttoortete ic^, „aber toie in aller SBelt fommt er in Sf)re§anbe?" „®a8 ift unfre ©ad^e," anttoortete er. „2lber ift e§^ benn tctrflic^ ber 3§"g«? Sefe^en ©ie \\n genau." 5Darauf na£)m i^ ben Seutel in bie §anb ; eg tear bod^ ' nic^t ttieiner, nur bem meinigen fel^r a^nlid;. ^e^t erJIcirte id^ i^nen meinen ^rrtum. Sie faf)en * fid^ berfd^mi^t in bie 3(ugen unb rebeten leife ein ^jaar SOSorte mit einanber. ©arauf fagte bcv altere ber beiben SJianner ju mir : „2Bd toaren ©ie benn geftern abenb, unb tcie biel ®elb fatten ©ie bei ftc^ ?" ^d^ nannte i^m ben Drt, etnen getoiffen ^onjertgarten, unb bie ©umme bon 75 SKar!.' „5Dag ftimmt genou," fagte je^t ber jUngere ju feinem THE POSSESSIVES 97 Slatneraben. ,Sun," fagte ber anbere ju mir : „^ft bie§ mh leid^t ber '^i)xiQi ?" 5Damit gog er einen anberen Seutel au§ ber 2;afcl^e. SieSmal tear e§ toirflic^ ber meinige ; and) ftimmte ber Qntjalt. Sie ®efc^ic£)te ^ mtt bem falfc^en Seutel tear nur eine ^riifung meiner 3tebUc^!eit. EXERCISE 25 a Remark. — Translate ' you ' by bu, ©ie or i^v, as you please, but take care that pronoun and possessive be congruous ; that is, do not, in the same sentence, associate bein with Sie, ^^x with bu, or the like. 1. I do it for your sake. 2. How goes it with you and yours? 3. Your German is much better than mine. 4. Our prices are much lower than his. 5. My house is not far from hers. 6. That is my affair, not yours. 7. His last work is the best. 8. Your new friend is an old acquaint- ance of mine. 9. We find our highest happiness in quiet daily work. 10. The girl is the picture of her mother. 11. My little garden is now my greatest delight. 12. I think your old room was better than your new (one). 13. They were friends their whole life long. 14. Here are tickets for you and your family. Vocabulary a^ntid^, adj. (dat.) similar. ber Somera'b, w. comrade. a'Kerbi'ngS, adv. to be sure. legen, v. lay ; pret. legte. fiefe^en, v. look at [be-see]. leife, adu. softly, in low tone, batni't, adv. therewith. bie SfJJorf, w. mark. borou'f, adv. there-upon. neniten, v. name ; pret. nartnte. bn§ ei'gentum, s.' property bie ^Priifung, w. trial, proving. [own-dom]. bie ffieblic^feit, w. honesty, eino'nber, pron. (indecl.) each ftimmen, v. tally, coincide. other, one another. bie ©uiiime, w. sum. erfWren, v. explain ; pret. erf lorle. ber[i^mi^t, adv. shrewdly, falfc^, adj. false, wrong. ba§ SBort, n. s.^" word.' genau', adj. exact, careful. jie^en, v. draw ; pret. jog ber 3n§alt,s.' contents [in-hold]. [tow]. Notes. — i ttor jnir Ottf ben Xi^(t) ; after legen, fe(§cn and other verbs of placing, auf takes the ace. on account of the motion implied. S5or 98 THE PRONOUN mil", dat. as answering the question whereabouts upon the table. — 2 notice Lhe gender; SBeutel is masc, but eS Is used without regar( lie gender of tlie predicate bet S^rtge, to denote identity. — ^cl 1 0nd) iitt^t nictncr, it was not mine after all. The predicate posses is apt to be declined when the noun to which it refers is not expres in the same sentence. — *fal)en fid) . . . tit btc Stiijieit, looked in e other's eyes ; fa[)cn, pret. of ff {)eii ; fid^, dat. in reciprocal sense, § 123 — ''SlJnrf, marks ; the singular form is always used after a nume: The mark is the German unit of currency = 10.25. — « Qiefl^tci^te « affair of. — 'SSorte means words in connected discourse; Sffibr words without connection. EXERCISE 26 Reading Lesson: Congkuence op Personal, Possessit AND Reflexive Pronouns Note. — The same matter is given below in three different forr (a) as it would appear il written, say, by a teacher to one or more puj who had just left scliool ; (6) as it would be written by a father to : son ; (c) as it would be written by a father to his two sons. (a) 3(^ fage ^finen aufvid^ttg, ©ie ^a6en eine ^eit fc^toercr ^t fung t)or fic^ ; barum Ijiiten ©ie fid^ bor^ falfd^en ©c^ritte Q^re eitern, ^^re 2ef)rer, ertoarten Diet bon ^Jjtren ; auf ^^n unb auf gfjrem ©liicfe ru^en i£;re §offnungen. 2fber ©te fcnn S^re 5pflic^t ; ic^ braucEte fie ^^nen m{i^t ju erilaren. 3Sergeub ©ie nid^t gijre 3eit ; berlaffen ©te fic^ fo Die! al§ moglid^ = a Sfjre eigne ^raft, auf 3£)ren eignen %U\^. 3Sor atten Sing' feien ©ie ' fi^ f elber treu. (b) Sc^ fage £iir aufnd^tig, Su ^aft eine Beit f^toever ^Prufur bor S)ir ; barum ^iite * 2)ic^ bor falf^en ©Written. 2)einc @ tern, Seine £ef)rer, ertoarten biel bon Sir ; auf Sir unb a\ Seinem ©liicfe ru^en itjre §offnungen. 3lber Su fennft Seii $flict;t ; id) brauc£)e fie Sir nid}t ju erHaren. 33ergeube ^ nid Seine geit ; berlaffe ' Sic^ fo biel al8 inoglid^ auf Seine eigi ^raft, auf Seinen eignen glei^. SSor alten Singen fei * S felber treu. THE POSSESSIVES 99 (c) ^d^ fage (Sud^ aufrid^ttg, ^i)x i)abt einc Beit fc^loerer ^prufung Dor @u(^ ; barum ()utet^ ®u(f) t)or faljc^en ©c^ritten. ©ure @I= tern, Sure Sefjrer, ertoarten biel Don dni) ; auf ©ud^ unb auf ©urcm ©liide ru^en tt)re ^offnungen. 2(ber ^f)r lennt gure ^flic^t ; ic^ fcrauc^e fie ®u(^ nic^t ju erflaren. SSergeubet* nic^t ©ure 3eit ; f wla^t "^ ®uc^ fo biel al§ tnoglid^ auf Sure eigne ^raft, auf ©uren etgnen ?^Iei^. SSor alien ®ingen feib ^ ©uif) felber treu. EXERCISE 26 a Kemakk. — "Write this exercise three times lor the three oases that ' you ' means (a) a near relative or an intimate friend ; (6) two intimate friends, and (c) one or more acquaintances. 1. Where are you? 2. How do you do?^ 3. "What have you in your hand ? 4. How goes it with you ? 5. I bring you' good news. 6. I know you and I rely upon you. 7. I need you and you need me. 8. Have you any ' money by you ? 9. Luckily for you he does not see you. 10. You are still young; you have yet the best part of life before you. VOCABULAKY ou'frii^tig, adj. sincere, frank ru^en, v. rest. [up-right]. ber ©cfiritt, s.^ step, baru'tn, adv. therefore. fcfimer, adj. heavy, hard, ber gleijs, s.' (no pi.) industry. treu, adj. true, faithful, bte §offnung, w. hope. toergeuben, v. waste, pten (fidi), v. be on one's guard Dertaffen (ficfi), v. rely (upon = [heed]. nuf, with ace). bie iJSflic^t, w. duty [plight]. Notes. — ^ ^itten ©ie fir^ for, be on your guard against (see Ex. 8, n. 10). _2fo Biel alS niofllit^ = mogtic^ft Oiel, as much as possible. — 'feteit e[(^e 1. The interrogative pronouns wcr, who, and tnai, what (for their inflection see § 143), are also used as relatives, = he who, whoever, that which, tvhafever. 137. The Relative Clause. In a relative clause the inflected verb comes last. The relative pronoun itself comes first (except when it is governed by a preposi- THE RELATIVES 107 tion) and agrees with its antecedent in gender and number; e. g. h)e^e_ber abutter, beren tinb unbonfbar ift, alas for the mother whose child is ungrateful ; er i[t ein ^nabe, toon bent id) nur ®uteg gef)ort ^abt, he is a hoy of whom I have heard only good reports. 1. The relative cannot be omitted, as it so often is in English; e.g. the man I mean is ber 9Jlann, ben id^ meine; the house I live in, ba§ §aug, in ireld^em (or tcorin) tc^ hJO^ne. 2. If the antecedent of a relative is a personal pronoun of the first or second person, such pronoun is usually repeaj;- ed after the relative, in which case the verb takes the per- son of the antecedent ; e. g. xi), ber td^ bein {Jreunb bin, I who am your friend ; bu, ber bu mi^ fennft, you who know me. But if the personal pronoun is not repeated the verb stands in the third person ; e. g. bu, ber mi^ !ennt, you who hnow me. 138. Use of ber and tuel^. Either relative may refer to a person or to a thing. SBeld), but not ber, may be used as an adjective in agreement with a noun; e. g. er ift etn Warm, ber (or tneldier) ftetg bie 9BaI)r^eit fprtd)t, tuetd^er (never ber) (Stgenfc^aft er fetit ®(iicE tierbanft, he is a man who always speahs the truth, to which trait he owes his success. 1. In the genitive the forms of ber are required, except in the adjectival use of h)e(c^ just explained ; elsewhere there is a free choice between ber and tt)el(^, subject only to considerations of style and euphony. 139. Substitutes for the Relative. For the dative or accusative of ber or roelc^, depending upon a preposition and not referring to a living object, it is usual to sub- stitute a compound of the preposition with the adverb tro, where (before vowels ttor), e. g. h\^, toer fie au^ fein mag, she is pretty at any rate, whoever she may he. 141. Use of m§ as Relative. The use of the neuter ■ma§ as indefinite relative = what, whatever, that ivhich, the thing which, etc. runs nearly parallel to that of the masculine-feminine toer ; e. g. \va§, \d) fel)e, (hag) lt)et§ i^, what I see, (that) I know; el ift falfcf), ttiol mon aucf) fa= gen mag, it is false, whatever they may say. a. So also when the antecedent is a sentence ; e. g. c3 gelang mir nic^t, toaS mic^ feJjr argerte, / did not succeed, which vexed me greatly. 1. This toag is often best translated hj so far as ; e.g. tOag mi(!^ betrifft, so far as concerns me. THE RELATIVES 109 2. SSa§ is very often used as relative after a neuter pro- noun or substantive adjective, and when so used it implies that the antecedent is taken in a general or indefinite sense. After a substantive adjective in the superlative degree iuaS is the regular relative ; e. g. ni^t aHeS, toag glanjt, tft ©olb, not all that glitters is gold; bag ift eg, toa§ mi(^ firgert, that is what vexes me ; e§ ift ba§ befte, h)a§ i^ tun !ann, it is the best I can do; bai ©ro^e, toag (better ba§) i(^ an il)m 6eh)un= bere, *Ae great qualities that I admire in him ; h)a§ ift ba§, bag (not tt)a§) ©ie in ber §anb ^c&tn'i what is that that you have in your hand ? 142. Rule of Order III : The Dependent2_0rder. In a dependent sentence the verb comes at the end ; e. g. rtiffen @te, 06 bee .gerr Softer ju §aufe ift ? do you knotv whether the doctor is at home ? erinnerrt ©ie fic|, too @ie geftevn JU biefer 3^^^ foarert ? (^0 yow remember where you were yesterday at this time ? a. The case in which ' the verb' is in a compound tense, and so consists of more than one word, will be provided for further on. 1. This rule covers all sentences introduced by a subor- dinating conjunction, a relative pronoun or particle, or an indirect interrogative. a. Some of the most common subordinating conjunc- tions are alS, as, when ; ba, as, since ; bamit, so that ; ba^, that; inbem, while; oh, whether ; iceil, because; h)enn, if; ioie, how, as; tro, where. For a fuller list see § 381. 2. Subordinate sentences of every kind are usually set off by a comma. EXERCISE 29 Heading Lksson : Relative Pronouns Sieber §crr SJliiHer ! 3^r freunblxd^er 33rtef, in bent ©ie nir fo biel ^"tereffanteg iiber bie ©c^ule erja^ten, unb ber nun 110 THE PRONOUN leibcr f($Dn jtoei SBo^en unbeanttoortet liegt/ tear mir l^od^ iDittlommen. ©§ freut mid^ fel^r, ba^ bie gutett g^reunbe, m benen ic^ lange 3«it fo gtiidlid^ le&te, nD(^ immer an mi^ benfct @§ gibt ein ©!pri(i)tt)Drt, lt)el(^e§ lautet : „2tuS ben 2tugen, au bem Sinn"; aber, tt»a§ mic^ betrifft, fo^ finbe ic^ f)ter unter lav ter gremben, ba^ xHg je^t er[t' meine atten jjreunbe ric^ti 2Ba8 Sie toon bem jungen 3^ri| 3JJofer f(^reiben, beffen ©Iwi d^e 3^"«n fo biel SJluJje maiden, ift mir'ganj begreiflid^. Ii« ^unge tear Don ^tnb auf ^ ein 3;augenic^t€, ber nur an bumm ©treic^e' bad^te." "^d) loei^, ba^ er ni^t reblic^ ift, unb tot !einen §^ara!ter ^at, bem ' ift nun nii^t ju ^elfen. StHe^, tea bev Se^rer fiir einen fDl(^en ©filler tut, ift berlorene SJlii^i f^iXx ben 3tat, ben ©ie mir in 33ejug auf meine ©tubien gebeti banfe id^ ^^nen fef)r. ®a ©ie mid^ fo lange !ennen, toiffen Si am bcften, tuoju ' i^ fa^ig bin, unb toeld^e ' jjel^ler id^ ju bcrmei ben l^abe. EXERCISE 29 a 1. He is a man who knows" everything. 2. The build ing that you see is a museum. 3. That is the lady who ha the pretty daughters. 4. I do not know " the book o which you speak. 5. There are " authors who write toi much and think too little. 6. That part of Dresden whicl lies on the left bank of the river is called the Old-Town 7. That is not the man I mean. 8. Here one finds all tha makes life interesting. 9. That is all I know ' of the affaii 10. There is^^ no poet whose life is more interesting 11. Whoever has money has friends. 12. I give you tli< best I have. 13. The work of which you speak is very ex pensive. 14. Do you know ^'' the book in which the sayinj is found ? '^ Vocabulary begreiflid), adj. oomprehen- ber SBejug, s.^ (pi. it) , referenct xible. regard, betreffen, t). concern; fietvifft, con- ber Sljaro'ttcr (pi. =tc're), chat cerns. acter. THE INTEEKOGATIVES 111 la, sub. conj. as, since. io§, sub. cmij. that. lumm, adj. stupid [dumb]. d^ig, adj. capable, fit, suited. )cr Seller, s. ^ mistake. teucn, V. rejoice; eg frcut mic^, I am glad. \VaiWi:),,adj. happy, autcn, V. purport, run. )ie SOJii^e, w. trouble, pains. )cr 'Slat, s. {no pi.) advice, eblid^, adj. honest, candid. ftlja^en, v. value, esteem. ber ©inn, s. ^ sense, mind. ba§ ©^ridjmott, s. ' proverb. ber ©ttcicf), s.^ prank, trick, stroke. bei aau'fleniiiitS, s.= (indecl.) good-for-nothing. u'nbeantttjottct, pple. unan- swered. Bertoien, pple. lost [forlorn]. bcrmeiben, v. avoid. hiitlfo mmcn, adj. -welcome. Notes.— 1 gicgt, has lain, has been lying (Ex. 7, n. 1). — ^ jj p„j|j tSt, I find. When a subordinate sentence has gone before, the princi- )al sentence must stand in the inverted order, and fo is often put )efore the principal verb to make the inversion easier. Such a fo hould not be translated. — " je$t Kj}, lit. now first; but lvalue now Irst = I just begin to value.— '^ Bon iiinl) ouf, from a child up; i. e. ram childhood.—^ Humme ©Ircitftf, mischief.—' iacftte, thought, was hinking; pret. of ben!en.— 'Dcm ill nid)t JU Jtlftn, he (i. e. such a Person) is not to be helped. It is necessary to use bem here because letfen governs the dat. One could not say wer nicfit rcblid) ift, ift ni(£)t u ^elfen. — ' tODjtl, tucl^c ; these are indirect interrogatives, and as uch require the dependent order. The direct form vrould be: SBoju in ti^ fi^ifl? aBetdje getter ^abe idj ju uermciben. — ' knows, know, oiffen. — ^''know, fennen. — ^^ there are, there is, ^^jtSt.— '^- is found, id) ftnbet. ; _ ' THE INTERROGATIVES 143. The Forms. The interrogative pronouns are t»er, uho, voas, what, meldj, which, what, and teas fiir (ein), ohat sort of (a), what. 1. The inflection of ttJcr and tt)a§, which do not yary for lumber, is as follows: N. tt)cr G. ttjcffen, tt)e§ D. went A. wen weffen, iiic§ tuas 112 THE PRONOUN a. The short form toe? is little used except in the cor I^ounds tueS^alB and meStoegen, whij. The missing dative i lt)a§ is supplied by the compounds of Iro (§ 144, 1). 2. SBelcI) is inflected like the relative toetc^, but is oft€ uninflected before ein or an adjective, especially in exclami tory phrases; e.g. icelc^ (ein) f clones Silb! what a preti ■picture! 3. In toag fiir ein the toaS does not vary, but ein is inflec ed (in the singular) like the article ein. 144. Use of met and Weld). SBer is used of persor only, toa6 of things only, and toelc^ of either persons c things. 2Ber and Voa^ are used without a noun, tceli either with or without ; e. g. hier ift jener Warm ? who i that man ? ft)el(f)e§ S3ucf) meinert @ie ? what (which) look a you mean ? 1. For the dative and accusative of tt>a§, dependent on preposition, it is usual to substitute a compoimd of tt)o ; e. j tooju ber 2arm ? whij the fuss ? woxan arbeiten £ie ? wh are you working at ? 145. Use of Wa^ fiir (ein). In this pronoun the fiir i without prepositional force, and ein takes the cas required by the syntax of the sentence. 2[8a§ may b separated by one or more w^ords from fiir ein; e. g. \m fiir ein SBaum ift ba^S, or xoai \\i "baS, fiir ein Saurn ? wha kind of a tree is that ? \va§ fiir einen Secret t)aben ©ie what kind of a teacher have you ? 1. In exclamatory phrases lua§ fiir (ein) is often bei translated by what; e. g. toag fiir Unfinn ! what nonsense EXERCISE 30 Colloquy : Interrogative Pronouns 1 2Ber ift ba§ auf bem Silbe an ber 2Banb ? 3)a§ ift SBiSmarcE. SBoju ^aben ©ie beun ^fire 3lugen? THE INTERROGATIVES _ 113 Sa, bie gro^e ^p^otograjj^ie ; toer toii^te ^ baS nid^t ! ^(^ meine ntc^t bie. SfJun, tceld)eg Silb meinen ©ie benn ? ^d^ meine bag fleine Sing, toelc^eS unter ber ip^otogra^^ie jangt. 2td^ fo ! gfjun, toofiir ^alten ©ie bag ? Sefe^en ©ie e§ genau. Sc§ fe^e, e§ ift eine g^eberjeic^nung. aSon toem ^aben ©ie fie ? ^ Son meinem greunbe Subloig. 9taten ©ie nun einmal, tcer 5ie beiben ^Perfonen barauf finb. ®ie§ ift offenbar Subtoig ; aber ii^ toei^ nid^t, itier ber anbere ft. SBa§ ©ie boc^ fagen ! ^ SRun, ber anbere bin ' id^ felb[t. ©ie ? aSer ba§ glauben fonnte ! * SBofjer f)aben ©ie benn ben bnberbaren StuSbrudE ? Unb toag fiir einen JQut tragen ©ie ? 5Dag ift nur ein ©^ja^ SubtoigS ; toer i^n !ennt, berfte^t bag >^ne 3Seitere§. 2 What sort of a picture is that ? "What picture are you talking about ? » The large photo- ;raph ? ^ Who would not know '' a photograph of Bismarck ? I aean the little picture below.' Oh, that's it. That is a pen-drawing. Guess from whom have it. I do not know — perhaps from your friend Ludwig. Right ; now guess whom the drawing represents. This here is certainly Ludwig himself, but who in all the ^orld ^ is the other ? So ^^ you do not know " him. Well, the other is I my- 3lf. But what an expression ! And what sort of a thing is lat you have on your head ? EXERCISE 30 a I. Who goes there ? 2. Who is she ? 3. Who are ley ? 4. What have you in your hand ? 5. Of whom are yi4 THE PRONOUN you speaking ? 6. Of what are you speaking ? 7. Who; do you mean ? 8. What new building is that that I 8( yonder ? 9. Do you know '^ at what time " the perfom ance begins? 10. In what does the difference consist 11. I do not know^^ in what the difference consist 12. What sort of a teacher have you? 13. Every or knows ^^ what sort of a man he is. 14. Which drama ( Schiller do you like best ? Vocabulary anber, adj. other. ber S?opf, s.= (pi. o), head, ber Slugbrucf, s.^ {pi. ii), expres- o^ne, prep, (ace.) without. sion. bie 5|5erfo'n, w. person. bo'tftetten, v. represent. bie ^^otogmp^ie', to. photograpi bie 5eber, lo. pen, feather. raten, v. guess, gfauben, v. be-lieve. ber ©pafe, s.^ (pi. a), jest. f)alten, v. hold, consider. tmgen, v. wear [drag, draw]. fiangert, v. hang; ^^fingt, hangs. tierftet)en, v. understand, ber §ut, s.' (pi. ii), hat. bie SBanb, s." (pi. a), wall, ftintien, v. can. bie 3eid)nung, w. dra-n-ing. Notes. — ^ ttier tniipc, who would know f pret. subj. of roiffen.- ^ toas) ®ie iotif fagcn ! you don't say so ! quite different from wai fagi @ie ? what do you say ? — ^iev aiiiiere bin id) felbft, t?ie other is I m\ self; for it is I Ger. says i(f| bin e8, etc. — * mer iaS glaitben fiiuitte as if any one could believe that I different from roer Mnnte bas gtauben who could believe that ? The former luer is really an indirect interroj ative, with something like I'd like to know understood. — * about, »oi at tlie beginning of the sentence. — ^the large photograph; repeat tl Bott. — ' Who would not know, >ner feiinte nic^t. Semite is pret. suli of tennen, as fbnntc is of f onnen. — ^ below, barunter. — ^ who in all tl world, Wer in aUev Selt. — i" so, alfo. — "know, tennen. — i^kno^ knows, ttiiffen. — i^at what time, um Wetc^e Si^xt. THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES 146. 9tfl. 2111, all, has regular adjective inflectioi but is sometimes left uninflected, especially before ber ( a possessive ; e. g. aHe guten J)inge, all good things ; aHi INDEFINITES — PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES 115 ifc^e 2Saffer, all fresh water ; all mein %IM, all my hajp- iness. 1. The form atle occurs after certaiu prepositions ; e. g. :o^ aHebem, in spite of all that. 2. The neuter aKeS, used alone, means everything. 147. 2tnber. Stnber, other, has regular adjective inflec- Lon. 1. The English another, = one more, is expressed not by ttber, but by no(^ ein; e. g. icf) triinfc^e nod^ ein 'f8\^tt,Iwant nother ticket (ein anbereS would mean a different one). 148. S3etbe. 93etbe, hoth, has regular adjective inflec- lon, and is apt to take the place of jftiet after a de- lined word ; e. g. bie 6etben ^artekn, the tivo parties ; teine beiben ©c£)toe[tern, my two sisters. 1. In general Betbe is used only in the plural, but the neu- sr singular beibeS occurs. Both . . . and is usually ex- ressed by fotrot)! . . . al§ ; e. g. both the Icing and the eople, fotool^I ber ^onig al§ bag ^oli. 149 ©in-. The use of ein, one, as pronoun has al- 3ady been referred to (§ 116, 1). 1. In the oblique cases ein takes the place of man, which I indeclinable ; e. g. eS gefdttt einem nic^t, it does not please ie. 150. @tnig-, etlie^-. These words both mean some and ave regular adjective inflection. The singular is little sed, being replaced by etwaS. Of the two words einig- 1 the one more commonly used. 151. ©thiai?. @tlt)aS, something, somewhat, some, is in- eclinable and is used either with or without a noun. ; is the ordinary equivalent of English some, any, before singular noun of any gender and in any case; e. g. IIQ THE PRONOUN ne£)men ©ie ctma§ 93rob, take some bread ; mit ettoa^ gurd = mit einiger gurdjt, loith some fear. 1. fo etloaS is equivalent to some (any) such thing. 152. ^rgcnb. This is an indeclinable word which i rarely used alone, but is placed before numerous word to give the sense of English some, any ; e. g. irgenb eine or irgenb jenianb, some one, any one; irgenb etoa^, any thing, something ; irgenblBO, anywhere, etc. 153. ^eb-, jcgltrf)-, iebermaitn. Seb- and jegttd^- meai each, every, and have full adjective inflection. Eithe may be preceded by etn. Sebermann, every one, can no be used with a noun and has no inflection except a gen itive in § ; e. g. jeber (ein jeber, jeber TOenfd), jebermann l)at feine guten @igen[cf)aften, every one has his good qual itics. 154. ^cmonb. Sentanb, some one, is never used with i noun and has no inflection except a genitive in §, rarel; a dative in em or an accusative in en. 155. Sein. H'etn is the negative of ein and is inflectei in the same way, except that it has a plural. It take the place of English no, none, not a, not any ; e. g. bi Oitteft urn ®elb, aOer id) ^afie feineS, you ask for money, hi I haven't any; ba§ t[t fetrt 2CpfeI6aum, that is not «i apple-tree. 156. 3Jlan, Wan is a wholly indefinite and indeclir able pronoun meaning one, they, people. Often it i best rendered by the passive voice or by a phrase witl there; e. g. man [agt, it is said; man flopft, there it knock. 1. The oblique cases of man are replaced by ein-. 157. WlaniS}. Wland), many, some, in the singula many a, may be inflected regularly (which is the rule i INDEFINITES — PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES 117 no adjective follows), or it may be uninflected ; e.g. mancf)er Tlann, many a man ; mand) guter Warm or man= c£)er gute Wann, many a good man. 158. Wtijt, me^ter-. aKef)r, more, is indeclinable; thus me£)r £id)t, more light ; nic£)t'3 met)r bation, no more of that. The comparative mef)rer- is used with full inflec- tion in the sense of several ; e. g. mit mel)reren greunben, with several friends. 159. Stt^t^. 9'?id)t§, nothing, is the negative to eth)a3 and is indeclinabl^. 160. Sitcmanb. 9?temanb, no one, is the negative to jemanb and has the same inflection. It can not be used with a noun. 161. SBtel. SSiel, much, in the plural many, is capable of full inflection, but is often left uninflected, especially in the singular when not preceded by bee or a posses- sive ; e. g. er f)at biel SSerftanb, he has much sense ; bo§ tft ju biel, tliat is too much ; ha^i ®{M bider SJJenjrfien, the happiness of many men ; er t)at bieleS eriebt, he has expe- rienced much. 162. 233a§, U)el(^, hicr. All of the interrogatives may be used as indefinites, having the meaning of some, something, some one, anything, any one, etc. In this sense they are apt to be accompanied by irgenb ; e. g. \6) toet^ toa§ SJeue^, / know something new ; nef)men ©ie noc^ tiWaS: 93rob (eintge Slirfc^en), take some more iread (some cherries) ; ic^ banfe, ic^ f)abe noc^ toelc^eS (tt)eIcE)e), thank you, I have some still. 163. SBenig. 3Benig, little, in the plural /«w, is capable of full inflection, but is often uninflected, especially in the singular ; e. g. icf) f)a6e tnentg ^offnung, / have little hope; mit ftjentg 93er[tanb, with little sense; er leiftet mit toentgem t)iel, he does much with little. 118 THE PRONOUN EXERCISE 31 Colloquy : Indefinite Pronouns 1 SBiinfd^en ©ie ettoaS, mein §err ? 3a, id) tounfd^e ein guteS S9u(§ aU 2Bei^na^t§gefc^enf fiir eine junge greunbin. §a6en ©ie fo ettoaS? ©elDi^ ; ba jinb, jum Seif^jiel, einige neue ^ 5iomane. ^tiit% SRabc^en lie[t gem cinen guten Stoman. §ier ift nun jebenfattS ^ toaS ^iibfi^eS ; aber eg ift tco^I ein toenig teuer, nid^t toa^x ? giid^t fo fe^r; eg foftet ad^t 3JJarf. S)a§ 33ud^ ift gerabe je^t in ber Mohi ; jebermann lieft eg unb lobt eg. ^a, aber mani^er fd^Ie(^te 3toman finbet ^eutjutage Sefer, bie i^n loben. 2Ber ift benn ber SSerfaffer ? 5)ag h)ei^ man nic^t. @g ift bag 3Berf irgenb eineg jungen ©cbriftfteCerg, tceld^er unter falfc^em Stamen fd^reibt. SBag fagt man Don ber fittli^en Slenbenj beg Sud^eg ? 3tad) aUtm, toag id^ ^ore, ift eg gefunb in jeber §inftd^t. Sliemanb fagt ettoag bagegen. Sd^ I)abe nod^ eine garage, ^ft eg bei allebem ' auc^ interef= fant ? 3SieIe gefunben Sitter finb langtoeilig. 9iun, biefer ift jebenf allg nic^tg tneniger alg * [angtoeiKg. ©ie finben nid^tg ^ntereffantereg in unfrem Saben. 2 Good morning, sir. Do you wish something in the way of ^ books ? Yes, if ° you have something right good.' What is there that is new ? Do you wish something light — some ' novel, for ex- ample ? Perhaps, only it must be ' interesting. Please show me some new novels. There you have several right before you.'" And there are more over yonder. Here now is something nice, but I presume it costs too much. INDEFINITES— PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES 119 That book is a little dear, to be sure, — on account of the many pictures in it. It costs ten marks. The price m^^ pretty high, isn't it? Is it known who the author is ? No, but he writes well,^'' whoever he may be.'* Every one praises the book. Well, in view of all that ^* you say, perhaps the price is " not too high, after all.^° Certainly not ; just ask " any one who understands such things. EXERCISE 31 a 1. All my money is lost. 2. All good friends are wel- come. 3. One of the two brothers is a physician ; the other is an author. 4. Some parts of the book are very interest- ing, others are intolerable. 5. I need some money ; I have none by me. 6. In a few days I am going to Leipzig. 7. Every one has his own taste in these matters. 8. No one is a better friend of the poor. 9. Does any one know how much the thing costs ? 10. I need some old newspa- pers; have you any? 11. It costs little money, but much trouble. 12. Many a poor man is happier than his rich neighbor. 13. One finds in the book little (that is) new, yet much (that is) interesting. 14. Every day" I visit some" museum or picture-gallery. Vocabulary ba§ aSeifpiel, s.= example. bet Sefer, «.' reader. bviibeii, adi-. over yonder. Io6en, v. praise [love]. bie grnge, w. question. bie 9)Jobe, w. fashion, mode. gegen, prep, (ace.) against. ber SRoma'n, s.' novel, romance.. gerabe, adv. exactly, just. ftttliifi, adj. moral. bag @efcf)enf, s.» present. bie Senbe'nj, w. tendency. bie §inftc£|t, w. respect. bet Setfaffer, s.^ author. loften, V. cost. m.nn, svb. conj. if, when. bet Saben, s.' (pi. a), store. , jeigen, v. show [teach]. Ieid)t, adj. light, easy. 120 THE VERB Notes. — i|ieue ; one might say iieiten instead (§ 288, 3, a). — ^jj, beitfaUS, at any rate; an adv. formed from ouf jeben gatt, in any case. — '6et oUcbem, with all that, withal. — * ittrfjtS memger aiS, anything but. — ^ in the way of, in with dat. — ^if, trenn, which requires the dependent order. —' something right good, etmaS xedjt @ute«. — 9 some, ivgenb einen.— 'only it must be, nur mug cr . . .fein.— 1° right before you, gevobc Bor fic^. — i* is, ift bod), the boc^ serving to emphasize the verb. — ^^ well, gut, not mo|(. — " whoever he may be, Wet er oud) fein mag. — " in view of all that, nad) atlem, maS. — i^ per- haps the price is, ift ber ^teiS oieUeii^t. — ^^ after all, am Enbe, follow- ing Bielleid)t. — " just ask any one, fragcn @te nur trgenb jemanb.— 18 every day, ace. — i' some, irgenb ein, to be repeated as the nouns differ in gender. ' THE VERB 164. Voice. The active voice represents the subject as acting, the passive as acted upon ; i. e. the object of the active verb becomes the subject of the passive. 1. Only ' transitive' verbs, i. e. those which govern the accusative, can be used in the passive with a definite sub- ject, but intransitive verbs admit of an impersonal passive. 165. Mode. Of the four modes the indicative and imperative correspond closely to the English indicative and imperative. The subjunctive is used to express doubt or uncertainty (especially in indirect questions and statements), or with an imperative sense translatable by let, or with a potential sense translatable by would or .should. The conditional is always translatable by would or should. 166. The Infinitive. The infinitive is not a mode of the verb, but rather a verbal noun. It is used both with and without ju, and corresponds partly to the Eng- lish infinitive with and without to, and partly to the verbal in ing. 167. The Participle. The present participle ends in enb and corresponds to the English present participle in THE VERB 12f ing. The perfect participle ends always in t or in it, and is further characterized by the prefix ge. 1. But the prefix ge is omitted with verbs in teren, with inseparable compounds, and in some other cases to be noted further on. 168. Tense. The present and preterit, as consisting of one word, are called 'simple tenses "' ; the perfect, pluperfect, future and future perfect are formed by means of auxiliaries, and are called ' compound tenses.' 1. The auxiliary of the perfect and pluperfect, which is combined with the perfect participle, is either l^aben, have, or fein, he. All transitive verbs, and many that are intran- sitive, are conjugated with f)aben. Intransitive verbs de- noting motion, and a few that do not denote motion, are conjugated with fein. See § 323. 2. The auxiliary of the futui-e and future perfect, which combines with the infinitive, is tuerben, become. 3. The conditional mode has but two tenses, a present and a perfect, the auxiliary being the preterit subjunctive of loerben, used in combination with the infinitive. 4. The imperative has but one tense, the present. 169. Person and Number. Person and number are distinguished by endings which are applied to the ' stem ' of the verb, sometimes with and sometimes without a ■'connecting vowel' e; e. g. bu mac^=ft, thou mahest, but bu ftnb=e=[t, thou Jindcst. 1. The stem of a verb is obtained by dropping the final en (or simply the final n if the verb does not end in en) of the present infinitive. In some verbs the stem undergoes an internal vowel change in the preterit and perfect parti- ciple. 170. Principal Parts. The ' principal parts ' of a verb, so called because when they are known all the 122 THE VEEB other forms can be determined from them, are (1) the present infinitive, (2) the preterit indicative first person singular, (3) the perfect participle ; thus madjen, mad^k, gemadjt ; ftnben, fanb, gefunben. CONJUGATION 171. The Auxiliaries of Tense. As the three verbs ^aben, fein and toerben are needed in the conjugation of all other verbs whatsoever, their inflection is given first. As auxiliaries, they are used only in the simple tenses, but as independent verbs they have complete inflec- tion. a. To assist the beginner translations are given with the paradigms below, but it should be understood that they will often prove inapplicable. The translation must be varied to suit the connection. Thus bil bijt may be 'thou art,' or 'you are,' or 'thou hast,' or 'you have.' In case of the subjunctive, particularly, it is quite impossible to give any one distinctive translation that will not be wrong more of- ten than right. The common use of ' may ' and ' might ' is quite misleading. As this is so, and as it very often happens that the translation of the subjunctive does not differ from that of the corresponding indicative, it has seemed best to let one and the same translation stand for both. 1. The conjugation of I)aben — principal parts f)a6en, ^atlt, Qtffobi — is as follows : PRES. IND. PRES. STJBJ, t^ i)aht I have ■ ic^ '^abc bu ^oft thou hast bu \)abt\i er t)at he has cr ^alz wir ^obcn ive have iptr !^o6cn if)x ^abt you have \^i t)abct fie ^abtn they have lie %abm CONJUGATION 123 PEET. IND. PEET. SUBJ. id) Ijatte I had ic^ ^atte Du l^atteft thou hadst bu ^atteft er ^atte he had er ^dtte toir Ijatten we had toir fatten i^r ^attet you had i^r ^attet fte fatten they had fie tjatten PERFECT IND. PERFECT SUBJ. \^ l^abe gefiabt I have had id^ fjabe ge^bt bu ijaft ge^abt thou hast had bu ^abeft gel)abt er ^at ge^abt he has had er ^aht ge^abt toir ^aben gefiabt vie have had toir ^aben gef^abt i^r ^abt gefiabt you have had ifjr fiabet gefjabt fie l^aben gefjabt they have had fie ^aben ge£)abt PLUPElir. IND. PLUPEEF. SUBJ. ic^ Ijatte ge^abt I had had \il l^dtte ge^abt bu f)atteft ge^abt thou hadst had bu l^atteft gel^abt er l^atte ge^abt he had had er E)atte getjabt toir Iiatten ge^abt we had had toir fatten geljabt il^r Ijattet gef)abt '• you had had i^r Iiottet ge^abt fie l^atten gefiabt they had had fie flatten gel^abt EUTUEE IND. FUTUEB SUBJ. id^ toerbe ^aben I shall have id^ toerbe ^aben DU toirft {)aben thou wilt have bu toerbeft ^aben :r toirb l^aben he will have er toerbe l^aben rir toerben l^aben we shall have toir toerben fjaben ^r toerbet ^aben you ivill have i^r toerbet ^aben ie toerben ^aben they tvill have fie toerben ^ahtn UT. PEEF. IND. FUT. PEEF. SUBJ. c^ toerbe I shall id^ toerbe CO m toirft CO thou wilt p^ bu toerbeft r toirb he will 1 er toerbe oir toerben '-o^ we shall ^^' toir toerben Ejr toerbet you will 1. il^r toerbet 33 ie toerben ^ they will fie toerben , 124 THE VERB PRESENT CONDITIOXAL ic^ ttjiirbe f)aben I should have bu miirbeft ^aben er tciirbe t)aben toir iDiirben ^aben i^r miirbet ^abcn fie toiirben fjaben thou wouldst ha he would have ive should have you would hove they would have ve PERFECT CONDITIONAL xi) iDiirbc ' I should bu toiirbeft er tciirbe a thou u-ouldst he %vould a TO toir tciirben u-e should >• i^r toiirbet 2 you would i. fie VDiirben they would ^ IMPERATIVE baben ioir. let lu ; ha l^abe (bu), have thou l^abe er, let him have PRESENT INFINITIVE (ju) l)aben, {to) have PERFECT INFINITIVE gel^abt ju {)aben, to have had f)abt (it)r), have (you) Ijaben fie, let them have PRESENT PARTICIPLE fjabenb, having PERFECT PARTICIPLE ge£)abt, had 2. The conjugation of fein — principal parts fein, tear, getoefen — is as follows : PRES. IND. ) PRES. SUBJ. ic^ bin I am ic^ fei bu bift thou art bu fei(e)ft er ift he is er fei tt»ir finb we are loir feien i^r feib you are i^r feiet fie finb they are fie feien CONJUGATION 125 PEET. ryD. PRET. SUBJ. td^ tear I was id^ tocire bu iDorft tJiou wert bu toareft er tear he was er iDcire toir toaren we were toir toaren i^x tt)ar(e)t you were it)r toaret fie tuaren they were fie toaren PERFECT INDIC. PERFECT SUBJ. id) bin geluefen I have been i(^ fei getoefen bu 6ift getoefen thou hast been bu fei(e)ft getoefen er ift gelrefen he has been er fei getoefen tcir finb geioefen we have been toir feien getoefen if)r feib getoefen you have been i^r feiet getoefen fie finb geh)efen they have been fie feien getoefen PLUPEEF. IND. PLUPEEF. SUBJ. i^ 'max getttefen I had been id^ tocire getoefen . bu tcarft geluefen thoxi hadst been bu tooreft getoefen er mar gehjefen he had been er toare getoefen h)ir tnaren getcefen lue had been toir toaren getoefen i^r.toar(e)tgeh)efen you had been it)r toaret getoefen fie toaren getoefen they had been fie toaren getoefen rUTUEE IXDIC. FUTURE SUBJ. i^ toerbe feirt I shall be id^ toerbe fein bu toirft fein thou ivilt be bu toerbeft fein er toirb fein he will be er toerbe fein toir tverben fein we shall be toir toerben fein t^r toerbet fein you will be i^r toerbet fein fie tcerben fein they will be fie toerben fein PUT. PERF. IXD. PUT. PEEF. SUBJ. i(^ toerbe I shall ic^ toerbe bu toirft CO <* 5- thou luilt bu toerbeft CO 3- er tcirb he will « (» er toerbe h)ir toerben ■ S we shall toir toerben S i^r toerbet f you will ex i^r toerbet fie toerben they will fie toerben 126 THE VERB PRESENT CONDITIONAL \6) iDiirbe fein I should be bu tBiirbeft fein thou wouldst be er triirbe fein he would be toir tcitrben fein we should be iijx tolirbet fein you would be fie iciirben fein they would be ii) toUrbe bu toiirbeft er toUrbe Icir toiirben \i)x tciirbet fie hJiirben PEEEECT CONDITIONAL / should i thou wouldst S, he would we should you would they would IMPEEATIVE fei (bu), be {thou) fei er, let him be PRESENT INFINITIVE (ju) fein, (to) be PERFECT INFINITIVE getoefen ju fein, to have been feien trir, let us be feib (i^r), be {you) feien fie, let them be PRESENT PARTICIPLE feienb, being PERFECT PARTICIPLE getoefen, been 3. The conjugation of toerben — principal parts toerben tourbe or toarb, getoorben — is as follows : PRES. IND. id^ toerbe bu toirft er toirb toir toerben i^r toerbet fie toerben / become thou beoomest he becomes we become you. become they become PRES. SUBJ. id) toerbe bu toerbeft er toerbe toir toerben t^r toerbet fte toerben CONJUGATION 127 PEETEEIT INDIC. PEETEEIT STJBJ. ic^ tBurbe or tnarb I became td^ toiirbe iu tuurbeft or ttiarbft thou becamest bu toiirbeft er tDurbe or marb lie became er toiirbe h)tr iDurben we became toir toiirben x\)t Irurbet you became i^r toiirbet fte njurben they became fie toiirben PEEFECT INDIC. PEEFECT SUBJ. i^ bin getoorben I have becom,e id^ fei getoorben bu 6ift gelDorben thou hast become bu fei(e)ft getoorben er ift gehjorben he has become er fei getoorben njtr |tnb getcorben we have become toir feien getoorben i^r feib getoorben you have become i^r feiet getoorben fie jtnb getoorben they have become fie feien getoorben PLUPEEFECT IND. PLUPEEF. SUBJ. ic^ tear getoorben I had become x&j toare getoorben bu toarft getoorben thou hadst become bu toareft getoorben er toax gehJorben he had becom,e er toare getoorben tBtr toaren getoorben we had become toir toaren getoorben t^rttiar(e)tgett)orben you had becom,e i^r todret getoorben jte toaren geirorben they had become fie toaren getoorben FUTUEE IND. FUTUEE SUBJ. i^ tcerbe toerben I shall become i(| toerbe toerben bu iuirft toerben thoii wilt become bu toerbeft toerben er hjirb toerben he will becoTne er toerbe toerben Wit toerben toerben we shall become toir toerben toerben i^r toerbet toerben you will become i^r toerbet toerben fte toerben toerben they will become fie toerben toerben FUT. PEEF. IND. FUT. PEEF. SUBJ. i^ toerbe I shall id^ toerbe bu toirft CO 3 thou wilt bu toerbeft t er toirb o . 3- he will er toerbe o . or toir toerben 3 we shall i toir toerben i^r toerbet ¥ you will i i^r toerbet "fc fie toerben :i they will fie toerben ^ 128 THE VERB PRESENT CONDITIONAL id^ toiirbe toerben bu tDiirbeft toerben er irilrbe tcerben hjir iDiirben toerben if)r toiirbet toerben yie triirben toerben ic^ toiirbe bu ttjurbeft er toiirbe toir toiirben \i)x toiirbet fie toiirben a- I should become thou wouldst become he ivould become ive should become you would become they would become PEEPECT CONDITIONAL I should thou wouldst he would we should you would they would IMPEKATIVE toerben toir, let us become toerbet (if)r), become (you) toerben fie, let them become PRESENT PARTICIPLE toerbenb, becoviing PERFECT PARTICIPLE getoorben, become Notice partic- toerbe (bu), become (thou) toerbe er, let him becom,e PRESENT INFINITIVE (ju) toerben, (to) become PERFECT INFINITIVE getoorben ju fein, to have become 172. Remarks on the above Paradigms. ularly the difference between corresponding indicative and subjunctive forms, such as I)aft - I)abeft, I)at - t}abe, ift- fei, toirb - toerbe. The following examples will show how the subjunctive is used and how the translation of it must vary : ebe( fci ber SDJenfd), let man be noble ; cc! fei toaljr ober falfcl), he it true or false ; id) fragte if)rt, 06 er franf fei, / ashed Mm if he was (loere) sick. 1. The third person plural, with fie written Sie, is used as a second person in polite address. See § 301. 2. The preterit subjunctive is equivalent in meaning to the present conditional, and the pluperfect subjunctive to CONJUGATION 129 the perfect conditional ; thus e§ toare fonberbar, it would be strange, is the same as e§ toiirbe fonberbar fein, and c§ toare fonberbar getcefen, it would have been strange, is the same as e§ toiirbe fonberbar getoefen fein. 3. The third person singular and first person plural of the imperative are supplied from the subjunctive ; they re- quire the subject to be expressed, toir always after the verb, er either before or after. The subjects bu and i^r are usu- ally omitted. The third person plural of the imperative (also supplied from the subjunctive) is little used, except as a second person, in polite address, ©te is always expressed and always follows the verb ; e. g. ^aben ©ie ©ebulb, have patience. 4. In the preterit indicative of toerben the forms with u are those ordinarily used, but those with a are very com- mon in books. 173. Rule of Order IV : Compound Tenses. In an inde- pendent sentence the uninflected part of a compound tense, i. e. the infinitive or participle, comes last ; in a dependent sentence the inflected auxiliary comes last and is imme- diately preceded by the uninflected part. Thus we have : a. In the normal order : i^ )^a.'bt i^n fett geftern nic^t gefe= l^en, / have not seen him since yesterday ; (Sie toerben mic^ l(>eute abenb ju §aufe finben, you will find me at home this evening ; e§ hJiirbe tnir gro^e g^reube gemad^t f)aben, it would have given me great pleasure. b. In the inverted order : feit geftern l^abe \&i i^n nid^t ge= fe^en ; l^eute abenb toerben ©ie mid^ ju §aufe finben ; mir toiirbe e§ gro^e g^reube gemad^t fjaben. c. In the dependent order : i^ toei^ getoi^, ba^ id; i^n feit geftern nic^t gefefjen l^abe, / know for certain that I have not seen him since yesterday ; e§ ift toa^rfd^einlid^, ba| Sie mid^ ^eute abenb ju §aufe finben toerben, it is probable that you will find me at 'home this evening ; id^ tjerfi($ere ©ie, ba^ e§ mir 3ro^e greube gemad^t Ijaben toiirbe, I assure you that it would have given me great pleasure. [30 THE VERB EXERCISE 32 Reading Lesson : Fokms of ^o6en, fein and wcrbcit. 3JJeine liebe Sd^toefter ! 2Bo bift bu benn eigentlid^ ? * © toerben morgen bierjetjn SEage fein, ba^ id) feine 3eile iJon ®i ober t)on ber 3Ilutter get^abt ^abe.^ aSieEeic^t feib ^f^r auf be: atugftellung getoefen, aber in bem g^aEe toiirbet ^fjr boc| 3"t ge ^abt baben, ein (soar SBorte an mic^ ju fd^reiben. 2Benn Si nur ni(f)t fran! getcefen bift ! ^(^ fage mir jtoar bfter§^ : Se ru^ig, l^abe ®ebulb ; aber bie ^dt toirb mir am @nbe boc^ gai ju lang.* ^^ toiirbe atterbingg gefa^ter fein, ^atteft 3)u ber UnfaH nid^t geJ^abt,* benn id) fann bie SeforgniS ' ni^t M iret: ben, ba^ berf elbe ' ijietteic^t fc^Iimmer getoef en ift, al§ $5^1 ati: fangg' ju glauben geneigt toart." Sitte, anttoorte re^t Bali auf biefcn Srief, fei eg nur einige 3«il«n, bann tuerbe id^ toiebei frol^ fein. ©ett einem SJlonat bin id^ nid^t fo flci^ig getoefen, toie frii^er, ioi^i)aib meine ©efunbJjeit bebeutenb beffer getoorben ift. gc^ bitte 3)id^, bem SSater ju f agen, ba^ eS mir lieb ^^ tuare, toenn ii^ fur nac^ften SKonat einen lleinen 3"f^"l 1" Slafc^engelb t/atte. ©g h)irb namlid^ balb bie ^t\t ber grojien SlJJeffe fein, unb e§ toare bod^" unangene^m, toenn ic^ mic^ babei ju fe^r einjufc^rftnten" l^atte. ©rrtarte bieSmal feinen langen Srief Don mir. "^d) ^aBe fd^on mel^rere Stunben bie jjeber in ber §anb gel^abt unb bin be? ©d^reibenS" miibe getoorben. EXERCISE 32 a 1. I have been very sick. 2. It would be a pity if he were " not at home. 3. On the 11th of February I shall be seventeen years old. 4. Many think they would be'' happy if they only had " money. 5. He had always been my friend. 6. I had always had a friend in '" him. 7. It was late, the air had become very cold, and we still had a long way before us. 8. Let him only have patience and everything will turn out ^" well in the '° end. 9. My Ger- man would be better perhaps if I had had a better teacher. 10. He would have become famous if he had only beer CONJUGATION 131 more industrious. 11. It wodd be possible if I had more time. 12. Next week =" I shall be at home every evening.^" 13. How much money have I had ? 14. Do you know "* how much money I have had this month ? ^ VOCABULART Die SluSfteHung, w. exposition. geneigt, jspZe. adj. inclined. Bebeutenb, pple. adj. significant ; Io§, adj. rid of, free from, loose. as adv. notably. bie SKeffe, w. fair, mass. bie SBeforgniS, s.= fear, solicitude. mitbe, adj. tired. ei'iifc^rS'ttfett, v. limit. ofterg, adv. often, oft. flei|ig, adj. industrious. |cE|limtn, adj. bad [slim]. gar, adv. quite, altogether. ber gufdjufe, s.» {pi. ii), addition, bie ®ebulb {no pi.) patience. increase. ^t'ia^pple. adj. composed, calm. jwar, adv. to be sure, forsooth. Notes. —1 etgetltltc^, pray tell, Pd like to k-now. — " ia^ x(tl . . . ge^abt ^o6e, that I have not had, i. e. since I have had. — s jifterS ; from ofter, comparative of oft, but without comparative meaning (see Ex. 20, n. 1). — * ttjirb , , . ju Inng, is really (bod)) becoming at last quite too long. — ^ Ijdtteft ®tt . . . ntl^t fle^Jit, if you had not had ; the pret. and plup. subj. are used, with or without toenn, to denote a con- dition wliioh is contrary to fact. When luentl is omitted the condi- tional idea is expressed, as in English, by the inverted order ; pttefi ®u nic^t ge^abt being = luenn Su iiici)t gel^afit t|otteft. — « SBeforgmS, ace. depending upon to8 ; fonn nicE)t lo8 toerben = can not get rid of; lann being pres. ind. 1. pers. sing, of lonnen. — ' berfelie, it, i. e. the accident (§ 134, 1). — « anfangS, at first. — ^ niort ; dependent order after al8 = than. — i" Hcb, agreeable. — i^bo^, surely. — ^^ cinjufd^t;ott= leit, to limit. Observe that the gu of the infinitive comes between the parts of the verb. Such verbs, called separable compounds, will be explained further on. — is j,(g @(^reitienS tniibe, tired of writing. Notice that the gen. precedes the adj. on which it depends. — i* were, lufire ; see n. 5 above and § 359, 1, a. — '^^ think they would be, ben!en, fte ttiiirbcn . . , fetn, or, benten, bag fie . . . fetn miitbcn ; baj? can be omitted, just as ' that ' may be in EngUsh, and in such case the order of the dependent clause is normal. — i* had, fatten ; see n. 5 above. — 1' in, an with dat. — i^ tum out well, gut tocrbcn. — i' in the, am. — 2" ace. of time. — ^i know, Wiffen. 174. Weak and Strong Verbs. Verbs are divided in- to two great classes, called Weak and Strong. A weak 132 THE VERB verb forms its preterit first person singular by adding or ete to the stem, as mac£)=en, macf)te, reb=en, reb=ete. strong verb forms its preterit by means of an interi vowel-change, called 'ablaut,' as fommen, fam. 1. The perfect particij^le of a weak verb always ends ii or it, as getnac^t, gerebet; that of a strong verb ends in ( as gefommen. a. Verbs in ie'ren, which are always weak, do not ta the prefix ge in the perfect participle ; thus from [tubie'r« ftubiert', not geftubiert. The Weak Conjugatiox 175. Examples: Io6ert, to praise, conjugated with f] ben ; folgen, to follow, conjugated with fetit. 1. Conjugation of (oben. Principal parts, Io6en, [o6te, gelol PEES. IND. PEES. SUB J. id^ lobe I praise id^ lobe bu tobft thou praisesf bu lobeft er lobt he praises er lobe Icir loben ive praise loir loben i^r lobt you praise i^r lobet fie loben they praise fie loben PRET. IXD. PEET. SUBJ. ic^ lobte I praised td^ lobte bu lobteft thou praisedst bu lobteft er lobte he praised er lobte tnir lobten we praised loir lobten if)r lobtet you praised ifir lobtet fie lobten they praised fie lobten PEEPECT IND. PEEFECT. SUBJ. ic^ ftabe gelobt I have praised id^ babe gelobt bu ^aft gclobt thou hast praised bu ^abeft gelobt er i)at gelobt he has praised er l;abe gelobt h)ir fjaben gelobt we have praised wix l^aben gelobt \i)x ^aht gelobt you have 2' raised i^r f)abet gelobt fie ^aben gelobt they have ^3 raised fie ^aben gelobt CONJUGATION 133 PLUPBEF. IND. tc^ i)atti gelobt bit I)atte[t geIo6t er l^atte geloBt tt)ir fatten getoBt il^r ^attct gelobt fie fatten getobt PUTUEE IND. ic^ toerbe loben bu rtirft loben er toirb loben h)ir toerben loben \i)x iBerbet (oben fie toerben loben PUT. PEEP. IND. i^ tnerbe bu totrft er toirb toir toerben i^r toerbet fie toerben I had praised thou hadst praised he had praised we had praised you had praised they had praised I shall praise thou wilt praise he will praise we shall praise you will praise they will praise I shall 0, thou wilt Z he will f we shall » you will they will PRESENT CONDITIONAL ic^ toiirbe loben bu toiirbeft loben er toiirbe loben toir Itiiirben loben i^r toiirbet loben fie toiirben loben PEEFECT CONDITIONAL PLUPEEF. SUBJ. id^ l^atte gelobt bu l^citteft gelobt er ^atte gelobt toir fatten gelobt il)r l^attet gelobt fie fatten gelobt PUTU.ee SUBJ. \6^ )»erbe loben bu toerbeft loben er Irerbe loben toir toerben loben i^r toerbet loben fie toerben loben PUT. PEEP. SUBJ tc§ toerbe bu toerbeft er ttjerbe toir toerben i^r toerbet fie toerben «3^ I should praise thou wouldst praise he would praise we should praise you would praise they would praise ic^ toiirbe bu triirbeft er toiirbe toir tBiirben i^r toiirbet fie ttturben I should thou wouldst he would we should you would they would a toir toerben fatten i^r toerbet fatten fie toerben fatten FUT. PERF. SUBJ id^ toerbe bu toerbeft er toerbe toir toerben i^r toerbet fie toerben PRESENT CONDITIONAL id) toiirbe fatten bu tourbeft fatten er toiirbe fatten toir toilrben fatten i^r toiirbet fatten fie toilrben fatten I should fall thou wouldst fall he would fall we should fall you would fall they would fall PERFECT CONDITIONAL id^ toiirbe bu toilrbeft er toiirbe toir toilrben il^r toiirbet fie toilrben as fatte (bu), fall {thou) ■ fatte er, let hiTn fall PRESENT INFINITJVE (ju) fatten, {to) fall PERFECT INFINITIVE / should thou wouldst he would ^ we should 2. you would they would IMPERATIVE fatten toir, let us fall \a.\itt (if)r), fall {you) fatten fie, let them fall PRESENT PARTICIPLE fattenb, falling PERFECT PARTICIPLE gefatten ju fein, to have fallen gefatten, fallen 146 THE VERB 185. Irregular Strong Verbs. The three verbs geljen, go, fte^en, stand, and tun, do, are irregular in that they form their preterit and perfect participle from a stem different from that of the present. They are also with- out vowel-change in the present. The principal parts are gel)en, gijig, gegangen; fte£)en, ftanb, geftanben; tun, tat, getan. The simple tenses of the indicative are inflected as follows : Present Preterit id^ gel^e fte^e tue gins ftanb tat bu ge^ft fte^ft tuft gingft ftanbft tatft er gef)t ftefjt tut ging ftanb tat tt)ir gef^en ftefjen tun gtngen ftanben taten i^r gef)t ftel^t tut gingt ftanbet tatct fie geJten fte^en tun gingen ftanben taten 1. The other forms are regular, gel^en being conjugated with fein, fte^en and tun with ^aben. 186. Verbs of Mixed Inflection. A number of verbs which were once strong have passed over, wholly or in part, to the weak conjugation ; e. g. rad)en, rod), geroc^en, to avenge, is now usually conjugated rdd)en, rad^te, ge> rad)t. 1. Thus strong and weak forms from the same verb may exist side by side. "When this is the case they are some- times associated with difference of meaning ; e. g. the prin- cipal parts of f(f)affen in the sense of create are fdjaffen, fc^uf, gefd}affen ; but in the sense of do, be busy, f^affen, fd^afftc, gefc^iafft. 187. Rule of Order V : Dependent Infinitives. A de- pendent infinitive, with or without ju, comes last if the verb is in a simple tense, otherwise next to the last; e. g. ic^ I}a6e tiid)t§ niit ber Sadjc 5U tun, / /( ave nothing to do with the affair; but id) Ijabi. nic^tg mit ber ©ai^e }U tun ge()abt, / hare had nothing to do xvith the affair. CONJUGATION 147 1. An infinitive dependent upon a verb which itself stands in the dependent order generally conies just before the verb if unmodified, but after it if modified by an object or an adverb ; e. g. obluoljl id^ tJjn ju antttiorten gebeten i^atti, tho I had asked him to answer ; but oblBO^I ic^ ifjn gebeten ^atte, meipe ^rage ju beanthjorten, tho I had asked him to answer my question. EXERCISE 34 Reading Lesson : Strong Verbs 3Jletn lieber 3^reunb ! (gnbli^ f)aft Su 3)ein langeS ©^h)et= gen gebroc^en ; Sein 33rief Dom 12. biefe§ 9)tonat§ ift mir foe^ ben ju §anben gefommen. %vx bie 9Jac^n(^ten, bie Su mir au§ ber §eimat gibft, banfe ic| Sir f^erjlicf), obtoo^l anbere j^reunbe mir jum SCeiP f^on iiber biefelben ®inge gefdjrieben flatten. 3c^ fd^liefee ^ au§ ©einem aSriefe, ba§ eg ®tr gut get)t, unb ba^ S)u leine ®efal)r laufft/ an^ ber Sc^tBinbju^t ju fterben. 3)ie Sefc^reibung Seiner JReife nad^ 6f)icago tear mir ^o^ft interef= jant. SeSaS ®u mijt aihi gefefjen ^aft ! Unb in tote lurjer 3eit ! ®enn e§ fc^eint, ba^ 2)u nur brei ober bier Stage bort ge= biteben bift. 9lun, xij ijOiU aud^ Jurjlid^ eine Ikine 3fietfe gemad^t, — eine {Ju^toanberung * im ^arjgebirge. SSieEeid^t toirft 5Du gem babon l^oren. gd^ ^atte biel bon ben ©^on^eiten biefer ©egenb geF^ort unb gelefen, unb tear natiirlid^ re(^t neugierig barauf° getoorben. aSor ettoa jtoei SfBoc^en j^ra^ tc^ eineS STageS ' bariiber mit ei= nem Sefannten, ber meine gfjeugierbe ju teilen fd^ien, unb toir trafen bie SSerabrebung, ben beru^mten Srodfen * sufammen" in 2lugen[d^etn ju nel^men.' EXERCISE 34 a 1. She speaks, reads, and writes German very well. 2. The picture hangs too high. 3. He does not keep " his word. 4. My physician advises a long walk every day,^^ but that" takes too much time. 5. What would you give for it ? 6. I asked i' him to remain. 7. How long did 148 THE VERB you remain ? 8. 1 found him as " he was lying by the way, helped him ^^ upon ^^ his feet and gave him ^* some money. 9 I came home late,^' sat a while by the stove, wrote a few letters, and then went " to bed. 10. You have done much for me. 11. I have written three letters, but he has not answered. 12. We have remained too long already. 13. If you had come a little earlier, I should have found " you. 14. I now saw that we had gone too far. — At this point it will be well to review and memorize the parts of the strong verbs already introduced in the preceding . Omitting compounds they are as follows, those conjugated being marked with an asterisk : Note, principal exercises, with jeiii Bitten *blei6en finben ge6en *gc6en Iialten tieiBen tielfen *fomtnen lefen Itegen nefimen raten 6ot blie5 fanb ga6 9'"g tlielt tliefe lam hS kg nnfint riet gefieten geblieben gefunben gegeben gegangen gefialten gefieifeen ge^otfen getotnmen gelefen gclegen genommen geroteH fcfjeinen fcbreiben fe^en *|ein fijen f|)reci)en ftefien tun tragen *iiierben jie^en fc^ien fcfjrteb fa§ loar \pxai, ftanb tot tvug inarb rauvbe sog gefdjienen gefifirieben gefe^en gemefen gefeffen ge[firoc^en geftanbcn getan getragen geroorben gejogen Vocabulary ber 2lugen|d)ein, s.^ view [eye- shine]. betannt, adj. known ; as subst, acquaintance. bie S8e|(l)reibung, w. description. bredien, v. s. (brad), gebrodien), break. enblid), adv. finally [end-]. ber Su6, s.' (pi. 3-iifje), foot. bie (Siefa^r, w. danger. bie §eiinat, w. home [home-]. /:^erj(id], adj. heart-y, cordial. / furjlid), adv. lately. / laufen, v. s. (lief, gelaufen, awe. fetn), run [leap]. bie SJeugierbe, w. curiosity. V neugievig, adj. curious. oblDotil, sub. conj. altho. fdiliefjen, v. s. (jd)lD6, gefd)Ibf|en), infer, conclude. • jd)itieiflen, v. s. (fc^roieg, gejd)Une» gen), be silent. CONJUGATION 149 bte ©ifiroinbfu^t, w. consumption, treffen, v. s. (traf, gefroffen), hit, foeben, adv. just now [so-even]. hit upon. fterben, v. s. (ftarb, fleftorben, aux. bte SSera'brebung, w. agreement, fein), die [starve]. arrangement, teilen, v. w. share [deal]. jufaminen, arfu.*together. Notes. — i jum Xcil, in part. — 2 fc^Ueftc ; notice that fdfiliEfien has gcfd^toffen (not gefcfjiogcn) in the perf. pple. This means that the is short. — 3 lottfft ; see § 182, 3. ®efaf)r loufen = to run a risk.—* on, of; the name of the malady from which one suffers, or 0/ which one dies, is put in the dat. with an. — * guj^Wonbcrmtg, walking tour. — * bornuf, with regard to it. — ^ etucS XngeS, one day ; for the gen. of time see § 251, 2. — * SBroden, Brocken; the highest summit of the Harz Mountains. —9 ne^men; see § 182, 2. 3u lugenfcljein nel)men = to inspect, take a view of. — w keep, flatten. — " every day, ace. — " that ; bag, rather than ber. — i" ask, bitten. — " as, ItJie {sub. conj.). — 15 Use the dat. — w upon, auf with ace. — i' home late ; see § 96, 1. — 18 then went, ging bann. — 1^ I should have found, ^fitte tdf) gefunben or tDiitbe ic^ . . . gefunben f)aben. The reason for the inverted order is explained further on in § 200. EXERCISE 35 Reading Lesson : The Same Continued 2lm nad^ften ^^age fu^ren toir mit ber (Sifenba^n bt§ nad^ SBernigerobe,^ unb Don ba gingcn toir ju %ii^ nad^ ^Ifenburg, einem fleinen Sorfe, tcetd^eg ungefa^r bier ©tunben^ bom SSrodengijjfel entfemt^ Itegt. §ier fanben toir balb ein guteS ©aft^auS, too toir un§ jiemlic^ frii^ ju S3ett legten. 3lm foIgen= ben SJlorgen l^ingen leid^te SBoIfen am §tmmel, unb manriet* un§, auf guteS SBetter ju toarten. 6§ ttare befjer getoefen, toenn tcir biefem Slate gefolgt toaren, aber baju hjaren tt)ir ju un= gebulbig. 2Bir ^ielten ' bie leid^ten SBotfen nic^t fiir gefafjrlid^. 2lIfo tnad^ten toir un§ frit^ auf ben 2Beg/ unb am Stnfang ging eg aud^ h)ir!li(^ fefir f4)on. 5Die 5Rorgen(uft tear fjb^ift an= gene^m, bie SSogel fangen in ben Sfiaumen, unb eine ^jrac^tige 3lainx bot, todfirenb toir ^b^ix unb l^ol^er ftiegen, immer neue 9?eije. 9iac^bem toir ettoa eine ©tunbe gegangen toaren, famen irir an einen 300 gu^' ^o^en S^elfen, toelc^er ben 3tamm „^U fenftein" tragi. S)erfelbe liegt bi^t am SSege unb ift nid^t fc^tcer 10 150 THE VERB ju 6efteigen/ SBtr flommen alfo auf ben ©ijifet unb fa^en mi)l eine ^albe Stunbe broben. EXERCISE 35 a 1. The river runs through beautiful valleys. 2. He car- ries his head very high. 3. Let him be silent and go his way.' 4. Please shut the door — I have already asked you twice. 5. I have offered you " too much already. 6. It seemed impossible to mount higher. 7. At last we came to ^^ a little village, which was called Hoohstein. 8. I met '^ her at ^^ the station and we drove home to- gether. 9. On the summit we saw a little girl who offered us ^' the flowers that she had found. 10. I would be si- lent if only he had not broken his word. 11. I ran quickly to ^^ the river, gave the child " my hand and drew it to '^ the land. 12. The child would have died if I had not come. 13. You would have fallen had I not taken you by the hand. 14. Who knows what Byron would have done if he had not died so young ? Vocabulary / 6e[teigen, v. s. (fieftieg, Befttegen), / ber ®i})fel, s.' peak, summit, climb. i^ ber Jpimmel, s.' heaven, sky. bieten, v. s. (6ot, geboten), offer, ^ Ilimmen, v. s. (tlomm, getlotnmen, bid. aux. fein), climb. bit^t, adj. close, dense [tight]. nacE)be'm, sub. conj. after. ^ bQ§ ®orf, s.' village [thorp]. bie SJatu'r, w. nature, y brobert, adv. up there. / ber Steij, s.' charm. / bie ©ifenboljii, w. railway. ^ fingen, v. s. (fang, gejungen), sing. ^/entfernt, adv. distant. / ftcigen, v. s. (ftieg, gefttegen, aux. ^ fafiren, v. s. (fufir, gefa^ren, aux. fein), climb. fein), travel, drive [fare]. u'ngebulbig, adj. impatient, ber gelfen, «.' rock. / ber SSoget, s.' (pi. o), bird [fowl]. ^ boS 6Saft^au8, s.' inn [guest- / tudbrenb, sub. conj. while ; also house]. prep, (gen.), during, gefa^rlid), arfy'. dangerous. /bie 2BoI!e, to. cloud [welkin]. CONJUGATION 151 Notes. — i SBerntgero'be, name of a little city in the Harz Moun- tains. — ^ (Stunben, hours' walk, leagues ; ace. of measure. — ^ ent= f ernt, distant, away ; the aoc. of measure is often accompanied by an adv. of measure. — * riet, advised. The verb also means to guess (Ex. 30). — 6 ^telten ; gotten fitt = regard as, consider. — ^ fidj aitf ben SBeg tna^eit, to start, get under way. — ' JJu^ ; used in the sing., as a measure of height, after a numeral. — " fiefteigen is transitive, while fteigen is intransitive. The construction here requires a transitive verb ' way, ace, tho ge^en is intransitive ; see § 266, 1. — i" ask, bitten ; the order : bid) fc^on jweimol. — " Use the dat. ; the order : btr fd^oit ju Biet, — ^^ to, an with aoc. — i^ mget, treffen. — i* at, auf with dat. EXERCISE 36 Reading Lesson : The Same Continued 5Die 2lu§[t(i^t bon btcfem 5Pun!te ttjcrbe tc^ fo balb nid^t t)er= geffen. 2Baf)renb tcir ^ier ja^en unb ^3Iauberten, beutete mein 9leife!amerab mel^rmalS^ auf bie 2BoIfen, toelc^e imtner nod^ am §tmmel I^ingen unb gerabe je^t ]^of)er ju fteigen unb bid^ter ju toerben f(^ienen. SBir fa^en, bafe e§ ein ©etoitter geben hjiirbe, unb bad^ten^ fofort an bie SSorte ber £eute im ©aftfjaufe. atber an ' eine kixiU^x tear je^t nid^t me^r ju benfen ; baju glaubten* loir ju toeit gegangen ju fein. 2llfo gingen toir toei= ter, ba !ein Dbbac^ ju fe{)en ^ tear, nad^ bem ©i^jfet be§ 35erge§ ju.° Se|t fd^ritten h)ir natiirli4» fd^netter, inbem ' toir affe ^aar gjlinuten ' Slide nad^ bem §immel toarfen. Son geit ju Beit liefen toir fogar eine fleine ©tredEe, aber ba§ tourbe balb ennu= benb. ©nblic^ brac^ baS ©etoitter tog, unb wa§ fiir ein ^Better ! ®er 9tcgen fie( in ©tromen, ber SBinb 6lie§ unb l^eulte toie toll' unb bog bie 58aume, ba^ fie brazen. Slenbenbe SSIi^e fc^offen iiberaa burd^ bie £uft unb fc^Iugen biStoeilen in bie Saume. EXERCISE 36 a 1. He stands now where I stood ten years ago. 2. The letter has been lying on my table a whole week. 3. We had mounted higher and higher and stood now upon the summit. 4. William Tell shot an apple from the head of 152 THE VERB his child. 5. His heart beats warmly for the poor. 6. We have met and beaten them twice. 7. The thing bends, but it does not break. 8. The wind is blowing cold from the mountains ; there will be ^° a "storm 9. Prices have risen ; everything has become dearer. 10. He cast one glance at^^ the crowd and strode quietly into the building. 11. Poets have always sung of love and beauty. 12. How long have you been standing already? 13. Did you drive or come on foot ? 14. Why are you silent ? Do you not see what you have done ? 15. That throws a strong light upon " the whole affair. 16. It struck twelve as we were standing before the door, and I saw that we had come too late. Vocabulary J bie StuSft^t, w. view [outsight]. / fc^iefeen, v. s. (fdjofe, gef^offen), / Biegen, v. s. (bog, gefiogen), bend shoot. [bow]. / fi^tagen, v. s. (f^Iug, gef^Iagen), filafeti, V. s. (blie§, gebtafen), strike, beat [slay]. blow. ^, f^reiten, v. s. (fc^ritt, gefd^ritten, blenben, v. w. blind, dazzle. aux. feiit), step. / ber SBttd, s.= glance. v fogar, adv. actually, even. /' ier Slig, s.^ flash, lightning. / bte ©trerfe, w. stretch, distance. ermiiben, v. w. tire, fatigue. / ber ©ti-otti, s.' {pi. B), stream. baS ©emitter, s.' thunderstorm. / tott, adj. mad. / ^eulen, v. w. howl. / iiberaH, adv. everywhere, /inbe'tn, sub. conj. while, since. / bergefien, v. s. (tiergofe, bergeffen), bo§ Obbn(5, S.3 shelter [-thatch]. forget. ^Jlaubem, w. chat. IDcrfen, v. s. (wavf, geiDorfen), i/ ber DJegen, «.' rain. throw, cast [warp]. bie SRiJctfet}r, w. return. / bev SBinb, s." wind. Notes. — i ntc^rtttalS, several times. Notice the inversion (Ex. 29, n. 2). — 2 ji(|((|te)t J from benteu, bac^te, gebail)t ; one of the irregular weak verbs. — ^ nn . . . benfeit, a return was now no longer to be thought of, there was no thinking of a return any more. — * glailitcit . , . feilt, believed that we had gone. — * j,j fcl)cii, to be seen. — « itnd) . . . 5u, toward. — ' iiibem . . . tuarfeil, while we cast, or better simply casting. A clause with inbem is often best translated by the Eng. pple. in ing. — ' atte paat 9Ktlluten, every few minutes. — ' tute toll, like mad. — w be, geben. — ^^ at, upon, auf with aco. CONJUGATION 153 The Modal Auxiliaries and toiffeit 188. Characteristics. The verbs biirfen, to he permit- ted, fonnen, can, mogen, may, miiffen, must, fotlen, sliall, tDoflert, will, and ttiiffen, to know, constitute a class by themselves. The first six are called ' modal auxiliaries.' They and Iniffeit were originally strong verbs, but devel- oped weak preterits after the old preterit had acquired present meaning. As a class they have the following peculiarities : 1. In the present indicative the vowel of the singular (except in foHen) is different from that of the plural, and the third person singular lacks the ending t. 2. Where the infinitive has umlaut, this umlaut disap- pears in the preterit indicative, but is found in the preterit subjunctive. 3. Each verb (except toifjen) has two perfect participles, one weak, with prefix ge, and without umlaut, the other strong, without ge, and identical in form with the infinitive ; thus from fonnen, gefonnt and fonnen. The strong participle is used only and always in connection with an infinitive ; thus t^ f)aBe eS nii^t gefonnt, / have not been able (to do) it; but \6^ {)a6e e§ nic^t tun fonnen, I have not been able to do it. a. There are a few other verbs that show this last pecu- liarity of the modal auxiliaries ; i. e. employ what seems to be the infinitive, and really is so if the verb is weak, in connection with an infinitive. The most common of them are ^ei^en, I;elfen, laffen, fefjen and {)Dren. Thus one says id^ fjabe fagen I)oren, I have heard say. 189. Inflection of the Modal Auxiliaries. The forms are given below without translation, because they must be translated variously. See §§ 190 and 832 ff. 1. iSiirfeit. Principal parts, biirfen, burfte, geburft. 154 THE VERB PEES. IND. id^ barf bu barfft er barf toir biirfen itjr biirft fie biirfen PRES. SUBJ. i^ biirfe bu biirfeft cr biirfe it)tr biirfen i^r biirfet fie biirfen PERFECT INDIC. tc^ ^a6e geburft bu i)aft geburft etc. or, with an infinitive, bu ^aft . . biirfen biirfen etc. PLUPEEF. INDIC. tc^ ^atte geburft bu f)atteft geburft etc. or, witli an infinitive, ic^ I)atte . bu l^atteft biirfen . biirfen etc. FUT. INDIC \^ toerbe biirfen bu h)irft biirfen etc. FUTURE PERF. INDIC. id) tcerbe geburft fjaben bu toirft geburft tjaben etc. or, with an infinitive, id^ toerbe ^aben . . . biirfen bu toirft ^aben . . . biirfen etc. PRESENT COND. ic^ hjiirbe biirfen bu it)iirbeft biirfen etc. PRET. IND. id^ burfte bu burfteft er burfte toir burften if)r burftet fie burften PEET. SUBJ. id^ biirfte bu biirfteft er biirfte toir biirften ii)r biirftet fie biirften PEEFECT SUBJ. td^ £)a6e geburft bu ijabeft geburft etc. or, with an infinitive. id^ ^ahe . bu ^abeft . biirfen . biirfen etc. PLUPEEF. SUBJ. td^ f)atte geburft bu {)atteft geburft etc. or, with an infinitive. id; ^atte . . bu tjatteft . biirfen . biirfen etc, FUT. SUBJ. id^ toerbe biirfen bu toerbeft biirfen etc. FUTURE PERF. SUBJ. ic^ toerbe geburft l^aben bu toerbeft geburft f)abm etc. or, witli an infinitive, id^ toerbe l^aben . bu toerbeft ^aben etc. biirfen . . biirfen PERFECT COND. id^ toiirbe geburft ^aben bu toiirbeft geburft ^aben etc. or, with an infinitive, ic^ toiirbe ^aben . . , biirfen etc. CONJUGATION 155 IMPEKATITE PRES. INS. (ju) biirfen PBKFECT INF. geburft ju ^aben 2. Sbnnen. Principal parts, PKES. IND. PKES. SUBJ. id^ lann bu lannft er lann toir fotinen il^r lonnt |te fonnen id^ lonne bu lonneft er tonne toir lonnen t^r fonnet fie !bnnen PERFECT IND. x^ Ijabe gefonnt bu £)aft gelonnt etc. or, with an infinitive, id^ ^dbi . bu l^aft . . . lonnen fonnen etc. PLtrPERF. IND. id^ ^atte gefonnt bu l^atteft gefonnt etc. or, with an infinitive, id^ ^atte . bu l^atteft fonnen . fonnen etc. FUTURE IND. id^ toerbe fonnen bu toirft fonnen etc. FUT. PERF. IND. i(^ toerbe gefonnt l^aben bu toirft gefonnt ^aben etc. or, with an infinitive, id^ toerbe ^ahm . . . ftinnen bu toirft l^aben . . . fonnen etc. (wanting) PRES. PPIE. biirfenb PERFECT PPLE. geburft, biirfen fonnen, fonnte, gefonnt. PRBT. IND. PKET. SUBJ. i(^ fonnte bu fonnteft er fonnte toir fonnten il^r fonntet fie fonnten id^ fonnte bu fonnteft er fonnte toir fonnten i^r fonntet fie fonnten PERFECT SUBJ. id^ ^a6e gefonnt bu l^abeft gefonnt etc. or, with an infinitive. id^ l^abe . bu ^abeft fonnen . fonnen etc. PLUPERF. SUBJ. id^ l^atte gefonnt bu ^atteft gefonnt etc. or, with an infinitive, id^ ^atte . . bu l^atteft . fonnen . fonnen etc. FUTURE SUBJ. td^ toerbe fonnen bu toerbeft fonnen etc. FUT. PERF. SUBJ. id^ toerbe gefonnt ^aben bu toerbeft gefonnt l^aben etc. or, with an infinitive, i(^ toerbe fjaben . . . fonnen bu toerbeft l^aben . . . fonnen etc. 156 THE VERB PRESENT COND. id^ tDiirbe lonnen bu h)urbeft fonnen etc. IMPERATIVE PRESENT INE. (ju) fonnen PERE. INF. gefonnt ju "^ahm 3. Sllijgcrt. Principal parts, PRES. IND. PBBS. SUBJ. PERFECT COND. t^ toiirbe gefonnt l^aben bu tcilrbeft gefonnt fjaben etc. or, with an infinitive, id^ tDiirbe fjaben . . . fonnen etc (wanting) PRESENT PPLB. fonnenb PEBF. PPLE. gefonnt, fonnen mogen, moc^te, gemod^t. PEET. IND. PRET. SUBJ. icE) mag bu magft er mag lt>ir mogen tf)r mogt fie mogen ic^ moge bu mogeft er moge tcir mogen t^r miiget fie mogen i^ mo(^te bu mo^teft er mod^te toir moc^ten i£)r mod^tet fie mod^ten tc^ moc^te bu moc^teft er moc^te toir mod^ten if)r mod^tet fie mod^ten PERFECT IND. td^ J)a6e gemo(i^t bu l^aft gemoc^t etc. or, witli an infinitive, id^ ^abe . . . mogen bu ^aft . . . mogen etc. PLUPERF. IND. id^ ^atte gemoi^t bu l^atteft gemoc^t etc or, with an infinitive, id^ ^atte . bu f)atteft mogen . mdgen etc. FUTURE IND. i(^ toerbe mogen bu toirft mogen etc. PERFECT SUBJ. t^ l^abe gemoi^t bu {(ttbeft gemod^t etc. or, with an infinitive, id) fjabe . . . mijgen bu ^abeft . . . mogen etc PLUPERF. SUBJ. i^ f)atte gemoc^t bu f)dtteft gemoc^t etc. or, with an infinitive, id^ f)atte . . . mogen bu ^atteft . . . mogen etc. FUTURE SUBJ. id^ tcerbe mogen bu toerbeft mbgen etc. CONJUGATION 157 FTTT. PEErECT DTD. t^ tcerbe gemod^t l^aben bu toirft gemocEjt ^abcn etc. or, "with an infinitive, ic^ tcerbe i^abm . . . tnbgen bu toirft ^aben . . . tnogen etc. PRESENT COJfD. i(^ toiirbe tnbgen bu iriirbeft mogen etc. FUT. PEEFECT SUBJ. i(^ hjerbe gemo^t fjaben bu tt)erbeft gemoc^t ^aben etc. or, witli an infinitive, td^ luerbe I^aben . . . mogen bu inerbej't f)aben . . . mogen etc. PEEFECT COXD. ic^ toiirbe gemoc^t l^aben bu hJiirbeft gemod^t ^aben etc. or, with an infinitive, i(^ tDiirbe ^abtn . . . mogen etc. iMPEEATivE (wanting) PEES. IXF. PEES. PPLE. (ju) mogen mogenb PEEF. INF. PEEF. PPLE. gemo(^t ju t^aben gemoi^t, mogen 4. SRuffcti. Principal parts, miifjen, mu^te. gemu^t. PEES. IND. PEES. SUBJ. PEET. IND. PRET. SUBJ ii) mu^ id) miiffe id^ mu^te i^ mii^te bu mu^t bu mujjeft bu mu^teft bu mii^teft er mu^ er miiffe er mu^te er mii^te toir miiffen tt)ir miiffen toir mu^ten toir mii^ten i^r mii^t if)r miiffet i^r mu^tet i^r mii^tet fie miiffen fie miiffen fie mu^ten fie mii^ten PERF. IND. PEEF. SUBJ. ic^ l^abe gcmu^t bu ^aft gemu^t etc. or, with an infinitive, id^ ^ahe . . . muffen bu l^aft . . . muffen etc. id^ ^abi gemu^t bu ^beft gemu^t etc. or, with an infinitive, td^ l^abe . . . miiffen bu l^abeft . . . muffen etc. 158 THE VEKB PLUPERr. TNV. id^ ^atte gcmu^t bu ^atteft getnu^t etc. or, with an infinitive, id^ ^atte . . . miiffen bu ^atteft . . . miifjen etc. PUTUBE IND. ic^ tuerbe tnitffen bu toirfl miij'fen etc. FUT. PBEF. nSTD. id^ icerbe gemu^t l^aben bu tcirft getnu^t i)abtn etc. or, with an infinitive, t^ hjerbe ^aben . . . miiffen bu tcirft ^aben . . . miiffen etc. PLUPEEF. SUBJ. ic^ f)atte getnu^t bu j;atteft gemu^t etc. or, with an infinitive, id^ ^atte . . . miiffen bu ^atteft . . . miiffen etc. FUTtJEE SUBJ. id^ Irerbe miiffen bu toerbeft miiffen etc. FTTT. PEEF. SUBJ. id) toerbe gemu^t l^aben bu itierbeft gemu^t i)aben etc. or, with an infinitive, id) werbe l)aben . . . muffen bu loerbeft ^aben . . . miiffen etc. PEBSENT COND. id^ tDiirbe miiffen bu ioiirbeft muffen etc PEEFECT COTfTD. t^ iciirbe gemu^t i^aben bu hjiirbeft gemu^t fiaben or, with an infinitive, id^ tDiirbe ^aben . . . miiffen etc. iMPEEATivE (wanting) PEES. INF. PEES. PPLE. (ju) miiffen miiffenb PEEP. INF. PEEF. PPLE. gemu^t ju ijaben gemu^t, miiffen 5. SoHen. Principal parts, foHen, foUte, gefottt. PEES. IND. PEES. SUBJ. PKET. IND. PRET. SUBJ. id) fen ic^ foHe id^ fottte ic§ foate bu foHft bu fotteft bu foateft bu follteft erfoa er folfe er foate er fottte \mx fotten tt)ir foUen iuir fottten tuir foUten i^r foat ifir foHet iE)r fotttet ifjr fotttet fie foKen fie fotten fie fotlten fie foUten CONJUGATION 159 PEEFECT BSD. PERFECT STTBJ. ic^ f)aU gefollt bu ^aft gefoHt etc. or, with an infinitive, ic^ I)a6e . bu^aft . . follen fotten etc. PLUP. IWD. ic^ l^atte gefollt bu ^atteft gefollt etc. or, with an infinitive, id) ^atte . . . foUen bu ^atteft . . . foHen etc. FUT. USD. ic^ toerbe follen bu toirft foffen etc. FFT. PEKF. IKD. ic^ toerbe gefotft ^aben bu toirft gefollt liaben etc. or, with an infinitive. i^ toerbe l^aben . bu toirft I)oben . . foHen . foUen etc. PEES. COND. id^ l^abe gefoEt bu ^abeft gefoHt etc. or, with an infinitive. bu ^abeft . . follen . follen etc. PLUP. SUBJ. x^ l^atte gefollt bu ptteft gefollt etc. or, with an infinitive, xdi) ^atte . . . foKen bu l)atteft . . . follen etc. FUT. SUBJ. id^ toerbe fotten bu toerbeft fotten etc. FUT. PEEF. SUBJ. i(^ toerbe gefollt ^aben bu toerbeft gefollt Ijaben etc. or, with an infinitive, id^ toerbe ^aben . . . follen bu toerbeft etc. PEEF. COND. ic^ toiirbe follen bu tourbeft follen etc id^ toiirbe gefollt l)aben bu toiirbeft gefollt l^aben etc. or, with an infinitive, id^ toiirbe ^aben . . . follen etc. iMPEEATiTB (wanting) PEES. EST. PEES. PPLE. (ju) follen foCenb PEEF. INFIN. PEEF. PPLE. gefoEt 3u liaben gefottt, fotten 6. aBottcn. Principal parts, tootten, toottte, getoottt. 160 THE VERB PEES. IND. PEES. SUBJ. FEET. IND. PEET. SUBJ id) h»ia xi) motte id) iDolIte id) Itioltte bu iDittft bu moEeft bu icoKteft bu tDottteft er tritt er tcotte er tDoUte er toollte lt)ir hjolfen tuir iDoIIen h)ir tBottten h)ir tooHten ii)x tDoItt if)r tDottet tf)r tDoHtet if)r tcotltet fie iDoHen fie iDoden fie tuollten fie tooltten PEEI \ IND. PEEF. SUBJ. id^ J;aBe geVoottt ic^ i)aU getoottt bu l^aft gelDoKt etc. bu i)abeft getoollt or, witli an infinitive, or, -with an infinitive, \d) ^abe . . . tnoffen ic^ i)aie . . . tootten bu f)aft . . . iBotten etc. bu l^abeft . . . tootten etc. PLUI >. ETD. PLur. SUBJ. i^ ijattt getooKt id^ ^atte getcoKt bu ^atteft getootit etc. bu ^atteft gehjollt etc. or, -with an infinitive, or, with an infinitive, \6) ^atte . . . , tDoUen id^ fjatte . . . VDoHen bu J^atteft . . . tBoHen etc. bu l^atteft . . . iBoHen etc. FUT . IND. FUT. SUBJ. id) tcerbe icotten ic^ toerbe toollen bu toirft hJoHen etc. bu toerbeft ttJoHen etc. FUT. PEEF. IKD. FUT. PEKF. SUBJ. ic^ toerbe gelcotlt f)aben bu tcirft gelDoHt ^aben etc. or, with an infinitive, id) toerbe ^aben . . . tcotfen bu icirft J)aben . . . tcoHen etc. PEES. COND. id^ toiirbe tt)oI(en bu toiirbeft tooHen etc. id) loerbe gelcottt l^abcn bu hjerbeft getooHt fjaben etc. or, with an infinitive, td^ toerbe t)aben . . . tcotten bu toerbeft ^oben . . . tcotten etc. PEEP. COND. ic^ hJiirbe gelcoUt l^aben bu iciirbeft getotiHt ^aben etc. or, with an infinitive, id^ toiirbe ^aben . . bu toiirbcft £)aben etc. tooffen . . hJoHen CONJUGATION 161 iroHe (bu) iDoIle er PEES. ESTFIN. (ju) iDoIIen PEEF. IXFIX. getDoIIt ju ^aben IMPEEATIVE tDoIten toir iDottt (i^r) tootten jie PEES. PPLE. iDoHenb PEEP. PPLE. 190. Inflection of miffcit. are inflected as follows : PEES. IND. PEES. SUBJ. getDoKt, Itjotten The simple tenses of iriffett PEET. IND. PEET. SUBJ. i^ toei^ bu toetjjt er tcei^ toir VDtffen fie tuiffen toiffe toiffeft tDtjje iBtffen h)t|fet tciffen tDu^te tcu^teft tDu^te h)u|ten tDu^tet tou^ten toii^te toii^teft toii|te tott^ten toti^tet tou^ten 1. The compound tenses are regular ; id) ^aht getDu^t, ic^ l^atte gehju^t, ic^ icerbe toifjen, ic^ toerbe getcu^t fjaben, etc. 2. The imperative is tcifje (bu), toiffe er, iDtffen toir, toi^t (i^r) toiffen fie. 191. Use of the Modal Auxiliaries. The use of the modal auxiliaries is highly idiomatic. All of them ex- cept bitrfen have familiar English cognates, but the English verbs may, can, shall and will have but two tenses each, while Tnust has but one. This necessitates the use in English of various circumlocutions, particu- larly in translating the compound tenses ; e. g. ic^ miifj, / miost, but ic^ mu^te, / had to, was obliged to ; ic^ fann, / can, but ic^ rterbe fonnen, / shall ie able. The follow- ing are the most important uses. 1. Sitrfcn usually m.ean8 to he permitted, to have the right, but is often best translated by may, or with a nega- 162 THE VERB tive by must not ; e. g. barf i^ um§ Srot bitten ? may I ask for the bread ? bag burfen ©ie nic^t tun, that you must not do. The preterit subjunctive may denote probability ; e. g. ba§ bilrftc ber %a^ f ein, that might he the case. Sometimes burfen approaches the meaning of dare, as in id^ barf bef)aup= ten, / dai-e assert. But it is not cognate with dare and is very rarely to be so translated. 2. ^iinncn in the present is usually equivalent to can, but often to may ; e. g. ba§ fann fein, that may he. ^'c^ fonnte means I was able, iif) fonnte, / should be able, both of which uses are covered by English could ; e. g. ic^ fonnte e§ (ge= ftern) nic^t finben, I could not find it {yesterday) ; i^ fonnte eg finben (hJenn id^ ein £i^t Ijcitte), I could find it {if I had a light). 3. SO'lbgen is sometimes equivalent to may, as in er mag ei bel^alten, he may keep it ; more often it is to be rendered by wish, want, like, care ; e. g. i^ mag if)n nicf)t fef)en, / do not want to see him. This use is especially common in the preterit subjunctive, ic^ mo(^te (gern) being equivalent to I should like. 4. SOJiiffcn is equivalent to must only in the present; elsewhere it is to be translated by be compelled, be obliged, or the like ; e. g. ic^ mu|te tad^en, / had to laugh, I could not help laughing ; er f)at ben ganjen Stag arbeiten miiffen, Ae has had to work all day. @r mii^te means he would have, to, he would need. 5. ©ottcn is sometimes equivalent to shall, in the pre- terit to should, ought ; e. g. bu fottft nid;t toten, thou shalt not kill; bu foKteft ge^en, you should {ought to) go. More often it is best rendered by a form of be followed by to ; e. g. er foUte balb fterben, he was soon to die. Very fre- quently it is used to report what is said, claimed or thought by some one else than the speaker ; e. g. er foil fe^r reic^ fein, he is said to be very rich. CONJUGATION 163 6. SSSoKen generally denotes an act of willing or wishing on the part of the subject ; e. g. er h)tff 'inted, i. e. the work of printing is finished. 2. The forms with toerben, then, denote an action going on at the time indicated by the tense of the verb ; those witJi fein a state or condition that has resulted from a pre- vious action. Further examples : bie ^fiir ift gefdjioffen, the door is closed ; bie Hxnx ttttrb um 8 U^r gefc^loffen, the door is closed (i. e. the;/ close the door) at S o'clock; id; tarn bcina^C 511 \pat ; ber 33rief lourbe (eben) gefd;ricben ; I came almost THE PASSIVE VOICE 169 too late ; the letter was {just) being written ; \ij fam ju f^jat ; ber 33rief tear (f^on) gefdE)rte6en ; / came too late ; the letter was (already) written. 196. Conjugation of the Passive: geIo6t toerbeit, to he praised. PEE SENT I am, praised, thou art praised etc. nSTD. SUB J. id^ toerbe gelobt t(^ tocrbe gelobt bu toii'ft gelobt bu icerbeft gelobt er irirb gelobt er toerbe gelobt iptr toerben gelobt etc. trir toerben gelobt etc. PEETEEIT I tvas praised, thou wert praised etc. IND. SUBJ. id^ tourbe (or tuarb) gelobt id) toiirbe gelobt bu tourbeft (or toarbft) gelobt bu tniirbeft gelobt er tourbe (or tuarb) gelobt er toiirbe gelobt totr tourben gelobt etc. toir toiirben gelobt etc. PEEFECT / have been praised, thou hast been praised etc. IND. SUBJ. i^ bin gelobt toorben tc^ fei gelobt loorben bu bift gelobt tcorben bu iei(e)ft gelobt toorben er ift gelobt tcorben etc. er fei gelobt toorben etc. PLUPEEPECT I had been praised, zhou hadst been praised etc. IND. SUBJ. id^ tear gelobt toorben i($ tcare gelobt toorben bu toarft gelobt worben bu icareft gelobt ioorben er ioar etc. etc. er tcare etc. etc. 170 THE VERB FUTTJEE / shall be praised, thou wilt be praised etc. IND. SUBJ. \ij tcerbe geIo6t toerben tc^ irerbe gelobt toerben bu toirft gelobt toerben bu toerbeft gelobt toerben er loirb etc. etc. er toerbe etc. etc. FUTUKB PERFECT / shall have been praised, thou wilt have been praised etc. DTD. STJBJ. td^ ttierbe gelobt toorben fein x6) toerbe gelobt toorben fein bu toirft gelobt rtorben fein bu toerbeft gelobt toorben fein er toirb etc. etc. cr toerbe etc. etc. PRESENT CONDITIONAL. \i) iDurbe gelobt ioerben, / should be praised bu toiirbeft gelobt ioerben etc., thou wouldst be praised etc. PERFECT CONDITIONAL / should have been praised etc. i^ toiirbe gelobt toorben fein bu toiirbeft gelobt toorben fein etc. IMPERATIVE fei (bu) gelobt, be thou praised fei er gelobt, let him be praised (Forms with Werben, as merbe gelobt, er ttierbe gelobt, are rare ; sea §344,1.) INFINITIVE PRESENT : gelobt (ju) tnerben, to be praised PERFECT : gelobt toorben (ju) fein, to have been praised GERUNDIVE JU lobenb, to be praised, praiseworthy (§ 370). 197. The Active and the Passive Construction. In going from the active to the passive construction the THE PASSIVE VOICE 171 object of the active verb becomes the subject of the pas- sive, wliile the subject of the active, if a personal agent, goes into the dative with t)on ; e. g. mv [(f)tugeit ben geinb, we heat the enemy, becomes ber ^^^^'^b tourbe Don un§ ge* fc^Iagen, the enemy was beaten by us. 1. A non-personal instrument or means is denoted usu- ally by the accusative with burc^ ; e. g. ber geinb tourbe burd^ Sift gefc^Iagen, the enemy was beaten by strategy. 198. The Impersonal Passive of Intransitive Verbs. Intransitive vcbs can only be used impersonally in the passive, but this use is very common. The impersonal passive can seldom be translated literally ; e. g. e§ tDUrbe getattjt urtb geyungen, there was singing and dancing. 1. Such expressions, therefore, as I was believed, my advice was not foUoived, and all others in which the corresponding German verb is intransitive, have to be rendered by imper- sonal constructions, thus : mir Ipurbe geglaubt ; meinem State tDurbe ntd^t gefolgt. a. Very often, however, one can substitute for such an intransitive verb a transitive compound which can be used personally in the passive ; thus for my advice was not fol- lowed one can say mein 9iat iDurbe nid^t befolgt. 199. Substitutes for the Passive. On the whole the passive is much less used in German than in English. The English passive can be replaced in German (1) by man with the active, as in man [agt, it is said ; (2) by a reflexive form (§ 201), as in e§ Derftet)t [tc^, it is under- stood ; (3) by a reflexive with taffen, let, as in e§ la^t \\6) fioffen, it may be hoped ; e§ Iie§ [tc^ ertoarten, it was to he expected, 200. Rule of Order VII: Inversion after Subordinate Clause. Any subordinate clause preceding the princi- pal verb of a complex sentence causes inversion ; e. g. 172 THE VERB toenn icf) an Sl)rer ©telle toctre, (fo) tourbe tc£) ju |)aufe 6Iet^ 6en, */ i were m your place, I should remain at home ; obtuDl)[ et ®elb fjot, ()d) {)at er boc£) Irenig SSerftaitb, tho he has money, he has little sense ; bamtt er 9iuf)e I)abett !onnte, 309 er fid) aufS Sanb jiiriicf, l. a), duel. be bored. Notes. — i fidj e»B5^en on (dat.), to take pleasure in. — 2 fiii^ frcuen iiSer (ace), to be delighted over. — ° ufier4au))t, at all, anyway. — •* aSorum \)ai eS . . . geljonbeW ; worunt = um traS. The meaning is : What was the question at issue? — ^ jj^g frogt ft(^ eliejt, that is just the question * fit^ fdj[aj{en, to ./t^W. — ' Oleil^, directly, in a moment. The meaning is : We are close by. — ^ How . . . feels, ttiie bie frif^e Suft einem (§ 149, 1) n)ol)t tut! — » Wasn't it . . . the, mar eS boi!^.— ^"keep, bleiben. — "Nor I either, tc^ attij nic§t. — 12 there are, eS gibt. — w who do not care anything about, bie ft^ gar niii^t um . . . fum= mem. — " So that is, baS tft olio. — '^ to be sure, atletbingS. — 1^ when it's a question of, trenn t8 ftdf) um . . . ^anbelt. — i' one must put up with things, mug man fiij fif)on etmaS gefaden laffen.— " let one's self he bored, fid) quolen taffen ; inf. without ju.— "in order to be, um . . . ju fein. — 2" man, ber 'Sftenid). [80 THE VERB COMPOUND VERBS 206. Separable and Inseparable Compounds. There are two kinds of compound verbs, separable and insep- arable. In the latter the particle always precedes the verb and forms one word with it, as Derftetjeii, understand; er Uerftdjt, he understands. In the former the particle is liable to be separated from the verb, as aufjufteljen, to rise ; cr ftet)t friif) auf, he rises early. 1. In English we have only inseparable composition, as in beget, forgive, outrun, none of which can be broken up without changing the meaning ; compare outrun with run out, backslide with slide back etc. 207. Differences in Conjugation. The conjugation of a separable compound differs from that of an insepar- able in the following particulars : 1. In the simple tenses of a separable verb, except in the dependent order, the prefix comes at the end of the sen- tence ; e. g. from auffe^en, to put on, er fe^t ben §ut auf, Im puts on h is hat. An inseparable compound, as stated above, is never broken up. 2. The ju of the infinitive comes between the parts of a separable compound, the three being written as one word, as auf5ufte{)en ; with an inseparable compound ju precedes and is written separately, as ju berftefien. 3. The ge of the past participle comes between the pre- fix and the verb in a separable compound, the three ele- ments being here also written as one word ; e. g. aufgeftan= ben, risen. In an inseparable compound ge is omitted entirely ; e. g. berftanben, understood. 4. Separable compounds invariably accent the prefix; inseparable compounds the verb; as berfte'^en, berfta'nb, tierfta'nben ; au'ffte^en, ftanb au'f, au'fgeftanben. 208. The Inseparable Prefixes. The prefixes which always form inseparable verbs are te, ent (einp), er, ge. COMPOUND VERBS 181 tier and jer. These six prefixes are never accented in \ any part of speech, and are not in use as separate ■words. 1. Each of these prefixes had originally a definite mean- ing, and this original meaning is sometimes distinctly dis- cernible in modern German ; e. g. er meant out and erbenfen is to think out. In other cases the force of the prefix has blended so closely with that of the verb that it can now be discovered only by the help of historical study (just as in English we have lost all sense of a connection between have and behave). Sometimes a compound exists with no simple verb corresponding to it ; e. g. beginnen, to begin. In. gen- eral the meaning of a comjjound can not be told fiom a knowledge of its parts, but must be learned from the dictionary. The most common and easily discernible mean- ings of the inseparable prefixes are as follows : a. f8c, cognate with be in behave, beget, etc. forms transi- tive verFs from intransitives or from nouns and adjectives ; e. g. bebenfen, think about, consider, from benfen, think ; befreien, set free, liberate, from frei, free ; befiimmem, trouble, from Summer, sorrow. 6. @nj/ which sometimes takes the form em)3, implies smaratign, sometimes origm ; e. g. entge^en, escape, get away from ; entlaffen, dismiss, let go away ; tni\it1:im, stand forth, arise ; entflammen, flame out, hurst into flames. c. @r means forth, out, often forming transitive verbs of completed action; thus er[te§en, stand forth, arise; erfd^ei= nen, shine forth, appear ; erbenfen, think out, excogitate; er= finben, find out, invent; erjagen, hunt down, capture by chas- ing ; tx\xsxo,tn, find out by asking. d. (SJc forms numerous compounds in which the meaning of the prefix is not now obvious, and can only be understood by historical study. e. SBer, cognate with for in forgive, forget, etc. means out, away, to an end; e.g. berge^en, pass away ; tierfinlen, sink 182 THE VERB away; berbluten, bleed to death. Sometimes it means ainiss, as in t)erfuf)ren, lead astray ; berfennen, misjudge. f. 3cr means asunder, ot pieces ; e. g. jerfjjringen, hurst asunc[er; jerbrecfjen, break in pieces. 209, Conjugation of Inseparable Compounds. This does not differ in principle from the conjugation of a simple verb. The following synopsis of the inflection of betommen, to get, conjugated with fjafieny and Derreifen, to depart, conjugated with [etn, wiU suffice for illustration. PBESENT Ind. : i^ be!otmne, bu belommft etc. ; i^ Derreife, bu i)er= reifeft etc. Subj.: id^ befomme, bu befomtneft etc.; ic^ toerreife, bu ber= reifeft etc. PEETEEIT Ind. : id^ belatn, bu belamft etc. ; id^ berretfte, bu berretfteft etc. Subj. : ic^ beldme, bu befameft etc. ; id^ berreifte, bu Derreifteft etc. PEKFECT Ind. : id^ l^abe befommen, bu ^aft belommen etc. ; id^ bin \kx= reift, bu bift tierreift etc. Subj. : id^ l)ahi befomnten, bu Ijabeft be!ommen etc. ; i^ fei i)er= reift, bu fei(e)ft Derreift etc. PLUPERFECT Ind. : \cr with Proper Names. The rule is, as in Eng- lish: No article unless the name is preceded by an adjective; e.g. im Sa^re 1770 gtng ®oet£)e nad) ©trofe= burg, too er Berber fennen lernte, in the year 1770 Goethe 202 THE USE OF THE ARTICLE went to Strassburg, where he became acquainted with Herder. But one would say ber junge (Soet^e, noc^ bem bamate franjiififcl^cn ©trajsburg, ben fci)on berutjmten ^erber. a. Such phrases as little Karl, old Fritz, young Germany, Brown Bess, need the article in German ; thus, ber Keine ifarl ; ber alte grife ; bag jiinge ®cuti(i)(anb ; bte braune Si(cl. But jung ©iegfrieb, Mein 9}o« lanb, and the like (with uninflected adjective), occur in songs. 1. But a ' familiar ' ber often stands before the names of friends, neighbors, acquaintances, etc.; e. g. ha t[t ber 2relt (S.), there is Tell; ttjer ift ber SBeiSlingen (G-)' "^"^'-^ '^ ^^'eis- lingen ? The usage is common in the classics where the speakers belong to the common people. a. The use of ber before Christian names (except where it is needed to show case) is South-German ; e. g. ber SUBit^elm (bie Serta) ift nidjt gu ipaufc, Wilhelm {Berta} is not at home. Here the North-German prefers to omit the article, tho he may use it to show case, as in ic^ gab c8 bem SSSitfielm (bet SBevta). 2. So also ber is used before the names of well-known historical and fictitious characters, especially with the ob- lique cases of names that are not inflected ; e. g. fennft bu ben %au\t (G.) ? knowest thou Faust ? bie ©ebic^te beg ^oraj, the poems of Horace ; er fpielt gem ben §amlet, likes to play Hamlet ; td^ jie^e SBagner bem Seetl^oijen bor, I prefer Wag- ner to Beethoven. a. The converse of this process (treating a well-known proper name as a common noun) is seen when a common noun, losing its article, becomes, as it were, a proper noun ; e. g. .ffnabe (prod): id) bued|c bid); 9io«(ein fprad): id) fted^c bid) (G.); boy said : Pll pluck thee; little rose said: I'll prick thee; ^Korgenftunb t)at ®o(b im SWunb, morning hour has gold in its mouth. So also in stage directions ; e. g. gt(d)erfnabe fal)rt in eincm Sa^n (S.), {the) flsherhoy is rowing a boat. b. Proper names used appellatively take an article, as in English ; e. g. bie 93enu« Bon SOfilo, t?ie Venus of Milo ; bie @^a!e8peavc unb bie @oetr)e erfc^einen nidjt oft, the Shakespeares and the Goethes do not ap- pear often. 3. Names of countries are mostly neuter and take no ar- ticle unless preceded by an inflected adjective ; e. g. (S^janien THE USE OF THE ARTICLE 203 .ift mein §eimat[anb, Spain is my native land ; ganj (S^5anien, all Spain; but ba§ fd^one S^janien, beautiful Spain. a. On the other hand, the article is regularly used with feminine names of countries, and with a few that are not feminine. Some of these take, or may take, the article in English. Such are : bo§ (or ber) (SlfoB, Alsatia. bic Kormanbie, Normandie bie (Jnmpogne, the Campagna ber 5PeIo)jrune§, the Peloponnesus bte ©aScogne, Gascony bie ^falj, the Palatinate bie j?rim, the Crimea bie ©d^roeij, Switzerland bie 2aufi^, Lusatia bie lartarei, Tartary bie SeUante, the Levant bie Sitrlei, Turkey bie TOoIbau, Moldavia bie Sakt^ei, Wallachia and others in ei. So also ber SSteiSgau, iAe Breisgau, and others in gau; bic 9teumart, tAe Neumark, and others in matt ; bie SaSetterou, the Wet- terau, and others in au ; baS 3Sogt(anb, the Vogtland, bie iJJiebcrlonbe, the Netherlands, and others in lonb, laube. For baS Sirot, ( He of dirt. 2. The use of ber before SBater, 2Ruttcr, ®d)Wefter, iPcfter, etc., is South-German, but very common in the classics; e.g. baS mujj @tc nid|t ber SKutter fagcn (G.), you must not tell your mother that. The THE USE OF THE ARTICLE 205 North-German prefers a possessive, as in English. Apossessive should always he used when it would not otherwise he clear whose father, sister, lover, etc., is meant. 228. The Distributive bcr occurs (chiefly in expres- sions of price) with the sense of a, an, per ; e. g. e§ foftet jtoet Waii haS> ^funb, it costs two marks a pound. So also one may say bretmal bie 2Bo(i)e (or in ber 2[Boc£)e, or ft)oct}ent= lic^), three times a week. 229. Prepositional Phrases — a highly idiomatic ele- ment of every language — present numerous peculiarities in the use of the article which must be learned by ob- servation. The following examples will illustrate : in bte Sircf)e gef)en, to go to church ; in bte ©cf)ule gef)en, to go to school ; auf ber ©djule, at school ; in ber @cf)ule, m school ; jum Seifpiet, for example ; jum %t\{, in part ; eine jur grau ne^men, to take one to wife, for a wife ; einen jum ^rafi= benten h)at)(en, to elect one president ; im §imme(, in heaven (but in the sky) ; m ber §olIe, in hell ; jur §o[(e, to hell ; im ^arabiefe, in paradise ; jur ®e)unb£)ett ! heres to your health ! jur gtucflid)en 3ieife ! here's to a pleasant journey ! 230. The Use of etn. The indefinite article is the numeral etn weakened by loss of stress. It precedes all other modifiers of its noun except Weldi, toaiS fitr and [old^, and it may precede folrf) (§135, 1). 1. In talk the forms of etn often suffer apheresis of et or even of the entire syllable eiu ; e. g. tie ftellen (lug 'ne (= einc) SJor^ut au8 (S.), put out a picket; bu bift 'n (= eiii) braoer finabe, a good boy; eS Wat tnat (= einmot) ein .Saifer, there was once an emperor. 2. The use of ein corresponds in the main very closely to that of a, an (but see §§ 228, 229, 231). Thus, just as in English, it may go with an abstract noun or a noun of ma- terial to denote a particular case or a concrete object ; e. g. eine ^Jreube, a joy ; eine ©d^on^ett, a beauty; ein ®Ia§, a 206 THE USE OF THE ARTICLE glass. So, too, it may go with a proper name, having then the sense of one such as ; e. g. ba§ tcare einem ©driller untn6g= lic^, that would he impossible for a Schiller. a. With verbal nouns ein often serves to emphasize the vehemence, the frequent repetition, or the long continuance of an action ; e. g. bag ift ein ©tiitmen (G.), that is a storming, i. e. how we go storming; baS War ein ©pajicren (G.), that luas a walking, i. e. they were always walking together; nun foH eS an ein ®cf)obeIft)o(ten (G.), now weHl pro- ceed to a cracking of skulls. 231. The Omission of tin. In the predicate, and also after a\S, ein is apt to be omitted before an unmodified noun denoting vocation, rank, character, station in life, less often before one denoting nationality ; e. g. mein SBruber ift Solbat (G.), mi/ brother is a soldier; er [tare ofe Shrift (Gr-), he died a Christian. 1. If the noun is modified by an adjective or a genitive, ein is generally used unless noun and modifier form a set phirase ; e. g. er ift ein grower Stricter, a great poet ; but er ift |)reu|ifd^er ©olbat, fonigli^er diat, aRitglieb beS 9ieid^§tag§, he is a Prussian soldier, (a) royal councillor, (a) member of parliament. a. Exceptions to both the above rules are numerous ; so much so that the Grimm Dictionary merely says the article may drop out in such cases. 232. Repetition of the Article. If the article is used before the first of two or more nouns connected in the same construction, it must be repeated with each fol- lowing noun if there is change of gender ; e. g. bei" ili3- nig itnb bie Saiferiit, the Mng and the empress ; ber (Strom, \)0S, Wttx, '^(x^ ©dj gcf)6rt bent SiJnig (S.), the river, the sea, the salt belong to the king. 1. If these is no change of gender the repetition viag be dispensed with, and viiwit be if the two nouns refer to the same person or thing; e.g. ber S^aifer unb Sonig, the em- THE GENDER OF NOUNS 207 p&ror and king (one person), but ber ^aifer unb ber Konig, two persons ; eine griin' unb toei^e 3^af)ne, a green-and-wMte banner, but eine griine unb eine toei^e 3^af)ne, a green and a ivhite banner. 2. The rule of repetition applies also to adjectives and possessives ; e. g. guter SBein unb guteS 33ier, good wine and {good) beer; bie ^eitfi^rift fiir beutfc^eS 2((tertum unb beutfd^e 2iteraturgef^id£)te, Journal for German Antiquity and {Ger- man) Literary History ;■ \tm (jofjer @ang, fetn' eble ©eftalt (G.), his lofty stride, his noble form. But an uninflected ad- jective need not be repeated; e.g. ()at ©ie gut 93ier unb 2Bein (TJ.) ? have yoti good beer and xvine ? a. Exceptions to the rule of repetition are common in poetry and in talk; e. g. waS foil alt bet ©djmerj unb Jiift (G.) ? what means all the pain and pleasure f THE GENDER OF NOUNS 233. Gender as Determined by Meaning. The brief statement in § 75 may be expanded as follows : 1. Masculine are names of males, points of the compass, stones, vsrinds, seasons, months and days of the week ; e. g. 3)tann, man ; ©tier, bull ,■ ^engft, stallion ; @6er, boar ; 58ar, bear ; §a^n, coek ; Jtorb, north or north wind ; ^ief et, flint ; %XKm.\, granite ; W\x\.izx, winter ; %\i!a,July; W\VCm^6:i , Wed- nesday. 2. Feminine are the names of females, most trees and flowers (especially those ending in e), most German rivers, and nearly all abstract terms ; e. g. ^u^, cow ; ©tute, mare ; ©au, sow; §enne, hen; Suc^e, beech; ©id^e, oak; 3f;elfe, pink; 'I)onau, Danube ; '!tuQm'!>,vi7-tue ; Ttaarafter, a man of solid character. 248. The Genitive as Sole Object of Verbs. A num- ber of verbs take, or may take, a genitive as sole ob- ject ; e. g. geben!e be^ ©abbottageS, remember the sabbath day f )"c£)one meiner, spare me ; \6) bebarf S^reg 93eiftanbe§, / need your assistance. 1. This construction is on the wane. It is found in the classics, and may still occur, in stately writing, after a pretty large number of verbs. But the most of them admit, or even prefer, besides the genitive, some other construction. Such are (the alternative being put in brackets) : ac^ten, heed [auf, ace] gene(en, give birth to bebiitfcn, need [aoc] geniegen, enjoy [aoc] bege^ren, desire [aoc] geWa^rcn, perceive [ace] braudien, need [ace] f)arven, wait [auf, aoc] banten, thank [ace] Ijiiteii, guard [ace] bcnten, think [an, ace] lad^en, laugh [u6er, ace] entbe^ren, lack [ace] maiigetn, lack [ace] enttaten, lack [ace] Vfegcn, attend to [ace] ermangclit, lack [ace] jd)onen, spare [ace] ertticibnen, mention [ace] f^JOttcn, mock [iiliev, ace] fro^Iod'ett, ex,ult [iiber, ace] fierben, die [an, dat.] gebtaudjcn, rise [ace] (Uev)fc^teii, ?/iiss [ace] gebcuten, think btxee\\en, forget [ace] THE GENITIVE 221 Bertangen, desire [nacfi, dat] toattm, rule [iiber, ace] toa^ten, guard [aoc] tnarten, wait [auf, aoc] lt)a^tnet)men, perceive [ace] a. Sometimes difference of meaning is associated -witli difference of construction. Tlius Iad)en and jpotten are apt to take the gen. wlien used figuratively in tlie sense make light of; e. g. ic^ \ai)tt iiber ben @paj3, laughed at the joke, but Iacf)te feitier ®rof|ungen, made light of his threats. Cf. furtlier feincS 3Initc8 marten, attend to one's business, but ttuf ben 3ug marten, wait for the train ; bcr $Rut)e pftegcn, take rest, but einen Ston!en pftegen, nurse a sick person. b. The gen. as sole object is for the most part a gen. of cause, de- noting that which occasions the activity or state denoted by the verb ; hence §nnger8 ftetben, die of hunger, and eine8 bofcn £obe« flerben, die an evil death. Some cases which might seem to come under this head are partitive genitives ; e. g. fid) 9{ot8 er^oten, get advice (§ 250) ; others are adverbial ; e. g. bc8 ©laubenS leben, live in the faith (§ 251). Diffi- cult to classify is 35erfteilen8 Ipielen, play hide and seek. 249. The Genitive as Secondary Object occurs with numerous verbs in connection with an accusative; e. g. ic^ freue mtcC) betne§ §eil^, I rejoice in thy salvation; toetcf) anbrer ©iinbe ftagt ba§ ^erj bic^ an (S.) ? of what othei- sin does thy heart accuse thee ? The verbs are : 1. Yerbs of 'judicial action' and their kind, the genitive denoting that of which some one is accused, convicted, ad- monished, deemed worthy, etc. Such are : anttagen, accuse Io«fpved^en, acquit oerflagen, accuse bcle^reii, inform inaf)nen, admonish (»et)tof)nen, reward befdjeiben, inform iiberfii^ren, convict Berftdjern, assure bcfd^ulblgen, accuse iiber^ebcn, exempt setgemiffern, assure bejidjtigen, accuse tibermeifen, convict miitbigen, deem worthy ftcifpred^en, acquit iibetseugen, convince jcificn, accuse a. Setc^ren occurs in such locutions as man ^at tnic^ eineS anbern belc^rt, I am otherwise advised. i8efd)eiben in the same sense is now quaint, liberjcugen, Berftd)crn and verbs of acquitting may take the dat. with Bon instead of the gen. 58erfi(i^etn admits also a dat. of the person and an ace. of the tiring : ic^ Berfi^re bir metne Ket(nal)me, 1 assure you of my sympathy, instead of id) Berfidire bi(^ metnet Seit no^me. SUia^nen usually takes an with ace. 222 SYNTAX OF THE CASES 2. Several verbs of separation or deprivation, the geni- tive denoting that of which some one is deprived. Such are : entfe^en, dispossess cnttbb^nen, wean Berjagett, drive out berHJcifen, banish berauBen, rob enttaben, relieve entbinben, release entloffen, dismiss entbtbgen, deprive enttafteti, relieve ent^eben, relieve enttebigcn, exempt entlteiben, divest a. Sntbinben, =blb6en, ^cte"/ 4af[en, may take a dat. with Bon. Entloffen admits three constructions: thus to dismiss one from service is etnen fcineS ®ienfte«, or »om Stenfte, or ou8 bem ©ienfte entloffen. Other compounds of ent talie a dat. of the person, and an ace. of the thing. See § 258, 2. 3. A multitude of reflexive verbs with meanings too va- rious to classify. Such are : fti^ obtun, renounce onmogen, claim onne^mcu, take charge bebienen, make use beftelg(ig)en, attend to begeben, renounce bemad)tigen, get possession bemciftern, get control befc^eiben, acquiesce in beftnnen, bethink one's self entaitgern, renounce ent^otten, refrain from cntlcbigen, acquit one's self ent|cl)togen, get rid entfinnen, recollect erbarmen, pity etbreiften, dare to do \i6) erftec^en, dare to do (er)freuen, enjoy erinnetn, remember et!iit)nen, dare to do erlre^ren, keep from getrbften, expect riitjmen, boast fdjitnen, be ashamed iiber^eben, boast untctfongcn, "> dare to untertoinben, J undertake Sermeffen, dare to do Bermuten, expect Berfe^en, expect (Ber)trbften, acquiesce in BetlBcgen, dare to do iBcigern, refuse a. Some of these verbs admit other oonstractions ; e. g. fii) (er)= freiien, viil)mcn, fc^nmen, the aco. with iibcr ; fid^ onmogcn, the dat. of the reflexive and the ace. of the tiling. (Srinnern, with ace, for jtd^ ciinnern, with gen., is a North-German provincialism. 4. Certain impersonal verbs of feeling, the genitive giv- ing the cause of the emotion ; e. g. mid; jammert feiner 9iot, I pitij his distress. Such are, letting mi(^ represent the va- riable personal object : ^ THE GENITIVE 223 e8 bauert mic^, I pity e3 getuftet mic^, I desire eS efelt midfi, I am disgusted e« jammert mid), I pity ea erbormt mic^, I pity c« reitt mid), I regret e8 Bcrbticgt mid), I am annoyed a. With the most of these verbs the gen. is becoming quaint, and iiber with the ace. or mcgen with the gen. (with getit[tct, nod) and the dat.) is preferred. Note finally eS (dcr)ro^nt ftc^ ber 3»ul)e, it is worth the trouble. 250. The Partitive Genitive with Verbs. At an ear- lier period several verbs might take a genitive to denote that the object was affected only in part ; e. g. beS Sroteg, or 93rot!3, effen, to eat bread, tnanger dii pain, where one would now say Srot or bom 93rote or etloag S3rot effen ; et gi6t feine§ S3rot§ ben Strmen (Lu.), he giveth of Us bread to the poor. 1. But this construction is now obsolete or quaint, except perhaps after geniegen (cf. § 248). Where it occurs in the classics it is usually held to be a Grecism or Gallicism ; e. g. brad)te bie SMutter beS I)err= Iid)en SJSeineg (G.), brought {some) of the noble wine; e8 fd)enfte ber S8of)me beg perlenben SBeinS (S.), poured out {some) of the sparkling wine. a. But a few isolated phrases survive in common use ; e. g. fti^ 9iat8 et^olen, get advice. 251. The Adverbial Genitive. The genitive is used with verbs to denote various adverbial relations : 1. Place; e.g. je^t ge^e jeber feineg 2Bege§ (S.), noiv let each go his ivay ; haS Jjretfen bie ©d^iiler atterorten (G.), the students praise that everywhere. a. The adverbial gen. of place is no longer common, except in the phrase allerorten (altcrort^). Where it oocui-s in the classics after gel)en, tominett, jie^en, and other verbs of motion, present usage prefers the ace. (§ 266). Goethe sometimes forces German idiom a little in his use of this construction ; e. g. baS ift be^ Sanbeg nidjt ber S5raud), that is not the custom in these parts {Faust, 1. 2949, bfS ?atibe8 being = I)ier gii ?anbe) ; gianiicn broben Harer ( = in ber flaren) 9Jad)t, shine up there in the clear night (ibid. 1. 4647). 224 SYNTAX OF THE CASES 2. Time ; e. g. bie State tierfammelten \id) beS gJtittagS (G.), the counclUors assembled at noon; 2^age§ 3(r6eit, 3tbenb3 ©dfte (G.), tcork h]i day, guests at night. a. This use of the gen. is very common in certain set phrases ; e. g. ciiteS SogeS, one day; eineS ?t6eubg, one evening; BormittagS, fore- noons; oteubs, evenings; uacf)t«, at night; neuerbiiigS (i. e. iieucr Singe, with adverbial 8), recently; uon alters l)ei', from of old; uor alterij, anciently. On the ace. of time, as compared with the gen., see § 266, 2, a. 3. Manner and degree ; e. g. nad) Uri fa^r' ic^ ftef)enben J-u^eS {^.), I iriU. go to Uri without delay; metneS 2Biffen§ ift eg bag erfte 9)Jal, so far as I know, it is the first time. a. Here the phrases are still more numerous ; e. g. teincSttJcgg, hy no means; gliidlicfjerioeife, happily, and others in suicife ; gelt)if)er= majjeii, in a certain sense, and others in =iTiageu (gen. of 3)ta6); atlevs btngS, to be sure; unuerridjteter @ad)e, in vain, with errand unaccom- plished; nteinerfeits on my part ; metneS @rad)ten§, i)im?/ op mion; bcrgeftalt, in such a way ; beg toeiteren, in detail. 252. The Complementary Genitive with Adjectives. Certain adjectives may take a genitive to complement their meaning ; e. g. bc§ ®efu()l!S nic£)t maditig ftanb id} 'iia (S.), I stood there not able to control my feelings ; bo^ [ie beg 3)range§ miib' [inb (S.), that they are tired of oppression. 1. The adjectives that take the genitive express for the most part the ideas of power, possession, knowledge, capa- city, abundance and their opposites. Such are (including their compounds with un): anfiiJ)tig, in sight fa[)ig, capable inne, percipient bar, hare fret,/ree funbig, acquainted bebiitftig, m need ^nl), glad lebi^, free bettotigt, in need gebenf, mindful leer, empty bett)u§t, conscious geli3al)r, aware Io8, free blog, bare geltidrtig, expectant inQd)tig, able to control einig, agreed Beluijj, certain niiibe, tired eingebent, mindful gett)o()ut, used quitt, done ctfatjteti, experienced I|abt|aft, in possession |ott, sated THE GENITIVE 225 \ii)\tMQ, guilty Betb8(f)tig, siispicioMs noUifuU ftd)er, certain uerluftig, lacking Wert, worth teili)aft, partaking Bernmtenb, expectant ttjurbig, worthy iiberbriiffig, weary aerfic^ert, assured a. Several of these adjectives, when used predicatively, may take an ace. instead of a gen. ; namely, auftc^tig, getoa^r, gehjoljnt, Ijab^aft, tnne, Io8, fatt, Dcrmutenb, Wert ; e. g. al? mid) bie gee anftdltig Wurbe (Platen), when the fairy noticed (became observant of ) me; ben Sojeil ftnb fie loa (G.), they are rid of the Evil One; ba8 raor bie SUiii^e tiic^t Wert (G.), not worth the trouble. — This construction originated thus : The old gen. e8 in id) bin eg loS, I am rid of it, and similar locutions, came to be felt as an ace, and this led to the use of a real ace. in place of eS ; i. e. the misunderstood ii^ bin e8 Io8 drew after it id^ bin baS S)ing to8. 6. grei, leer, and (08 may be followed by Bon, and faf)ig by ju. SBiirbig and unmilrbig occur sometimes with a dat. ; e. g. ni(!^t8 ift ei» nem SKann nnroiirbiger (L.), more unworthy of a man. c. Adverbs that govern the gen. will be treated as prepositions. See § 376. 253. The Partitive Genitive with Adjectives, Pronouns and Adverbs. A genitive of the whole may occur after numerals, after certain pronouns and pronominal ad- jectives, and after adjectives in the comparative and superlative; e.g. fiinf unfre^ Drbensi, five of our order; alter guten Singe ftnb bret, of all good things there are three; iinfer einer, one of us; ber ftiacfern SRdnner biele (S.), many brave men; ber yc^redlt(^fte ber ©c^recfen (S.), the most terrible of terrors. 1. After a numeral the partitive genitive is no longer common except when the numeral agrees with a noun un- derstood. Thus for neun ganjer '^aijXt (L.), nine whole years, one would now say neun ganje "^aiixz. But neun unfrer ®e= feEf(^«ft, nine of our company, or jtoan^ig ber beften, tiventy of the best, is good usage, tho the dative with Don or unter also occurs. 2. The pronouns and pronominals which admit a parti- tive genitive are tcer, toelc^, toa§, all, anber-, 6eib-, ein, einig-. 226 SYNTAX OF THE CASES etlid^-, ettnaS, genug, jeb-, !etn, manc^, tnef)rer-, nid^tg, tiiel and toenig. But the most of these admit also tjon or unter with the dative, and this is the preferred construction with jemanb and niemanb. a. The old partitive genitive of an adjective after ni^tS (cf. § 320, 2), ettoa§, and other indeolinables, ceased long ago to be felt as a genitive, and is now treated as an appos- itive ; e. g. ju tuaS S3efferm finb toir geboren (S.), we are horn for something better. Goethe's ju toa^ ?(euen (for 5Reuem, Faust, 1. 3254) is for the rime's sake. b. So also in such expressions as tt)a§ 2!Bunber§, what {of) wonder, toaS 2^eufel§; ivhat the deuce, etc., the genitive, ceasing to be felt as such, dropped its case-ending and be- came an appositive; hence toa§ SBunber, toa§ Steufel, toaS §enfer, tcaS 'Sia.\xh (Faust, 1. 6549). c. The form anberS, else, remains unchanged after roer, jettianb, tlic= manb ; e. g. roer auberS, wlio else ; tnit nicmonb anber8 (not anberm). 3. A partitive genitive may occur after certain adverbs of place ; e. g. tuo^tn be§ 3Bege§, whither away ; fooEjer beg Sanbe§, from what part of the country ; too anberS o?r anber§= *DD, elsewhere ; nirgenb anber§, nowhere else. i. Quite anomalous is Goethe's use of a partitive gen. with Ijaufig ill Faust, 1. 3098 : 3l)r J|abt ber greunbe £)oufig, you have friends in abundance. 254. The Genitive with Prepositions. A large num- ber of prepositions and prepositional adverbs govern the genitive. For a list with illustrations, see §§ 376-7. 255. The Genitive in Exclamations. After an in- terjection the genitive is sometimes used to denote the occasion of the feeling ; e. g. o ber ungliidfeligen Stunbe ! oh, the unhappy hour ! pfut be§ 53o)ett)id)tg ! out upon the villain ! 1. This construction is distinctly literary, and is becoming rare even in poetry. Common language prefers the nom., or else a prepo- sitional phrase ; e. g. nitt eurem ®olbe (S.), out upon your gold! pfui iibcv bid) ! fle upon you 1 THE DATIVE 227 THE DATIVE 256. The dative depends upon verbs, adjectives and prepositions, rarely upon nouns and interjections. Its name, from the Latin casus dativus, implies that it is the case of giving, i. e. of the indirect object. But it has other functions also. . 257. The Dative with Verbs: Sole Object. A large number of intransitive verbs take a single object, or complement of their meaning, in the dative ; e. g. icE) baii!e bir, / thanh thee ; ben ©otterrt gteid)' ic^ nid)t (G.), I am not like the gods; mir toirb natf)gefe^t (S.), / am followed. 1. The verbs that take the dative as sole object express such ideas as motion or effort toward and away from ; dis- appearance, lack ; appurtenance, fitness, suitability ; pleas- ure and displeasure ; friendly, gracious, or submissive ac- tion, and the reverse ; resemblance and correspondence. Some have English equivalents that need no preposition and may seem to be transitive ; others require in English a preposition, usually to. Such are : fotgcn, follow ftommen, len^t gebii^ten, 6e^t gefaHen, please geI)oren, belong ge^orc^eii, obey geniigen, suffice gcf^e^en, happen (ge)3iemen, become gtouben, believe gleicf)en, resemble grollen, be angry £)elfen, lielp a. Slntttiorten takes a dat. of the person only : what one answers stands in the ace, that to which one answers in the ace. with auf ; 6. g. antliiorte mir, answer me; antraorte auf meiiie groge, answer my aifneirx, resemble ontlBorten, answer begegtien, meet bebagen, please betommen, b^t banten, thank bienen, serve broken, threaten biin!en, seem etiiegen, succumb (er)(^clnen, appear fef)Ien, fail fludjen, curse l^ulbigcn, pay homage mongeln, be lacking na^en, approach nii^en, benefit ^affeii,^* fi^aben, injure \iinmije\n, flatter tro^cn, defy (Ber)trauen, trust Weid^en, yield loel^ren, defend jiivitcn, be angry 228 SYNTAX OF THE CASES question; er anttoortete niit fetiic @t(be, he answered me not a syllable — ©egeflnen occurs in the classics witii tlie ace. — Sionten = toctban!cii may have an ace. of the thing ; e. g. iii) (t)er)bante i^m mein ®(ucf, 1 owe to him my happiness. — Olaubeil taltes the dat. of the person in the sense of believe, the ace. with an in that of believe in (but in Faust, 1. 3434, id) gloube i^n = I believe in him). — 9KangeIn now usually has a dat. of the person, the thing needed oeing in the nom. or dat. with an ; e. g. mir maiigelt @etb, or e8 niongelt ntir an Oelb, instead of id) mangle be6 ©elbeS (§ 248, 1). 2. A still larger number of verbs, with meanings similar to those mentioned above, take the dative in virtue of their composition with one of the prefixes an, auf, au§, 6ei, ein, ent, entgegen, mi^, nac^, unter, ber, bor, tioxan, borauS, totbcr, ju, jubor. Examples are: a6geE)en, be lacking; ange^oren, belong; auffaEen, surprise; auSlceid^en, evade; beipf[id)ten, support; einf alien, occur; entge{)en, escape; entgcgencilen, hasten toward ; mifefaKen, displease ; nad^ftefjen, be inferior; unterliegen, succumb ; Uerfc^tcinben, vanish; tiorbeugen, pre- vent ; tioran= and borauSgeljen, precede ; toiberftel^en, repel; jueilen, hasten to ; juborfommen, anticijmte. a. Verbal phrases with similar meanings may also take the dat. ; e. g. cincm ju §i(fe lommen, come to the aid of one ; einem jur 6^re ge= xtxijm, redound to one's credit. Cf . § 259, 2. 258. The Dative with Verbs : Secondary Object. Many transitive verbs take a secondary object in the dative, the primary object being usually a noun or pronoun in the accusative, but often an infinitive or a clause ; e. g. gebt mir ben ^elm (S.), give me the helmet ; \6) toerbe je(5t bicf) !einem SRac^6ar reic^en (G.), I shall hand thee now to no neighbor ; gurc^t gebietet if)m JU fdE)ft)etgen, fear lids him he silent; mm fog' mir ein§, man foil fein SSunber gtauben (Gr.), now let some one tell me that we are nat to believe in miracles. What is here called the secondary object may be : 1. A true indirect object, translatable ' by the objective with to, and occm-ring chiefly with verbs of giving, com- THE DATIVE 229' municating, showing, proving, and the like (see example* above). a. ©agen, say, is apt to take the dat. with jju -when followed by a, literal quotation in the direct form ; e. g. er fagte mir, id) fet Derriidt, told me I was crazy; but er (agte ju nut : bu bift Oerructt. — @d)reiben, vyrite, takes the dat. , or the aoo. with an. — Some verbs of this class,, e. g. bemeifeii, show, and erlt)St)nen, mention, admit the ace. with gegen instead of the dat. 6. Some of the verbs given in § 257, 1, may take a direct object in the form of an ace. or a clause ; e. g. ic^ bante bir, bag — , / thank thee- that — ,■ ontlnorte nttt ba8, answer me that; ba8 glauBe id) btr tiic^t, I do not believe you (when you say) that. 2. A privative object, denoting that /rom which something is separated, and translatable by the objective with from ; e.g. ber Siing, ben er bem S'">iXQ genommen (W.), the ring- which he had taken from, the dwarf ; bief en 2^roft foff mir nie= maub rauben, no one shall rob me of this comfort. a. This dat. occurs after verbs of taking, stealing, withholding,, alienating, etc. (many being compounds of ent or IBcg), some of which, however, may take Don instead. It represents an extinct ablative. 3. The beneficiary object, denoting that /or which some- thing is done ; e. g. h)a§ faufft bu beiner %xau ju SBeifjnac^ten. (Gr.) ? what shall you buy your wife for Christmas ? a. This construction is comparatively rare with transitive verbs,, the ace. with fiir being preferred. Still it is closely akin to the dat. of interest, which is very common. 4. An object due to the composition of the verb with, one of the prefixes mentioned in § 257, 2. It has to be translated in various ways ; e. g. \d) fet?e bem ®inge fein (Snbe ab, I see no end to {of) the thing; man fte^t bir'§ an ben 2Iu= gen an (G.), one can see it by your eyes ; ber SBinb trteb un§- ben (Stau6 entgegen, drove the dust in our faces ; ettoaS einem S3riefe Beilegen, to enclose som,ething in a letter. a. With several of these compounds the dat. object is a reflexive- pronoun ; e. g. \i) mage mir baS 9tect)t an, I claim [arrogate to myself) the right ; \i) bitte mir baS au«, I make that a condition ; fic^ ettraS cin= bitben, imagine something; fvi) etiraS jutrauen, trust one's self for something. //^O SYNTAX OF THE CASES n / 259. The Dative of Interest. The dative is freely ( /used to denote the person (less often the thing) con- cerned in a statement. a. The translation has to vary greatly ; e. g. toie ge^t e§ ^^nen ? how goes it with you ? mir ift e§ einerlei, it is all the same to me; bem 3?ater graufet'g (G.), the father shudders. In connection with a noun that has the definite article it often has the force of a possessive ; e. g. eS ge^t mir anS §er3, it goes to my heaH ; bag Qtxtx&ji if;tn jur ®^re, that re- dounds to his credit. It occurs : 1. With transitive verbs as the case of the beneficiary object (see above, § 258, 3). Here belong niunerous verbal phrases containing a transitive verb; e.g. ba§ tat er mir juliebe, he did that for my sake; f(^rei6' e§ bir t^tnterS Dfir, make a note of it ; bief en mu^ ic^ lt)a§ jum beften geben (G.), / must do something for these fellows ; id; madEje e§ mir jur Slufgabe, I makei it my task. a. Where a personal object is accompanied by a phrase specifying a part of the object there is sometimes a choice between the dat. and the ace; e. g. er trat mir (or mid)) auf ben %\x^, he stepped, upon my foot. 2. With intransitive verbs ; e. g. fein §er5 fd^tug ber gan= jen 5Jlenjd£)f)eit (S.), his heart heat for all mankind ; hjie nur bem ^ojjf ni^t aHe ^offnung fc^tcinbet (G.), how only for that head does all hope not vanish. a. Here belong a multitude of impersonal phrases with fein, toerben, bleiben, gefc^el^en, geEten, and others ; e. g. e? ift mir rec^t, it suits me ; mir toirb fo Iicf)t (G.), it grows so clear to me; eS gej(f)ief)t bir recl)t, it serves you right ; e§ fd^metft mir gut, it tastes good to me ; e§ tut mir leib, / am sorry ; e§ liegt mir biel baran, it is of great concern to me. b. Add to these the strictly impersonal verbs: e§ al^nt mir, I forbode; e§ beliebt mir, / choose ; e§ efelt mir, lam disgusted ; e§ gcbrirfjt mir, / lack ; eg grant mir, I abhor ; e? graufet mir, / shudder ; eg fc^aubert mir, / shudder ; eg fc^winbelt mir, I am giddy ; eg trciumt mir, I dream. THE DATIVE 231 3. With passive verbs (including gef^el^en), and some- times after toerben in the sense of ju teil toerben ; e. g. ba tcirb ber ©eift eud^ Idd^I breffiert (G.), there your mind will he well trained ; ba loarb ber 2:a^)fer!eit if)r Sofin (G.)? ^^'■«'* ^"^ very got its reward ; eitt Unrc(^t ift mir gefc^e^en, a wrong has been done me. 4. As ' ethical ' dative — a personal pronoun interjected loosely in the sentence to indicate indirect interest or sym- pathetic concern on the part of the speaker or listener ; e. g. 'nett Sl^fel fc^ie^t ber SSater bir bom Saum (S.), father can shoot an apple from the tree for you; er l^at eui^ f)er3li^ bran gebad^t (G.), he thought of it earnestly, you'll he glad to hear ; ge£)t mir, nid^tg toeiter babon (G.) ! go, I say, no more of that I 260. The Dative with Adjectives. A large number of adjectives govern the dative, the most of them oc- curring chiefly in the predicate ; e. g. tdj bin fonft alien SD?enf(^en gut (G-.), / am kindly disposed to all other men ; bie .^oflicllfeit ift euc^ gelaufig (G-)' politeness is natural to yoio ; er i[t bir neibifcE) (S.), he is envious of you. 1. The adjectives that govern the dat. have meanings similar to those given for verbs in § 257, 1. The list includes, first, participial adjectives from verbs that govern the dat., as entfptcc^cnb, corresponds ing; pa^^ewi, fitting ; angenieffen, adapted; secondly, a large number of words in bar, tic^ and ig. These suffixes either form passive ver- bals (the dat. denoting the object for which the action is feasible), as ben!6ar, thinkable, or else they mean replete with, having the character of, and the dat. denotes the object toward which the quality is mani- fested; e.g. haniiax, grateful ; ^teimiiii), friendly ; gunftig,/a«ora6!e. 2. Of adjectives not included under the foregoing heads the follow- ing are the most common : ob^olb, unfriendly eigen(tiimttii)), peculiar gleid), like fi^nlid), similar fcinb(Iid^), hostile gut, kindly disposed (an)geI)orig, belonging fremb, strange fieilfam, wholesome angcne^m, pleasant fotgfam, obedient bolb, gracious beEannt, known ge^orfani, obedient leic^t, easy benac^bart, neighboring gelegen, opportune ticb, dear bequem, comfortable gemein(fam), common na^e, near 232 SYNTAX OF THE CASES neibif(^, envious trcu, true ttiittfotnmen, welcome fd)tt)et, difficult Borteil^aft, helpful irunfd^cnShiert, desira- teuer, dear Wert, dear ble. a. To these add negative compounds with un, as unangene^m, un= treu ; also a number of specialized perfect participles, from verbs which may not elsewhere govern the dative ; as angeboren, innate; be= (djieben, destined; crgeben, devoted; ertt)iinjd)t, wished for; gelegen, opportune; genetgt, inclined; getDad)ieii, equal; gemogen, well dis- posed; iibcrlegeii, superior ; unvexijo^t, unhoped for ; tevbimten, obliged; Mxita^t, hateful ; tinXoanit, akin. Besides ab^olb there are also several other compounds of ah, in which the prefix denotes aloofness; e.g. abbriid^ig, abtriinnig, recreant. 6. A few other adjectives take the dat. when used in the predicate or adverbially in impersonal phrases ; e. g. e8 ift tnir atigft, I am anx- ious ; e8 ttiai^t miv bange, it makes me anxious ; eS ift tnir reif|t, it suits me; e8 tut mir Ictb, I am sorry. c. With many of the above named adjectives a prepositional con- struction is admissible ; thus fiir with the ace. after the passive ver- bals (e8 ift fiir mid) bentbor, instead of cS ift tnir ben!bar), and also aiter angenef]tn, f)cilfam, gut, paffenb, Borteil^oft, and others ; gegen with ace. after frcunblid), felnbtid), ge^otfam, treu, and Bon with dat. after com- pounds of ab and ent. 261. The Dative with Nouns is rare, but occurs no-w- and then in the classics ; e. g. ein 3)Jufter Surgern unb Souern (G.), a model for citizens and farmers ; ©etct^^eit etnem neuen SBunbe (G.), certainty to a new covenant. 1. -When it seems to occur in expressions of wishing it is really de- pendent on a suppressed verb ; e. g. @ott fci 2)ant, thanks be (given) to God; §cil ber Sungfrau (S.) ! hail to the Maid ! h)et) bir! woe to thee! a. Closely akin to this is the dat. with interjections, which is com- mon after mobt ; e. g. tro^I bir ! well for thee. After other interjec- tions it is rare ; but Schiller has (jfui beu gtenben ! out upon the wretches; and Goethe, o ben trefflid^en 3Ken|c^eu ! the excellent people ! 262. The Dative -with Prepositions. There are six- teen prepositions that no-w regularly take the dative, iiine that take the dative or accusative according to the nature of the construction, and several more that 7nay take the dative instead of some other more usual con- struction. For lists and illustrations see §§ 376-7. THE ACCUSATIVE 233 THE ACCUSATIVE 263. The Accusative as Direct Object. The direct ob- ject of a transitive verb is put in the accusative ; e. g. i6) tieb' bi(^, mic^ reijt beine f(|one (Se[tatt (G.), / love thee, thy heautifid form, charms me. a. The object may denote the result of the verbal action and is then called a 'factitive' object ; e. g. etnen iBrief fi^retben, to write a letter. 1. Certain verbs vary between the transitive and the in- transitive construction ; thus : a. Slntomtnen, in the sense of come over, and serfldjcni, assure, which usually take the ace, occur also with the dat. 6. A few others which usually take the dat. occur in the classics with the ace. Such are begegnen, meet; Ijelfeii, help; fc^meic^etn,./!a«- ter, and the impersonals biinteii, seem; etetit, disgust; grauett and graufen, horrify. After {often, cost, the personal object may be either dat. or ace. ; eg foftet blr (or Mc^) jc^n SJforf, it costs you ten marks. c. With others the case depends upon the meaning, or the nature of the construction. Thus bejoljten, pay, takes a dat. of the person and aco. of the thing (er bejalilte mir ba« @etb) ; but if there is only a personal object it stands in the ace. (er beiat)lte mic^). — 5Rac^al)mcit, imitate, may also take a dat. of the person, and an ace. of the thing. If there is but one obje'ct, it may stand in either case, but b em Setter nad^a^men means to take the teacher as a model, while ben Sef)rer nai^= airmen means to ape him maliciously. — Siufen, call, with ace. = sum- mon, with dat., call to. Cf. further §§ 249, 3, a, and 257, 1, a. 2. Observe that many verbs which are intransitive in the simple form have transitive compounds of kindred mean- ing ; e. g. bem State folgen, but ben 3tat befotgen, to follow the advice; auf eine garage antmorten, but eine grage beant= tDorten, to answer a question; einem fein @elb rauben, but einen feineS ©elbeS berauben, to rob one of one's money. 3. After certain impersonal verbs the accusative object, denoting the person concerned, looks as if it were the sub- ject of an intransitive verb ; e. g. i^rt fd)Idfert, he is drowsy ; m\ij bunit, methinks (but also mir biinlt, see above under 1, h) ; mic^ l^ungert, / am hungry. Here belong, further, e§ 234 SYNTAX OF THE CASES biirftet, e!elt, friert, fc^aubert mid^, / am thirsty, disgusted, cold, horrified. All are really transitive, e§ biinlt mic^, meaning it causes me to thinlc, if)n fc^Iafert, it makes him drowsy, etc. a. A much larger number of transitive verbs, not regularly imper- sonal, can be used impersonally -with an object which may or may not be literally translatable ; e. g. e8 freut mid), lam glad; tntd) iiberlciuft'«, I am all of a tremble; c8 fafit mid) talt betm ©c^opfc (G.), H is as if a cold hand seized me by the forelock. @3 gibt, there is, there are, with ace. object, is equivalent (but see § 340) to a form of fein, with predi- cate nom. Notice further the use of the ace. in eS (e^t §iebe, they are corning to blows, there is a fight on, and in eS l)at @efal)r, there is dan- ger. On the c8 in these idioms see § 303, 1, a. 264. The Cognate Accusative. Some intransitive verbs may take, in the accusative, an object which simply re- peats, in the form of a noun, the idea of the verb ; e. g. )te [tirdt einert eblen 2;ob (G.), she will die a noble death; id) m6d}te bittre 2;ranen toeinen (G.), / could weep bitter tears; gar fdjone ©piele fpiel' id) mit bir (G.), very beauti- ful games I will play ivith thee. 1. In like manner an intransitive verb may take a factitive object ; e. g. bcr Seng loc^elt feincn ©rug, Spring smiles its greeting ; Wai grinjeft bu iittt ^er (G.) ? what art thou grinning at mef 265. The Accusative as Secondary Object. There are several verbs which may take two objects in the accusa- tive ; e. g. bie ^DJiife f)Otte ben ^ifopUiS feine gobeln gelcf)rt (L.), the Muse had taught ^sop his fables ; bie ^offniing neitn' id) mcine ®otttn iioc| (S.), / still call Hope my god- dess. The construction may be considered under three heads, as follows : 1. The two objects are the person acted upon and the thing done. Here belong le^ren, teach, and sometimes also, but only when the thing-object is a neuter pronoun, bitten and fragen, ask, bereben and iiberreben, persuade ; e. g. le^re mi^ bie toa^re SBei^^eit, teach me true irisdom ; id) tpid bi(^ ettcaS fragen, I want to ask you something ; \d) bitte bid^ nur THE ACCUSATIVE 235 bie§, I ask you only this ; ifjr toerbet mtd^ ba§ nid^t iiberreben, you will not persuade me (of) that. See under d below. a. But after le^ren one meets also with a dat. of the person ; e. g. nur bag ScBen {ef)rct jcbem, itiaS et fei (G.), only life teaches every one what he is. The German of to-day tends to avoid the double aco. with Icfiren as pedantic ; instead of et le^rt niicfi (bie) ajtuftt, he teaches me music, say er untettid)tct mid^ in ber SOtuftf. After fragen, imc^ with dat. is used ; after bitten, um with ace. ; e. g. id) fragte tf)n nae^ bent Sege, I asked him the way ; icf) bat ifjn um §ilfe, / asked him for help. 6. With tt)iffen taffeit, tell, fcljen laffen, show, and the like, when an infinitive takes the place of the thing-object, the ace. is the rule, but the dat. a not infrequent exception ; e. g. lag mid) beine @(^al5e fe^cn, let me see your treasures ; but Ia§ eS mit buti^ (Sintradjt fc^en (G.), prove it to me by harmony. So, too, the dat. may follow ^eifeen, bid, when there is no infinitive; e. g. wer ^icg i^nt baS (L.) ? who bade him that? — instead of mev ^icg tl]n bag tun ? c. By a confusion, familiar also in English, lernen, learn, is some- times used with the sense and the construction of le^ren ; e. g. tc^ lerne fte aHerlct luftige Sieber (G.), I am ' learning ' her all sorts of jolly songs. But this is not good German. d. In the phrase e8 ntmmt mid) SBunber, I wonder at it, eS is really an old gen. of cause {wonder seizes me because of it) which came to be felt as a nom. So also the pronominal ace. after bitten, fragen, bcre» ben and iiberveben, seems to have resulted from mistaking the ei or eineS for an ace. in such phrases as it^ Bitte bic^'8, ic^ bitte bic^ nur eineS, andi then extending the analogy. In the phrase jemanb Siigen flrafcn, accuse one of lying, which looks like an instance of two accusatives, Siigcn is probably an old gen. of cause {chide one for lying). 2. The two objects are the person or thing named and the name, the verbs those meaning to call (nennen, f)ei^en, fd^elten, f c^imjjfen, taufen) ; e. g. bu nennft bici^ einen STeit (G.), you call yourself a part ; \d) barf mic^ nirf)t be§ ®Iu(Je§ Siebting fd^elten (S.), I can not call myself a favorite of Fortune. a. After verbs of making, choosing, appointing — madden, ttjat|(cn, ermal)ten, ctncnnen^ what would be in English the second or factitive object is usually put in the dat. with ju ; e. g. bie 35erjmeiflung mad^t micfi jur gurie, jum Eiet (S.), makes me a fury, a beast; bet Slei^gtag ermatirte 3JuboIf gum ^aifer, elected Rudolf emperor. ■236 SYNTAX OF THE CASES 3. The second object is an appositive with aU or lute. The verbs are especially those of regarding, representing, tnowing, finding, but many others admit the construction ; ■e.g. i^r^abt mi^ ftet§ al§ eine g^einbin nur betrac^tet (S.),yoM have always regarded me only as an enemy ; hai Sitter finbet un§ nur nocf) al§ tt)af)re ^inber (G.), old age finds us still real children ; bu be^anbelft mid^ toie jene ^a|e (G.), you treat me like the cat in the fable. a. W9 denotes the character or capacity, wic the manner, in -whicli the first object is concerned ; e. g. man bctra^tetc i^tl a\9 (S^jion unb be^anbeltc if)n Itiic elnen §mib, they regarded him as a spy and treated Mm like a dog. b. Eor the nom. instead of the second object after a reflexive verb see § 271, 3. c. Certain verbs of regarding and representing, as adjten, fatten, flUSgeben, ertlfiren, are most often followed by fiit with ace; e. g. ai}t' c8 nic^t fiir 9iaub (G.), do not esteem it a derogation; fiir h)a« i^ciltft bu iaS Xin (G.) ? for what do you take the beast ? 266. The Adverbial Accusative. The accusative may he used to denote various adverbial relations, as follows : 1. The way ; e. g. tt)anbte beine fiir^terlid^e ©tra^e (S.), ffo thy fearful way ; bod^ jieJ^en fie it;ren 2Beg bafjin, er ge^t ben fetnen (G.), but they go on their way, he goes his. a. As used with intransitive verbs the ace. of the way might be re- garded as a cognate aoc, only we can not separate er ging ben liitjeften SBeg from er fanbtc mid) ben tiirjeften SBeg, both of which are good Ger- man. This ace. is often accompanied by an adverb of direction ; e. g. «r ging bie Sreppe binanf, he went up the steps ; ber ?anbbogt fu£|rt ifjn ben ®ee ^crauf (S.), is bringing him up the lake. 2. Time ; e. g. toir miifjen fort nod^ biefe ^Rad^t, we must go this very night ; unb triite fie ben 2tugenbltrf herein (G.), and were she to enter this moment; er leert' i^n jeben SdE)mau§ (G.), he drained it at every feast. a. As we have seen above, time Is also denoted by the gen. In general the gen. is less definite, or is used in phrases implying repeti- THE ACCUSATIVE 237 tion or custom ; e. g. eineg StbenbS, one evening ; eincS fiijonen 5Eagc9 (indefinite time) ; beS abenb«, nad)t8, t3ormtttag6 (custom). In the phrase jebeii 2lbenb, every evening, the idea of repetition is contained in jebcn. Distinguish the ace. of tune in gteid) btcfcti Slugenblicf, this Very moment, from the ace. of measure, in reorte einen Stugenblid, wait a moment. b. Note the use of (gnbe, end, 5!JJitte, middle, 2tnfang, beginning, without article before the name of a month ; e.g. er le^tte @nbe SUMrj nad) §au|e, he returned home the last of March. 3. Measure of time, space, weight and cost; e.g. er ift fc^on einen SKonat ijkt, has been here a month; toir gingen eine ©tre(f e toeiter, we -went a piece further ; e§ tciegt einen ©entner, it weighs a hundred; e§ foftet fe(^g SJlarf, it costs six marks. a. Measure of difference after an adjective was formerly expressed by a gen. , and traces of the construction are found in the classics ; e . g. eines §aupte8 longer at8 bie SJitter alle (W.), a head taller than all the knights. One would now say um ein §aupt tdnger. 6. The aoc. of measure is very often accompanied by an adjective or adverb ; e. g. brei Safjre alt ; ]ed)S gitg f|0^ ; cine Ette breit ; brei ajJeilen entfernt. 267. The Accusative Absolute. The accusative is often used absolutely, as if dependent upon I)a6enb un- derstood ; e. g. i)a§ ©c^toert tm ^cr^m blicfft bu l)inauf (G.), the sword in thy heart, thou lookest up ; id) eife fort, Dor mir ben %aQ, iinb f)inter mir bie ^ad)t (G)., / hasten on, the day before me and the night behind. So also in set phrases ; e. g. fie rul)ten atmenb 9trni in 9Irm (G.), they rested, pant- ing, arm in arm. 1. This accusative is often connected with a perfect par- ticiple used absolutely ; e. g. tcenn t(^ fo fa^, ben ©ttenbogen aufgeftemmt (G.), when I would sit thus, ivith my elbow propped up ; fc^on ben §a[g entblo^t, !niet' ic^ auf bem 3)tantel (L.), my nech already bared, I was kneeling on my mantle. 2. Different is the ace. dependent upon a verb of wishing or offer- ing; e.g. guten Sffiorgen! good morning! biefen Su| ber ganjen SBett (S.) ! this kiss to the whole world ! 238 SYNTAX OF THE CASES 3. Note finally, in this connection, the occasional use of the aco. with an interjection ; e. g. (jfui bid) ! fie upon you! o mic^ Berge^Iid^cn (L.) ! oh me, forgetful ! i. e. how forgetful I ami 268. The Accusative with Prepositions. The accusa- tive is always used after eight prepositions and some- times after nine others. For lists see §§ 376-7. 269. The Accusatives with Adjectives. A few adjec- tives that regularly take the genitive admit the accusa- tive instead. See § 252, 1, a. APPOSITION 270. Immediate Apposition. An appositive agrees in case with its antecedent ; e. g. toa§ fonnert tt)ir, ein 33oIf bcr ^irtert (S.)? what can we do, a race of shepherds ? boS ^ai^jtaugenmerf metit, be^ ©eognoften (G.), the chief concern of me, the geologist ; trinf i£)n aul, bert %xani ber 2a6e (G.), drink it up, the draught of solace. 1. A noun in apposition with a sentence is put in the nominative; e.g. ^ajjpen^eim ftarb gteid^ am folgenben 2;ag, ein unerfe^Ii(f)er 93erluft fiir ba§ I'aiferlid^e §eer (S.), Pappen- heim died the very next day, an irremediable loss for the im- perial army. 2. For titles in apposition with proper names see § 285. 271. Mediate Apposition. Apposition may be medi- ated by al§ or rtjte (of. § 242, 2) ; e. g. fomm' id) d§ ®at= tin (G.)? do I come as wife? tvk eiiien S?rei[el trieb'S mid) um (S.), like a top it sent 7ne around. 1. An appositive with alg may denote cause, real or sup- posed ; e. g. mir, alS bem alteften, fiel C'3 ju, it fell to me as the oldest ; am 24j'ten al§ am S^age, lt>D — (G.), on the Qlfih, that being the day on xvh'ich — . Such an appositive may he used to explain an adverb ; e. g. boc^ morgen, alg am evften Dftertage (G.), but to-morrow, that being the first JSaster holiday. APPOSITION 23& a. After alg = in the capacity of, an appositive may stand in the nominative without regard to the case of its ante- cedent, and may even explain a possessive; e.g. bie 2tn= fpriic^e btefeS 9)tenfc§en al§ ®ici^ter, the claims of this man as poet; feine ©tettung al§ ^aujjt einer gro^m ^artei, his posi- tion as head of a great party. h. The rule of congruence in case holds also after otS = than; e. g. ba« tt)ci6 nienianb alS id), no one but me knoios that; baS fag' ic^ teinem anbcrn al$ if)m (Gr. ), I will tell no one but him. 2. After tote in comparisons the nominative sometimes occm's without regard to the preceding case ; e. g. einem Manm toie ©ie fann e§ nic^t an ©elbe fef)Ien (L.), money can not be lacking to a man like you. 3. After a reflexive pronoun one sometimes meets with the nominative instead of an appositional object ; e. g. er fietDci^rte fid^ alS treuer ^^reunb, proved himself a true friend ; ic^ unterjeid^ne mi^ algber ^^rige, / sign myself 'yours'; er fii^It ftd^ 6alb ein Mann (G.), feels himself a man. Bat this construction is hardly to be approved except with true reflexives ; for jeigt fid; al§ frecfjer Siigner, shoivs himself a hold liar, say rather freemen Siigner (Blatz). Still, Lessing wrote : ®te fe^en mi(^ ein 'Sia.vb ber SSetten, you see me a p>rey to the ivaves. 272. Spurious Apposition. As we have seen (§ 246, 1, a, § 253, 2, a), an appositional construction has taken the place of an older partitive genitive after indeclin- ables and also after nouns of weight, measure and num- ber ; e. g. etoa§ ®ute§ ; mtt ettoa^ ®utem ; eiit ®(a§ SSein ; etne SRenge Sinber. 1. After nouns of weight and measure the appositive generally de- notes material and is uninflected ; e. g. mtt einem ®ta« SBein, with a glass of wine; gegen brci ^Pfiinb ©ilber, about three pounds of silver. After a noun of number the rule of apposition holds when the dat. plu. is concerned ; e. g. mit brei ®u^enb Siern, with three dozen eggs; au8 einer SKenge Seifpieten, from a multitude of examples. 240 THE DECLENSION OF NOUNS THE DECLENSION" OF NOUNS 273. Strong and Weak Declension. The terms 'strong' and 'weak,' as applied to the declension of nouns, were introduced by Grimm (Deutsche Grammatik II, 597, Ge- schichte der deutsc/ien Sprache, p. 652). Nouns with stem ending in a vowel he called ' strong ' because they apply the case-ending directly, thus seeming to rely upon their own resources ; whereas the ' weak ' nouns need the support of an ra-suifix. The names are fanciful, hut convenient and in universal use. It is therefore best to keep them, tho they have little force as applied to modern German, in which the old vowel-stems no longer appear as such and the original conditions are iniother respects very much obscured. THE STROXG DECLENSION 274. The First Class. Besides the nouns specified in § 79, the First Class contains one masculine in e, namely, Siife, cheese. Here belong also verbal nouns (infinitives) in (e)n, including @ctn and S^mi, which are the only- monosyllables. But infinitives form no plural. 1. The nouns of Class 1 which have umlaut as plural-sign are as follows, the * marking those in which it is optional : "OiSn, field *§amniel, wether 5nagcl, nail 2(pie(, apple §otnmer, hammer Ofen, stove SBobeii, ground ipattbel, trade ©attel, saddle *58ogeii, bow fi'Iofter, convent *@d)abcn, injury SBrubcr, brother *?aben, store ©(^nobet, beak *gaben, thread 'Mangel, defect S^roager, brother-in-law Oarten, garden SDJantel, mantle Sodjter, daughter ©raben, trench JOiutter, mother SBattv, father §afett, haven Jiabel, navel SBoget, bird a. Of the above all are mas. except bo8 ^lofter, bic SKutter and bie 'ioijtex. — Not good, tho sometimes seen and more often heard, are the plurals jffiften, boxes ; ^rogen, collars ; Soger, camps ; aUSgen, stomachs; aBftgcn, wagons; Sffiiiffev, waters. Some also condemn SBbgen as bad. —It is usual to distinguish between gcuftcrlobcn,' shut- ters, and Souftabcu, stores. b. The nouns mentioned in § 279, 2, may be regarded as of this class if we posit as nom. the form in en. THE STRONG DECLENSION 241 275. The Second Class. For the genitive and dative of monosyllables the long forms, e. g. S^ageS, 2^age, are to be looked upon as the normal literary usage ; but the short forms %agi§, S^ag, are common in all styles. In poetry and studied prose rhythm is often a deciding factor in the choice; in the case of compounds, the accent ; thus 3So'rftanbg, but S^erfta'nbeg. a. Some authorities, e. g. Blatz, state that the dropping of e is more apt to occur after a long stem-vowel ; i. e. that S8aum8, Saum, 5Eag8, SEog, are more common than gaffg, gatt, @inn«, ©inn. But no great importance can he attached to this principle. For the dat. after a preposition numerous set phrases prefer the short form ; e. g. ju ^u^, on foot; nut %Ui% purposely ; mit 9ietf)t, rightly ; jum'Seil, in part; tnit SBeib uub Sinb, with wife and child. But others have the long form; as jit §oufe, at home; Bei Sifc^e, at table. 1. The monosyllabic feminines of Class 2 are as follows (all with umlaut in the plural, if possible): Sffngft, distress Sljt, axe SSanf, bench SBraut, bride S3runft, heat SSruft, breast ^au%flst ^inijt, flight gruc|t, fruit j kinsman, ber 3Sertoanbte, bie SSertoanbten ; bag 2(u^ere, the exterior, but fein Stu^ereS, his or its exterior. Such words are subject to the same uncertainty of inflection as other adjectives after atle, anbere, etc. (§ 288, 3, a) ; e. g., atte ©ele^rte(n) ; biele Seamte(n). a. Such a substantive adjective, if preceded by a strong adjective, may become weak, especially in the neut. and the gen. pi. ; e. g. ein fi^bneS Sugere (instead of Sujjercg), a beautiful exterior; ein SteiS lieBcr aSetwanbten. So, too, one meets with ein grower ®e(el)rte, a great scholar, and jcin reitfiet SSerlnanbte, his rich relative : but Oele^tter and SSerraonbter are better. In the nom.-aco. pi. without article 95crroanbte, Scomte, are better than aSerlnanbten, Seamtcn. But in the dat. sing, without article usage prefers the weak form ; e. g. man Eonnte i^m otg SBeamten (rather than SBcamtem) menig Borwerfen (Andresen), one could reproach him with little as official. Notice further etu bummer 3ungc (not 3nnger), a stupid youth. 291. Adjectives and Prepositions. As in English the use of prepositions after adjectives is highly idiomatic. The following examples will illustrate (see further under prepositions) : a[f)tiam auf (ace), heedful op bta^ Dot (dat.), pale with orm an (dat.), poor in blinb auf or an (dat.), blind in aufmettfam auf (ace), attentive to bofe ouf (ace), angry at Bange Dor (dat.), afraid of eifer|iid)tig auf (ace), jealous of begiertg nad), eager for empfonglid^ fiir, susceptible to befdjamt iiber (ace), ashamed of cm^jfinblid) gegcn, sensitive to beforgt urn, anxious about fo^ig ju (or gen.), capable o* SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE 257 fteuiibttd^ QeQtn, friendly toward ftd^er toor (dat.), safe from tranf am §erjen, sick at Jieart ftolj auf (ace), proud of neibijii) auf (ace), envious of tau6 gcgen, deaf toward xtiij an (dat.), rich in Bertiebt in (ace), enamored of 292. Comparison with cr and eft is not confined, as in English, to short words ; e. g. bet allertf)rtfttic^l'te tSttig, the most Christian king ; 'ba^ aKererbarmtt(^=Iangtr)etIigfte ®ttig Con ber aSett. 1. A participle should not be compared unless it is in use, or admits of use, as an adjective in the positive degree ; e. g. reijenber, more charming ; am bebeutenbften, most important ; bie getcagtefte 3lnna^me, the boldest assumption. But excep- tions are very frequent in the classics ; e. g. ettoag Unter= rt(^tenbere§ (H.), something more instructive ; an bem in bie 2[ugen f attenbften Drte (L.) in the most obvious place ; auf ber bliil^enbften SBiefe (U.), on the most flowery meadow. 2. Adjectives in ifc^ may drop the e of tlie superlative ending cfl, but sliould retain tlie \; e. g. ber narrifcfiefte or nfirrijcfjfte not niirrifc^te. 293. Umlaut in the Comparative and Superlative ap- pears in fewer words than formerly. In the classics we find such forms as 6ef)agltd)er, flctdier, fiarer, which are no longer used. Forms with umlaut are often heard in the dialects where the literary language prefers the unmodi" fied vowel. The following adjectives regularly have umlaut in the comparative, the * marking those for which usage is unsettled : att, old grob, rude long, long arg, had grog, great nal), near arm, poor ^art, tiard *na6, wet *bang, afraid tiod), high rot, red *bla§, pale jung, young fc^arf, sharp *bral), 'grood' talt, cold *fc^ma(, narrow bumm, stupid *targ, stingy {(J)njail), weak fromm, pious Hug, clever fifltt'orji, black *gefunb, healthy frant, sick ftarf, strong *gtatt, smooth furj, short warm, warm 258 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE a. The forms without umlaut seem preferable in case of bang, BIa§ bvau (brciBer, ber broufte are South German), gefunb, targ ; those with umlaut in case of gtatt, nnjj, fc^mal. 294. Absolute and Relative Comparison. In relative comparison one object is compared with another or with others, as in er ift alter atg iclj; bie Sioie ift bie jcI)onfte aHer 33(iimen. Absolute comparison expresses simply an emi- nent degree ; e. g. eine dltcre S)ame, an elderly lady ; bie neiiereit ©prad)en, the modern languages ; ein f)i3(i))"t Ie^r= Xtx6^tSi Sud), a most instructive look. 1. The relative superlative is usually preceded by ber and may be qualified by a prefixed atler, by some other partitive genitive, or by a phrase with bon ; e. g. ber aKerfii^nfte §elb, the boldest of all heroes; ber ©liter l)oc^fte§, the highest of blessings ; betn armlidjften ijon alien ©rbenf ij^nen (G.), the poorest of all the sons of earth. a. Except aderltcbft, which is now felt as an absolute superlative, a relative superlative without bet may not stand in the predicate; one may say bag SBilb ift ollcvlicbft, is most lovely, but not ift fi^oiift, nor aIlerfd)onfl. 2. The absolute superlative is generally denoted by an adverb, as i)bd}^t, au^erft, fe^r, re^t, iiberau^, burc!^ unb burc^; or by composition, as tDunberf c^on, wonderfully fine ; blut= tuenig, mighty little ; J3ubelna^, wet as a drowned rat. a. Occasionally the inflected superlative is used absolutely; e.g. reeil eS bie ttiettigften fbnncn (G.), since very few can do it; Scibcnf(i|af= ten, bie ftct) in feineni fd)onften Seibe bavftetlten (Arndt), passions which showed themselves in his moat beautiful body. But in the last example ttmnbei'bat fc^bnen would be more idiomatic. 3. After ein an inflected superlative is not in general to be approved, since a highest is necessarily the highest. Still one meets with ein pd)fte£i SBefen, a supreme Being ; cf. also e§ gtbt ein Su^er[te§ in alien 3)ingen, there is an extreme m all things. Goethe is fond of this construction. 4. For the greatest possible one may say ber gvo6tmbglid)e or bet mogtid)ft gtogc. The former is more logical, the latter probalDly more usual. An awkward double superlative, ber gto6tmbglid)ftc, also occurs. SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE 259 5. The phrase with am (§ 112) forms a relative super- lative capable of use only in the predicate. Its ordinary and proper function is to compare an object not with other objects, but with itself under other conditions ; e. g. ©critter toax am grb^ten alg ©ramatifer, S. ivas greatest as dramatist. Here am grb^ten = at the greatest ; ci. English at Ms best. Cf . f m-ther, e§ trare mir am liebften, it ivould be most agreeable to me, i. 6. / should prefer, but eS toare mir au^er[t Iie6, it would be extremely agreeable to me. a. But modern German often uses the phrase with om in compar- ing an object with other objects. 295. Comparison with mcfjr and am meiftcn is less common than with more and most in English (§ 292). The form with me£)r is to be preferred whenever the comparison is between different qualities rather than between different degrees of the same quality ; e. g. er ift mef)r geledrt ate ffug, he is more learned than wise. a. But even in this case good writers sometimes use the comparative in er ; thus Goethe has ernfter a(8 liebticf), more serious than winsome. 1. Wd)X and om meiften are also used in comparing the indecUn- ables in § 289, 2 ; e. g. fie Voax rae^r fc^utb al§ id) (G.), she was more to blame than I; tt)a8 mtr am meiften leib tut, what grieves me most. 2. Aside from the cases mentioned above, comparison with mef)r and am meiften may occur where it is not strictly required, especially with participial adjectives ; e. g. niemanb ift me^r gejjlagt (G.), more plagued ; ber am meiften gebilbete (G.), the most cultivated ; ein mel^r befonneneS ©emitt (Platen), a more circumspect disposition. 3. Note that the simple meift as modifier does not form a super- iative, but = meifteuS, /or the most part; e. g. fie ifi meift tiebenSttiiir= big, does not mean she is most amiable, but she is amiable as a gene- ral thing. 296. Defective and Irregular Comparison. (Supple mentary to § 114). 1. The following adjectives, denoting position, have no positive except in the form of the preposition or adverb 260 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE from which they are derived : au^er, outer ; {(inter, hinder iriMX, inner; miiitv, lower; ohix, upper; \xnitx, lower ; tjcrber, further forward. The superlative is formed in each case by adding ft to the comparative ; ber au^erfte, ber fjinterfte etc. 2. SlJlitttcr, middle (superlative mittetft), has positive meaning, the real positive mittet having gone out of use except in compounds : thus bie aJiittelftufe or bie mittlcre @tufc, the middle stage. 3. The stem of erft, first, appears in e^c, 6e/ore, and e^cr, ere; that of lefjt, last, in the obsolete tag, lazy, gtfteft and le^teft occur, but are needless monstrosities. 4. For Goethe's meiner = mel^r mcin, see § 308, 2. USE OF THE NUMERALS 297. Notes upon the Cardinals. The form etn§ is used in counting (where no noun is thought of), except when unb follows ; e. g. cing, jtoei, brei ; einmal ein§ t[t eing ; ^unbert unb ein§ ; but ein unb jtoanjig. So too in giving the time, e. g. I)al6 ein^, half past 12. But in all these cases ein is also correct, and is preferred in parts of Germany. 0. A thousand and one nights (the noun being fem.) = taufenb unb cine 'Slaift ; but a hundred and one reasons, or years (the noun being mas. or neu.), = ^unbert nnb ein Otitnbe, 3ot)V'e. 1. The decUned foi-ms jiueter, breier, jtoeien, breien are apt to be used when the case would not otherwise be obvious ; e. g. burd^ jtoeier 3^U9«" 5)Junb (G.), by the mouth of two witnesses ; h)a§ jtoeien ju breit ift breien ju enge, too broad for two, too narrow for three. a Down to about the close of the 18th century the form jiueen, twain, was used for the mas. and neu., and jluo for the fem.; thus Voss wrote jIdo 9JacI)te juglctd) unb jmcen ber Sofl'. These forms, as also the ordinal gtoot- = jroeit-, are now obsolete or dialectic. 2. The numbers from brei to jtDoIf are generally unvaried, but may form a nominative or accusative in e (less often a dative in en) in colloquial language, when no noun follows ; e. g. e§ toaren unf er fiinf e, five of «s. Note also the phrases USE OF THE NUMERALS 261 auf alien bieren, on all fours ; mit bieren, with coach and four ; bor bieren (G.), hefore 4 o'clock. 3. gunfge^n, funfjtg are better than funfjet)n, funfjig. gufjetin, fuf» 3iB are colloquial. The short forras fcd^jefjtt, fedijifl, ftebjclin, ftebsig, are more common than fe(f|85el)ii, |e(f)83ig, fiebenje^n, fiebciijig. 4. §unbert and tau|enb can be used as substantives ; e. g. biele ^unberte, manxj hundreds ; gu STaufenben, hy thousands. 3)ttEion is regularly so used ; hence jtoei SRittionen, not jtcei 3)Jiaion. 298. Expressions of Time. In giving a date the year is designated by a cardinal number, with or without pre- ceding im Saf)re; e.g. (gcf)i[(er ift 1805 geftorben (or im Saf)re 1805, but in 1805 is not good), Schiller died in 1805. 1. The day of the month is designated by an inflected ordinal, with preceding article, followed by the name of the month without preposition ; thus am 4. (or 4ten, both being read bierten) ^uli, 1776, on July 4, 1776. In dating a letter the accusative without preposition (ben 4. '^\x\\, 1776) is usual. 2. For the time of day the following are the usual forms of expression : um fec^§ (Ufir), «* ««; (o'clock) ; eg ift 6 borbei, or nac^ 6, it is past 6 ; ein SSiertel (auf) 7, a quarter past 6 ; ijalh 7, half past 6 ; brei SBiertet (auf) 7, a quarter to 7. 3. It happened in the fifties = e8 ge|d)a^ in ben fiinf^iger 3a^ren, or tit ben giinfjigetn. The same for a man in the fifties. 299. Numeral Derivatives. Besides those mentioned in § 118 are to be noted : 1. Iteratives in mal, as breimal, thrice ; multiplicatives in f ad^, as bretfac^, threefold ; variatives in erlei, denoting num- ber of kinds, as breierki, of three kinds ; ordinal adverbs in eng, as britten§, thirdly. 2. The obsolete or archaic compounds of \tVo ; e. g. ii^ \\i\)t jelb- britt(er), I traveled with two others (myself the third) ; fetboieri, with 262 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN three others, etc. ©etbonbet, with one other, takes the place of fe(6= jWeit-, anbet having once been commonly used in the sense of second {secundua); cf. om anbetii 5Eagc, on the following day. SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS 300. The Genitive of the personal prononns occurs mostly with verbs, adjectives and numerals ; e. g. fd)Dne meiner (Heine), spare me; \lyc Snftrumente fpottet mein (G.), mock me ; bein benf tc^ alle 3eit, I ih-inlc of thee (song) ; fetner uneingebenf, unmindful of him. After nouns it is rare ; e. g. burc^ bie SSergeffen^eit beiner (H.), forgetfidness of you ; aug ^eradjtung euer (S.), from contempt of you. 1. The short forms mein, bein, fein, are older than meiner, beiner, feiner, and are probably possessives in their origin. They occm- chiefly in poetry. In the genitive plural the original and proper forms are unfer and euer, but unfrer and eurer occur in the classics; e.g. unb eurer toa^rlic^ I)att' ii^ nic^t gef ei)It (S.), / should not have missed you ; ja bann bebarf e§ unferer nii^t me^r (S.). 2. The old gen. c8 still survives in certain locutions, but is no longer felt as a gen. ; e. g. icf) bin e8 miibe, Bin eS jufrieben, I am tired of it, satined with it, where it is felt as an ace. ; eS nimmt mi^ Sffiunbet, I wonder, where it is felt as a nom. (§ 265, 1, d). 301. The Pronouns of Address. The literary use of the pronouns of address is a somewhat complicated sub- ject, the bare essentials of which are as follows : a. Originally bu was the only pronoun used in addressing one per- son. In the 9th century the plu. il)r began to be employed in certain social relations for politeness' sake, bu being retained for all cases where formal politeness would be either unnecessary or out of place, e. g. in addressing intimates, inferiors, the lower animals, inanimate objects, the heart, the soul, one's self in soliloquy ; also in prayers and apostrophes to supernatural beings, absent or imaginary persons, abstract qualities, etc. This has always been, and still largely con- tinues to be, the usage of the higher poetry. THE PERSONAL PEONOUN 263 1. In the classics, then, tt)r, as applied to one person, is polite or deferential, while bu is simply natural. S)u may imply familiarity or contempt, but it may also comport with the highest regard — a regard that feels no need of artificial speech. a. Thus in Goethe's Iphigenie and Tasso the characters use only bu. Sometimes fine shades of meaning turn upon the use of the pro- noun : thus in Tell, 1. 1690, the change from i\)x to bu marks the clear- ing up of a lover's misunderstanding. In Faust, 1. 300, the transition from bit to i^r marks a descent from the tone of reverence to tliat of everyday polite intercourse. In Nathan the hero uses the pohte i^r to the obscure Templar, but stands on his dignity in returning the Sultan's bu with bu. 2. Toward the end of the 16th century began the practice of using §err, g^rau and graulein as a polite circumlocution for il^r. This led presently to the use of er, he, and fie, s/ie, as pronouns of address. o. Both usages survive in the classics ; e. g. t»a8 ffet|t bem §etru ju ©ienften (Faust, 1. 1322) ? how can I serve the gentleman (i. e. you) ? fomme ber §err nut mieber mit suriicf, just come back again with me, (Nathan, I, 3, where the Friar, who usually says il)r to the Templar, several times substitutes the more ceremonious bet §etr) ; ju(J)' (Sr ben reblicCien OeWinn (Faust, 1. 548), seek you (i. e. let him, the ^gentleman'' seek) honest gain; ad) fe^ @ie nut (ibid. 1. 2881), oh, just see! b. (St was at first the acme of politeness ; it survived longest as a form of address to a social or official inferior, as from ruler to subject, master to servant, teacher to pupil. In the classics the sudden tran- sition from bu to @t may denote vexation, as in Faust, 1. 548 and 1. 2304 ; that from (Sr to bu, as in Faust, 1. 2882, an increase of cordial- ity, a putting aside of ceremony. 3. The next stage was the employment of ©ie, they, in the sense of you. a. This grew out of the use of a verb in 3. plu. with titles ; e. g. @ute SKajeftfit finb, your majesty are, instead of is; §ert ®ottot tt)ur= ben latcd^iftert (Faust, 1. 3523), the doctor were catechized. In such a locution as the last, if a pronoun were to take the place of S)o!tor, it could only be fie, they. This awkward form of address, which poetry for the most part repudiates, became established about the middle of the 18th century. 264 SYNTAX OF THE PEONOUN 4. At present, then, in the language of common hfe, one uses ©ie in addressing strangers (one or more), acquaint- ances, or any hut very intimate friends. Social differences count for nothing, except that for princes and high digni- taries the old forms ©uer (Sure) ©nabert, §ot)ett, 3Rajeftat, ©jcettenj etc. with plural verh are still in use. ®u is said to a member of one's family, an intimate friend, a very young child, an animal or a thing, ^^r is appropriate only as plural ; i. e. in adressing several persons each one of whom would be bu. In advertisements and notices to the public at large good usage avoids a pronoun of direct address. 5. As to the writing of the pronouns of address usage is still some- what unsettled. @ie and 3()r, when they mean you and your, are always given a capital. Also (Sr, @ie = she, and their possessives, are best written with a capital when used in address. As to bu, beiti, i^r, euer, there is no uniformity, but 3^r rather than i^r is usual in re- ferring to one person. The rules recommend that these pronouns be given a capital in letters, where the word will fall under the eye of the person addressed. 302. Omission of Personal Pronouns. As a rule a pronominal subject is expressed, except in the impera- tive, but id), bit, er, fie, e§, are often omitted in colloquial language ; e. g. (ic^) banfe Sf)nen, thank you ; (ic^) bitte, 'please'; (cS) ]6)ahit nic^tg, it does no harm; (id)) Ijcifee aRagifter {Faust, 1. 360); (bu) erfenneft bann (ibid. 1. 422); (er) gef)t ba ftracfg (ibid. 1. 2867). a. For the omission of e8 with impersonal verbs see § 204, 2. 1. Far less common is the omission of roir, i^r, fie (plu.), but cases occur. 2. In the imperative bu and i^r are omitted unless em- phatic, as in fliftre bu mcin §eer (S.), do thou lead mi/ army. The other pronouns er, fie, h)ir, ©ie, are always expressed. 3. The omission of id; in letter-writing is characteristic of the commercial stj'le ; e. g. ^t)r ®eeI;rteS bom geftrigen 'Datum I^a6e er^alten, (/) am, in receipt of your favor of yesterday. THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS 265 303. Special Uses of tS. Besides serving as pronoun, of reference to a neuter noun, e^ has a variety of special uses, as follows : 1. As indefinite subject of impersondl verbs ; e. g. e§ regnet ; eS tut mir leib. The poets often use such an im- personal e§ to convey an idea of something mysterious, vast, or gruesome ; e. g. bafjnloS liegt eg £)inter mir (S.), a tracldess ivaste lies behind me; regt fic^'S ni^t quiffenb fcf)on (G.)? is there not already a quichening stir f a. The c8 in eS gibt, there is, denotes in a general way tlie situation, or state of affairs, whicli ' gives,' i. e. affords, or produces, what is de- noted by the object (of. § 340). Quite similar is the d in ei ^ot @c» faljr, there is danger; c§ je^t §iebc, there is a fight on. 2. As subject of ift or jinb (without referen.ce to the gender or number of the predicate noun) in expressions of identity ; e. g. eg ift mein 93ruber ; eg ift metne Sc^icefter ; eg finb g^reunbe tjon mir, they are friends of mine. a. But for it is I, it was you, etc. (where the predicate is itself a pronoun), German reverses the order, saying ii^ bin ea, bu toarft (®ie roaren) eS, etc. 3. As expletive, or formal subject, with all sorts of verbs, to anticipate a real subject which", for any reason, is to come after the verb. This use of eS is only in part parallel to that of EngUsh there; e.g. eg tear einmal ein J^bnig, there was once a Icing ; eg lebe bie ^Jrei^eit ! long live freedom ! eg irrt ber SSJtenfd), man errs. a. The office of the expletive in such oases is simply to justify the inversion. In old German, however, and even later in poetry, the inversion may occur without c« ; e. g. (al) ein M:mV ei:i Sfo^Iein jle^n (G.), a boy saw a little rose growing. 4. As indefinite object with certain verbs, taking the place of Enghsh it, things, matters ; e. g. eg ift of)ne a3eif|3tet, tt)ie fte'g tretben (S.), how they carry things on ; tcie tuir'g bann fo %zxxX\&i toeit gebrad^t (G.), how we have brought matters so gloriously far. 266 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN a. Sometimes c8 is used loosely for an object or subject inferrible from, but not distinctly contained in, the context. See e. g. Faust, 11. 285, 534. 5. To avoid repetition of a noun, adjective, pronoun, or clause ; e. g. er ift gIM tic^ (ift ©elefjrter, ift einer ber ©ro^en), ic^ Bin cS nidjt, he is happy (is a scholar, is one of the leaders'), I am not; toie biel Uffr t[t e§? i(f) toei^ e§ nic^t, ivhat time is it? I do not know. 6. To refer to a number of persons in a general way ; e. g. mai ftd) joiift an ineinein Sieb erfreuet, Itienn e« nod) lebt {Faust, 1. 24), they who {tt)08) once delighted in my song, if they still live. 304. The Reflexive. In a simple independent sentence the reflexive of the third person is always [ic^ ; e. g. [ie t)atte !ein ®elb det fid), she had no money with her; ber S^rieg bringt ©lettb ntit ftd), war brings misery with it ; [ie i)ahm eine fd)ijiic ^ufunft bor fic^, they have a fine future iefore them. a. But in old German, just as in the English of the above examples, the personal pronoun was used reflexively in the dat. The usage is common down to the 18th century ; e. g. bie §eiben ftnb i^nen felbft ein ®eje^ (Lu.), the heathen are a law unto themselves. 6. @ttf) not referring to the subject is rare, but one may say bie greimbfc^oft Berbinbet bie 2)Jen|d)en nnter ftt^, binds men among thevi- selves, i. e. together. 1. In a subordinate clause fid) refers to the subject of the clause, the subject of the principal verb being referred to by a personal pronoun ; e. g. er belobte bie Solbaten, bie fidf) ge^or= fam gegen ifjn betriefen l^atten (Blatz), he praised the soldiers who had shown themselves obedient to him. a. So, too, when the subordinate clause is represented by an infini- tive or an adjective : e. g. fie bat iljn fid) ju entfd^ulbigeu iinb fte ju lje= gleitcn, to excuse himself and accompany her ; er borgte ba8 i^m nbtige ®clb, he harrowed the money needful to him. 2. ©icf) as reciprocal may be ambiguous ; fie gefatten fid^ may mean they please themselves or they please each other. The uncertainty can be removed by the use of the true THE POSSESSIVES 267 reciprocal einanber, the adverb gegenfeittg, mutually, or the Gallicism ber eine, ber anbere, — fie gef affen fid^, ber (bie) eine bem (ber) anbern. 3. Observe that the usual equivalent of the objective myself, thyself, etc. is the simple mid), bi(^, etc. ©elbft or fetber is added only when emphasis is desired. THE POSSESSIVES 305. The Absolute Possessive. In agreement Tvith a noun the possessive is always some form of meiit, bein, fein, unfer, euer, t()r, inflected as in § 125 ; but for the pos- sessive used absolutely, i. e. without a noun, there is a choice between three, in the predicate sometimes four, forms of expression ; e. g. your judgment is more favor- able than mine = St)r Urtetl t[t giinftiger alg meineS, or ba§ nteiite, or "aa^ meinige. a. In meaning these forms are to a large degree interchangeable, but ber nteine belongs in general to more stately, ber meinige, to more familiar diction. In the predicate the uninflected form implies simple ownership, while inflection may denote emphasis or contrast ; e. g. ba8 S3uc^ ift mein, but eS ift nii^t bein S3uc^, eS ift metneS. 1. Letters end with such formulas as §o(!^a(!^tunggBoH 3f|t (bet Sl^re, ber S^rige), respectfully yours; ganj bet S^rige, bet ®einige, etc. ; 3^r (®ein) trcuet, etgebenct, tteuefter, evgebenfter, etc. 2. A friend of mine, a relative of yours = elu greunb tion mit, ein iBetttianbter Bon S^nen. 306. The Compounds mcinettoegcn, tnctne^glet^en, etc. 1. SJJeinettoegen comes from an old dat. plu. minenwegen (i. e. mei= nen SBegen) used adverbially. Developing an excresent t the phrase became meinentrocgen, which is still sometimes met with, tho the usual form drops n before t. The ^alben of meinct^olben is also a dat. of §alb, half, behalf, sake; here again the stages were meinen §alben, mcincnt^otben, mcinct^atben. SUieiuetiuiUen comes from um meinen Sitten, for my sake, with the same phonetic development as in the other cases. 2. In meineSgteid^en we have the adjective gleidj, like, governing a preceding gen. which logically should be the personal pronoun nicin 268 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN or mcinct, but became the possessive, giving my like instead of the like of me. The 8 is hard to account for. It may be due to the analogy of beSglcicfien, or of noun-stems with gen. in 8. After meineS the adjec- tive naturally took a weak form. 3. Such compounds as meinetfeltS, on my part, and meineSteit?, /or my part, come under § 251, 3. 307. Notes upon fetn and i^r. As in English the possessive of the third person may refer reflexively to the subject of the sentence (= Latin suus) or to another noun (= Latin ejus) ; e. g. bie Sonne tiollenbet i^re JReife, the sun completes its journey ; il)r Slnblid gibt ben (Sngein ©tdrfe (G.), its aspect (i. e. the sight of it) gives strength to the angels. 1. Where an ambiguity might arise it should be avoided by the use of ber or berfelbe for the possessive that does not refer to the subject of the sentence ; e. g. er berbrangte feinen 93ruber unb trat art beffen ©telle (or an ©teEe begfelben), he crowded out his brother and took his (the brother's) place ; er 6efudE)te feinen ©o^n unb beffen 3^rau, he visited his son and his daughter-in-law. a. Such an ambiguous possessive as appears in the English he ordered his servant to polish his boots can be avoided in German by the right use of the dative : er befaf)! feinem SSebteuten i^m bie ©tiefel 311 pni^en has reference to the master's boots, fi(^ bie ©ticfel ju )3ul5en, to the servant's own boots. But many would be content to say |cine ©tiefel and let the ambiguity stand, as in English. 2. Formerly jeitt might refer to a fem. noun, il)r being not yet in use as a reflexive possessive. Traces of this usage survive in collo- quial phrases ; e. g. bie @acl)e I)at feiiie 3tid)tigteit, the thing is quite true; (ein !Eor fcnnt jebe ^ut), every cow knoius her own gate. a. Note further the stereotyped adverb feinev 3fit» meaning not only in his or its time, but in her time, in our time, or simply in due time; e. g. nix maren fcinet 3fi' nuratcre SSutjdje, we were merry lads in our day. 308. Archaisms and Irregularities. In popular poetry the possessive (of course uninflected) may follow its THE DEMONSTRATIVES 269 noun ; e. g. 9toIanb gebai^t' im ^erjen fein = in jeinem §er= jen, in Ms heart. 1. The form S^to, in 31)ro ajJajeftat, your Majesty, is an old gen. plu. of fie, introduced in quite modern times after the analogy of ®ero (§ 309, 5). It is used only in princely titles, and is either mas. or fem., sing, or plu. 2. The comparison of a possessive, as in Goethe's nun ift baS meine meincr al8 jemol?, now mine is more mine than ever, is a hold poetic license. Ordinarily one would say mefjr niein. THE DEMONSTRATIVES 309. S)er. (Supplementary to §§ 129-131). 1. The inflection of ber was at first precisely that of the definite article, the long forms beffen, beren, benen being of quite modern origin. Present usage prescribes beffen, beren, benen when the pronoun is used absolutely, but be§, ber, ben when a noun follows; e.g. be§ 2tbel§ rii£)me bid^ (S.), boast of that nohility ; infolge befjen, m consequence of that. a. But be§, ber, are used absolutely in compounds ; e. g. be8l)ot6, beSmcgcn (also beffentmegen), bevgleic^en, etc. Other archaic exceptions occur in the classics ; e. g. bc« initb Supiter ergrimmt (G.), at that Ju- piter becomes wroth; bie ®egeniuart beS, ber bie ®onner mirft (S.), the presence of him that hurls the thunderbolts. 2. For the genitive plural of ber the usual form is now beren, unless a relative clause follows, in which case berer is preferred, especially if the pronoun refers to persons ; e. g. beren 'i^ahz id) ijiele gefammelt (G-.), / have collected many of them; bie 9)?i^gun[t berer, bie bag Uberma^ mcineS ©IMeg Beleibigte (W.), the ill-will of those whom, the excess of my happiness offended. a. ®eret occurs before noble names even if there is no relative ; e. g. bo? ®d^lo§ berer Bon ©tein, the castle of the Von Steins. 3. ®er is the pronorm most often used before a genitive or phrase with Son, to take the place of a noun previously mentioned ; e. g. bie 2Bege ©otteS finb berf(^ieben bon benen beg SKenfc^en, the ways of God are different from those of men ; 270 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN bie Sebolferung SonbonS ift grij^er a(§ bie t>on ^axiS, greater than that of Far is. 3)erjenige also occurs in this use, but is not so good. a. ®a8, for bie referring to persons, is iisually contemptuous ; e. g. ba8 jc^Icnbert luic bie ©d^nccfen (S.), those fellows dawdle like snails. 5. ®ero is an old gen. plu. once common in ceremonious address before higli titles ; as 2)ero Onoben, your (properly their) Grace. 310. The Compounds of ba do not refer to living beings, but exceptions occur in familiar language ; e. g. ein ^aar Scrle, U)orit6er [ie [treiten fonnen (G.), a brace of fellows to quarrel about; ein S5ater ^atte bret @o£)ne, babon (cf. § 314) tvav ber altefte flug unb gefi^eit (Gr.), three sons of whom the eldest ivas shrewd and clever. 1. A compound of ha should not stand as the antecedent of a relative ; e. g. / thougld of what you said = tc^ bat^te an ba§ (not baran), tcag bu fagteft. Note also that some prep- ositions, notably o^ne, never combine with ba. 2. Tmesis of a ba-compound is rare in literary language, but com- mon in certain dialects ; e. g. ba beljiite mid^ ®ott Dor (= baoor be^iite mi^), God keep me from that. 311. The Determinatives, ©e'rjenige is an emphatic ber used to particularize the antecedent of a relative ; e. g. baS ift berjenige, bon bent rtir rebeten, that is the man we were talldng about; biejenige grei£)eit, bie icf) mir l)erau§= nef)me (Kant), the (particular) liberty I take. 1. ©erfe'lbe must refer to something already known. It is a frequent substitute for er, fie, eS ; e. g. ^(etnigJeiten, bie er bon SDlarianen er^alten ober berfelben geraubt fjatte (G.), tr-ifes that he had recelred from Mariane or stolen from her. a. Some prescribe that betfetbe always be substituted for the aco. c8 governed by a preposition ; e. g. baS fiiub ifi !vaii( ; luir luollen ftiv ba8fctbe jorgeii, we will take care of it. But others repudiate this rule and prefer fiir e8. 6. Observe the contractions am fetben Sag = an bcmfetben jEag, jut lelben 3eit = jii berfctben ^nt ; sometimes also ju biefev (jener) ielbcn 3eit, at this (that) selfsame time, ©ctbig-, for fclb-, is obsolescent. THE INTERROGATIVES 271 c. ©inunbberfelbe, one and the same, is best written as one word with ein uninflected ; thus an ettuutbbcmjelben 5Eage, rather than an einem unb bemfetbcn. d. In ceremonious address ©icfetben, sometimes with prefixed §o(^ §oi^ft, 2(tter^bcf|ft, may take the place of @ie. 2. ©o((^ is sometimes used, but not very elegantly, for berfelbe ; e. g. \ Seib ; oU feinen Summer. In the genitive it is rare but occurs ; e. g. ber ®d)aupla| all meiner ®IucE= feligfeit (G.), the scene of all my happiness. 1. The form alte occurs mostly after prepositions that govern the dative; as bon attebem,/Vo?ft all that ; au§ alle= bem ; tro| aHebem. But it may stand as nominative; e.g. at(e bag ^Jetgen (G.), all the inclining ; aHe fein 3)tammon (S.), all his wealth. THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 275 2. 3lIIe§ inay mean everybody, as in atleS tanjte toie tott (G.), everybody was dancing like viad. It may also follow toer, toai and even teem, without change of form ; e. g. toer toaf alle§ ba ? who all was there ? teem alle§ gabft bu bag ®eli (Gr.)? 3. Sltt does not admit of weak inflection : one says ber S5atet unfel aUer (not alien) ; bo8 alleS, bieS atles, nad) bent attem (better than alien). For aHenfoUS, see § 288, 1, a. 4. In the classics all sometimes = jeb-, every ; e. g. oiler 3uf'onb ijl gut (G.), every condition is good; bei aEem irbi|d)en ®tng (S.) ; bie grauen allc8 ©tanbcS (G.). In these cases present usage would prefer the sing, of jeb- or the plu. of ail. Cf . alle Sage, everij day ; oHe paar SEUinuten, enery few minutes. Quite common are : trir I)aBen alien Otunb, alien 3InlaJ3, every reason, every occasion. 5. In like manner early writers use oil in the sense of ganj, the whole; e. g. alien 2Sinter (Logau) ; burdj alleS Seben (Frank). One would now say ben gonjen Sinter, buvd) boa gonje Seben. Cf. bie gan3e Sflaijt, all night; gonj Stmerita, all America. But oUe SBelt is still common, along with bie gonje SBelt, for all the world, tout le monde. 6. After o^ne, all and jeb- occur sometimes in the sense of Eng. any; e. g. ot)ne oUen (or jebcn) SSegriff, without any idea. 7. Note finally the idioms in oUer @ile, in all haste; in oiler S^n^e, very early in the morning ; also eS (ber SBein, bie greubc) ift olle, i. e. is all gone; er Witb fein bifjdie" ®«Ii' itit^ "He madden, he will soon make an end of [run thru) his little money. 318. @in-. As pronoun etn- may take the place of (irgenb) jemanb, some one, any one; e. g. '!)a liegt fc£)on einer tot (G.), there lies some one dead ; ha fragt niemanb, tt)a§ einer gtaubt (S.), what any one believes. 1. The neuter form ein§ may refer to a person ; e. g. nun yag' mir eini (G.), now let some one tell me ; toenn unfer einS am ©(Jtnnen toar (G.), when you and I were at our spinning. a. More often it is used, sometimes almost untranslatably, as cog- nate object of ftngen, trintcn and other verbs ; e. g. ein« fingen, sing a song; ein8 trinten, take a drink; roenn bir boS SDiabc^en tetmt, ba liebt fte ein« jum ©pog (G.), she just falls in love for fun. 319. @tnt(j- and its Synonyms. For the singular of »inig- present usage prefers a substitute (ein, irgenb ein, 276 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN etn toenig, etlraS), but it is not uncommon in literature ; e. g. auS %md]t beg XobsS^ ober fon[t einigeS ©ingel (Claudius), fro7n fear of death or some other thing; nad) etniger 5pau[e (G.), after a short pause; itid)t ot)ne etnigeS 58eben!en, not without some hesitation. 1. The plu. einige implies, according to Grimm, more than two but less than five. For iive or more one says meljrere, cine SJienge, manege, Biete. The ill-sounding einige roenige occurs in the sense of a few, but a few is better denoted by einige alone, or else by ein paax. Note the orthographic distinction in ein paat 2JJinutcn, a few minutes, but ein ipaar ©tiefel, a pair of boots. ■ a. (gtlid)e, inelcfje and ettt)elif|e have the same meaning as einige, but ettt)etci)e is obsolete and etlid)e becoming so. 2. Einige may precede a numeral ; e. g. einige jWonjig, twenty odd. The article ein is sometimes used in a similar way ; e. g. ein ad)t Sagc^ some eight days. 3. iffte^rc for mel)rere is not good. For the phrase morgen ein 5!JJe^= rc8 (L.), more to-morrow, one would now prefer morgen tne^t, S!Beite= reS, or baS Seitere. 320. (S^ttoaS, was, nid^ti. Both toaS and etoaS may mean something of importance ; e. g. lafet mic^ aud) ettoa§ fein, let me he something too ; fie riiften fid) fd)tieE, benn fte biinten fic^ ttiaS {G.),for they think themselves '■some.'' 1. The ace. of etmoS forms a common adverb = somewhat, a little; e. g. etma8 fait, somewhat cold. Distinguish therefore between etraa8 Beffer, somewhat better, and etnjaS SeffcreS, something belter. 2. S'Jid^tS, tho classed for convenience with pronominals, is really a substantive — the gen. of niht = naught, — which is still preserved as a dat. in the phrases gunicfjte Wevben, come to naught, and mit ni(i)» ten, by no means. In early modem German nil^t took a partitive gen.; e. g. unb l)otte ber Siebe nid)t (Lu.), andhadnotlove, i. e. naught of love. This construction still occurs in the phrase t)ier ift metneS iBIeibenS nidjt, there is no staying here for me. 321. 9Jion and its Compounds. Wan, from Warm, like French on from homo, does not individualize at all, whence it is never preceded by irgenb, though it may approach the meaning of irgenb jemanb ; e. g. mon )30C^t, there is a THE INDEFLNITE PRONOUNS 277 knock, some one is knocking. Most often it is an indefinite representative of people at large, mankind, the public, as in man fagt, they say, it is said; man fommt ju fe^n, man Itiill am liebften f(i)aun (G-.), people come to see, they wish to gaze. 1. Again, man may take the place of a personal pronoun of any person. Goethe often uses it for id] in describing his own doings, and interchanges it with irir in the same sentence. 3)iait fc^ttieige is much the same, only less brusque, as fi^weige, fd^meigt, or fdjttieigen Sic. The policeman says tocr ift mon ? Was Witt man ^ier ? for who are you f what do you want here ? * 2. ^emanb and niemanb are compounds of man with ex- crescent b. For the dative and accusative present usage prefers the uninflected form, tho the dative in em and (less often) the accusative in en, still occur. Their plural is sup- plied by einige and fetne. 322. SBtel and ioenig. With these words there is great freedom in the use of uninflected forms. Inflection is required only after bcr or a possessive; e. g. ha§ biele (Selb, ba§ er beft^t, the large amount of money that he possesses; tro^ fetne§ bielen ®elbe§; metn 3Sentge§, my little. a. But tticnig after bet or a possessive and in agreement with a noun in the singular is not common. For fein ttienigeS 2^alent (G.), his little talent, one would now prefer feilt geringeS latent, fcin !(eine8, or jeiit bi6d)eu Eafent. 1. Except after ber or a possessive, inflection prevails in the plural and genitive singular (where it may be needed to show case), non-inflection in the nominative singular, mas- culine and neuter ; elsewhere both are about equally com- mon. Examples: fc^on biete 2^age (S.), these many days; er freut fid^ bieler ®^re, enjoys much honor ; biel Sarm um nid^tS, much ado about nothing ; biel ©ef^rei unb toenig SffioIIe, much noise and little wool; ijtel ®anf, many thanks ; mit bieler 3)lu]^e ; mit toenig SCBil unb Diel Seljagen (G.) ; tjtel ©ru^e £)at er aufgetragen (G.). 2. Sometimes inflection is associated with the idea of variety ; e. g. xij meine miji DieleS, Jonbern Biel ; ein tt)enigc8, aber mit gleig (L.) ; I 278 THE VERB mean not {a little in) much, but much {in little) ; a small quantity, but with care. Stahr writes : ict) ijabt diclc8 gefe^en, f)ier unb ba aud) »icl, many things, here and there also much {of importance) ; tner DieleS fitingt (G.), he who offers a great variety ; Oiet Sein, much wine; oielcr SGBein, many kinds of wine. THE VERB SUPPLEMENTARY DETAILS ON CONJUGATION 323. ^aittt and fein as Auxiliaries. All transitive Terbs (including reflexives), the modal auxiliaries and many intransitives are conjugated with l)abm. 1. With a very few exceptions (bleiben, gefc^ef)en, geltngen, gtiicfen, fein) the verbs that form their perfect tenses with fein contain the idea of transition from one place or con- dition to another. They either denote literal motion, as gef)en, fommen, or else a change of status, as altern, berften. a. Often this idea of change is given by a prefix, and thus we may have a compound conjugated with fein, while the simple verb takes ^loben ; e. g. fdjtafen, sleep, and eini(I)lafcn, fall asleep ; fle^en, stand, and erftef)en, arise. Such compounds are quite numerous and only a few specimens of them are given in the list below. The most impor- tant of the verbs that take fein are, then, the following, together with their intransitive compounds : attern, grow old auffte^en, arise Begegiien, meet berften, burst bleibeii, remain etien, hurry ent((^tafen,/aH asleep erfd^einen, appear ertrinten, drown erroodjen, awaken fa^ven, go fatten, fall flicgen,^^ ^ie^en,flee ^ie^u\,flow ^o\qin, follow fticren, freeze gebeifien, thrive get)en, go getingen, succeed geiiefcn, recover gefc^e^en, happen glciten, glide gtiicfen, succeed Itimmen, climb flcttcrn, clamber fommen, come trict^en, creep laufcn, run quetten, gush forth reifen, set out teiten, ride rennen, run x\nmn,flow fd)eitevn, be wrecked f^Iei^en, creep jd^meljeu, melt fdjreiten, stride fc^Wimmen, swim fein, be ftnfen, sink fpcingen, spring fteigen, climb fterben, die ftiivjen, rush treteii, step Oeratmcn, grow poor tiev^ungern, starve inadjfen, grow lBeid)en, recede loerben, become jlc^en, pass SUPPLEMENTARY DETAILS ON CONJUGATION 279 6. Intransitives that do not come under any of these heads are con- jugated with l)obcn. This is the case not only with verhs which con- tain no idea of motion, as fd)(afen, sleep, hut also with verhs of motion that denote simply a verhal activity, without any idea of transition from one point to another. Verbs of motion that are usually of this character are omitted from the list above. Such are, e. g. ppfen, hop ; Ixattn, kneel ; raufdien, rasHe ; fcfimanteii, wa«er; jc^webcn, sweep ; tan= jcn, dance. But any of these may take fein, if they express transition; e. g. bet SBogel ift butc()8 genfter ge^iitjft, has hopped thru the window. c. On the other hand several of the verbs in the list above may take ^abcn if the tense denotes simply a verbal activity, or a temporal, rather than a local, relation ; e. g. bie f)aben fc^on ma« 9let^t8 gefprun= gen (G.), have danced a good bit, but one would say finb inS SBaffer ge= f))rungen, have leaped into the water ; er I)ot Diet gcreift, he has traveled much, but er ift naci) ^ari8 gereift, has set out for Paris ; ba« ifinb I)at crft Ijeute gegangen, has never walked until to-day, but ift ^eitte Bon einem ©tu^t jum anbcrn gegangen, walked from one chair to the other ; id) f)abe eine ©tunbe gerltten, / rode for an hour, but idi bin aufS Sanb gerittcn, rode into the country ; \6) t)abe fottgefa{|ren, I continued, but i^ bin fottgcfaf)ren, I went away. d. The general principle regulating the use of ^aben and fein is simple : l)oben calls attention to a verbal action, fein to the state or condition that has resulted from the action. There is, however, much confusion of the two auxiliaries, fein being often used where the rule would call for f|aben ; cf. Goethe's ift toiel gereift (Faust, 1. 3019). Even ftetjen, ft^en and Uegen are sometimes conjugated with fein. On the other hand, begegnen and folgcn occur with ^aben. 324. Omission of the Auxiliaries. The auxiliaries of tense are often omitted at the end of a dependent clause ; e. g. ba§ient(5e, tt)a§ ttitr Don anbern gef)ort (sc. %aWn), that which we have heard from others ; haSi ift tm %tl't) ber[e(6e Diain, too irtr bereini't gegangen (so. finb), the selfsame tract where we once walked. a. In this way it is often possible to avoid an unpleasant concur- rence of auxiliaries ; e. g. ber ©ieg, ben er errungen (^atte), ^atte ben)ie= fen, bog — , the victory he had won had proved that — ; maS bamit ge= Ironnen njorben (war). Wax unbebeutenb, what had been gained by this, was insignificant. 6.. The frequent omission of the auxiliary is characteristic of cer- tain authors, e. g. Lessing, Goethe, Riohter. With writers on style the matter is a moot-question, some advocating, others disapproving, , 280 THE VERB the ' hatte-war style.' In general it is not well to omit the auxiliary if an ambiguity of mode or tense would result. On the other hand, in such a sentence as the following, quoted by Wustmann, the two final mar's would be intolerable : ba bie 3^''^ f"'^ ^'^ ''o« §errenf)au8 gemoljit ruorben (inar), abgetaufen teat, since the time had expired for which the House of Lords had been chosen. 325. Periphrastic and Causal Auxiliaries. Standard German recognizes no auxiliary corresponding to Eng- lish do in / do believe, I did think, etc., but tun is so used in dialect, and the usage is more or less reflected in lit- erature; e. g. bie Stugen tSten i^m [tnfen (G.), his eyes sank, i. e. did sink ; (ic^) tat i^n rec^t Ijerjltc^ lieben (G.), / loved him right heartily. a. 'Jiun as auxiliary usually has pret. ind. tot, not tat. See the examples above. This tiit, which looks like a subjunctive but is not, comes from the middle High German tete, which was both indicative and subjunctive. 1. Saffen, let, is sometimes called a causative auxiliary, but its meaning may be pel-missive as well as causal ; e. g. la^ mi(^ gefjen auf beiner ©J3ur (Stolberg), let me go upon thy track (permissive) ; bie Mutter lie^ einen ^Pfaffen lommen (G.), had a priest come (causal) ; \ij laffe mir meinen Hermann nid^t jc^elten (G.), / will not let my Hermann he scolded. a. On the peculiar passive use of the active inf. after laffen, as in the last example, see § 366, 1, a. b. SJJad^cn, make, also occurs as causative auxiliary : e. g. it)t ^abt mid) meibtid) ft^mi^en mac^eii (G.), you have made me sweat vigorously. 326. Omission of the Augment ge. 1. The prefix gc was not at first a necessary element of the perfect participle. In composition with verbs the particle had various func- tions, one of which was to denote the completion of the action ; e. g. da der haubtman gelas den brief, when the captain finished reading the letter. Becoming thus associated with the idea of completed action, the particle attached itself more and more to the perfect par- ticiple and finally became a regular ' sign ' of that form. a. The above statement sufficiently explains the occasional occur- rence in the classics of such participles as funbeit, for gefunbcn • font' men, for gc!onimen, etc. They are survivals. SUPPLEMENTARY DETAILS ON CONJUGATION 281 2. At present tlie following classes of verts regularly form their perfect participle without gc : a. Inseparable compounds and verbs in ie'ren, — because of a feel- ing that ge should not immediately precede an unaccented syllable. b. The modal auxiliaries, and also Jjeigen, laffen, fe^en, when the participle occurs in connection with an infinitive ; e. g. id^ Ifaie e{» nid)t tun Ibnncn, I have not been able to do it; ex ^at mid) rufen taffen, he has had me called. The old participle of these verbs looks and sounds like an infinitive ; for which reason several other verbs that have followed their analogy put the infinitive in place of the parti- ciple when an infinitive precedes. Such are, quite regularly, '^elfen, ^ore:i, which seems to have followed fe^en, and sometimes also Brau= d^en, Icfireti, tnoc^en and Icnten ; e. g. ic^ ^obe fagen ^firen, / have heard say; id) ^otte i^n I'ennen ternen, I had learned to know him ; i^r ijait miif fc^mi^en tnad)en (G.), you have made me sweat. c. SBerbett in the passive \voice, to avoid iwo concurrent forms with ge. d. Certain adjective compounds, as [)auSba(Iett, home-baked, homely (Baden instead of gcbaden); ^IBtuadifen, half-grown. 327. Use of the Connecting Vowel and the Endings. The rules in § 176 present the normal usage of to-day, but there are many exceptions. Solemn or stately dic- tion tends to long forms, easy talk to short, while the poet may take advantage of either for his meter's sake ; e. g. rebft bu bon einem ber ha lebet (S.) ? id) f)ak gelefit unb gdiefiet (S.) ; bie fci)on[te Sungfrau [it^et (Heine) ; be= greife nic^t, toa^ er an mtr ftnb't (G.). Here the normal forms would be : rebeft, kb]i, geliebt, fi|t, finbet. 1. In talk it is usual to drop the connecting vowel e in the pres. ind. 2. sing, after a sibilant (contrary to § 176, 3). In such cases the f of the ending ft is also dropped and the form becomes identical with the 3. sing.; thus bu tt)ifd|t, instead of mifdjeft ; bu lieft, for licfeft ; bu logt, for laffeft ; bu ftljt, for fi^eft. In the pret. such contractions (bu agt, for bu a^eft, from cffen) are much more rare. a. So too a final t of the stem is not heard (tho it is best to write it) before ft ; i. e. pltft, gittft, fid|tft, are pronounced, usually, ptft, Bilft, fid)fl. 2. In the imv. 2. sing, the ending e belongs properly to all weak verbs. If, therefore, it is omitted, an apostrophe is proper; e. g. lieb' 282 THE VERB folang bu lieben fannfl ; folg' nur bem altcn fen -without ge occurs in [)au8baifcn, neubaden, etc. =68ren, =bar, »boreu ; =bierft or borft ; =bare ; =bier ! or »bare ! IV. — Only in gebfiten, give birth to (earlier geberen, whence gebietft, gebtert, gebier !). ®ebare as pret. subj. is avoided, being like the pres. Seijieit, hite, big, gebiffeii; bei§(e|)t, beigt; biffe; betJ3(e) ! I. SBeaeit, hark, [bolt,] [geboneu]; [binft]; [bolte]; [bitt!] [III.]— Now always weak, but strong forms occur in the classics. Grimm wrote : ein §unb bettt noi^ ^eute, loie et 3U 2(nfang bcr ©^bpfung boU, with weak pres. and strong pret. in the same sentence. SBcrgeit, /jMe, barg, gebotgen ; birgft; biirge or botge ; birg ! (berge!). III. SBerften, hurst, barft, [borft], gcborften; birftcft or birft, birft; borfte or btirfte ; birft ! III. — Often weak thruout. SBiegen, hend, bog, gcbogeu; biegft [beugft]; bbge; btcge! [beug!] II. SBieteit, o#er, bot, geboten ; bieteft [beutft, beut] ; biite; biete! [beut!] II. SBhitien, 6mcZ, banb, gebunben; btnbeft; banbe ; bitibe! III. Sttteit, ask, bat, gebctcti; bitteft; bate; bitte! V. ffltofeu, hlow, bfieS, geblafen; btof(ef)t, blcift; blicfe ; bla|(e)! VII.— Sometimes weak in pres. The pret. btuS (Claudius) is jocose. SSleifieit, »-emai;i, btieb, gcblieben ; bleibft; bitebe; bteib(e)! I. =BIeirf|eii, =6Ii(fi, =btic^en ; =bteic^ft ; =blic^e ; =bteicf)(e) ! I. — Strong only in crbieiii^eii, berbleic^en, turn pale, die, which may be weak in the pret. Slcid^en, bleach, is weak. SBraten, roast, brict, gebraten; brfitft, brfit; briete; brote! VIL — Sometimes weak, but no gcbratet. fSttdftn, break, brad), Qtbxoifm; bri(f)ft; btoi^e; bri(f|! (btecbe!) IV. — 3tabebred^en, murder (a language), is weak : robebrec^te, gcrabebre(i)t. =iiei^e)t, =bief), bief)en; =beit)ft; =biel)e; »bei^e 1 L— Only in gebeil)en, thrive. =ber6eit, =barb, =borbcn; «birbft; «burbe or .barfie; «birB! III.— Only in oetberben, ruin, he ruined, which is apt to he weak when transitive. Serberbt means morally corrupt ; ein BerberbteS §er3, but etn Berbotbener {bankrupt) £oufmann. Siitgcn, hire, bong, gebungcn; bingft; binge ! III.— Originally and still, usually, weak. Pret. subj. always bingte, not bonge, nor bflnge. SBebingen, stipulate, is usually weak, always so in the ppl. adj. bebingl; conditioned. 286 THE VERB Iireft^cn, thresh, brofc^ or btofi^, flcbro(d)cn; brifc^(ef)t, brifdit; brojc^c, orbrofc^c; bri|i^ ! III.— Often weak. ^btie^cit, = biog, =broffcn. Only in Bcrbriegen, vex, wliicli is hardly used except in the 3. sing. ; tierbrtegt [^brcugt] ; Berbroffe. 11. Sringcii, press, btang [bnmg], flcbrungeu; bringft; brange [briinge]; btingc! III. effen, eat, ofi, gegeffen; tffeft or ifit, iJ3t; afje; tg! (cffe!) V.-®e, effctt contracted to geffen (of. Faust, 1. 2838), where ge ceased to be felt as a prefix, and so was prefixed anew. gotten, go, fut)r, gefa^ren; fciljrft; fiil)rc; fa^te! VI. f?oaen, /aH, fiel, gcfaHen; fattft; ^dt; foHc! VII. gmtflen [faljen], catch, fing (fteng), gefangen; fiingft [ftitift]; finge (fienge); fange! VII. %t^itn, fight, fodjt, gefodjtra; ftcf)t(e)ft, fic^t; fbc^te; fitf|t! [IH.] — Sometimes weak. ■ =fe^tcit, 'W, »fo¥en; =ftef|lft; =fbJite or =fa£)te; =fie^l! {=fe^le!) IV.— Only in befe^len, command, and empte^Icn, recommend. gel)Ien,/«ii, is weak. 5inbeit,Jin(i, fanb, gefimbeii; fiiibcft; fonbe; ftttbe! III. JJIei^ten, iraid, f(od)t, gef(od|tcn; flid)t(e)ft, pd)t; pd|te; ftid|t! [III.] — Sometimes weak. =flet^en, =fli6, =fliffen; ^fteigeft, ^fleifet; =fliff«; =f(ei6e ! I. — Only in ^li) befkifeeii, attend to. 3-neflcii, ^2/, flog, geflogeit; fticgft [ftcugft]; pge; fliege; [fteug !] H. gHe^en,/iee, ftoli, gefloficn; fliefift [fleud^ft]; fibfje; flief|e ! [flcu^!] II. gtic^eit, /0J«, f(o|3, geftoffen; flie6(ef)t [fleuBt], fliegt [fteugt]; pffc; fliege! [fleujs!] II. grogeii, osJ;, fragte (fviig), gefragt; fragft (frfigft); fvogte; froge! VI. — A weak verb that has developed strong forms after the analogy of fd)Iagc:t and tragen. But the weak forms are better. greffen, eat (said of animals), frag, gefrcffen; fviffeft or frigt,. ftigt; ftojje; frig! (fi'effe !) V. — A compound of Bev and effen. %xitvt\i, freeze, fror, gefroren; fvierft; frove; fviere! II. ©Sreit, /e»-men<, gor, gegoreti; gierft; gore; [gicr !] [IV.] — Usually weak, especially in the figurative sense he perturbed. ®c6cit, give, gab, gegeben; gibft (giebft); gfibe, gib ! (gieb!) V. ©c^eii, go, giitg (gieng), gegaugen; gel)ft; ginge (gienge); ge^! VH. ©citcii, 6e worth, gait, gegolten; giltft, gilt; goltc or gSlte; gilt! (gelte!) III. SUPPLEMENTAKY DETAILS ON CONJUGATION 287 : 'fleffen, ^gag, ^flcffcn; =giff(ef)t or .gigt, .gigt; ^gfige; =gi6 ! (.geffe !) V. — Only in oergeffen, forget. ©ie^eit, pour, go§, gegoffen; gie6(ei)t [geugt], gie^t [geu§t]; gbffe; giege! [geiig!] 11. =giitneu, =gann, =gonnen; =ginnft; =gannc or gonne; =ginne ! III. — Only in begiinicn, hegin. iBegonnte for begaitii, occurs in the classics. ®(etif)eu, he like, gltd), geglicf)en; gteic^ft; glic[)e; gleicfie! I. —Usu- ally weak in the transitive sense make like. ©Jei^cii, shine, gtig, gegtiffen; gtei6(ef)t, glcifet; gliffe; gtcige ! I. — Now usually weak, but little used in any form. ©teiteit, glide, gittt, gegtitten; gleiteft; glitte; glcitc! I. — Some- times weak. , ®limmeit, (/ZOTtjner, gtomm, geglommen; glimmft; glomme; glimme ! [III]. — Sometimes weak. @ra6eu, dig, grub, gegraben; groBft; griifie; gtobe! VI. ®reifcit, seize, griff, gegriffcn; greifft; griffe; greife! I. ©rctiten, grin, [grinn], [gegrinnen]; greinft; [grintie]; greine! I. — Now weak, and used only in the sense of whine, cry. fatten, hold, t)te(t, get)atten; fjciltft, t)oIt; t)ieltf; Ijalte! VII. ^nngeit, hang, f)ing (f)ieng), gefioitgen; l)aiigft; f|inge (t)ienge); l^ange ! VII. — There is also a weak ^ongen, which, like ^angen, is both transitive and intransitive. fatten, hew, t)ie6, ge^aiten; t)aufl; !)iebe; '^aue ! VII. — §ieB is for [)icl»; there is no change of stem, as in ge^eti, giiig. $e6ett, raise, IjoB or ^ub, gef)oben; l^ebft, l^iibe or pbe; ^ebe ! [VI.] The old pple. gcf|aben survives in erl)aben, exalted. ^ei^cit, call, he called, '^ieg, gcljeigen; fiei6(e|)t, ^ei§t; I)ie6e; ^eige! vn. ^elfcii, help, fialf, ge{)otfen; l)ilfft; Ijiilfe or {)alfe; f|ilf! (fielfe!) III. Setfen, quarrel, [tiff], [gcHffen]; tetfft; [fiffe]; feife! I. — Now al- ways weak. fficfeit, choose,lox, ge!orcn; fief(ef)t;'Iore; !iefe ! II.— Often weak. Cf. fiiren. tlie6en, cleave, Hob, gettoben; fliebft; fibbe; tticbe! II. — Usually weak, and little used in any form. Kltmmett, climb, ttomm, gellommen; flimmfl; ttomme; flimme! [III.]— Often weak. tlingcii, sound, Kang, gettungen; flingjl; flange; Hinge! in.— Often weak. 288 THE VERB Sncifcn, pinch, (niff, gctntffen; tueifft; tniffe; fneifel I.— Often weak. Bneiptw, pinch, [(nitJp,] [getnilspcn]; tneipft; [fnttipe]; tneiptl I.— Now always weak, jfncipen, drink, is weak. Sommeit, come, lam, ge!omnicn; fommft (fommft); fame; fomm! [IV.]— Sbnnnft, !ommt, are common in the classics, but fommjl, tommt, are to be preferred. Srcifr^en, scream, trifd), gehifdjen; Iteifd)(ef)t, frcifd|t; triidjc; treifdie! I. See under (reigen. Bvei^en, scream, [frig], [gcftiffcn]; frei6(ef)t, frcigt; [triffe]; freige! I. — Both freigen and !reifd)en, related words, are often weak, frcigen now regularly so. S'rict^cn, creep, fi;ocf|, gefro(^en; friei^fl [freuc^ft]; frodje; Iriedje! [freud)!] II. Sitvcn, choose, for, gEforen; tiirft; fore; fiire! II. — Often weak. The pret. for, of fiefen, gave rise to the spurious present tiiren. £aben, ioad, lub, g«tabeit: lobft, labt; tiibe; labe ! VI. — Saben, imiae, was at first weak, but eariy became confounded with labeii, load. Both now prefer weak forms in the pres. , strong in the pret. Snffen, let, lieg, getaffen; ffiffeft or lagt, lafet; fieBe; laS! "^H- Saufeit, run, lief, gelaufen; laufft (tauffi); liefe; lauf ! VII. fieibcn, su/er, litt, geiitten; leibefl; litte; (eibe! I. — gntteiben and Bctleibcn, from Seib, are weak. So is Bemitlciben, pity, from SKitlctb. Seidell, lend, Vid), gelic^en; Ieil)ft; lie^e; lei^e 1 I. Sefcit, reod, la«, gelefen; llef(cf)t, lieft; lofe; Ues! (tcfe !) V. Siegctt, lie, be situated, lag, gelegen; liegft; lage; tiege ! V. =Heren, 4or, 46ren; 4ierft; 4ore; 4iere ! II. — Only in Berlieren, lose. =Iin(jett, 4ang, 4ungen; 3. sing. 4inflt; 4ange. III. —Only in gc» tiugen, succeed, and inigliiigen, fail. Used impersonally. Sijfeiften, go out, put out (of a light), loid), gclofdjen; Uf(^(ey)t, Ufd)|l; (bfd)e; lifd)! [HI.] — Often weak, especially, when transitive. Orig- inally tejdjen, whence (iyd)cft, ti|d)t, lifd)! Silgen, lie, speak falsely, log, gelogen; liigft; Ibge; luge! II. swollen, grind, [muf)t], gemaf)(en; [mfifjlft]; [miit)Ie]; ma^Je; VI. — Now weak, except gemal)len. 3>lctben, shun, mieb, gemiebeii; meibejl; niiebe; nieibe ! I. aWcrfen, milk, molt, gemolteii; miH|l; raolte; mitt! [III]. —Now usually weak. SUPPLEMENTARY DETAILS ON CONJUGATION 289 aWeffett, measure, ma% gemeffen; miffefi or migt, migt; tnfige, tni§ I leffe !) V. yitfimeu, take, m^m, genommen; nimmft; nix^me; nimm! (nc^me!) =nefe)l, --mS, =ncfen; =ncf(ef)t, =neft; .nafe; =ne(e! V. — Only in gene= |cn, recoBer. Miiegeit, =no6, =noffen; =nieg(ef)t, .niegt; =noffe; ^niege ! IL — Only in geniegen, eiy'o?/. «|5fetfeu, whistle, pfiff, gcpfiffen; (jfeifft; pfiffe; (jfeifc! I. ^JSflegeu, aiiend to, (jflog [(Jflag], gepflogen; ^jflegft; ppge [pflogc]; ^jflege ! [IV.] — Weak in the sense of nurse, or be accustomed. iPteifeit, praise, pxitS, gepriefen; lJteif(e|)t, (ireift; )jtiefe; preife! I. — Sometimes weak. QiteUen, gush forth, quoU, gequotten; quittft, quelle; quill! [III.] — ®u quillft, er quittt, early gave rise to a weak quillen. Ouetten, soak, is weak. dtiidfen, avenge, [xoij], [geroc^cn]; rat^ft; [rb(^e]; rdc^c! [IV.]— Now weak. iHotcn, advise, riet, getaten; ratft, rat; riete; rate! VII. — Rarely weak. Sffetben, rub, rteb, geriebcn; reibft; riebe; reibe ! I. Mei^en, tear, rig, geriffen; rei6(cf)t; reigt; riffe; reige ! L SHetteii, ride, ritt, gcritten; retteft; ritte; reite! I. SRieri^en, smell, rod), geroc^en; ricdjft [reuc^ft]; riic^e; riec^e ! [reucf)!] II. Slingen, wrestle, rong, gerungen; ringft; rtiuge [ritnge]; ringc! III. — SRingen, /or)« a ring, and beringen, give a ring to, are weak. So ia utnringen, surround, usually ; but umrang, nmrungen occur. Siinneit, run (of water), rann, geronnen; rinnft; rantie or rbnne ; rinne ! III. yiufeti, call, ricf, gerufen; ruffl; riefe; rufe ! VII. — Rarely weak. Saljen, salt, [ftelj], gefotjen. VII. — Now weak, except gefatjcn. Saufett, drink, foff, gejoffen; faufft ; fbffe; faufe! II. — Often weak. Sauden, suck, fog, gefogcn; faugft; fijge; fauge ! II. —Often weak. ©c^offcit, create, j(f|uf, ge[d)affen; fc^affft; ft^ilfc; fd)affe! VI.— ©li^affett, meaning work, procure, command, is weak. Sii^aUen, sound, fd^oH, gefd^oHen; fd)aHft; fi^olte; fdjaHe! [III.]— Now usually weak, except in stately diction. The forms Mend two verbs, viz., a weak fc^aUen and a now obsolete (c^eUcn, fd)atC, ge|(!|oIIcn. 290 THE VERB =f(^e5cn, --\iia% ^fc^c^en ; 3. sing, .fc^ie^t, ^ft^a^e. V.— Only in gc. f(f|ef)en, happen, and there only in 3. sing. (Sdjeiben, part, (cfjicb, gcfc^ieben; td^cibcji; jc^iebe; ft^etbe! I. — Wealt forms are rare and always transitive. Notice the doublet be^ jt^ieben, appointed, but bejc^eiben, modest. ©djcutcn, seem, \d)m\, gefc^ietten; jc^einft; fd)iene ; fd)eine ! I. ©^elteit, scold, |(f)alt, gefif)oIten; fdiiltft, jc^ilt; fd^blte or fc^altc; fc^ilt! (fdjette !) III. — Rarely weak in i^res. ©c^cren, shear, \i)ox, gefc^oren; fc^ierft; fdjbte; fc^ier! [IV.].— Often weak. ©d)icbcu, shove, fd)ob, gef^oben; fc^iebfi; Sifo^x; jc^icbe! 11. ©djiefecn, shoot, jd)o6, gefc^offcn; f(^ie6(ef)t [fc^eugt], \ij\t^t [fc^eugt]; fd)bffe; [d)te6e! [fdjcu^!] 11. 'Bi)\n'itn,flay, fd)unb, gefc^unben; fd)inbeft; jc^unbc; jc^inbe! [III.] . — Rarely weak. ©d)Iafen, sleep, \i)i\t\, gefc^tofen; fd)Iafft; jd)ticfe ; fc^tofe! VTI. Sd)(ageu, strike, fdilug, jefc^tagcn; fc^Icigft; fi^Iitge ; fi^lage ! VI. Siiftlctdjeit, creep,\&iiii)i gfjc^rtd)en ; jc^Ieidift; jc^Iid^e ; |d^Iei(^e! I. ®d)lcifeit, whet, fd)(tff, gcidiliffen ; fdjleifft ; jc^liffe; fdireife! I.— Weak in the sense of slip or drag. ©(^tci^en, slit, fc^tig, gefdjKffett ; fi^teij3(c!)t, jd^teigt; fd)Iiffe; fd^teige ! I. ©djHefcn, siip, (d)Ioff, gefd^loffen ; js^Iiefft; fc^Ibffe ; \&i[u]t\ II. ©(^liefeen, shut, \ij[o% gefd)foffen; f(^Iie6(ef)t [fifileugt], (diriegt [fc^leuBtj; fd)(bffe; j^Iicfec ! [(d)tcu6!] II. ©d)linfleu, wind, jdjfang, gefc^Iungen ; fd^Ungf}; jdjtange; jdjliuge 1 in. ©rfimei^eit, dash, \i)m\% gefd)miffeit ; |cf)niei6(e()t, fdjmeigt ; fdjmiffc ; fdjmeige! I. ©r^mcljcn, melt, jc^niolj, gefdjmoljcni fd)mit3(c[)t, (djmiljt ; jt^mblje; fd)mirj! [III.] — Often weak, especially when transitive. ©t^nottfieit, snart, id)tiob, ge|d)no6en ; jrfinaubft; fd)ubbe; fd|naubc! IT. — ^Now usually weak, but strong forms occur. Srfiucibcn, cui, fdjnitt, gefc^nitteni fd)ncibeft; |d)nittc; fdjneibe! I. ©i^uicSen, snort, fd)nob, gefd)iiobeti; ji^nicbft; fd)ubbe; fdjnicbe! II. — Now usually weak ; a secondary form of fd)nauben. ©i^rnubcii, screw, jd)vob, gefd)roben; fd)raubft; (d)rbbc; ji^raube! II. — Originally, and still usually, weak. ©^rctfen, be afraid, |d)rat, [gefrfirodCen] ; fdivicfft; fd)va!e; fd)ri(f! IV. — Often weak, especially when transitive = frighten. Most com- mon in evid)vc(fcni erfcbroden takes the place of gefc^tocfen. SUPPLEMENTARY DETAILS ON CONJUGATION 29] ©^teiieii, write, fc^rieb, gefc^tieBen; fc^retbft; fd^rietie; fi^reibe! I. ©djreicn, cry, fc()rie, gefc^tieen; fcf)reift; yd)ricc; fdjrcie! I. ©^reiteu, sfride, fc^titt, gefc^rittcn; fci^reiteft; fc()ritte; fdjreite! I. ©rfirjteit, grind, [fifiriet], gefdjroten. VII. — Weak, except gefdjroten. ©djworeii, fester, fdjmor (fd)»ur), gefd)TOoren; jdjtoierft; fd|fBore ((d)tt)ure); filmier! [IV.] — Now usually weak in pres., sometimes so iu pret. Pple. always geJi^lDorett. Sc^weigeii, 6e silent, jd)h)ieg, gefdjluiegcn; fdjWeigft; fii^iriege; fd^roci. ge ! I. — ©djroeigen, silence, is weak. SdjltieKen, swell, fc^iroll, gefd)Woneu; fc^mittft; fc^moUe; fd)>t)ill! {f(!^tt)effe !) [III.] — Weak when transitive. (S^tvintmoi, swim, \6)\oa.mm (fdjttiomm), geldimommen; fc^iBitntnft; td^mfimme (fdifDomme); fc^itilmme! III. ©c^iotnbejt, vanish, fc^roonb [fc^rounb], gefd)ft>unben; fi^lrinbefi; fd^mcinbe [ic^iriiitbe]; fd)tt)inbe! III. ©d^niutgcn, swing, fd)Wang [fdjrtiung], gefd^ttmngen; fdjWiitgft; fc^kDfinge [fdjmiinge] ; jdiroinge ! III. — ^t\6jVow.Qm, endow with wings, is weak. SdjWPiren, swear, fc^roor or f(^mur, gefd^tnoreit; jc^Worft; fd)h)iire or fd)«ore; fdiWBre! [VI.] — Rarely weak. ©e^en, see, fa^, gefe^en; ftel|ft; fa^e; ftef)! (fe^e)! V. ©eitt, he, War, gewcfen; bift, ift; Wore; jet! V. (fein replacing iDefen). ©iebeit, 6oii, fott, gefotten ; ftebejl ; fbtte ; ftebe! II. — Now usually weak ; but gefotten as adjective is still common. ©tnijcit, sing, fang [fuiig], gefungcn ; fmgfl ; fange [fiingc] ; ftnge! III. ©inleit, sink, \ml [fuiif], ge(unteit; ftnf ft ; fanle [fiinfe] ; fin!c! III. ©tmten, think, fann, gefonnen; finnft ; fanne ; fmne! III. —Some- times weak. (Sefonnen fein = to intend; gcfmnt fetn, to he minded. ©i^en, sit, fafe, gefeffen; fife(ef)t, ftfet ; fojje; ft^e! V. ©J)ttlteit, split, [fjiielt], gefpatten. VII. — Now weak, except gefpolten. »bge; Wcige! [II.]— Cf. wie. gen and =megen. SSaf^en, wash, wn\ii, gemafc^en mafd^(cf)t, rt)of(f)t; mufd)e; wafdjcf VI. — Su n)a|d)(ei)t, er ttiafc^t, without umlaut, are rare. SScbcii, weave, njob, geiroben; tvcbft; iuobe; iuebe! VI. — Now usu- ally weak. -Wegen, =roog, =tt)ogen; =tt)cgfl; =n)oge; =njcge! [V.] — Only in Bemcr gen, move, whicii is weak, except in the sense of induce. USE OP THE MODAL AUXILIARIES 293 Wtid)tn, recede, wiij, setoii)en; tteicEift; mic£)e; miijel I.— Seid^en, soften, is weak. SESetfen, show, wieS, getotcfen; tt)eif(ef)t, iBeij}; tciefe; meife! L aSerben, s«e, ttjarB [irurB], geirorBen; it>irbft; >rur6e or toarbe; mirb! (werbe!) IIL ' aSerben, become, luarb or )Durbe, getnorben; Wirft, tttvb; ttiiirbe! werbe! III. aSerfeit, throw, iuorf [wurf], gemorfen: irtrfft; wiirfe or marfe; mirf ! (raerfe!) IH. aSiegeit, weigh, trog, geloogen; miegft; iDoge; miege ! IL— The same as ircigen and =iuegen. iOSiegen, rock, is weak. aStnbeii, wind, toanb, geirunben; ttiinbefi; wfinbe; fttnbe! IIL— Sinben, sniff, is -weak. =ttiinuen, ^Wami, =tt)onnen; =rt)innft; .wiinne or .tnanne; =tt)inne! IIL — Only in gelrinnen, win. =ttlti:ren, in bcrroirren, confuse ; always weak, but with strong pple. Dettoorren, along with Bertrirrt. III. 3ei^ett, accuse, jic^, gejielen; jei^ft; jie^e; jei^cl L Sicken, draw, jog, gejogen; jiefifl [jeud^ft]; joge; jte^el [jeud^!] IL 3tt>tnaen, /orce, groang, gejwungen; SWingft; jtBonge; stuinge! IIL USE OP THE MODAL AUXILIARIES 332. While it belongs to lexicography rather than grammar to ex- plain in detail the meanings of words, the modal auxiliaries are of such peculiar idiomatic importance as to justify a departure from the rule in their case. The brief account in § 191 is therefore recapitu- lated and amplified in the following sections. 333. 2)itrfen. The root-meaning is need, in which sense it is used by Luther with a gen. ; e. g. bie ®efunben biirfcn beS SltjteS nidjt, need not a physician (Luke t, 31). This sense is now given by Bebiitfen. 1. From the meaning be in want of it was an easy step to have occasion for, as in Lessing's waS barf Id) jeben Korett fragen : Wet iji ber gtogte Sytann ? what need (dccasion) have I to ask ? This sense is now given by braud^en. 2. From the last meaning came naturally that of have authority, hence, be allowed, be justified in. This is the usual meaning of biirfen in modern German. Sometimes it approaches fbiinen, or, with a neg- ative, miiffen, and is to be translated by may, can, must, according 294 THE VERB to the connection. Examples: ic^ barf onnc^men, I may assume; borf id) bitten ? may I ask f id) burfte mid) atgetn, I had a right to be an- noyed ; ex ift fvanf unb barf nid)t auSge^en, can not, must not, go out (for he may (possibly) not go out, one ■would say er lann moglic^crloeife nid)t ait8gel)eii) ; Ijiet bin id) 'JJienfd), t)ier barf id)'8 fein (G.), I can be, may be, have the right to be one; id) barf nic^t fagen wit, I cannot, must not, say how (because propriety forbids), but id) fann ni(^t fagen mie, I can not say how (because I am unable). 3. Siirfcn early became confounded with the now obsolete turren, dare (id) tar, I dare; id) tox^te, I durst), whence the occasional meaning of dare, venture ; e. g. wer barf mir'g inS ©eftc^t fagen? who dares say it to my face f id) barf betjaupten, I dare assert. But the student should, in general, be wary of translating biirfen by dare. 4. The pret. subj. biirfte is used in mild expressions of probability ; e. g. man biitfte mand)e8 einWenben, one might make many objections; biefe SKittel biitften fid) nid)t ben)at)ren, these means may not prove effect- ive; baS biirfte bcr gait fein, may be the case. 334. ^iinnen. The o riginal m eanin g, to know, is preserved in a few phrases, mostly of the school ; e. g. fannft bu bie SReget (ba8 @pie(, ben Jtatei^i8mu8) ? do you know the rule (the game, the catechism) ? jjbnnen ©ie ®eutf^ ? do you know German ? ^d) lann e8 ousmenbig, I know it by heart. Here no verb is understood, tho it may seem natural to supply one. 1. Very often it expresses simple ability, being then = Bermogen ; e. g. bu lannft ja otteS, Sett (S.), you can do everything, you know; meun id) etluaS auf bic^ tonnte (G.), if I could influence you somewhat; maS fann bie SSSett mir tT)ol)t gettia^ren (G.) ? what can the world offer me f 2. Most commonly it denotes possibility, variously conditioned by circumstances, inclination, the nature of things ; e. g. i(tf fann nic^t fjo^e SBorte mad)en (G.), lean not make fine phrases (it being contrary to my nature) ; lann baS natiirlic^ gef^et)en? can that happen naturally? iaS lann ber ^aU fein, that may be the case (much the same as ba8 mog bet ^aU fein). a. If the conditioning circumstances imply a right, or permission, Ibnncn may take the place of biirfen ; e. g. nun tbnnt i^r ^ereintommeii, now you can (may) come in ; fein jjaifer fann, Wo8 unfer ift, uerfd)enfen (S. ), no emperor can (has the right to) give away what is ours. 3. Akin to the last is that meaning which implies that there is good reason for the action ; e. g. @ie tbnnen mir glaubcn, you may well be- lieve me ; barauf fannft bu ftolj fein, you have reasonto beproud of that; tn biefcm ©Inne tonnft bu'8 ttiagen (G.), you can afford to venture it. USE OF THE MODAL AUXILIARIES 295 a. Hence tonnen may convey a request, a suggestion, a mild com- man d or remonstrance . Thus (toTcEiId) : fannfTBu'nid^t enimat gu mir lommen, come and see me, won't you ; (to a servant) : @ie tonnen mir einc glaf^e Sffiein Btingen, you may bring me, etc. ; tc^ fonnte f()oter juriidfelfren, I might return later (I suppose) ; jo ettt)o8 lonnen ©ie glauben ? can you believe suck a thing. 335. areSgeu. Tlie radical meaning is to be able, and this sense is occasionally met with in modem German ; e. g. bo leiner bi(^ ergriin= ben mag (G.), since none can fathom thee; bu mag ft e8 ptoi^tig maten (Geibel), you can (i. e. you are the man to) paint it gloriously. But this sense is now for the most part given by the compound Bctmiigen, or else by lonnen, with which mogcn is sometimes pleonastically asso- ciated; e. g. Was t(^ tann unb mag, as much as ever I can. SBermogen requires ju before a dependent infinitive ; e. g. ic^ bermag ntif|t ju at» teilen, I can not judge. 1. More common, but still not the most common, is the meaning of possibility, conditioned by outward circumstances ; e. g. otjn' Itjn mag iij auf (grben, mag bott nid|t felig if erben (Burger), without Mm I can not be happy; waS mag tno^I brinne (ein (G.) ? what can be in it, pray f n moc^te ein bofeg OeWiffen ^aBen (L.), he possibly had abad conscience • toie mot^te baa ju eritietjen fetn? how could that be proved ? a. 3Koc^te is common in narrative to denote a rough approximation ; 6. g. ungefti^r jWei ajionate mod)te ic§ fo jugebrod)! ^aben, I may have spent about two months thus. 6. Out of the general meaning of possibility grows the permissive or concessive force of mogen ; e. g. ein ®tng mag nod) fo nartid^ fcin, how- ever foolish a thing may be; mag er fommen ober gct|en, maS jd)tett'« mic^ (L.), he may come or go, what do I care. As thus used in indirect dis- course it may denote a mild command ; e. g. fie rtef, er mijge ge^en, too^in er tooUt, she called to him to go where he chose. 2. The subjunctive forms may serve as a periphrasis for a potential or optative mode ; e. g. bie ©tra^e mirb beftreut, bamit bte *Pferbe nic^t ouSgteiten mogen (G.), that the horses may not slip; beS §immel8 §eere miigen bic^ bebeden (U.), may heaven's hosts protect thee; motfite id) bod| tm ftanbe fein (G.), would that I were able. iSTote that in the first two of these examples a simple subjunctive would be undistuiguisha.ble from the indicative. 3. The usual oifice of mogen now is to denote a wish, choice or preference ; e.g. fte mag ftii^ gerne pn^en (G.), she likes to adorn her- self; magft bit ein rebtic^ SBort »on mir Bernet)men (S.) ? do youwantto hear an honest word f ii) mbc^te toiffen, I should like to know ; ii) mod)te Bittre kronen meincn (G.), I would fain weep; ei moi^te Icin §unb 296 THE VERB \o lilnger IcBen (G.), no dog would care, etc. The infinitive is often omitted ; e. g. be^olten @ie e8 fiir fid^, ic^ mag c8 ni(^t, / do not care for it; warum niagft bu,ltia8 bu niiji Bermagft? ivhy doyouwish todowhat you can not do ? 336. Sdiiffen. In the oldest German tniiffen usually means to have liberty, to b e yermit ted, i. e. it corresponds to the modern biirfen. This sense appears now only in negative sentences, where miiffen is some- times interchangeable with biirfen ; e. g. bo8 tnugt bu nic^t tun, you must not do that; if)t miigt nuv ni^t erfc^retfen (S.), you must not be frightened. 1. The modernrniiffcn generally implies a constraint from without, as of circumstances, aiulhority, duty, logic ; e. g. butd^ bie|e tjo^lc @affe muJ3 er tommen (S.), he must come (there being no other way) ; @iget^ mug faUen, Sigeth must fall; id) mug gefte^en, Z musi con/es.s ; tdfi mugte ta(f)en, I had to laugh; if)t mugtet euc^ jii^Weigenb fiigen (S.), you should have yielded, = il^r ^fittct eurf) fiigen fotten. 2. Less often it denotes certainty, assurance ; e. g. biefer 3Jtenfi^ mug ein SJJiJtber fcin, ' no doubt this man is a murderer ' (Acts xxviii, 4) ; mon mug leinen ^^Hofop^en lennen, roenn man glaubt (L.), one must needs be a stranger to philosophers, «tc. ; e8 miigte ber SEeufet bat)intet fteden (G.), the devil would needs be in it. 3. It may denote that something is so fated, ordained, or it may present a voluntary action as due to constraint ; e. g. ttje^ mir, hjaS mug id) ^bren ? alas, what must I hear ? roarum mugtcft bu mid) tier= laffen ? why did you have to leave me f id) fe^te mid) ^in, um ju arbeiten, unb War in guter Sonne ; nun abet mugte ein (ongmeiliger S3efud) mic^ftbten, a tedious call had to interrupt me, i. e. it was my fate to be interrupted. 337. ©oHen. The radical meaning of foHen, to which @(f)ulb is a verbal abstract, is that of obligation, duty. The pret. subj. with pres- ent force, corresponds to English should, ought to, while the pres. ind. may denote a peremptory command ; e. g. er follte fid) fdjiimen, he ought to be ashamed; birfoUft ni(f)t ftef)Ien, thou shalt not steal. So in toasts ; e. g. bet Sonig fott leben ! long live the king ! 1. More often, however, follen denotes not that something ought to be, but that it is to be, in accordance with another's will or decree ; e. g. er fott gteii^ tommen, he shall come at once (i. e. I promise that he shall); bie aSa^I fottte batb gel)alten tuerben, the election was soon to be held. Thus often in confident promises ; e. g. in beine §iitte fott bet ©djroeijet matten (S.), to thy hut the Swiss shall Journey. a. Hence fotten corresponds to English shall in deliberative ques- tions ; e. g. was fott id) tun ? what shall I do? what am I to do f was fott ber aKenfd) eerlangen (G.) ? what shall man desire f USE or THE MODAL AUXILIARIES 297 5. Similar to the last is the use of foHcn in luas foil bet §ut (S.) ? what is the hat meant for ? maS fott e8 bebeuten ? what is it meant to signify f i. e. what construction is to be put upon it f 2. Very often it is used in reporting on hearsay, or on the author- ity or claim of others ; e. g. ba8 S3uc^ fott te()r intereffant fcin, is said to be very interesting ; fott (or fotttc) ba8 mbglici) feitt ? can that bepossible f i. e. shall (or should) one be expected to believe it ? 3. Now and then follte (pret. subj.) has about the force of the con- ditional ; e. g. id) fottte mtinen, I should think; man foKte gtauBen, one would believe. 338. aSottett denotes etymologically a will or intention on the part of the subject; e.g. ic§ iDifl eud) le^ren ©eftd^tct madien (G.), I will teach youto make faces; bit Wittft un8 gar noc5 grob Begegnen (G.) ? do you actually mean to insult us ? a. Very often, however, it denotes a wish rather than a will, especi- ally if there is no infinitive ; "e. g. loaS iDottt iljr ba ? what do~you want there ? cr Witt noc§ ®anE, he even wants thanks. Still fainter is the rad- ical meaning in rootten @te fo gut fein, will you be so kind (polite request) ; mlr ttjotten eincn ^pajjft crluofjlen, we will choose a pope (proposal). 1. Since the intent is apt to be followed by action, trotten often comes to have the meaning to be on the point of; e. g. er mill ge^en, he is about to go (common in stage directions) ; bte Uf)t fc^rittte (screeched) ttJie immer, Weim fie ebcit fd^tagen WoKte, whenever it was about to strike ; bet fcieg fcf)ieu ftcfi nun auf beutfc^en iBobcn fpielen ju Wolten (S.), seemed about to play. 2. Specially important is the idiomatic u se of Gotten with non-per- sonal subjects, which strictly can have no will. The shades of mean- ing thus given are many and subtle ; e. g. bo8 Witt eu(f| nic^t be^agcn (G.), that won't suit you, i. e. doesnHsuit you at all ; baS reitt nid^tS fagen, thai means nothing; e? WiUthtv.'otxXtxuten, it is justbeing noised abroaA ; ti Witt o^nctjin regnen, it is bound to rain any way; baS Sui^ mitt ftu= biett fetn, the book must be studied (cf. § 344, 1). 3. SBoUen often implies a claim, an attitude, a seeming intention, on the part of the subject ; e. g. mittft £)etter fe^en a(8 beine ebein SSater (S.) ? dost claim to see more clearly ? er loitt e8 geprt f)aben, he claims to have heard; ii) mitt e8 nic^t bemerft ijaien, I will act as if I had not noticed it ; idf| mitt e8 gem gelogen fiaben, I am ready to be called a liar for having said it ; iij fuc^' i^n iibcratt, attein er mitt mir nid)t begegnen (G.), he is bound not to meet me, seems bent on not meeting me; mit martcten lange auf if|n, bo er aber nicfit fonimen mottte, etc. but since he ii98 THE VEEB didnH seem inclined to come; mit ber SBa!)! tDoKte es itntner me|r ernfl toerben, it was bent on becoming, i. e. the prospect seemed, more and more serious. a. Care must be taken in all cases to avoid confounding iDotfen with a mere auxiliary of the [future ; eS Witt niir nic^t cinleud^tcn, I do not understand it at all, is different from c8 ftirb mir nie einleudjten, I shall never understand it ; n luitt mir nid}t begegnen, in the above example, from et lt)irb mir nid)t begegnen, he will not meet me. Nevertheless ttiollen sometimes approaches tDerbfn pretty closely ; e.g. ic^meignid^t, Wag bas rocrbeu iDttt, I do not know what will come of it (ttierben tt)it^ would be cacophonous). 4. Notice finally the use of the subjunctive in. bag iBoIIe @ott nid^t, God forbid ; moUte ®ott, bag, would to God that; id) WoDte tiebcr iiic^tg bason IDifl'en, which may mean I had rather know nothing of it, as well as I preferred to know; iDie looltt' e9 oiirfi ju eurcn O^rcn !ommen (G.) ? how should it come to your ears ? IMPERSONAL VERBS 339. The Personal and the Impersonal Construction. With certain verbs there is a choice between a personal and an impersonal form of expression ; e. g. between e^ bauert mid) and id; bebaure, lam sorry ; between mtc^ frtert and ic^ frtere, / am cold. 1. In these cases the impersonal form properly denotes an involun- tary experience, the personal a voluntary activity of the subject ; thus mir trciumtc, al6 ftiinbe id) (G.), I dreamed {the dream came to me) that I stood; n traumt son einer ^atme (Heine), he is dreaming of a palm- tree ; midi ^ungert, I am hungry, but er ^iingert aitS ©eij, he goes hungry from, avarice. Still the distinction is often ignored in practice ; thus Grimm writes bamit il)r nid)t friett and bnmit eud) :itc£)t frierc, with pre- cisely the same sense. 340. (SS gtfit, with object in the accusative, is used in the sense of there is, if the object is plural, there are; e. g. e§ gi6t WaS^ 9feue§, there is something new; I)eute toirb'^ Jiod) ein ©etoitter geben, there will be a shower yet to-day; 0, gtljt e§ ®eifter in ber Siift (G.), if there are spirits in the air. coMPOinsro verbs 299 1. On the eS of this phrase cf. § 303, 1, a. Since the pronoun de- notes a general situation, eg gibt should not he used if the object is a concrete thing definitely limited in time or place. Thus one would not say e8 gibt einen Sieb (but eS ift etn ®ieb) im Jpaufe, there is a thief in the house ; not eS gibt (but e8 finb) 10 Tlatt in bent SSeutet, there are 10 marks in the purse. The object is apt to be a neuter pronoun, a plural, an abstract, an infinitive ; e. g. maS gibt'« ? whaVs up ? whaVs the matter f eS gibt im SUteufc^enlcben SlugenbltcEe (S.), there are mo- ments, etc. : e9 mug auc^ '\o{6)t Sauje geben (G.), there must be such fel- lows ; l)iet gibt'a ju tun (G.), here is work to do ; l)ier gibt'« ju untetfd)ei-= ben (L.), here there is a distinction to he made; xaixi gibt'8 ju effen? whM is there to eat f a. The use of the nom. after e§ gibt, as in e8 gibt ftijc^er §ering, there is fresh herring, is provincial. So, too, is the use of geben for gibt when the object is plu. ; e. g. er ifl etn ^au3, tt)ie'« nte^v noc^ geben (G.), such as there are many more. COMPOUND VERBS 341. The Adverbial Prefixes which form separable compoimds are as follows, the * marking those that may be inseparable: ab, off, down an, at, on ouf, up au«, out id, by, with Bettor, before ba(r), there bajmijdjen, between *bur(f|, thru ein, into emj3or, up entjWei, in two cntgegen, toward fort, away, forth gegen, against in(ne), in beim, home t)et, hither ^in, thither Winter, behind tnit, with ob, over, upon *iiber, over *um, around *untet, under Dor, before *lBieber, again meg, away JU, to jUtiicE, back jujammen, together ' a. To these must be added a number of compound particles formed by combining some two of the words givenabove, the compounds of ba(r), ^er and Ijin being especially numerous; e. g. bauon, off; bat)in, thither; lierauf, up here ; I)etein, in here; binab, down there ; f|tnitbcr, over there ; einl)et', along; nm\in, around; iMox, before; iiberetn, m accord ; sorous, in advance. 1. ©eBor hardly occurs as separable prefix except in beuorfte'^en, impend.— 'S>a occurs in babteiben, bafte£)en, but is rare, bat being pre 300 THE VERB ferred, as in barbieteit, batreic^en, barftellen. In composition with another particle bo is preferred before consonants, bar before vowels ; thus babei, bamit, but baran, batauS. — Oegeit and in are hardly used alone, their places being taken by entgegcn, and eiii or inue. 2. Of the separable prefixes, some, as ab, ein, empor, fort, l^eini, loeg, ^irt and f)er and their compounds, are used only in composition with verbs or in the predicate after fein ; while others are in use as prepo- sitions or as ordinary adverbs. Distinguish between the compound baBonfommen, in fiir bie«tnot tommft bu fo boBon (G. ), for this once you shall get off thus, and the simple verb (ommeit modified by the adverb boBon, in icE) bin eben baBon gefommen, I have just come from it (e. g. from the concert) . 3. As to compounds of bur^i, iiber, um, unter, toteber, separable composition accents the idea of the prefix and is apt to be preferred if the meaning is literal, while inseparable composition is associated more with figurative meanings ; e.g. unfern ^"ft''"^ ^atti fie langft burcfjblidt (G.), she had long since seen thru (i. e. comprehended) our condition, butic^ nal^m ein ^ernrofjr unb btidte burd^, / took a spy-glass and looked thru; bie ^cilte burdibringt ba§ ganje ^a.n%, permeates the whole house, but baS ®ad^ tear morfc^ unb bag SBaffer brang burd^, the water pressed thru ; ber Sutfci^er l^at ein £inb iiberfal^ren, ran over a child, but er £)at un§ iibergefal^ren, he drove us over (e. g. over the bridge). a. In many cases, however, the two modes of composition are used interchangeably without perceptible difference of meaning ; thus Goethe writes : am 29. burcl)(iing id) bie 3iofle, I went thru the rdle, and in the next sentence : i^ ging bicfelbe SioIIe bitri^. 6. As to compounds of iriber and t)ititet see § 212, 1. 342. Phrase-Compounds. By this name we designate those compounds in which the first part (the separable prefix) is an adjective, a noun, or a prepositional phrase. They may be divided into three groups, as follows j 1. Compounds of adjective and verb, the adjective having a facti- tive sense; e.g. bloBfteUfn, expose; fcftfialten, holdfast; fvciipredjen, acquit; I)od)ad)ten, esteem; Io«gef|en, go off; totfdjkgeit, kill; \val)x-- mtinmi, perceive ; tDeiSmadjcn, hoax. These and some others follow the ordinary rules of separable composition ; thus fejll)alten, tjielt fejl, feftge£)alten. COMPOUND VERBS 301 a. But a few such compounds are inflected like a simple stem ; e. g. rtcHofen, caress, liebfofte, gctiebtoft. So also IreiSfagett and loaJ|rfagen, prophesy. Like the latter are also certain quasi-compounds derived from stems already compounded ; as fruf)ftiiden, breakfast (from grufi^ flud), fru^ftucEte, gefriit)ftudEt ; langmeiten, hore (from Sangmeite) ; frol)= loden, rejoice ; red)tfertigen, justify. 2. Compounds of noun and verb, the noun being the object ; e. g. 0(f|tgebcn, Aeed; bantfagen, thank; fc^lfcijlagen, miscarry; glutfrounfc^en, congratulate; t)oft)aIten, hold court; ^ot)nlod)en, mock; bo^iifprecfjen, defy; lobfmgen, praise; t)rei«geben, give over. These and some others follow the rules of separable composition ; thus teilnef)men, participate, nafim tcif, teitgenommen. But ^o^ntad^en admits of both ^ol)urad^te and a. Other such compounds are inflected like a simple stem, a strong verb becoming weak ; e. g. branbfc^a^en, levy tribute ; lobifuMn, flatter fulsomely; lii\t)mani)tin, walk for pleasure ;.mntma^tn, conjecture; rabe= bredjen, torture; Wetterleu(f|tcn, lighten; mittfatiren, gratify; thus jit luftmanbcln, tuftwanbelte, geruftmanbelt; ju rabebtcc^cn, rabfbtedjte, ge^ rabebred^t. Like these again are certain quasi-compounds, as arglt)o^= nen, suspect (from 2(i-g»ot)n); branbmarfen, stigmatize (from iBranb- tnarfe); ^anbI)aDen (]^atibt)abtc, geljanbtfabt), handle; J|ofmeiftern, play the pedant with ; ratfd^tagcn (tat!d)Iagte, geratfcfjiagt), tefcecoitMei; me^= Itagen, lament; tretteifertt, emulate. b. Whether the separated noun of such compounds is to be written with a capital, or not, will depend upon how far it has lost its sub- stantive character. The matter is not yet very strictly regulated ; thus while the rules prescribe na^m teil and fanb ftatt, they permit fagte ®ant instead of batiffagte. Formerly all such nouns were given a capi- tal, as they still must be if qualified by an adjective ; thus i&} na^m baran teil, but ic^ jiabm baran !einen Kett. For such matters the wisest must consult the official rules (see Appendix I), or else Duden's Ortho- graphisches Worterbuch. c. Numerous compounds of a verb with a noun or adjective admit of txse only as participial adjectives or substantive infinitives ; e. g. fruc^tbringenb, fruitful; fmnbetorenb, sense-distracting ; rotblii^enb, red-blooming ; baS 2ltcmf|oIen, the drawing of the breath. But there are no verbs fruc^tbringen, atemtjoleit, etc. 3. Compounds of prepositional phrase and verb, as au§einanber» fc^en, explain ; burc^cinanbertt)crfen, jumble together. a. Here may be noticed a numerous class of verbal phrases which are in all respects separable compounds, except that phrase and verb are not written as one word in the inf. and perf. pple. Their spelling Is, again, in a very unsettled state. Examples are : guliebe tun, do for 302 THE VERB the love of; Bon fatten gefjcn, go off; ya ftaiibe (or guftanbc) tommen, come to pass; in ftanb (or inftanb, also in ©tonb) |e^en, put in position; ju ®tuni)c ge^en, go to ruin. 343. Compounds of Compounds. These always have the first j^refix separable, as in aner!ennen, recognize, aufer= giefjen, hrincf up. Seeming exceptions are not really compounds, but are derived from nouns; as beauftragen, commission (from 5(uftrag); tienoc^ri(f)tigen, apprise (from 9?ac^rid)t); DcraDfc^euen, ahhor (from SIDfdjeu). Such verbs are weak and inseparable ; thus (leauftragte, beauftragt. 1. While verbs doubly compounded are regularly separable (aufer= gie^en, jog auf), there are some of them that are avoided in forms ■where separation would be in order ; e. g. auferfte^en, rise from the dead; auSertcfcn, select; einBerleibcn, embody. One can say er ift aufs erftonben, or a(« cr oufcrftanb, but not er erftanb auf. Some writers even prefer er ancrfannte to er erionnte an. USE OF THE PASSIVE VOICE 344. SBerbcn and ®ein. The true passive with luerben (§ 195, 1), denotes an activity, the quasi-passive with fein a state; e. g. e§ toirb 6e{)au^tet, it is asserted, i. e. peo- ple assert ; fo ift e§ nid)t gemeint, it is not meant thus, i. e. such is not the meaning ; borttjiit tourbe id) gejogeti (G.), / ivas draivn thither, i. e. something drew me ; jeirt ge= )3uberteg ^aat Wax in eine runbe Socfe aufgeftedt (G.), was fas- tened up into a round mass, i. e. such was the style of hair-dress that had resulted from the operation of ' fas- tening up'; ber Sntfd)Iuf5 wax gefa^t (G.), the resolution was formed, i. e. had been previously formed ; ' btefe ift tei(§ auf i^d^tn gefiaut (G.), is huilt partly on rocks, i. e. has a rock foundation. a. Such a form as id) bin gcjttinngcn, lam compelled, has reference, then, to the state of constraint in which I find myself, whereas tc^ IDcrbe gcjmungen implies an agent. 3ct) bin gejwungen forms a perf. ic^ Bin gegmungen gemefen, I was constrained. USE OF THE PASSIVE VOICE 303 1. In old German jein was used as auxiliary of the passive, and survivals of this usage are still often met vfith ; e. g. in the imv., fei gelobt regularly takes the place of toctbc gelobt. So also one says fcib geBtiifet, not roerbet gegrii^t, be greeted, and lag eS bir ge(agt fein, for be assured. Instead of werbe iibetrebet, for be persuaded, usage prefers lag bid) iibcrreben. Noteworthy is the use of fein after mollen = miif= fen ; e. g. bag SBuc^ njitt nidjt nitr burdjblfittert, fonbern ftubiert fein, must be not only perused but studied. 2, The pple. geboren, born, is used with fein in speaking of living persons, with tuerben in speaking of the dead : i(f) bin geboren, I was born, but Sntl)et wurbe geboren, Luther was born. 2Bar geboren is prop- erly a pluperfect in sense. 3 The clumsy forms ending in hjorben fein are very rare in the classics. 345. Notes on the Passive Construction. The funda- mental use of the passive is to furnish a form of state- ment in which the action itself, or the object of it, is made more prominent than the active agent ; thus in ber 58(i^ traf ben 33outii, lightning struck the tree, one thinks primarily of the lightning, but in ber Saum Itiurbe bom S3Ii^ getroffen, of the tree. a. It follows, therefore, that the passive is out of place if the con- nection shows that the agent is the real subject of thought. 1. With verbs that take two accusatives in the active, both accu- satives become nominatives in the passive ; e. g. man nannte i^n S[Bit= l)etm ben 35erfd)tt)iegenen, they called him William the Silent, becomes er wurbe SBil^elm ber ffierfcfjiotegene genannt. a. After le^ren, teach, the ace. of the thing-object is sometimes re- tained, but the construction is rare. Instead of ic^ wurbe bie flJfufif gelet)tt, I was taught music, one says ic^ raurbe in ber 3Kufif nnterrici^tet, or bie iDtuftf vunrbe ntiv gelet)tt. 2. Exceptions to the general rule that intransitive verbs can only be used impersonally in the passive (§ 198) occur in talk and even in the classics ; e. g. Bon jammer gefolgt, fd)reitet bo8 UngliicE (S.), misfortune strides on followed by wailing. Here and elsewhere gefolgt Bon imi- tates the Fr. suivi de. Other verbs so used occasionally are banfen, glanben, tjetfen, fd)meid)eln ; but it is better to follow the rule and to say mir ronrbe gebanft, geglaubt, getjolfen, gefcf)meici)elt and not icf) wurbe gebanft, geglaubt, etc. 304 THE TERB SYNTAX OF NUMBER AND PERSON 346. Congruence of Number. A yerb agrees with its subject in number. a. Singular titles may take a plural verb ; e. g. Sure SDiajeftSt (Sy= ceUenj, §ol)eit, ©urditoiic^t) Ijabeit bcfo()Ien, Tour Majesty {Excellence, Highness, Serene Highness) has ordered; §err Softor ttjurben fatcdjifievt (G.), the doctor was catechized. Except in ceremonious address to high dignitaries this constniotion is no longer common. 1. A collective noun takes a singular verb unless there is a plural appositive; e. g. bie HJlenge mat^t ben ^unftler irr' unb fc^eu (G-.), the crowd makes the artist confused and shy ; ba§ SSoIt ift frei (G.) ; baS junge SSoIf ber ©dEtnitter fliegt jutn %ani (S.), but eine SRenge ©cifte toaren berfammelt, a number of guests were assembled. 2. After the exjsletive c§ the verb takes the number of the logical subject; e.g. e§ reben unb traumen bie 3Dtenfc^en toiel (S.), 7nen talk and dream much. a. After e6, bie8, bo8, in expressions of identity, the verb takes the number of the predicate noun; e. g. ba8 ftnt" 2;aid)cnfpieleriad)en (G.), those are juggler's tricks. 3. Two or more singular subjects require a plural verb only when they denote different persons or things that do not form a unity ; otherwise — and the cases are very much more common than in English — the verb stands in the sin- gular ; e. g. ber ^onig unb bie 5^atfcrin . . . mac^ten enbliei^ g^riebe (Burger), the Icing and the empress finally made peace ; ber ganje §imtnel unb ^uno erftaunten bariiber (L.), all Olympus and Juno were astonished at it ; 2lltar unb %xijt ^rangt in ^yefte^glanj (S.), altar and church are bright with festal splendor ; ber ©trom, baS ?Weer, ba§ ©alj, ge^ort bent ^onig (S.); unb %d^ unb ^Jleer totrb fortgerifjen (G.). a. Very often, especially in poetry, position favors the singular verb, it being made to agree with the nearest subject ; e. g. 3)ieif}er rii^tt fid) uiib ©eiefle (S.), master aiul man bestir themselves. b. Singular subjects connected by obcr, toeber . . . notS), nid^t allcitl , . . fonbeni ani). fomobl . . . al«, take a singular verb. USE OF THE TENSES 305 347. Congruence of Person. A verb agrees with its subject in person. 1. Where there are subjects of different person, the gen- eral rule is that the plural verb stands in the first person, if the first person is represented among the subjects, otherwise in the second ; e. g. tt)a§ bu unb ic^ bereinft im §immel ^offen (S.), what you and I hope for one day in heaven ; bu unb er feib beibe im ^J^i^tum, you and he are hath in error. a. If the verb precedes, or if the subjects are connected by ober, toebct . . . noc^, iiii^t aHeitt . . . yonbcrn auij, |omol)( . . . als, the verb is apt to agree with tlie nearest subject ; e. g. in biejcr f^toeigenb an (S.), these tnany days I have been noticing. 4. For the pres. as mild imperative, see § 363, 3, c. 350. The Preterit refers to a particular past time de- fined by the connection. It is thus the tense for nar- rating past events in their relation to one another ; e. g. eiS rtjar einmal ein junger ilerf, ber Ite^ [ic^ ate ©olbat an= luerfien, t)ielt [ttf) brao unb tear tmmer ber STapferfte, toenn e§ blaue 93o£)nen regnete (Gr.), there was once a young fellow who enlisted as a soldier, behaved bravely and was always foremost when it was raining hullets. 1. Just as in Eng. the pret. may denote a repeated or a continued past action. The former is called the ' iterative,' the latter the ' dm-a- tive' pret. Examples: njcnn id) fo fag 6ei cinem Octag (G.), whenever I was sitting thus at a drinking-bout ; @oct()e !iimmevte fi^ Itienig urn bie ipolitif, cared little for politics. 2. For the distinction between the pret. and the perf. see § 351. 351, The Perfect denotes primarily a present status that has resulted from a past action ; e. g. id) {)a5e mir ein ^ferb gefauft, / have bought mc a horse, i. e. / hare a horse got by buying , (£f)ri[t tft erftanben, Christ has arisen, i. e. is now on high. USE or THE TENSES 307 1. Very frequently, however, the perfect is used, with- out any implied reference to present time, to report an isolated past occurrence. In such cases English employs the preterit; e.g. (5f)a!e[!peare l^at ettoa bterjig 2>ramen ge= fc^rteben, S. wrote some forty plays (English permits has written only in speaking of a living person) ; e§ ift bir red^t gef ^e^en, it served you right ; tr)D ift er ? ic^ t)a6' i^n ruf eit ^oren (G .), where is he ? I heard him call. a. The perf. then, is the tense for reporting isolated or uncon- nected facts, while the pret. is the tense for narrating events in their connection. With the pret. one thinks of the time when the thing occurred, with the perf. (save as it may be accompanied by an adverb of time), only of the fact that it occurred. 6. But in the written language the pret. encroaches largely upon the domain of the perf. and must very often be translated by the Eng. perf. Thus Steffens' autobiography is called SBoS tc^ eriebte, i. e. what I have experienced. Cf. Goethe's ltia8 id) trtte, WaS id) jtrcBtc, mas id) titt imb roaS id) tebte, ftnb nur Stumen ^ier im ©traug, what I have done amiss, etc. In poetry the two tenses are often used inter- changeably ; e. g. ii) ^atte fetbft oft gritten^oftc ©tunben, bod) fot^ert jErieb i)ab' id) iiO(^ nie empfutibcit (G.), I have often had crotchety hours myself, but I have never yet felt, etc.; ba lief ii) frifi^ ^inju, fo tote ieinem ®ram ju fipiekn (G.), cease to play with your grief ; ba feefd^Ioffen fie ju bleiben (S.), there they decided to remain; mit i)er §anb toinft' er mir ju gefjen, with Ms hand he signed to me to go ; tt)a§ toiKft bu bid^ ba§ ©tro^ ju bref d^en ^stagen (G.) ? why will you trouble yourself to thresh straw ? '\<&j nefjme mi^ in aijt, mit folc^en ^ejen offentlid^ ju ge^en (G.), I am careful not to appear in public with such witches. a. The verbs and verbal phrases that are thus followed by the inf with JU are literally too numerous to mention, but the use of the con- struction corresponds in the main pretty closely to that of the Eng. inf. with to. The chief difference is that Ger. does not tolerate the 322 THE VERB prepositional iiof. with subject-accusative ; tor: I know him to he a liavy I judge him to be about 30 years old, Ger. says : id) loei^, bag er eitt Siigiier ift, id) glaubc, bag er, etc. Still, classic writers, notably Lessing, sometimes use the construction in imitation of the Latin ; e. g. big er ben rcc^ten 3eitpujilt gelommcn ju fein gtaubte (L.), until he believed the right time to have come. Cf . further § 366, 2, a. 4. As predicate with passive meaning after fein, bleiben, fi^einen, fte^en ; e. g. ba§ ift p ertiiarten, that is to be expected; ba§ fte£)t nic^t ju dnbern, that remains unchangeable. Cf. § 370, a. 5. As complement of nouns and adjectives ; e. g. e§ ift tDo£)l 3«it 3" fc^eiben {G<.),it is time to go, I think; bie§ ift bie 3trt mit ^ejert umjugeJ)n (G.), that is the way to deal with witches ; ba§ lt)dre fd^Wer ju betoeifen, that would he hard to prove; i^r toaret toert, glei^ in bie @E)' ju treten (G.), you. would be fit to enter the mamed state at once. a. The construction is very common after adjectives preceded by gu; e.g. ii) Bin gu alt urn nur ju fpielen (G.), too old merely to play. Observe, however, that the familiar Eng. construction seen in <^e stojy is too good for me to believe, the book is too deep for him to have written (it), where an inf. with subject different from that of the principal verb is mediated by means of /or, can not be imitated in Ger. ; instead of it we have als bag followed by the potential subj.: ble ®cf(^td)te ift ju gut, al8 bog ic^ baton glauben tonnte; bo8 Suc^ ift ju tief, al8 bog er eS ptte f(^reiben tbnncn. 6. An inf. wliich complements the meaning of a noun or an ad- jective does not need uni, tho the useless particle is very often inserted. One meets constantly with sentences of the type : er War gelc^elt genug, urn ben ©ebonten ju ctfaffen, ober eS fe^Ite it)m'an SKut, nm benfelben an8juful)rcn, he was clever enough to seize the idea, but he lacked courage to carry it out. But um is superfluous in both cases. Notice, then, the difference between id) gob niir bie S[ltul)e i^n gu be|u= d^en, I took the trouble to visit him, and id) gob mir Biel 3Jfiit)e, um it|n JU bcfud)en, I took much trouble in order to visit him. 6. After the prepositions ol^ne and (an)ftatt, as well as um ; e. g. id; mu| euren 5^ummer noc^ bergrb^ern, ftatt i^n p f)eiten (S.), I must increase your grief instead of healing it ; fie getjen an bem §ut borbei, ol^ne barauf ju ad^ten (S.), ther^ pass by the hat without noticing it. THE PARTICIPLE 323 a. Other prepositions do not govern tlie inf. with ju directly, but combine with an anticipating ba; e. g. tfinet bodjte baran, ben |)ut 3U (iriigen (S.), no one thought of greeting the hat; tx iff n\6)t baju gemoii^t, anflrcngenb ju arbeitcn (Gr.), he is not made for working hard. 7. Absolutely in exclamations ; e. g. toaS ! am JRanb be§ ®ra6§ JU liigen (G.) ! what ! to lie with his last breath ! unb nun — um§ §aar fic^ augjurauf en (G.) ! and now. — i£s evmigh to make one tear out one's hair ! THE PARTICIPLE 368. The Present Participle is used : 1. As adjective, adverb, and substantive ; e. g. fc^aumenbe SBeine (G.), foaming ivines ; man mo(^te rafenb toerben (G.), one could go mad ; in auff aEenb furjer '^ixi, in a surprisingly short time ; bie Siebenben, the lovers ; bie ©ntfagenben (G.), the votaries of renunciation. a. In the predicate after fein tlie pres. pple. has adjectival force and denotes a state or a quaUty. It does not form a tense as it may in Eng. Cf. § 348, 1. b. A participial adjective has active force and the noun it quahfles should be the subject of the action, as in cin licbeube? Jpetj, a heart that loves. But there are some phrases in use which are exceptions ; e. g. ber betteffenbc 5pun!t, the point concerned ; cine Bor^obenbe SReife, an in- tended journey ; fal^renbe ^oAt, movables; bie reitenbe ^oft, the mounted mail. Others are also current which are more or Mss dubious ; for effenbe SBaren, eatables, say rather Sgifai^en ; for bla(enbe 3nftruniente (G.), wind-instruments, say rather SSIaSinftrumente ; for fallcnbe ©uc^t, falling-sickness, gafljuc^t, etc. 2. As appositional predicate, to denote a concomitant act or state ; e. g. toir @^lt)eftern fa|en, bie 2Botte f|3innenb (S.), we sisters used to sit spinning the wool; unb i^r ^u| "max ©otterbrot, gliifjenb tote ber SBein (G.), and her kiss was am- brosia, glowing like wine. a. Observe that this pple. denotes a concomitant act or state, not one which is past or to come. Still, exceptions occur, just as in Eng. ; e. g. bies lagenb ritt er trufeiglid) Don batmen (S.), saying (i. e. having «oM) this he rode away d^antly ; in 3u8 o"* ?'"''' fteigenb fel)rten Wir 324 THE VERh: im Oc^len ein (G.), disembarking in Zug we put up at the 'Ox.' In the permissible phrase baS imc^ftenS erjiljeincnbe Sud), the book soon to appear, the idea of futurity is contained in the adverb. Cf . § 370, a. b. The pple. may denote means, but not cause ; e. g. fannft bit mii^ j[^meicf|elnb je beliigeu (G.), if you can ever deceive me by flattering ; unb a(8 mit fie frifd) nibcrnb balb erreidjt (S.), and when we had presently reached it by rowing briskly; BetfinEe [tompfeiib (G.), sink out of sight by stamping. But for the Eng. causal pple., seen e. g. in the sentence having nothing else to do, I went to the theater, Ger. uses a clause with a causal conjunction: ba id) fonft utd^ts 311 tun Ijatte, ging id) ill? X()eater. c. The appositional pple. usually refers to the subject, but may re- fer to an oblique case, if there is no chance of ambiguity ; e. g. unb finb' i^ll l)ier . . . fpi^finb'ge 9Jat|el Ibfenb (S.), ajidflnd him here guessing cunning riddles ; nod) judeub, mit be« ^autljcrS 3Sl)iien jerreigen fie be* geiubeg Jpecj (S.), still quivering (i. e. the heart) they rend with the teeth of the panther the heart of their foe. Such a construction as this last, however, is admissible only in poetry ; in prose one would say baS noc^ judcnbe Qexfi. Still less admissible in prose is the use of a pple. referring to some word not contained in the sentence at all ; e. g. erft fnieenb lafj bic treue Sibmimg btr gefatten, i)otit grau (G.), first kneeling let my loyal homage please thee, i. e. accept the homage I offer on my bended knees. 369. The Perfect Participle is used most frequently in the conjugation of the perfect tenses and the passive voice. Besides this it occurs : 1. As adjective, adverb, and substantive ; e. g. geefjrter §err, honored sir ; bie Sebriidten, the oppressed : ein berfluc^t fc^lauer ^erl, a cursedly sit/ fellow. a. As adjective the perf. pple. of transitive verbs has passive force, while that of certain intransitives conjugated with fein denotes the state that has resulted from the action ; e. g. ber gefSEte SBaitm, tlie felled tree ; bee gefaflene Saum, the fallen tree, = bcv SBaitm, ber gef[i(= len ift ; ein mi6Iungencr SSevfud), an attempt that has failed, = ein SSer= fiid), ber mi^Iungen ift. 6. In general, then, one can not use adjectively the perf. pple. of an Intransitive conjugated with I)aben, because such verbs form no pas- sive. That is, one can not say ba« gefdjiafene ^iitb, the slept child, for baS Sinb, bo8 gefc^lafen ^ot, tho one may say ba8 eingejd)Iafene j?inb for bag fiinb, ba8 eingefd)Iafeu ifi. There are, however, a few participial adjectives with active force formed from intransitives conjugated with THE PAUTICIPLE 325 ^aben. Such are etfo^tcn, experienced; gcteift, traveled (ein (Sereifter, a traveled man, just as in Eng.) ; gefc^rooten, sworn (bie ®ef(f|tt)oreneit, the jurors) ; ftiibiert, studied (eiti ©tubierter, an educated man) ; ttunten, drunk; wxbieni, meritorious ; terldjraiegen, siZent c. There is in Ger. no perf. active pple., tho one meets with awk- ward attempts to form one by means of ^abeub; e. g. bie rii^mfic^ft getfinHjft ^abenbe SBtigabe, the brigade that had fought most creditably. Compounds such as uiigefriiljftiidt (Bismarck), for without having break- fasted and nngebetet (Gerok), without having said grace, are quite on a par with ' unbreakfasted ' and ' unprayed ' in Eng. Still less admis- sible, grammatically, is the use of a perf. pple. with an object, tho it is not so very uncommon, especially when the object is fid) ; e. g. boS ben ©rafen befallenc UngKid (G.), the misfortune that had befallen the Count; an biefem naij unb nac^ fid) Betbreiteten ©e^eimniS (G.), thismys- tery that had spread abroad gradually. 2. As appositional predicate, in the same way and under the same restrictions as the present participle (§ 368, 2, a, h); e.g. befd^amt nur fte£)' id) bor i()m "ha {G.), I jmt stand there before him ashamed; entfernt Don bir . . . ergD|t mic^ noc^ bein Iiebet)oIte§ S3ilb (G-.), remote from thee, thy dear image still delights me. 3. In absolute conctruction, mostly with an accusative absolute ; e. g. fie jingt ^inau§ in bie ^nftere ytad^t, ba§ 3luge bom SSeinen getriibet (S.), she sings out into the dark night, her eyes dimmed with tears. 4. With imperative force, thru the omission of auxiliary and sub- ject; e.g. frifd) getnogt! venture boldly ; ^inaufgefdjaut (G.)! look up! 5. With lotitmeti and ge^cn as the equivalent of a pres. pple. ; e. g. ba tommt meiit SBeib gelaufeit (S.), thereupon my wife comes running. But in Bcttoren ge^en, to be lost (eg ift Beloren gegangen, it is lost), the participle has passive force. 6. As predicate after l^cigcn; e. g. baS ^eig' t(5 enb(id) fortgefc^ritten (G.), I call that getting along fast; bo8 ^eifit bie SESiUtiir auf bie ©pi^e getriebeit (Andresen), that is carrying arbitrary caprice too far. But in this last case tteiben would seem to be better on account of the ob- ject mmiXx. 370. The Gerundive. This is in form the present par- ticiple preceded by p and, when used attributively, dc 326 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB clined like any adjective. Its force is that of a future passive participle, denoting feasibility, obligation, pro- priety ; e. g. eine nie ju Dergeffenbe greube, a never-to-be- forgotten joy; eiit f(i)rt)er ju erfittlenbet 3Bunjc§, a wish difficult of fulfillment. a. For the gerundive in the predicate see § 367, 4. Since the ge- rundive lias passive force it should not be formed from intransitive verbs. Such locutions as ba8 batb yCL erfdjeiltenbe Slid), for the hook soon to appear, are ungrammatical, tho several are in use. SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB 371. Classification of Adverbs. With respect to their function adverbs may be divided into two classes : sim- ple adverbs and adverbial conjunctions. a. The simple adverbs denote relations of time, place, degree and manner. They may modify a verb, as in gut \ijxtibm, lorite well; an adjective, as in (ebr gut, very good; an adverb, as in |cl)r gerne, very gladly ; a prepositional phrase, as mitten im ^tnn, right in the fire ; a noun, as in ber SKann l)iet, the man here ; or they may stand in the predicate, as in eS ift Boi'bet, it is past. b. The adverbial conjunctions modify adverbially the verb of the sentence in which they stand, but serve at the same time to indicate the logical connection of the clause with what precedes or follows ; e. g. jmar tft e8 leid^t, bod) ift baS ?ei(^te fi^lDer (G.), to be sure it is easy, yet the easy is hard. Since the conjunctional aspect of these words is more important than the adverbial, they are treated further on under the head of conjunctions (§ 380). 1. With respect to their origin adverbs may be divided into three groups : (1) primitive words and compounds of such, as ba, there ; batiifeer, over there ; (2) derivatives formed by means of a suffix, as tet(§, partly ; Hirtblingg, blindly ; (3) adjectives in the stem-form, as gut, well. 372. Primitive Adverbs. These denote time, place and direction; e.g. je^t, now; bann, then; I)ier, here; bort, yonder; boI)in, thither ; auf, up; unter, down. Many of them are in use as prepositions and as verbal prefixes (§ 341). SYNTAX OP THE ADVERB 327 a. Words of this kind may be called demonstrative or positional adverbs. A few of them form adjectives in tg, as tjieftfl, from ^ier, bortig, je^ig, batnalig, which are used prepositively ; e. g. Dcr bamalige SiJuig, the then king (never ber bamaU ^onig) ; baS ^iefige Sweater, the theater of this place. Cf . also § 296, 1. 1. Besides the demonstrative adverbs there are a few others that admit only of adverbial use, the corresponding adjective, if there be one, having either a different form or a different meaning. Such are balb, soon (adj. balbig) ; eben,just, lately (ebeii as adj. = smooth, even) ; foft. almost (see below, § 373, 3); gar, quite; gern, gladly j taum, scarcely J jiJjon, already, quite; jef)r, very; iiiot)!, well, perliaps. @(^on has numerous idiomatic uses as a particle of assurance ; e. g. \ifon gut, all right; ji^on ba§ erfte SBort, the very first word; bag ftef)t fd^on beffer aiiS, that looks decidedly better; ex mirb fcf)on fommen, be assured he will come. 5ffiof)I, while cognate with well, does not often modify verbs in that sense : he writes well = ev jd)reibt gut. When used in the sense of well, it is accented, but its most common use is that of an unaccented particle of doubt or uncertainty ; e.g. (with stress) ic^ iDeig |el)t ttiof)t, I know very loell; eg ift Iro'^lbcta'nnt, it is well known; (without stress) ®ie Wiffen tt)oI)I, you probably know ; e8 ift too^l be= fanut, it is doubtless known. 373. Adverb and Adjective. Most adjectives can be used in the stem-form adverbially ; e. g. fo fait t)erta§t i^r bie gemeine Sac^e (S.)? do you thus coldly desert the common cause ? \6)on luieber fo ftolj tefc^eiben (L.) ? again already so proudly modest ? 1. While Ger. has no adverbial suffix of universal applicability, the suffix Ucf|, cognate with ly, does form a number of adverbs which can not be used adjectively ; e. g. fteilic^, to be sure (frei =free); |(f)roer(i(^, hardly (fc^roer = heavy, difficult); ficf)er(ic^, surely ; 'ma\)v\ii), truly. Cf. also ^offentlid), as may be hoped (from ^offeub); Wiffentlic^, knowingly (from loiffenb), and others like them. But most derivatives in U(^ admit also of adjectival use ; g. g. giitlid), kindly ; ntaWi), recently) ; gansltii), entirely. 2. Many adverbs are simply case-forms of adjectives, the genitive being the most common ; e. g. nd)tS, to the right ; \txadi, directly; 3ufe£)enb§, visibly; ^'6Dinbfu(^t fterben, die of consumption. (7) The seat of evidence ; e. g. man fte^t bit's an ben Stugen an, one can see by your eyes; jemanb om ®eft(f)t erfennen, recognize one by his face. (8) The means of guid- ance ; e. g. ein Xin om ©cite fiif)ren, lead an animal by a rope. b. "With ace. it denotes : (1) The goal of motion ; e. g. ou8 genfter ' gel)en, go to the window; eineu 3?ing on ben ginger fteden, put a ring on 332 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION one' s finger ; an ba8 ^\d getangen, arrixie at the goal. (2) The goal of thought; e.g. benft i^r on mid) ? do you think of me? gloubft bu an Oott ? dost thou believe in God ? jemanb an ben Sob nta^nen, remind one of death. (3) The object to or for, after certain verbs; e. g. an einen fd)reiben, write to one; Saren on cincn t)cvtaii^en, sell wares to one. (4) Witli bi§, the end of a period or space ; e. g. Bi« an fein felig Snbe, even to his blessed end ; btS on bie O^ren, up to the ears. jjtnftntt, gen. ; from ©tott, place, stead, governed in the dat. or ace. by on, hence = instead; e. g. onftatt ber golbnen Sieber, instead of golden songs. Sometimes with tmesis ; e. g. on ©o^neS ftott, in a son's stead. In talk sometimes with dat.: onftott mir, anftott bem SSoter. But on meiner ©tatt, anfiott beS Saterg, are better. 9luf, dat. and ace, on, upon. a. With dat. it denotes : (1) Position upon, in phrases of rest ; e. g. auf bem 93oben fte^cn, stand upon the ground ; ouf bem Stiidcn (iegen, lie upon one's back; ouf bem gluffe rubern, row upon the river. (2) Location at, in numerous phrases ; e. g. auf ber SSurg fi^en, reside at the castle ; auf bem 9tatl)anfe (ber UniBerfttat, bem iBoUe, ber SKeffe) fein, be at the town-hall (the university, the ball, the fair). (3) Status, in a looser locative sense ; e. g. ouf bem Sege, on the way; out bet ?ieige, on the decline ; etma« ouf bem ©piete fioben, have something at stake; ouf feincm ^op^t befte^en, insist on one's opinion, be obstinate; boS I)at mi)ti ouf fid^, that amounts to nothing (i. e. it is a basis with nothing on it). See under on. 6. With ace. it denotes : (1) The goal of motion ; e. g. ouf8 ®ai^ flettern, climb upon the roof; ftcf) aufS SSett Iegen, lie down upon the bed. The verb of motion need not be expressed ; e. g. SBaffer ouf meine 'iSlul)U, water to my mill. (2) The goal of perception, attention, prepa- ration, hope, desire, waiting, etc. ; e. g. ouf bie U^r fe^en, look at the clock ; auf guteS SBetter luortcn (^offen), wait {hope) for good weather; ft(f| ouf ben Srteg riiften, prepare for the war. Hence often in wishes, healths, etc. ; e. g. auf gnte ®cfunbl)eit, here's to your health; ouf gut Olud, for good luck ; auf SSieberfe^n, good-bye. Cf . further : 3d) bin ^ier ouf f'urje Qtit, for a short time (looking ahead); ouf jeben gott, in any case, at all events. (3) Close sequence ; e. g. ouf ?eib fommt gteub, after sorrow comes joy; id) tne e8 ouf beinen Siot (9?efet)I, SBinf), on your advice (command, suggestion) ; ic^ gloubc bir oufS aSSovt, / believe you implicitly. (4) Manner ; e. g. auf biefe SBeife, in this manner = in bicfet Sffieife ; ouf ®eutfd), in German ; ouf eigene .gionb, on one's own '■hook.' (5) The direction of feeling, after various adjectives, as bofe, eifevfiic^tig, neibifd), ftolj; e.g. fie if! ftolj ouf il)re @d)onf)eit, proud oj feer beauty. (6) The limit of extent, often with bis ; e. g. bvei SStertel SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION 333 auf jtBci, a quarter to two; BiS auf @pei|' unb Sranl, eoen to food and drink. 2tu8, dat., out of, from. It denotes : (1) An inner point of depart- ure, with verbs of motion and sensation ; e. g. ani ber 9iei^e treten, step out of the ranks ; einen au8 bcm SBaffer (ben glamtnen, ber 3?ot) rctteti, rescue one from the ivater [the flames, trouble) ; au8 bent genfter je^eii, look out of the window. (2) Simple aloofness, with verbs of rest, or without verb ; e. g. tag mii^ au8 ber @acf|e, leave me out of the affair; auS ben 5![ugen, aii8 bem ©inn, out of sight, out of mind. (3) Origin, both local and logical ; e. g. er ftammt au8 gutet gatntlie (au8 ber @il))t)ei5), he comes of good family (from Switzerland) ; ba9 Inei^ \i> onS ©rfa^tung, I know it from experience ; c8 gefc^afi au8 Un!enntni8, from ignorance. (4) Motive ; e. g. au8 Siebe (§ag, (Siferfuc^t) ^anbeln, act from love {hate, jealousy). (5) Material; e. g. eS \\i au8 ^olj ge» mac^t, made of wood. g[lt6er. dat., outside of, beside(s). Formerly with gen., which sur- vives in auger I'anbe? geljen, go abroad. It stands before nouns of con- dition, state, and before pronouns; e.g. auger 'Utern, out of breath ; auger S)ienft, out of service ; auger ac^t taffen, leave out of account ; er tjl auger ftcf), he is beside himself. Before nouns of place it was once common, but augerf|alb is now preferred ; e. g. auger bem Sager (Lu.), outside of the camp; auger ber ©tabt (S.), outside the city. It is often used in the sense of except; e. g. auger mtr ift fein ®ott, there is no God but me. 9tu^er^oI6, gen., outside of; e. g. auger^atb beS Sores, outside the gate; augerljalb be§ Oefe^eS, outside of the law. Sometimes with dat. in the classics and even now; e.g. auger^olb jetnem SJatertanbe (S.); ougerl^ol6 bcm eingejciunten §ofe (Freytag), outside the enclosed court. SBct, dat., 62/, at, near, with. It denotes : (1) Simple proximity ; e. g. beim genfter, by the window; bte @d)Ia(f)t bet SBaterioo, the battle of, i.e. near, W. (2) Location at, with, among, at the house of, in the works of ; e. g. bei einem ®elag, at a drinking-bout ; bet ber Slrbett, at work; Bei un8 5U ?anbe, in our country; beim Dnfet moBnen, live at one^s uncWs; bei einem ^rofeffor pren, hear lectures under a profes- sor; bie ©teEe ftnbet fid) bet ©(fiitler, is found in S. (3) Status, condi- tion, conoomitancy ; e. g. er ift Bet 3al)ren, well along in years; er ift nod) Bei boHen Stfiften, still in full vigor; Bei \\&i, in one's senses; iiJ) Bin Bei ®etbe, I am in funds; bei 9Ja(f)t, at night; 6ei3eiten, at times, betimes; Bei gutem SBettcr, the weather being good; bei biefer @a(i)lage, in view of this situation; Bet offnem gcnfter f(5Iafcn, sleep with open window; Beim @et)en, in walking. (4) Ground of assertion, prohibi- tion, etc.; e.g. beim^immeU by heaven! ba8 ift Bei Strafe berboten, 334 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION forbidden under penalty; Bei ?ei6e ttiiijt! not for your life! (5) Meas- ure ; e. g. bei cinem §aarc, hy a hair^s breadth; Bet toeitem, by a long way. (6) Point of seizure ; e. g. jemanb bei ber §anb crgreifen, seize one by the hand. SBtnnen, dat. and gen., within. Formerly of place or time, now only of time; e.g. biiinen eitufler Xaqe, within a few days; binnen brei STOonaten, within three months. The dat. now prevails. S3i§, ace, to, till. It denotes a limit of motion, time, or space ; e.g. id) get)e mit biS ieipii^, I will go along as far as L.; Boit Seijjjig Bi« (nod)) ©rcsbcii, /rom L. to D.; big greitag, till Friday. It is often followed by an adverb or another prep. ; e. g. Bi8 ^eute, until to-day; Bis jum Snbe, to the end ; et ftecf t in ©c^ulben Bi« iiBet bie C^ren, he is over Ms ears in debt. So in numerical approximations ; ad)t BiS jefin 3a^re, eight or ten years. 2)icSfctt§, gen., this side of; from ©eite with adverbial ?. ®ieS= feits beS SDJonbcS, this side the moon. The dat. occurs in old writers. 2)urri^, ace, thru, by. It denotes: (1) Transition thru space or time ; e. g. buvd) bie Suft ffiegen, JZy thru the air; bnrd) bie 9fac^t ma= c^en, watch thru the night. Figuratively: eS fu^r mir biitc^ ben J?opf, it flashed thru my head. "With verbs of perception : burcfi ein gcrnro^r jc^en, look thru a telescope. Often emphasized by an added l^inburc^ ; e.g. burdj Biete 3al)re l)inburc^, t^iru many years. On the adverbial burt^, in bie ganje Dfac^t buvd), the whole night thru, cf. § 266. (2) Means, including personal mediation, but not direct agency, for which see under uon ; e. g., ctttiaS burc^ Sift eriangen, get something by cun- ning ; er licjj mir burd) cinen 33oteit fagcn, sent word by a messenger. (3) Ground, cause, occasion; e.g. id) Bitte bid) burd) ®otte§ (Snoben, I pray you by God's grace; buvd) einen ^u^aU, by an accident; cicnb burdi mid) (G.), miserable thru me. (Sntgegcit, dat., against, toward. It is really an adverb (separable prefix), but when the verb of motion is omitted it may taJie on the character of a postpositive preposition ; e. g. bent ®d)nee, bem 9tegen, bem SBinb entgegen (G.), in face of snow and rain and wind; tf)v fteigt ^innuf, bem ©tvom ber SJeug entgegen (S.), facing the current. ^&t, ace, for. It implies: (1) Interest, benefit; e.g. etttjoa fiir etnen tun, do something for one; fiir Sctb nub jliubev Beteit, pmy /or one's wife and children. (2) Exchange, equivalence ; e. g. fiir einen l)anbeln, act for (i. e. in lieu of) one; e8 iff fUv @etb nid)t ju I)aben, not to be had for money; id) t)alt' il)n fiir einen ©c^etm, take him for a scamp ; fiivliebnc^men, put up with things. (.3) Sphere of application, limitation ; e. g. 2(rjnei fiiv ein gicBer, medicine for a fever; fur einen SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION 335 9iarren fpric^t cr gar nid^t fcfjlfi^t (G.), not badly for a fool; ic^ fur mein Keit, I for my part; gcmig fiic ^eute, enough for to-day; id} giiin im 5!BaIbe \a fiir mic^ t|in (G.), all by myself. (4) Succession ; e. g. @d)ritt fiir @d)ritt, step by step. giir is of like origin with Bor. The two are often confounded in early modern Ger. and even in the classics ; e. g. fiir giircf)t fterbcn (S.), die of fear; meinte fiir grcuben (G.), wept for joy. giit for tior may of course take the dat. ; e. g. roaS ^otte er bann noti) fiir feinetn ajiab= iftn Boraus (S.) ? Qitgen (gen), ace, toward, against, facing. It denotes: (1) The direction of motion, effort or purpose; e.g. gegen ben ©troin f(i)>t)int= men, swim against the current; wai fbimen loir gegen 2lI6recI)t« §ceve (S.) ? what can we do against A.^s armies ? fid) gegen bie Siire ftemnien, brace one^s self against the door. So with nouns ; e. g. cin 3JJttteI gegen bie S^olcro, a remedy against the cholera. With verbs of motion gegen is rare in the sense of toward, but may occur if the verb is such as to preclude the idea of hostility ; thus gegen bie @tabt marfdjiereu, means to march against the city, but gegen bie ©tobt fpoijieren, gegen ben 3t|ein toanbern, are permissible, tho ttac^, or nad) . . . ju, is preferred. (2) Direction of feeling, friendly or hostile ; e. g. freunbtid^ S^Qin bag $ott, friendly toward the people; touB gegen bie SBitte, deaf to the re- quest; g^rfurc^t gegen baS 3tltcr,re8peci /or a^e. (3) Offset, exchange, comparison; e.g. SBaren gegen bar @elb berfaufen, seZi wares /or cas^; jfviegSgefangene gegen einonber a\iitan]i)m, exchange prisoners ; gegen t§n IJin id) nirt)t8, beside him I am nothing ; ein ajJe^r Bon JttJanjig gegen jtBotf (S.), a majority of twenty to twelve. (4) Approximation ; e. g. gegen 9(6enb, toward evening; gegen brei SUtonate, about three months. (5) Position facing ; e. g. ein genfter gegen ©iiben, a window facing the south. In early modern Ger. gegen usually took the dat. and this construc- tion is met with now and then in the classics ; e. g. i^r hjerbet gegen I ber I'Jenge inentg fein (G.), few in comparison with the multitude. The I short form gen is common in the Bible and still survives in set phras- es; e. g. gen §immet, toward the sky. @eoeniifier, dat., opposite, in face of, in relation to. It generally follows its noun and is more often adv. than prep. It is used : (1) Of literal position ; e. g. bet ifircl)e gegenuber, or gegeniiber ber Jfirc^e, opposite the church. (Oegeniiber Bon, after Pr. vis-d-vis de, also oc- curs.) (2) Of status; e.g. bie ©tellung bc« ©taateS ber j?irc^e gegen= iiber, the attitude of the state in relation to the church ; biefer Xatfadje gegenuber bin id^ ffirad^Iog, in face of this fact. Tmesis is common in older writers ; e. g. in ber SEBiiften gegen 2)?oab iiber, in the desert over against Moab. 336 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION @ettto§, dat., according to, in harmony with. Strictly the adj. gcmajj (§ 260) used adverbially. It usually follows its noun; e.g. ber yiatnx gemeifj (or naturgemfig) leben, live according to nature ; bem» gcma6» accordingly. Nowadays often with gen. ; e. g. gemaS 3^te8 ®ci)ret6en8, according to your letter; befe^l8gcmo6, according to orders. ^nlfi, ^aI6eii, f)albtr, gen., because of, on account of. Stereotyped case-forms of the old noun §alb, side, direction; always postpositive. Examples : fiitftlic^er ^oci^begtiigung ^alb (G.), in the interest of a princely greeting ; biefer §offnung ^albcn, on account of this hope ; ber ©tubien ^alber (Ranke), in the interest of study. Now chiefly in com- pounds ; nieinetf|oIb(en), alterS^alber, amtsf|a(ber, Iranf^eit«t|alber, etc. Jpintcr, dat. and ace, behind. a. With dat. it denotes : (1) Position behind, with verbs of rest ; e.g. er ift Winter bcm §aufe, behind the house; Winter bem Serge ttio^= nen, live on the other side of the mountain. (2) Concealment ; e. g. Winter be8 Set)rcr8 9{iicfcit, behind the teacher'' s back; e« ftecft etitiag ba» llinter, there^s something behind it. (3) Support ; e. g. cr ftel^t l^intcr mir ala ^Biirge, he stands behind me as security. b. With ace. It denotes the goal of motion ; e. g. Winter? §ou8 gc= £|en, go behind the house; fd^reib' e8 bir l)inter8 Dt)t, make a note of it. 3n, dat. and ace; with dat. in, with ace. into. a. The dat. marks position, in space or time ; e. g. in ber ©tabt tt)oI)nen, live in the city ; im g'uffs tnotcn, wade in the river ; in einem 83ui^e (ei'en, read in a book ; cr ftarb im 3al)re 1800, died in the year 1800. b. The ace. implies a goal of motion, perception, duration; e.g. in bie ©tabt get)en, go into the city; in ben g(u6 (l|inein) luaten, wade into the river ; in ein 33ui^ |el)en, look into a book; er lebte biS tn8 3ttl)r 1800, he lived into the year 1800. Where a goal of motion is implied Ger. requires the ace. more strictly than Eng. requires into; e.g. man ^Jftanst cinen Saum in bie @rbe, plants a tree in the ground ; ii) ftede bie §anb in bie 11a^ accord- ing to the treaty of alliance. Sometimes with dat. Shortened from nad) Saut, according to the purport. SJJit, dat., with. It denotes : (1) Association, joint activity (friendly and hostile) ; e. g. lomm, ge ^ mit mir, come, go with me ; nitt einem ©egncr ftteiten, contend with an adversary; mtt ®ott, with God's help. (2) Concern, often in a very loose sense ; e. g. luie ftetjt e3 mtt 3f)rem ^erjen (G.) ? how is it with your heart ? am§ gibt'§ mit bent Saner bo (S.) ? whaVs the matter with the peasant there 9 IjinanS miti^m! out with him 1 id) bin mtt ber ®a&it fevtig, done with the affair. (3) Con- comitancy, in phrases of manner ; e. g. mit 9te(^t, rightly ; mit U'enig SlIBi^, with little wit. (4) Appurtenance ; e. g. @b^ mit ber eifernen §anb, Gotz with the iron hand. (5) Means ; e. g. mit einem ayjeffer jd^neiben, cut with a knife; mit ©enng bctriigen, deceive with pleasure. (6) Contemporaneousness ; e. g. bie SBflt ioirb fd^bnet mit jcbem Eag, every day ; mit ber ^eit/ *" course of time. SRitfamt, dat. ; the same as famt. WlitttlS, mittelff, gen., by means of; e. g. mittrfft il)re8 SKnfe^enS, by means of their prestige. SKitteiS is an adverbial genitive of SDHttel ; mittelfl has an excrescent t. $Ro^, dat., after, to, according to. It denotes : (1) Approach, direc- tion of motion, with names of places ; e. g. nadj SJertin ge^en, go to Berlin; nad) §anfe eilen, hurry home. The object may be an adverb ; e. g. nad) oben, up ; nad) unten, down. Direction, without the idea of arrival, may be expressed by nac^ . . . ju ; e. g. mir fu^rett nai^ ber @tobt gu, drove toward the city. (2) The direction of efiort, desire, attention, etc. ; e. g. nad) einem jcf)lagcn, strike at one ; nai^ einem 5iele fd)ieJ3cn, shoot at a mark ; na^ 9{nl)m ftrcben, strive for glory ; fid) nadi 9iu^c fel)nen, long for rest. (3) Sequence ; e. g. nac^ "n«nt reben, speak after one; einS nad) bent onbern, o)ie after the other; nad) tnrjer 3eit, after a short time; nac^ Siic^e, after dinner. (4) Accord- ance, often with object preceding ; e. g. nai^ meiner ainftdit, according to my view; attem 2lnf(f)eine nad), according to all appearances; id) fenne ifin bem Seamen nad), know him by name; eS rieci^t nad) ©^wefet, it smells of (like) sulfur. Wdii% dat., close by, next to; e.g. ntic^fl ber Srude, close by the bridge (S.). The superlative of no^, used adverbially. 338 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION Sdcbeit, dat. and ace, close by, beside. a. With dat. it denotes : (1) Simple juxtaposition; e. g. neben einfm ftljen, sit next to one; itebcn ber Siire fif|Iafen, sleep by the door. (2) Addition or comparison ; e. g. bu foUft leine anbern ©otter neben mir ^oben, no other gods beside me; bit ^aft nod) etne j?lug^eit neben bciner Slcbe (S.), shrewdness along with your love; neben il)m bin ic^ ein ©tiimper, a bungler in comparison with him. b. Witli aoo. it follows verbs of motion in the sense of beside, close to; e.g. er fteUte ftd) neben ben Ofen ^iii (S.), placed himself by the stove; er fe^te fid) neben fie (G.), sat down beside her. But the dat. is not infrequent even after verbs of motion. 9Je0ft, dat., along with, together with; e.g. ber SBater nebft feinen beibeit @ot)iicii, together with his two sons. Prom nebenS, an adverbial amplification of neben, with excrescent t. 06, dat., above, over, on account of; e.g. ob (Srben (archaic), above ground, on earth; ber *priefter fprad) belt ©egen ob bent *Paare (Lenau), pronounced the blessing over the pair ; ob all bem eblcu StBeiii (U.), over, i. e. on account of, all the noble wine. Db is now rare and confined to stately diction. It occurs also with gen. ; e. g. ob be8 felt= famen ®ei:ate8 (S.), on account of the strange implement. D^ite, aoo., without; e.g. oI)ne guten (Srunb, with/)ut good reason. The object may be an inf. with ju or a clause with ba§ ; e. g. bfjeugt nur, oI)ne Biel ju Wiffen (G.), without knowing much; ex fiinbtgt, o^ne bag er C8 tueljj, sins without knowing it. Formerly common with dat. and gen., whence the survivals o^nebem, aside from that, and jtt)eifel8= obne, doubtless. £)6cr^aI6, gen., above; e. g. oberf)atB beS ®orfe8, above the village. Also with dat.: obertjatb bem SBalbe, above the forest. ©nmt, dat., together with; e.g. ber SBater fantt ben Sinbcrn, the father together with the children. Sett, dat., since, from the time of; e. g. feit bent le^ten Sriege, since the last war. Formerly also with gen., whence feit alters, from of old. The object may be an adverb or adjective; e.g. feit gejlern, since yesterday ; feit turjem, recently. ©Ottbcr, aoc, without; obsolete except in a few plirases such as fonber @teid)en, also written fonbergleit^en, without peer ; fonber 3>fcifrfi doubtless. Formerly used also with dat. and gen. Xvotf, gen. or dat., in spite of, in competition with, hence, as well as; e.g. tro^ aller 58emi:t)ungen, in spiie o/aii e^orts; tro^ bem id)Icd)« ten SEBetter, in spite of the bad weather ; tro^ alte bem, /or all that; iaxt SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION 339 auf Bet|let)en rair una tro(3 finer SRotion in bcr SBelt (L.), we understand that as well as any nation in the world. Shortened from ju(m) Sro^e. iXier, dat. and aco., over, beyond. a. With dat. it denotes : (1) Position, with verbs of rest ; e. g. iiBer alien Oijjfein i[t 9Ju^' (G.), over all the hill-tops is rest; n ttio^nt iiber bcm SOJeere, lives across the sea. (2) Occupation ; e. g. iiber einem iBuc^e fl^en, sit over a book; iiber eiiiem ©efprcid) ben 3uB Berfaumen, miss the train over (i. e. thru being absorbed in) a conversation. 6. With ace. it denotes : (1) The goal of motion ; e. g. cr gie^t i^m ein ®la8 SBein iibet ben jfopf (G.), pours a glass of wine over his head; Sommcr iiber bie SCelt bringen, bring sorrow over the world; iiber cine iBriicfe Bel)en, go over a bridge. So with nouns that imply crossing ; e. g. bcr Ubergang iiber bie ®onait, the crossing of the Danube. (2) Su- periority ; e.g. iiber ein SBolt ijexx\iien, rule over a people; iiber ben geinb fiegen, prevail over the enemy. (3) Excess ; e. g. boS ge^t iiber alte SSernunft, beyond all reason ; iiber oUe 58efd)reibung fc^redlic^, ter- rible beyond all description ; iiber jwei 3al)re, over two years. But this last may also mean two years hence; of. ^eute iiber ac^t Sage, a week from to-day ; iiber SfJac^t, ouer night. Further: eiiimal iiber ba8 anberc, time after time; SSriefe iiber S3riefe, letters upon letters. (4) Occasion, theme ; e. g. iiber einen SSorfall ladjen (roeinen, fid) freuen), laugh {weep, rejoice) over an occurrence ; iiber bie fiunft fd)reiben, Mirite upon art; iiber baa ©rljabcne, On the Sublime. So in exclamations: p^ni iiber bid) ! out upon you 1 According to Brandt, iiber ein Sut^ ein^ j(f)tofen, to fall asleep over a book, implies that the hook is dull, while iiber einem S3ud)e einfc^Iafen, means simply to fall asleep while reading. Mm, ace, about, around. It denotes: (1) Simple position, often with following ber or ^erum ; e. g. uni8 geuer fteljen, stand about the fire; alle treten uni il)n (G.), come around him; um ben Xtiij (^erum) ipa;!ieren, walk round the pond. (2) Approxhnation ; e. g. um Seib= nai^tcn, about Christmas; um brei ©tunbeu, about three leagues. In giring the time of day, however, um denotes exact time ; e. g. um 3 Uiix, at S o^clock. (3) Concern, solicitude ; e. g. eg l^anbett fid^ um8 Seben, it is a question of life; um cine @ad)e ftrciten, contend about a matter; um etroaS bitten, ask for something. (4) Exchange, offset, price; e.g. alteS ift cud) fcil um ®oIb (S.), purchasable for gold; um oBeS in bcr SCBett, of (for) all things in the world. (5) Degree of differ- ence; e. g. um eincn Si°^ J" '"•""'' *'"' '"'^^^ ^ aninck; um ein §aar, by a hair's breadth. (6) Loss, deprivation; e.g. einen um3 Seben bringen, deprive one of life; um fc^bne ©tunben getaufd)t, cheated of fair hours. Ulrt . . . mitten, gen., for the sake of; e.g. um ®otte§ n)iIIen,/or God's sake; i. e. um ©otteS Sffiittcn, /or the will of God. 340 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION Unongcfc^eit, gen., not considering. Unfiefdjabct, gen., without detriment (or prejudice) to. Rarely with dat. tlngeod^tet, gen., notwithstanding. Formerly not uncommon with dat, whence bemungeadjtet (as well as beffenuugead)tct), nevertheless. Ulttcr, dat. and ace. under, among. a. With dat., in constructions of rest, it denotes : (1) Simple posi- tion ; e. g. unfer einem SBounie [it}tn, sit under a tree ; ®tetc|cn untct Oiclcm SBotle (G.), among many people. So, too, as the equivalent of a partitive gen. ; e. g. Bide unter ben Solbaten, many among the soldiers. (2) Status, with reference to superior authority, governing conditions, etc. ; e.g. imter einem Cfftjier biencn, serae under an officer; uutct ®tii(f feufjcii, jrroan under oppression ; initcr folt^en llmftaiibcn, uiider such circumstances; ciii iBuct) untct ber ^reffe, a hook in press. (3) Sl- multaneousness, ooncomitancy ; e. g. unter bet DJegierung ^arl§, under the reign of Karl; uutct bcm ©onncr bet Sononcn Borriiden, advarxe amid the roar of cannon. 6. With ace. it denotes the goal of motion ; e. g. cttt)a8 untct ben Xi\!i) tticrfen, throw something wider the table; id) tomni' gar rocnig urtter Seute (G.), I go little among people. Unter^nK, gen., below; e. g. untcr^otb bc8 ®orfe8, below the village. Sometimes with dat. SBermittelft, gen., by means of. The same as mitteljl. SSermagc, gen., in virtue of, by dint of; e. g. Bermoge feinc8 g^cigeS, by dint of his industry. 2?on, dat. , from, of. As we have seen (§ 247), Bon and the dat. may take the place of the gen. in nearly all the latter's uses. Aside from, this it denotes : (1) The starting-point ; e. g. Bon Scrlin not^ Scipjig fasten, travel from Berlin to Leipzig; won nun on, from now on. (2) Residence, origin ; e. g. ber JToufntann Bon SBcnebig, tihe merchant of Venice ; 9{ubotf Bon §ab«burg, Rudolf of Habsburg. Hence, in modern times, as a mere sign of nobiUty ; e. g. %ii.x\t Bon SBiSmavcE, Prince von Bismarck. (3) Agency, with passive verbs ; e. g. Slmcritu Wurbe Bon Sotumbns cntbedt, was discovered by Columbus. (4) Source ; e.g. Bou atten 'Beittn, from all sides; eon ber Suft tcbeu, live on air; Bon ttJcni tjabcn ®ic baS ? from whom have you that ? ba« ifl nid)t gut Bon bit, not kind of you ; Bon Oebuvt ein jDeutidjer, a German by birth; uajj Bom 9tcgen, wet with rain. (5) Separation, release ; e. g. boSSute- Bom ®c^tcd)tcn unterfd)eibeu, distinguish the good from the bad; fret Oon ifi^en, dat. and ace, between. The dat. follows verbs of rest, the ace. verbs of motion. SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION 378. Classification of Conjunctions. Conjunctions con- nect the members of compound or complex sentences (cf. § 411). Those that connect sentences of equal syn- tactical rank are called ' co-ordinating ' conjunctions, while those that introduce dependent clauses are called ' subordinating,' The former class may be subdivided, with reference to their influence on the word-order, into general connectives and adverbial conjunctions. 1. Conjunctions are mainly of adverbial origin, and are not always easily distinguishable from adverbs. The guiding principle is that an adverb modifies a single word, usually the verb, of its clause, while a conjunction limits the clause itself, showing its logical relation to what pracedes or follows. But a considerable number of adverbs (see below, § 380, 1) may perform either function, or both at the same time. 379. The General Connectives abtx, aHein, fonbern, benn, ober and uitb do not affect the word-order ; e. g. obex bie (Sonne bulbet fein 3Seifee§ (G.), hut the sun endures nothing white; benii er mar unfer (G.), for he was ours; 2Beib, mad)' ^tal^, ober metn 5Ro^ ge^t iiber bid) I)inft)eg (S.), woman, give way, or my horse will run over you. SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION 343 1. Of the three words for but, oHein and obex are used without appreciable difference of meaning, but aHein always begins its clause, whereas oBer may come after one or more words, beingthen equivalent to however ; e. g. \i) abcr Blieb tnit fummetBotter @ccte (S.), I however remained with sorrowful soul, ©onbern is used only after a negative, and introduces a contrast which excludes or contradicts what goes be- fore ; e. g. baS ift lein @tu:ib, fotibern nur cin SBorruanb, that isno reason, but only a pretext; er fatn mi^i, fonbern er blicb ru^ig ju §aufe, he did not come, but remained quietly at home. But if the second proposition does not exclude the first, abet is used even after a negative ; e, g. er fam tiici^t, aber er blieb nic^t o^ne Otunb ju §oufe, he did not come, but he had reason for remaining at home. (Sonbern is especially common in the correlative phrase nid^t atlein (or nic^t nur) . . . fonbetn aud), not only . . . but also. 2. ®«nn, for, always begins its clause and is thus easily distinguish- able from the inferential bentt, then (§ 380), which never stands first. 3. Cbcr, or, is often preceded by a correlative entweber, etiAer; e.g. entmeber i^r fennt mic^ ntc^t, ober i^t jeib fefjr boS^aft (G.), eitJier you do not know me, or you are very malicious. (Sntlreber sometimes causes inversion, ober very rarely. Ober is often followed by a pleonastic and untranslatable aber ; e. g. ii} tt)iU entmeber jtegen, ober abet fterben (Gr.), I will conquer or die. 4. The use of unb corresponds closely to that of and. Note, how- ever, the frequent employment of inversion after unb, with resumption of the subject by means of a pronoim, usually betfetbc ; e. g. bie SSor= ftettung bcginnt urn fec^S Ul)r, unb tt)irb biefe{6e ungefaljr brei ©tunben bauetn, enn is now little used after a comparative, except to avoid an awkward repeti- tion of at8; e. g. ©chiller roar grower ol8 ®ii^ter beim al8 ^^ilojo))^, greater as poet than as philosopher. 2H6 rote, for aU, is colloquial, but common in the classics. 6. ®a with pret. may denote simple time, Uke al8; e. g. ba t^r nod) bte fc^ijnc SBctt rcgtertet (S.), when you still ruled. So, too, to define 3ett; e.g. bic B^'tc"? ^<^ ^^ "oc^ felbft ini SBcrbcn roor (G.), the times when. More often, however, it is causal ; e. g. ba bit, o §err, bid) ein» mot roteber na^ft (G.), since thou dost again draw near. Somewhat rare is the sense of tho ; e. g. ba fid) mein S5ater ntd)t lei^t etne 3tu8= gate ertaubte, \o roar er bagegen nid)t farg (G.), tho my father did not like to spend money, still he was not niggardly; roerb' cin giirftcn!ne(^t, ba bu etn ©ctbft^err fein faniift (S.), become a vassal, where (tho) you may he a sovereign. c. Samlt denotes purpose, not result, and is usually followed by the subjunctive ; e. g. ba8 fag' i(f| eudfi, batnit i^r'8 roiffet (S.), 1 tell you this that you may know it. 3Iuf bag, = in order that, is common in early modern Ger., but is now archaic ; e. g. e^re SBater unb SJtiitter, auf bag c8 btr roo^t ge^e (Lu.), honor thy father and mother in order that, etc. d. ®o6 may denote purpose or result ; e. g. atle SSIiiten miiffen Oer= gct)cn, bag gtiic^te begliiilen (G.), blossoms must fade that fruits may bless. But for this bag modern prose prefers bamtt. Denoting result bag is apt to be preceded by fo, ouf fotc^e SBetfc, bergeflatt ; e. g. cr ff)rtct)t fo tetfe, bag man nict)t Berfte^t, he speaks so low that one does not under- stand. After ju . . . alS, in result-clauses, the subjunctive is usual ; e. g. et ffjric^t gu tetfe, ol8 bag man iljn Berftet)cn tbntite, he speaks too low for one to understand him. — Most often bag introduces a substan- tive or adjective clause; e. g. td^ glaube, bag er fommen roirb, I believe that he will come; metne Seljaufitung, bafi e8 fatfc^ tft, my assertion that it is false. The subjunctive in an object-clause is due to the nature of the thought (§ 360), not to any governing power of bag; e. g. roer badjte, bog bte ie et te6t, I know not how he lives; rait fprac^ett Bom ©eeman, unb irie er Ie£t (Heine), of the sailor and his way of living ; eS ift, Vote id) bir fagte, it is as I told you. A clause with wie may define a noun of manner ; e. g. bie 2trt, raie et lebt, his way of living. On the very common use of rate for ols in comparisons (i(^, bin otter irie bii, ic^ Bin nid)t fo alt tnie bu) see above under aU. m. Observe that toatin, raie, rao and its compounds may be used as direct interrogatives, vfith the order as in Eng. ; it is only when used indirectly in dependent sentences that they require the dependent order ; e. g. rao tft er ? raann rairb er tontmen ? where is he f when will he come ? id) raeig nid^t, raann er lomtnen rairb, I do not know when he will come. The prepositional compounds of rao, raorauf, teoran, etc., usually have relative force, but some of them serve also as indirect interrogatives ; e. g. bie jfrage, raoBon bie 9tebe ift, the question under discussion; Idi raetg nid)t, rooBon bie 3?ebe ift, I do not know what the question under discussion is. The particle audj (less often nur or im- mer) placed after an indirect raann, raie or rao, gives the force of Eng. ever ; e. g. ein l^eiliger 2BiIte tebt, raie and) bcr menfc^tirf)e raan!e (S.), a holy will lives, liowever the human will may waver ; raie baS au(^ feitt ma^,.kowever that may be. THE INTERJECTION" 382. Nature of the Interjection. The interjection does not form an integral part of the sentence, but is a sentence by itself, i. e. an independent expression of feeling or will. 1. Some interjections are used only as such, either alone or in con- nection with some other part of speech ; e. g. ai) ! ah ! ai), Oott ! ah, God ! dear me ! p\t ! hush ! These may be called the interjections proper. 2. Others are nouns, adjectives, adverbs, verbs, phrases ; e. g. I)ein hail! ^errtir^! splendid! nun! well! ftet)! look! ©otttob! God be praised ! Here belong all sorts of oaths, adjurations and by-words. 3. Others are calls to animals, imitations of sounds, refrains used in singing ; e. g. ^ift ! haw ! raau ! bow-wow ! ntiou I mew ! })tff ! bang ! iuii)f)etfal §eifal £|e! hurrah! heighol hohol 350 WORD-FOEMATION 4. While the interjection has no proper case-goyeming power and is usually followed by the nom., or by a prepositional phrase, it may be associated with a gen., dat. or ace. See §§ 255, 261, 1, a, and 267, 3. 383. List of Interjections. The interjections and interjectional phrases that fall under 2 and 3 in the above classification are too numerous to mention. The follow- ing list comprises only those of class 1, and of these only some of the more important. Such are : ac^ ! ah, O, alas ^aUo ! hello ^ui ! whiz of) ! oA iftl ^urra ! hurrah aija ! aha ^eba ! ho there iud)t)e ! heigho au ! ^ctfa ! heigho na ! indeed, well now Ball ! hah ^em \\)m\ hm o ! ol) ! 0, oh elj! eA ■ ^o! Ao ol)o! oho ei ! oho ^of)o ! hoho ^)fui ! pooh, fle \)a ! ha ^olla ! hello pft ! psf , hush ^al)a! haha ^u! whew uff! ugh 1. It is usual to classify interjections according to the nature of the feeling they denote, but with some of the most common the meaning depends largely on the connection, the tone in which they are uttered, the accompanying gesture, etc. Thus aH) most often expresses pain or regret, but it may denote surprise, or even delight. — O, o\), are often simply particles of address. — 53a^, pfui, uff, express annoyance or disgust. — §c, ^ebo, ^o, ^allo, are used in attracting attention. — SHa is deprecatory, a sort of verbal shrug of the shoulders. WORD-FORMATION 384. Of Derivation in General. Words are derived from roots, usually with the aid of prefixes and suffixes. Thus, looking at the noun ®e6urt, Mrth, we find that the prefix ge and the suffix t form a part of numerous other nouns, as well as this one, and have a meaning of their own. They are therefore called formative elements. The root is what remains when all such elements have been removed. 1. From a modem point of view it would seem, then, that the root of ®eburt is the syllable hur. But ®eburt comes from geBSten, earlier geberen, which, with its pret. gcbar, and its pple. geboren, shows us the THE DERIVATION OF NOUNS 351 same root in the forms Ber, bar, 6or. This internal vowel-change, called, as we have seen, ' ablaut,' plays an important part in deriva- tion. 2. The primary factors in derivation are, then, (1) the radical syllable with its possibilities of ablaut, (2) prefixes, and (3) suffixes. A root must always be present, tho its exact meaning is not always determinable. Of the forma- tive elements, suffixes play a much more important part than prefixes. Some suffixes, e. g. {)eit in g^reibeit, and turn in 3rr= turn, were once independent words ; in the case of others no such origin is traceable. A suffix may cause umlaut, which thus enters as a secondary factor into derivation ; e. g. %xau, graulein. 3. Finally, two or more words, each formed in the manner above described, may combine into a compound ; €.g. ©eburtgtag, birthday. 4. Remark. The etymology of German words can not be thoroly studied without a knowledge of the older Germanic dialects and of comparative Indo-European Philology (Appendix II). The following treatment of derivation, which does not presuppose such knowledge, must of necessity, therefore, be somewhat superficial. THE DERIVATION OF NOUNS 385. Nouns of Obscure Derivation. There are many nouns the derivation of which is obscure, either because there is no related verb which shows the root, or because the suffix, if there is one, has no definable meaning which enables us to associate the word with others of a like ending. Such are, e. g. %aa„ day ; geber, feather ; |)au§, house ; S3ufen, losom ; SSaffer, water. 1. Such nouns must count, for the student of modern German, as primitive words, tho many of them can be explained by the help of comparative philology. Thus Sag probably comes from a root mean- ing to bum : the ' day ' was the warm part of the four-and-twenty hours. Again geber comes from a root meaning to fly, plus an instrumental suffix: it meant means of flying. But the syllable geb is meaning- y 352 WORD-FOKMATION less in modem German, as is also the suflfix er applied to it, the there are other words in abundance in which er has a definable meaning ; e. g. §alter, holder, from the root of l)alten, hold. Hence we may call geber a primitive word, and §alter a derivative, tho both are in reality- derivatives. 386. Derivation by Ablaut. Many nouns are derived from strong verbal roots without the aid of a suffix. The root may appear as in the infinitive of the verb, or in some other ablaut-variation ; e. g. gaU, fall, from faHen ; Sife, hite, from beifsen ; ©cl)u§, shot, from fd^iefeen ; QoU, toll, from jat)len. The great mass of such derivatives are masculine (cf. § 234, 1, a). 387. Derivation by Suffix. Thegreatmajority of nouns are formed by the aid of a suffix. Some of the suffixes are applied to a verbal root (usually, but not always, in the form shown by the infinitive), others to a verbal stem or to the stem of a noun or adjective. The following alphabetical list contains those which are most important, i. e. those which are now felt, more or less distinctly, as suffixes, and form derivatives that have a definite and easily discernible relation to the primitive base. Those suffixes that contain a front vowel (e, i) are apt to cause umlaut, but there are many exceptions. 1. G^en and Icttt, the former cognate with kin in lambkin, are ap- plied to nouns to form diminutives ; e. g. SBttumd^en, little tree; 9ib8= letn, little rose. Often there is an implication of familiarity or endear- ment ; e. g. JUiitterd^en, little mother, mama ; ®u«(I)en, Susie. Both suffixes usually cause umlaut. Of the two the North German (^etl is the living suffix and prevails in the language of every-day life, while the South German lein is more literary ; cf. 3Ib8d)en and SRbStcin, SSIiimd^eit and iBtiitnleilt. In a few cases there is a stereotyped difference of meaning ; e. g. graulein, young lady. Miss, but graud)cn, little wife. 2. J)c, attached to verbal roots, denotes the thing done, or a con- crete manifestation of the action ; e. g. sBiirbe, burden, from sbfireit, bear ; ^tniiitjoy, from freuen, rejoice ,; ©entolbc, painting, from malen, paint; ©elUbbe, vow, from geloben, vow; 3i«rbe, ornament, from jieren, adorn. THE DERIVATIOi;^ OF NOUNS 353 3. @ is a very common suffix : (1) Attached to verbal roots it forms a multitude of f eminines, which denote the action or its concrete effect, less often that which performs the action ; e. g. Siige, falsehood, from liigen, lie; i!age, situation, from liegen, Jie; Oabe, gift, from geben ; g^jradje, language, from fpredicn ; %\\t%(,fiy, from fliegen ; @(i)(ange, serpent, from fc^lingen, wind. A few masculines denote persons ; e. g. SBote, messenger, from bieten, hid. (2) Attached to adjectives (always with umlaut, if possible), it forms abstracts ; e. g. (Srojje, greatness, from grog ; Sange, length, from long ; ifiirje, brevity, from turj. 4. ®i', erei'. @t is of foreign origin, Lat. ia, Fr. ie, and is always accented. It is appended both to nominal and to verbal stems to form nouns of action and of place ; e. g. §eud)elei, hypocrisy, from ^eud)e(n, feign; Slbtei, abbey, from 2(bt, abbot. As it was often vised after er, the suffix came to be felt as erei, and the latter is now much more com- mon than the simple ei. Srei forms nouns of action, Bs'iSila\tui,painting, from malen ; of place, as SBoderci, bakery, from baden ; of condition, as ©Haucrei, slavery, from ©ttatie ; rarely also collectives, as 9?citerei, cavalry, from 9ieiter. It often implies contempt, as in ©tJielerei, Sin= beret, child? s play ; 3urtfterei, pettifoggery, from 3urift. 5. @(, applied to verbal roots, denotes the instrument ; e. g. ^ix^ti, rein, from jie^en, draw; Slingel, bell, from fitngen, ring; §ebei, lever, from ^ebeii, lift. In South-German dialect et forms diminutives and familiar nicknames ; e. g. Wl'dhd, girl, instead of SDicibc^cn ; @c|))3el, nickname of 3oje^)^. 6. (5r, (er, iter. Er applied to verbal roots denotes the agent ; e. g. ©e^er, seer, from fel^en ; 3ager, tenier, fromjagen. It may also denot^e the instrument ; e. g. ©c^tager, sword, from |d)Iogen ; S3of|rcr, gimlet, from bo^reit. Attached to noun-stems it denotes a resident or a func- tionary; e. g. SBurger, citizen, from Surg, castle ; Serliner, resident of Berlin; SBogler, /owZer, from SBogel ; ©cirtner, gardener, from ©arten. The use of the suffix er after nouns in el and en (as in the last two examples) gave rise to the two new suffixes ler and ner, which were then appended to nouns not endmg in et or en ; as ^^unftler, artist, from ^unjl, art; ficHner, waiter, from ifeUer, cellar. 7. fieit leit. §eit, cognate with hood, in falsehood, and head in the archaic drowsihead, = drowsiness, was once an independent word, meaning manner, person. It forms abstracts from adjectives, and collectives from nouns ; e. g. grei^eit, freedom, from fret ; @d|bnl)ett. beauty, from fd|bn ; Tkn\ ftemben, alienate, from fremb, strange; entbtbgcn, expose, from blo6, bare; entfiugern, alienate, from fiu^er, outward. b. Aside from its inchoative and privative use, ent forms a number of verbs in which the force of the prefix is dimly felt, the compound differing but slightly perhaps from the simple verb; e. g. entbietcn, offer, from bieten, offer; entrid)ten, set right, discharge (a debt), from rid^ten, set right; cnt^alten, contain, from gotten, hold. c. The three verbs en^jfongen (empfafjen), cmpfcfjlen, and empftnben, contain the prefix in the form em)), ntf having become mpf. 3. @r, the same as the accented ur in UrqueH, ultimately also cog- nate with an§, out, meant originally out, forth, to the end. According as it looks to the beginning or the end, it forms, from verbal roots: (1) Intransitive inchoatives; e. g. crfte^en, stand forth, arise, from fte^cn; erbliif)en, blossom, from bfu^en; ermadjcn, awaken (come into the state of wakefulness denoted by the durative ttiac^en). (2) Transitive perfect- ives, denoting attainment of a goal ; e. g. etbenfen, think out, excogi- tate, from benfen; erjogen, hunt down, capture by hunting; cvfafiren, erieben, experience {reach by going, or living) ; erbettein, get by begging. 364 ■WORD-FORMATION a. Prefixed to adjectives er forms inchoatives and faotitives ; e. g. tttxawim, fall ill; erbdnben, become blind; ermuntcru, make cheerful, cheer up ; erneuern, renew ; fic^ erbtctften, make one's self bold, presume. Cf . also, from a noun-stem, fic^ crmottnett, make one's self a man, nerve one's self. 4. (55c, called by the Grimm Dictionary, which devotes some eight- een pages to it, ' the most wonderful word of our language,' meant originally with, together. Cf. § 388, 4. It is possibly cognate with Lat. cum-, con-, co-. The radical meaning is still dimly felt in gfrin= neti, run together, curdle, and gcfricrcn, cool together, freeze, con-geal. (Cf. the nouns Ocbriiber, brothers, belonging together in family or firm; <3e^a^vte, fellow-traveler, etc.). a. From the meaning together came that of fitness, appurtenance ; e.g. Qeifoxtn, belong to; gebiit]ren, 6e/i«; gejicmcn, feeseem. 6. Hence also the perfective force of ge (cf. Lat. conficio, with facia); e.g. gelangen, arrive at; geteic^cn, reach to, suffice; gerafen, come into; genefen, get well; geloinnen, gain. Out of this meaning grew its use as sign of the perf. pple. (§ 326, 1). c. In a few verbs ge has durative force, denoting a permanent or persistent condition ; e. g. fid) gebaveii, behave one's self; gebenfen, think of, intend ; gcrul)en, please, be minded (not from ruljen, but from an obsolete root cognate with reck) ; gebciten, bear, be in a state of bearing. d. In many cases, however, the force of ge is quite indeterminate. Indeed some of the explanations given above may be classed as doubt- ful, and in no case is the force of ge very distinctly felt even by edu- cated speakers. In gtauben, OliicE, Onabe, it appears reduced to g. 5. SB er, cognate with /or in /oj-giiue, at first meant /oriA, awaj/. Like et it may look to the beginning or the end, and forms, accordingly : (1) Verbs that denote a final departure or removal from a previous status; e.g. Bergetjeii, pass away; bertretben, drive out; Bevfenben, send away, despatch; Berg iejjen, pour OMi, spiii. (2) Perf ectives that denote a final issue, closing up, using up, or wasting, as the result of the action ; e. g. Berb(iil)en, go out of bloom, fade ; Berbtuteti, bleed to death; freffcii, i.e. Bereffcn, eat up, devour; Ber(d)n)inbeii, vanish; Ber= Qxaien,bury; Berfiegein, seai up; ucrbraudjen, use wp ; Berfpielen, joasie in play. a. Out of the first meaning grows that wliich simply negatives the meaning of the basic verb (cf . dis-pense and dis-unite) ; e. g. Bcrbteten, forbid, from bteten, offer; Bergeffen, forget, from obsolete geffen, j/ei; Oerfagen, refuse. DERIVATION OF PRONOUNS AND PARTICLES 365 6. The final issue being often conceived as wrong, Ber comes to mean amiss, wrongly, in excess, too long ; e. g. Berfet)rcn, pervert [give a wrong turn), from !efiren, turn; Oertentien, misjudge; Berfii^ren, lead astray, seduce; Berftfeen, sit too long ; Berfd^lofen, oversleep. c. Prefixed to a noun or adjective Ber has factitive force ; e. g. 8er» golben, gild, from @olb; Bcrgbttern, idolize, from @ott; Bercroigen, eter- nalize; Berlangei'tt, make longer, from Ifitiger. d. In some cases the perfective force of ber is so weajily felt that the compound hardly differs appreciably from the simple verb ; e. g. Dermeiben, avoid, and meiben; Betleugneit, deny, and teugnen. 6. 3cr, without cognate in modem English, means asunder, apart, in pieces; e. g.gerteifeen, tear in pieces; jettreten, crush by treading; jerfaUen, fall to pieces. DERIVATION OF PRONOUNS AND PARTICLES 397. The Pronouns. Of the derivation of pronouns there is little to be said. The personal pronouns, as also the simple possessives and demonstratives, are primitive words formed from pronominal roots. The amplified pos- sessive-stems nieinig, beinig, etc., have the adjectival suffix ig. S)erfeI6e is a compound of ber and fel6, cognate with self, which was sometimes uninflected in older German, but is now always inflected with the sense of English same. 1. Of the intensives felber, felBft, the former is a stereotyped nom. sing. mas. of felb, while the latter comes from the gen. felbeS with excrescent t, due perhaps to superlatives in ft. 2. The relative pronouns are of secondary origin, ber being the demonstrative ber, and ffield) the interrogative trelc^, which is from the old interrogative stem hva, live, with sufBx lic^ = like. 2Betc^ is thus = what-like. The same suffix appears in ioI(^ = so-like. 3Ber and tro8 are interrogatives, the r being the ending of the nom. sing, mas., and 8, representing an older t (cf. Eng. what), that of the neu. 3. The indefinite pronouns are either primitive words (all, anber, Jeibe, jeb-, man, Biel), compounds of such (jemonb = je + man, ntemanb = nie -f- man, jebermann = jeber SDJann), or they have adjectival suf- fixes already mentioned (einig, ctliif), jcglid), wentg, manif), which is identical with mannig in manntgfalt). 366 ■WORD-COMBINATION 398. The Particles have been pretty fully treated, with respect to their derivation, in preceding sections. Those adverbs which are simply uninflected adjectives have, of course, the derivation of adjec- tives. On the adverbial suffixes (e)«, eits, Ung«, loarts, ireije, see ■§§373-4. 1. The prepositions and conjunctions are mainly of adverbial origin (§§ 376, 378, 1). For the derivation of those prepositions that are not primitive words consult the list in § 377. The conjunctions are either primitive words and compounds of such, or they have the derivation of adverbs. There are no principles of derivation applicable to them as a class. The same is true of the interjections. WORD-COMBINATION COMPOUND NOUNS 399. Of Noun-Composition in General. Two or more words combined into one and used substantively consti- tute a compound noun. The last element is nearly always a noun, has weak stress and determines the gender and declension of the whole. The first element may be any part of speech ; it has strong stress and contains the dominant idea ; e.g.^xa'iit^u'a„freight-trai7i; ©dine'IIju'g, fast train ; (£i'ienbat)n=5(>n9elegenf;eiten, railway-affairs. 1. A few compound nouns have an adjective, adverb or phrase as final element; e.g. 3a'l)t^u' iibert, centwrv; ie^bema'ifi, farewell ; 9Jim» merfatt, never-full (of a glutton or toper); ©tcttbic^cin, rendez-vous ; ®pxmQmi)eti>, jump-qfleld, romp; ®arou8 (from gar an9), finishing- stroke. But such compounds are comparatively rare and stand apart from the ordinary principles of composition. 400. Compounds of Noun and Noun are the most numer- ■ ous class. They are formed in German much more freely than in English and hence can not always be translated by an equivalent compound. The important facts relating to them are as follows : 1. The first element may be the simple stem — -the earliest mode of composition ; e. g. §au8^err, head of the house ; 93ud)^anblung, bookstore ; 93aterlanb, native country. COMPOUND NOUNS 367 o. Observe, however, that many nouns now monosyllabic once had a stem-sufBx. The final vowel of this sufBx, becoming e, rendered the 'Stem,' for the purposes of composition, in some cases like the plu., with which it later became confused ; e. g. Sagebud), day-hook, diary (not days-book, tho it looks so); ipunbefteuer, dog-tax; ^fcrbcfleifc^, horse-flesh. In iBtfiutigom, bridegroom, i. e. bride-man, and 9^aif|tigaO, nightingale, i. e. night-singer, the old stem-suffix persists as i. 2. More often the first element is the genitive singular in (e)l, (e)n, or the genitive plural in er, en, e ; e.g. ©eifteSfraft, intellectual power ; ^naBenalter, boijhood ; g-rauenf tofter, nun- nery; ©etfterreic^, spirit-realm; ©anfeftatt, gooser-pen; ?Kdufe= fra^, damage done by the gnatving of mice. Possibly the last two cases should come under 1, a, above. a. The ending (e)S of mas. and neu. nouns, having come to be felt simply as a connecting link in compounds, was then applied also to f eminines, which would not take it as separate words ; e. g. Siebe8= btie^, love-letter ; @eburt8tag, birthday; SEBa^rtjeitSllebc, ioiie of truth; geftunggtnaiier, fortress-wall. It is thus now quite commonly applied to feminines in t, ^eit, teit, fc^aft, ung. 6. So, too, the ending en may be added to fem. nouns in the sing. ; e. g. E^renlBort, word of honor ; ©omienaufgong, sunrise. But these nouns once had en in the gen. regularly. In other cases the final e of a fem. in e is dropped; e. g. ©c^ultel)ter, school-teacher. 3. With respect to its meaning the first element may limit the second in almost any syntactic relation. Thus it may be equivalent to a. An appositive ; e. g. ©ottmenfi^, God-man; ©ternblume, star- flower. b. A genitive, which may be: (1) Partitive, as in iaxibeittii, part of the land, district. (2) Objective, as in 2;^ronbefteigung, mounting of the throne; Satferluol)!, imperial election. (3) Subjective, as in S3ti^= fc^lag, lightning-stroke. (4) Of specification, as in @cfu^t«mantt, man of feeling. (5) Of connection, as in giirftenfo^n, son of a prince; SKeereSttJcUe, wave of the sea. c. An accusative, as in @c^u^mad)cv, shoemaker. d. A prepositional phrase denoting purpose, destination, material, source, instrument, place, manner, etc.; e. g. SJBaffergloS, glass for water; @trof)t)ut, siraio hat; greubetrancn, tears of joy ; ®anH)ff(f)iff, steamboat; ^a\^ev^a^Tt, journey by water ; %ni\olt)at, foot-soldier. 368 WORD-COMBINATION 4. While in general no hyphen is needed between the parts of a compound, very long or unusual compounds should be bisected or trisected for the convenience of the eye ; e. g. i^euetWt^iiietnnQS- @efettfci)oft, fire-insurance company ; *)5er|onaI=35eranberung8=9facl)n)ci= |mig, report on changes of personnel. But there is no fixed rule on this subject. 401. Compounds of Adjective and Noun. The adjective is uninflected and the compound has a specific meanmg, different from that which would be given by the inflected adjective in agreement with the noun ; e. g. Sungfrau, young (itnmarried) woman; ScfjtoarjtDalb, Black Forest; 2{Itftabt, old^town, old part of town ; ©auerfraut, sauer- kraut ; §cll)ct)er, clairvoyant. a. A few spurious compounds contain an inflected adjective in agreement ; e. g. bie fo'ngcTOei'Ic, tedium, gen.-dat. bcr Songe(n)lt)etIe; baa §o^eIieb, Song of Solomon, bc8 §o^enlicbe8, bcm §o^enlifbe; ber §of)e)jriefter, high-priest, eitt §ot)er|Drieftev, beS §o[)en)jriefter8, jtuei §o]^e= ptiefter; bet @e[)eim(e)rat, privy counsellor, etn @et)etm(er)rat, beS @e= l)eim(en)rat?, 3itiei @e()eiin(e)rate, bie ®et)eitn(eu)rdtc. 1. Substantive adjectives take the form of a weiik gen. plu.; e. g. %xmett\ttan, poor-tax; S:xanten^aM, house for the sick, hospital; §ci» ligenfdjein, saintly halo. 2. Here belong also compounds of numeral and noun; e. g. ®reie(f, triangle; SSiergefpann, coach and four. 402. Compounds of Verb and Noun. The first element is the simple root, sometimes with a connecting e, which represents an earlier stem-suffix ; e. g. @c[)ie^putt)cr, gun- powder, from fcf)iegen, shoot; 9^ertntoort, noun, from nen= nen ; ,f)orfaaI, lecture-room, from (}oren ; Sefebucfj, reading- book, from lefen ; ijeifcfiejat^, postulate, from t)et)"djen. 403. Compounds of Particle and Noun are quite numer- ous ; e. g. Satoort, assent, from ja ; Se^^tjeit, present time, fromjeljt; ^mWmt, pronoun ; 'iM')ol)i, acclivity ; 9}orred)t, prerogative; 9)?i^mut, ill-humor; Obtxijaupt, chieftain; Unterabteilung, subdivision. COMPOUND ADJECTIVES 369 1. Numerous words which might seem at first sight to come under this head are not compounds of particle and noun, but derivatives of a compound verb; e. g. SluSgong, exit, from au«gef|en; S!Bot)(tat, benefit, from mo^ttun; Uberjie^er, overcoat, from iiber3iel)cn. COMPOUND ADJECTIVES 404. Noun and Adjective. This is the most common type of compound adjective. The first element may- be the stem or the genitive. It denotes various syntac- tic relations, which are easily understood. Examples : geiftreic^, clever, spiritual ; geifte^arm, intellectitally poor ; ^o[fnung§t)oE, liopeful ; menfdienteer, devoid of men, unin- habited; f)erjen§franf, sick at heart; arbeit^fd^ig, capable cf work. 1. Many com-pounds of this type imply comparison, the first element being intensive ; e. g. rie[engro^, tall as a giant, gigantic; bli^f(f)nelt, quick as lightning ; tnorgenf(^on, beauti- ful as the morning ; blutarm, poor to the very blood, very poor (bat it may also mean^oo/" in blood); Jjubetna^, soaking wet (wet as a poodle emerging from the water) . 2. The second element may be a participle (sometimes without ge), the first denoting the object, agent, instrument, or some adverbial relation; e. g. ^erjjerreigenb, heart-rending ; gottDcrtaffen, Goclr-forsaken ; meerumgeben, sea-girt; l)er3gcliebt, dearly beloved; gtunbbctfeljrt, radi- cally perverted ; ijauSiaden, home-baked, homely. a. fSevge^\m, forgotten, occurs with active force as if for Dergcffcnb; e. g. })ftiif)t»ergeffen, ct)tt>ergeffcit, duty-forgetting, honor-forgetting. 405. Adjective (or Adverb) and Adjective. Compounds of two adjectives, denoting a combination of the two qualities, are quite common. The first has the stem-form and is thus not formally distinguishable from an adverb ; e. g. altbeutfd), old German ; toUfit^n, foolhardy ; f)etlgrun, bright green. a. Compounds of three adjectives also occur; e. g. alt^oii^beutfd^i Old High German; rottt)ei§blou, red white and blue. 370 WOED-COMBIN^ATION 1. In such a compound as ebct=ftumm (G.), tho we can hardly trans- late it except by nobly mute, ebel is not a true adverh. Where the first element is an adverb the second is a participle; e. g. neuBaden, new-baked; iialbmai)\m, half-grown ; iiei^s^^itbt, fervently loved ; ^o(^» ge^Jticfcn, highly-praised. 2. A noun with preceding adjectival modifier is converted into a compound adjective by means of the suffixes ig, tfc^, lid^, both elements taking the stem-form; e.g. eincingig, one-eyed; altmobifi^, old-fash- ioned; \xemi\pxadjUi), pertaining to foreign languages. The usual suf- fix is tg. 406, Other Types of Compound Adjective occur, but are less common. Thus the first element may be : 1. The pronoun felBft; e. g. fcIBftoerftcinbtid), obvious. 2. A verbal root; e. g. lerneifrig, eager to (earn ; benflniirbig, /reemor- able. 3. A particle; e g. anjlcHig, handy ; aBl^otb, ungracious. OTHER COMPOUNDS 407. The Composition of Verbs, the subject being bound up with that of conjugation, has been fully treated in preceding sections. For inseparable composition see §§ 206-8 and 396 ; for compounds of separable particle and verb, §§ 210-12 and 341 ; for compounds of adjective and verb, or noun and verb, §§ 213 and 342 ; for compounds of compounds, §§ 214 and 343. 408. Compound Particles generally accent the second element. A compound adverb may consist of (1) noun "t" adverb, as Ottoman' ^, upstream ; (2) adverb (preposi- tion) + adverb, as jofo'rt, at mice ; bat^i'n, thither ; umf)e'r, round about; iifierau'iS, altogether; juglei'd), at the same time; (3) preposition -f case, as fiOerljau'pt, in general; Uor{)Q'nben, at hand, extant ; tnbe'fien, meanwhile. a. But the first element receives the accent if it is a pronoun or adjective, or if it is formed by means of one of the adverbial suffixes; e.g. 'at' m%tma^, accordingly ; Wx%t\la\i, in such way ; mci'uetmegcn, on my account ; o'UerbingS, to be sure; neu'evbinQS, recently ; a'nbcnt' fads, in the other event; Bo'rmittagS, forenoons; gu'iel)cub9, visibly: THE SENTENCE 371 tci'ttoeifc, partly. Some other exceptions occur ; e. g. au'get^alb, and other compounds of fialb, t'rgenbmo, be'nnoi^. @l'nmo(, means once (and no more) ; cinma'I, once (upon a time), just. 1, Compound prepositions consist of preposition + case ; e. g. an= fta'tt, instead; info'tge, in consequence of. ©innen is a compound of 6ei and the adverb innen. For others consult the list in § 377. 2. Compound conjunctions consist of two adverbs or of conjunction -)- adverb ; e. g. ttiteltio^I, altho; fobalb, as soon as; obgteid), obwol)!, altJio. ®ten)eit, archaic for because, is the adverbial ace. bie SGBei((e), the while. THE SENTENCE 409. Since the analysis of the sentence and the nomenclature ap- pUcable thereto are the same for German as for EngUsh, a brief treat- ment of the subject in its general aspects will be sufficient. 410. The Simple Sentence consists of a single subject and a single verb, each perhaps with modifiers. The subject is always a noun or pronoun. The modifiers of the subject may be : article, attributive adjective, limit- ing genitive, adnominal phrase, appositive (appositional predicate) and sometimes an adverb. The modifiers of the verb may be : object, predicate adverb, dependent infinitive. 1 With respect to its form the simple sentence is either (1) assertive, as er ^at bal 3^^' erreic^t, he has reached the goal ; {2) interrogative, as tjat cr ba§ '^\t\ erreid^t ? (3) optative- imperative, as moge er bag '%\i\ erreic^en, may he reach the goal, or er fce^alte ba§ "^xtX im 3luge, let him keep the goal in view. To these may be added (4) the exclamatoiy type, which, however, may have the dependent form ; e. g. tt)ie f d^nell er ba§ 3iel erretc^t Ejat ! how quickly he has reached the ■goal! Cf. §413, 1,5. a. An initial verb with following isoi) renders an assertive sentence emphatic; e.g. ift boc^ bie ®tobt tt)ie gefel)rt (G.), really the city is as if swept. Cf. §419, 5. 6. Any of the above forms may be negatived by the adverb nid)t. As in English, double negation is now regarded as vulgar and ungram- 372 THE SENTENCE matical, but it is common in the spoken language and is found abun- dantly in the best literature of all periods; e. g. e« ift a(« [)atte niettiarb uiiijtg ju treibeit (G.), it is as if no one had anything to do; nut fcin Oelb t;at fie itidjt (L.), only she hasn't any money. See the multitude of examples in the Grimm Dictionary, under lein. c. A pleonastic nicfit may occur (1) in exclamatory sentences,. (2) in dependent clauses after a verb of denying, doubting, forbidding, hindering, or the like, and (3) after a comparative ; e. g from Gleim, role mimtct roar fie nic^t ! how lively she was ! i. e. -what degree of live- liness did she not exhibit? iDie fdjlner finb nidjt bie 5D2ittet 3U errocrbcn (G.)! how hard the means are to obtain! id) Will jWot ntd)t teugnen, bog an biefen SBiic^ern nidjt niond)e8 jit Betbeffern fein foUte (L.)i I will not deny that many things in these books might be capable of improvement; met jmeifett, boJ3 iljr nid)t ... bie Orogmut fetfiei feib (L.)? who doubts that you are magnanimity itself? baS ift fogat uiienblid) tt)nf)tct a(« i§t e8 felbft nid)t cmtifinbet (G.), that is indeed infinitely more true than you yourself feel. This last usage is due to French influence and has now gone out of vogue. 411. The Compound Sentence consists of two or more simple sentences co-ordinately connected ; e. g. bie ^unft ift lang, unb furj ift unfer SeOen (G.), art is long and our life is short. a. A sentence consisting of two connected subjects with one verb, or of two verbs with one subject, may be classed as ' partly compound.' 1. The conjunctions that unite the members of a compound sen- tence are the general connectives (§ 379) and the adverbial conjunc- tions (§ 380). 412. The Complex Sentence consists of two sentences^ one of which is subordinate to some word in the other ; 6. g. id) felje nidjt, ttjanim bu fragft, / do not see why you ask. The important characteristic of the dependent clause is the final position of the verb. 1. A clause may be dependent in fact without being so in form ; e. g. gefdirieben ftcl)t : im Slnfong mot bo6 Sffiort, it is written : im the beginning was the word. 2. Every dependent clause performs the function of a substantive, an adjective, or an adverb. We have to do, therefore, with three kinds of DEPENDENT CLAUSES 373 DEPENDENT CLAUSES 413. Substantive Clauses are introduced by ha% a rela- tive pronoun, or an indirect interrogative. The latter may be either an interrogative pronoun, a compound of too, or one of the conjunctions ob, tnann, ftiie, too, rarely aU. 1. The clause may be subject, object (of verb or prepo- sition), predicate, or appositive ; e. g. tt)a§ tcirflid^ ift, ift ber= niinftig, what is real is rational ; tote fie bie 2lugen nieberfc^Iagt, ^at tief fit^ in tnein §erj gejjragt {G.),her way of casting down her eyes has impressed itself deeply on my heart ; i(f) fuf)Ie tooFir, ba^ mic^ ber §err nur fc^ont (G.), I feel sure that you are only sparing me; bu bift am @nbe — toa§ bu Bift (G.),you . are after all — what you are; er funbigt, D^ne ba^ er e§ toei^, he sins without knowing it ; ber ©a^, ba^ atte Sdenfc^en gtei^t yinb, the proposition that all men are equal. a. As to the mode and tense of object-clauses, see §§ 360-61. 6. The omission of the verb before object-clauses with toaS, toie, was fiir, has given rise to exclamatory sentences of dependent form ; e.g. traS bu ntd)t alleg ju erjSfjlen t)aft (G.) I what all haven't you to tell! lt)ie atteS fic^ gum (Sangen Webt (G.) I how everything weaves itself into a whole 1 But exclamatory sentences do not by any means always have this form. Cf. Goethe's loie lieb' id) bic^! tnie btidt bein Stugc! Itiie liebft bu ntidf) ! c. A substantive clause is often antJcapated by a compound of ba; e. g. bet SBcrt bet Erfinbuug beftel^t batin, bag fte iiberall aureenbbar ip, the value of the invention consists therein that it is universally appli- cable. So a bag-clause may follow an interjection ; e. g. ac^ ! bag bie 3Ken((i)en ]o ungliicf(ic§ ftnb (G.) \ alas, that people are so unfortunate! d. Clauses with atS ob, or atS with inversion (§ 359, 3, o), while formally adverbial, sometimes have substantive character ; e. g. bamit ®ic nid^t glaubeu, a\i ^anbelte td^ iiberetU (G.), that you may not believe that I acted overhastily. 414. Adjective Clauses modify a noun or pronoun and are introduced by a relative pronoun, a compound of too (rarely 'ba), or one of the conjunctions ate, "iia, toann (rare), toenn, tote, too; e. g. ber ®ott, ber @i[en toad^fen lie^ (Arndt), 374 THE SENTENCE the God who caused iron to grow ; bcn licf)' icf), bcr Unm8g= liciie^ bcgefjrt (G.), I love him who desires the impossible ; man burd)fucl}te aUe Drter, too grembe Uiof)nen fonnten (S.), all places where strangers might dwell; bie ^citen, ba ic^ noclj )eI6ft im SBerben tear (G.), the time when I myself was still growing. 415. Adverbial Clauses either define an adverb or limit the verb of the main sentence. They are introduced by the subordinating conjunctions and may be classified as follows (see § 381 for further examples and comments). 1. Local, introduced by loo and its compounds, rarely by ba; e. g. bteitit, roo i^t feib, remain where you are; iibcraH, iDO^inmein gitg mic^ trug (S.), everywhere where my feet carried me. 2. Temporal, introduced by ats, beoor, Di3, ba, c^e, inbcnt, inbcS nac^bem, f£it(beni), jobalb, fotonge, \o oft, maun (archaic), rocnn, tt)al)renb, reie, mo and its compounds ; e. g. bamalS fdjien er mit geWanbt, al8 ii^ i^n noi) nic^t Berftanb (G.), at that time he seemed to me clever when I did not yet understand him ; bicibt bod), biS meinc iEBtrtin fommt (S.), remain, won't you, until my wife cornea. 3. Conditional, introduced by al8 with inversion (§ 359, 3, a), al8 ob, al8 wemt, e8 fei benu bafj (§ 356, 1, a), falls, im gallc bajj, fo (archaic), menn ; e. g. mit fonnten Biet, menn mit jufammenftiinben (S.), we could do much if we stood together. For the mode of conditional clauses see § 359. a. As a variety of conditional clause we may regard the restrictive clause introduced by iiimiefetii, inmiemett, fofeni, fomeit, mofeni; e. g et cfftt bie SEBiffenfc^aft, fofetn fie niiljt (G.), he honors science so far as it is useful. 6. A conditional clause is often thrown into the form of an inter- rogative sentence ; e. g. o, gibt eS ©elfiet in bet Suft (G.), 0, if there are spirits in the air. 4. Concessive, introduced by obgIet(^, obf(f)oii, obmol)t, ob jmat, fo + adverb or adjective, menn aud), menngleid), Wenn fd)oii, micmol)!, mie aud), tvotsbem bag, iingead)tet bog; e. g. ge^orc^cn milt Id), ob id) gleid^ Ijicr nod) man(f)c8 fagcn toiinte (G.), I will obey, tho I might say much on this point ; fo gut matt md^tt, !ann man ftd) bod) betviigen, how- ever well one chooses {tho one choose ever so well), one may be mistaken. WOKD-OEDER 375 a. Concession can be expressed by simple inversion with following gleid), aurf), fd^on, unb (§ 379, 4, a) ; e. g. tft g(ei(^ bic ^a\)\ nic^t tJoU (S.), (Mho the number is not complete; unb foUt' er au(f| ftrauc^etit iiberatt (S.), and tho he should stumble everywhere. 5. Causal, introduced by ba, inbcm, tticit, juntat (ba); e. g. id^ lann frb{)ti(^ fc^eibeti, ba tneine 3lugen biefcii Sag ge|et)cit (S.), I can depart happy, since my eyes have seen this day. 6. Proportional, introduced by je, jc nad^bem, tt)ic; e. g. je efier bu ju un« juriidc le^vft, je fd)oner Wirft bu un8 tnittfommeu fein (G.), the sooner you return to us, etc. 7. Comparative, introduced by al8, tnie, gtei(^h)ie, fottiie; e.g. bcr trfige @ang be8 £riege« tat beni jlonig ebcn(oBiet ©d^abcn, ot8 er ben fRe= beUen iBorteil bra(^te(S.), the slow progress of the war injured the king just as much as it profited the rebels; xifc je^t bie ®adE|en, irie man bie ©acfjen eben fte^t (G.), you see things as people do just see them. a. The clauses with al8 ob, ot§ trenn, classed above as conditional, are strictly a combination of comparative and conditional. 6. Where the verb is the same in both clauses, it is often omitted in the second, just as in English ; e. g. bu nintmft eS ^bl|ev, als ii) felbft (eS ne^me) (G.), you take it more seriously than I myself. 8. Final, denoting purpose, and introduced by bag, bamit, ouf ba§ (archaic); e. g. eiU l^eim mit forgenber ©eefe, batnit er bie grift niii)t Ber= fe^Ie (S.), hurries home with anxious heart, in order that he may not fail to be on time. 9. Consecutive, denoting result, and introduced by bag, usually with preceding (o, bcr SCrt, bcrgefiolt, etc.; e. g. ber SBinb rtebte \o ftart, bag reir faunt tubern fonnten, the wind blew so hard that we could scarcely row. a. The peculiar use of the bag-clause after a comparative or ju (§ 367, 5, a) grew out of an ellipsis of fo ; i. e. er ifl grbger (ju grog), at8 bog ber 9Jeib i^ni f cEioben f bnnte, he is too great for envy to injure him, stands for er ift grbger al8 fo grog, bag, etc. WORD-ORDER 416. Types of Word-Order. We have to distinguish three types of word-order according as the finite verb occupies second place, first place, or last place, in relation to other elements of the sentence. 376 WORD-ORDER a. Essentially, then, the subject of word-order is all bound up in the position of the finite verb. This is the basis of classification and the point which should receive the learner's attention before eveiy- thing else. 1. That arrangement in which the finite verb occupies second place may be called the assertive order. It presents two cases. If the subject precedes, as in cr ift ha, we have the normal order. If an adjunct of the verb precedes, thus requiring the subject to follow the verb, as in ba ift er, we have the inverted order. a. The terms ' normal ' and ' inverted ' are used in a somewhat conventional sense. It is not to be understood that the order er ift ba is either more ancient or more common than the order ba tft er. From the German pomt of view there would be no serious impropriety in taking the latter as the starting-point, and regarding the former as an ' inversion.' Indeed, some recent grammarians Ignore this distinction entirely and call every sentence 'normal' in which the finite verb occupies second place. It is, however, convenient for some purposes to keep the term ' inversion ' in its traditional sense. 2. That arrangement in which the finite verb occupies first place, as in i[t er ba, may be called the interrogative order, tho its use is not confined to interrogative sentences. 3. That arrangement in which the finite verb occupies last place, as in (i(^ tuei^ ni^t) oh er ba ift, being character- istic of dependent clauses, may be called the dependent order. 417. The Normal Order is used for independent assert- ive sentences in which no other element precedes the subject in order of thought. The arrangement is : first, the subject and its modifiers ; second, the finite verb ; third, the adjuncts of the verb ; last, the non-finite part of the verb- Examples : ber ©chafer put^te [id) jum Slanj (G.), the shepherd dressed himself for the dance ; ba§ ertge Se6ert ftet)t mir gar nid)t an (G.), the narroio life does not suit me at all; tf)r I)obt tt)n treultd^ eingefungen (G.), you have faithfully sung him to sleep. ■WORD-OEDER 377 1. Observe that in the normal order the finite verb must have second place ; no adjunct of the verb may intervene between it and the subject. Thus, where English says 1 really believe, he soon returned, etc., German says id^ glauBe toirflic^, er le^rte 6alb jurM. a. A few words are excepted from this rule, namely : abcr, quite frequently; ouct), when its force falls on the preceding subject; some- times also bod), inbeffen, jebod), bagcgen, tro^bem, nomlid), atfo, and a few others; e.g. bag alfo Wor be8 tiot)r eS ifl. 6. For a similar reason the general connectives, unb, after, aHein, fonbern, benn, and entweber . . . ober, precede the subject without caus- ing inversion; they are not felt as adjuncts of the verb, but simply as connecting links. WORD-ORDER 379 c. Excepted from the rule, again, are initial adverbs the force of which is felt with the subject rather than with the verb; e. g. autS) t(^, I too ; fetbjl bet Sonig, even the king ; nur tier, only he. d. From the general principle stated above it follows that a sentence should not begin with two adverbs, unless they are so connected as to form in reality but one element of the sentence; e. g. ben atibcrn Ttox= gen War leiber baS ittagtfc^e ©eruft toieber BerjiJirounben (G.), the next morning, alas, the magic stage had again disappeared. Here one could not say ben anbern STforgen leibcr mat, nor leibet ben anbern SDJorgen roar, tho it would be permissible to say ben onbern SKotgcn, leiber, roar, since the pause makes leiber parenthetical and thus deprives it of the character of a direct adjunct of roar Ber(d^rounben. On the other hand, connected adverbs count as one element; e. g. gegen Slbcnb um bie be= ftimmte 3f it waxb Sffiilftelm aBge^olt (G. ), toward evening at the appointed time they called for Wilhelm. 2. A preceding subordinate clause having the value of an object or an adverb has the same effect upon the order as any other object or adverb ; e. g. ob er gefa^rlic^ t)erh)un= bet ift, hjiffen toir nid^t (L.)) whether he is dangerously wounded we do not know ; ate ic^ nod^ etn ^nabe tear (G.), fjierrte man tnid^ ein, when I was yet a boy they shut me up. a. Such a clause is very often resumed by a pronoun or an adverb, which makes the inversion easier; thus in the last two examples one might say ob er gefd^tlic^ Betrounbet ift, bas roiffen roir ntc^t; ats ic^ nod§ ein ^nabe roar, ba fpetrte man tnid) ein. When there is no resuming particle, the subject is sometimes allowed to precede the verb ; e. g. roie e8 in (olc^en gfitten ju ge^en pflegte, niemanb roar Borbereitet (G.), as is wont to happen in such cases, no one was prepared. b. Parenthetical sentences meaning said he, thought he, and the like, put the verb first because what precedes is the object ; e. g. „»er« jei^' mir," fagte SBilfietm loi^elnb (G.), 'pardon me,'' said Wilhelm with a smile. 3. An appositive preceding the subject is treated like an adjunct of the verb and causes inversion ; e. g. nad^benlenb ixbtv biefeg 2l6enteuer, ging er nad^ feinem Simi^^i^ (^^0) '^^<^ itating upon this adventure, he went to his room,. 4. The usual position of the subject in the inverted order is immediately after the verb, but an unemphatic pronoun or 380 WOED-OEDER adverb may come between ; e. g. auf bem S^au^Ia^e l^attett fic^ biele ^ufc^auer eingefunben (G.), in the theater a number of spectators had found places ; enblic^ fatnen toirf lic^ SKenfd^en an (G.), at last persons actually arrived. 5. If an inverted clause is followed by another co-ordinate clause having the same subject, an adverb may not precede the second verb unless the subject is repeated ; e. g. ba tarn fie ju einem foniglid^en ©artert unb beim SWonbenf(f)immer fat) fie, ba^ — (G.)) thereupon she came to a royal garden and saw by the moonlight that — . Here it would have been equally cor- rect to say unb fat) beim 3KonbenfcI)immer, ba^, but not unb beim Sl'lDnbenfc^immer fal^, ba^. a. For the unnecessary resumption of the subject after unb by means of berfelbe, see §379, 4. 6. If the second clause of the compound sentence has a new sub- ject, it usually stands in the normal order ; e. g. enbtid) fom ex juriii, unb fte Begtii^te if|n ntit greube, at last he came back and she greeted him with joy. 6. The effect of inversion without the form of it can be produced by using the expletive eg to anticipate a subject which, for stylistic, metrical or other reasons, it is desired to have follow the verb ; e. g. e§ reben unb traumen bie SKenfd^en biel (S.), men talk and dream much ; e§ irrt ber Slienfd^, fo lang er ftrebt (G.), man errs as long as he strives. 419. The Interrogative Order puts the finite verb first. It is used : 1. In all interrogative sentences except such as begin with an interrogative pronoun; e.g. fennft bu ben g^auft (G.) ? hnowest thou Faust ? toa§ toettet i^r (G.) ? what tvill you wager? 'mtx 'sotxlfi'i who knows ? 2. In optative sentences ; e.g. toaren it)tr nur ben S3erg 'om-- bet (G.), would that we were past the hill. a. But the subject may precede in an optative sentence ; e. g. beS §immcla §cetc mbgen bic^ bebedeu (U.), may heaven's hosts protect thee. So, too, with the real subject anticipated by eS; e.g. eS lebe bie grci» ^eit, long live freedom. WORD-ORDER 381 3. In imperative sentences, more especially when the verb is in the second person ; e. g. betradjt' it)tt re^t (G.), look at him. carefully ; fiifjre bu mein §eer (S.), lead thou my army ; beja^me jeber bte gerei^te 2But (S.), let every one control his righteous wrath ; gefte^' ic^'S nur {G),just let me confess. a. But imperative sentences naay also take the normal or the in- verted order, especially in the third person; e. g. er ftel)e feft Ulib fe^e ^icr '\\d) urn (G-.), let him stand firm and look about him here; je^t gel)e jeber feineS SS$ege6 fttU (S.), now let each quietly go his way ; boc^ ge^cn toir (G.), bat let us go. 4. In conditional sentences ; e. g. irre \i) nid^t, if I am not mistaken ; \a.i etoa§ 2Bert, eg mu^ ju 2;age fommen (G.), if a thing has value, it must come to the light. 5. In emphatic assertive sentences, the verb being usu- ally followed by bod^ ; e. g. finb boc^ ein tounberlii^ S8o(f bie SOBeifier (G.), indeed, women are a strange race. Such a sen- tence is often best translated by a question. a. In older German the finite verb might come first without special emphasis, and traces of this freedom are preserved in poetry; e. g. fa^ eitt Snob' ein 9ib8tein ftetjn, a boy saw a little rose growing. But in prose one would now need to say: ©8 fa^ ein ^nab' u. f. TO. 420. The Dependent Order is used in dependent clauses introduced by a relative pronoun or particle, an indirect interrogative, or a subordinating conjunction; e.g. ic^ 6in ber Oeift, ber ftet§ bernetnt (G.), / am the spirit that always denies ; iuef) mir, tnentt bu nicf)tS SeffereS toei^t (G.), woe is me if you, know of nothing letter ; Xotx toei^, too nun e§ bie bier 2Binbe ^a6en (G.), who knows where the four winds have it now ? a. A sentence may be logically but not formally dependent, i. e. it may be without a subordinating conjunction. Such a clause takes the normal order; e. g. bu ftefift, etn §unb unb feiu Oefpcnft ift ba (G.), you see, a dog and no spirit is there; jte metnt, bu feieft entflofien (G.), she thinks you have run away. b. In the universality of its application the dependent order is a comparatively recent development of literary usage. Early modem German allows the finite verb considerable freedom of position, and 382 "WORD-ORDER this freedom it still preserves in colloquial language and in poetry; e. g. meim e« .nidjt IDfir' buro) fat(cf)e Sent' Berraten morben (G.), if it had not been betrayed by treacherous persons; id) mn% ntc^t, luaS fsH e8 bc» beuten (Heine), I know not what to make of it; irenn id) jo fa§ fici eiiiem ©ekg (G.), when I would be sitting thus at a revel; roenn mit SBlumen bie (Srbe ftc^ tteibet iieu, memt bic Sriinnlein f[te6en im Iteblidjen Wax (S.), when the earth clothes itself anew with flowers, when the springs flow in lovely May. 1. A special case is presented by the compound tenses of the modal auxiliaries and those verbs (§ 326, 1, b), which follow their analogy in substituting what looks like the in- finitive for the participle. In such case the tense-auxiliary precedes the two ' infinitives ' and may be separated from them by intervening words; e g. ic^ fef)e ni^^t, tote meitt Sruber £)atte fc^oner auSgebilbet toerbeu fonnen (G.), I do not see how my brother could have been better educated. a. Lessing is fond of omitting the tense-auxiliary in such cases; e. g. fo mevlen bie 2lu8leger fct)t inotit on, bag ber Sid)ter ^ierburc^ jene 0(8 SSarboren, biefe al3 gcfittcte SJbtfct fc^itbern luoltett, the commentators remark very properly that the poet intended by this to represent the former as barbarians, the latter as civilized people. b. Aside from the ease just mentioned, some writers occasionally prefer to place the tense-auxiliary before instead of after the perfect infinitive of a compound tense; e. g. c8 fc^eiitet bem Sefer toeif fiirjer ouf bem ^apietc, af8 ei ben 3iiftf)ouern luirb toorgelommen fetn (L.), it seems to the reader much shorter on paper than it probably appeared to the spectators. 2. The dependent order may occur in exclamatory sen- tences thru the omission of a governing verb ; e. g. tote fid^ bie |5tatten 33urf4>e freuen (G.) ! how the loiv fellows enjoy themselves ! 3. The subject of a dependent clause usually stands just after the introductory connective, but a short unemphatio pronoun or adverb often intervenes before it ; e. g. bu fte^ft nur ^ier, Iceil bid; tnein 3Sater Brauc^te (G.), you only stand here because m,y father used you. 4. In old German the finite verb might stand at the end in sentences not dependent, and traces of this freedom are POSITION OF ADJUNCTS 383 preserved in poetry; e.g. beni', ^inb, urn atteS in ber 2BeIt, ber §err bic^ fiir ein g^rauiein l^alt (G.), the gentleman takes you for a fine young lady. POSITION OF ADJUNCTS 421. Adjuncts of the Noun. An attributive adjective or participle precedes its noun and is preceded by its own modifiers ; e. g. bonecfitem, aug ber Quelle gef(|o|3ftem ®oIbe (G.), of genuine gold oUainedfrom the source; ein berii^mter, unb bamote toegen feiner Slalente fe^r ge[(i)a|ter SBettntann (G.), a gentleman of reputation, who was at that time very much esteemed for his talents. 1. An appositive generally follows its noun, but may pre- cede ; if an adjective or participle, it usually follows its own modifiers, but may precede tbem for stylistic reasons. Thus it would be natural to say : bur(^ biefe SBorte tief gerii^rt, 6rad^ fie in Sranen au§, deeply touched by these words, she burst into tears. But if a relative clause were to follow SBorte, one might prefer to change the order and say : tief gerii^rt burc() btefe SBorte, bie offenbar bom §erjen famen, Brad^ fie in S^rcinen au§. 2. A limiting genitive, except a proper name, generally follows its noun, but exceiDtions are very frequent, especi- ally in poetry. 422. Adjuncts of the Verb : A General Principle. The adjuncts of the verb come in the reverse order of their importance, the more weighty elements tending toward the end. 1. Observe that tliis is only a general tendency, the operation of ■which is more or less crossed and interfered with by other considera^ tions. As a tendency, however, it is important. It explains, in the &st place, the final position of the Infinitive or participle of a com- pound tense: these, being felt as parts of the verb, are of course highly essential elements of the predication. 384 WOED-ORDER 2. The same principle explains the final position of an adverb, ad- jective, noun or phrase, tliat has become so intimately associated with the verb as to form a part of it; e.g. auf in auffte^ett; blog in blog^ ftelten; Sell in teilnel)mert; in ©tanb in inftonbfe^cn. 3. So, too, we can account for the final position of a predicate ad- jective in relation to a limiting genitive; e. g. bu bift bir nur be« eineit SCricbS beirugt (G.), thou art conscious only of the one impulse. Here belBugt is felt as the important element of the predication. On the other hand a weighty prepositional phrase may easily follow a predi- cate adjective; e. g. fie ift jef|r ftotj auf i'^re @(^onf)eit, she is very proud of her beauty. 423. Position of Objects. From the general principle just stated it follows that short, unemphatic, pronominal objects tend toward the beginning ; e. g. id) fentte i£)n fc^on fett Safircn, I have known Mm these many years; id) i)abt t^m Icingft bcrgeben, / have lo7ig since forgiven him. 1. The least emphatic pronouns are e§ and the reflexive, which accordingly precede ; e. g. ic^ ga6 e§ bir, / gave it to you; fie Ttdljert \\&j i^m, she approaches him. As hetwen these two [ic^ comes first, but with exceptions. 2. In general a direct object (especially if it denote a person) is of more importance than an indirect object (espe- cially if it denote a thing), and hence comes nearer the end ; e. g. ber SInblicf gi6t ben Sngein ©tarle, the sight gives strength to the angels. But where both objects are persons, or both things, this relation may easily be reversed ; e. g. [ie ftettte ben ^errn i^rem Sruber bor, she introduced the gentleman to her brother ; er ttiibmete f eine ^rafte bem 2)ienfte be§ SSaterlanbS, he devoted his powers to the service of his country. a. On the other hand an accusative object very regularly precedes a genitive or a prepositional phrase; e. g. ber langc Srieg beraubte ba8 iBatetlanb feiner triiftigften @ol)ne (Gr.), the long war robbed the country of its strongest sons; er befrcite bie 5|5^itofo))I)ie ban ifjrcn ^effeln, /reed philosophy from its fetters. 424. Position of Adverbs. The general rule is that the adverbs of direction (auf, ab, Ijer, I)in, etc.) are of mostim- POSITION OF ADJUNCTS 385 portance : they accordingly come last under the name of separable prefixes ; e. g. bie ©onite gef)t je^t um 6 Uf)r auf, the sun rises now at 6 o'clock. 1. Kext in importance are the negative ad rerbs nid^t, nie, nietnalS, !eine§l»eg§; these accordingly tend toward the end, especially in emphatic negations; e.g. baS 2e6en ift ber ®it= ter ^oc^fte? nxi^t (S.), life is not the highest of blessings ; ba^ bie Sef^ranfung bie Unenblid^feit JeinegtcegS auSfi^Iie^e (S.), that limitation hy no means excludes infinity ; \^ lann bie ©telle ni(^t iiberf e|en, / can not translate the passage. a. But a negative adverb that is not felt as an adjunct of the verb usually stands before the particular word or phrase that it modifies; thus one would ordinarily say in prose: bag Sebeit ift nic^t bo§ l^bc^fte icr Oiiter. 2. An adverb of time generally precedes one of place or manner ; that is, among the relations denoted by adverbs that of manner or degree is more important than that of place, place more important than time. But this order of precedence varies easily under the influence of special em- phasis. 425. Dependent Infinitives are preceded by their own modifiers ; e. g. bu 6raud)ft bic§ nic^t baru6er ju angftigert, you do not need to trouble yottrself about that ; 9SiI{)eIm fonnte fid) nic^t entfc^Iiefeen, bie 9{oIIe be§ lebenben ItonigS bem ^ebatiten ju itBerlaffen, could not make up his mind to leave the role of the living king to the pedant. 1. The prepositional infinitive is often incorporated in the sentence as one of the verbal adjuncts, espspeech is known to us in a measure through the process of restoration. By a comparison of cognate forms, as they actually appear in the derived languages, scholars have been able to reconstruct the alphabet, the grammar, and in part the vocab- ulary, of the parent-speech. Thus Eng. brother, Lat. /rater, Gk. if>pd.Trjp, Sansk. bhrdtar, point back to an I.-E. parent-form *bhrater (a prefixed * is used to distinguish ideal reconstructions from words historically known). 3. The Germanic Branch of the Indo-European Family. There was a time during which the ancestors of the vari- ous peoples now known to us as Germanic, having parted from the Indo-European parent-stock, still dwelt together in one community and spoke a common language. Later this Germanic stock parted into three branches, the east- ern, the northern and the western. The eastern branch is known chiefly from the extinct Gothic. The northern branch gave rise to the Scandinavian languages, Danish, Swedish, Icelandic and Norwegian. The western branch gave rise to German, English, Dutch, Flemish and Frisian. 1. Where the pro-ethnic home of the Germanic race was situated is not precisely known, nor have we any historical remains of their language in this stage of its history. It is possible, however, by com- parison of derived forms, to reconstruct the alphabet, the grammar. ENGLISH-GERMAN COGNATES 407 and in large part the vocabulary, of the Germanic parent-speech. Thus Gothic brothar, Old English brothor, Old High German bruodar. Old Low German brothar, and Old Icelandic br5thir, point back to a Germanic *brothar. 4. Phonetic Change. In every language the pronunci- ation of words is more or less subject to change. Thru a modified mode of utterance a sound is converted into another sound or ceases to be heard. In this way, given time enough, the pronunciation of a word may change to almost any imaginable extent. Thus English ten is the same word as Latin decern, only it is pronounced diiierently. 1. But changes of pronunciation do not take place at hap-hazard. When a particular tendency to change sets in, at a given time and in a given language, it does its work thoroly and uniformly. For ex- ample, if the tendency is to convert d into t, it will convert d into t everywhere, unless there is some interfering cause. Such a uniformly operating tendency to change of pronunciation is called a phonetic law. The principal causes that interfere with the uniform operation of phonetic laws are the position of the sound with respect to other sounds or to the accent, and the attracting influence — analogy — of other words. 2. Spelling is often an imperfect and deceptive representation of sounds, and is much more conservative than pronunciation. One of the most important maxims that the student of linguistics has to learn, is to think in terms of sounds, not in terms of letters. 5. The Germanic Shifting of Consonants. If, now, we compare a large number of Indo-European words, ideally restored, with their Germanic descendants, ideally restored, we shall find that the latter have undergone changes both in their vowels and in their consonants. One set of these changes, affecting the explosive conso- nants, or stops, is of fundamental importance in the study of English and German etymology, viz. : the Indo- European voiced aspirates hh, dJi, gh, become, in Germanic, the voiced stops h, d, g ; the voiced stops b, d, g, become voiceless, giving p, t, k, and the voiceless stops jp, t, k, become spirant, giving /, th, h. 408 AP PENDIX II 1. The following examples will Illustrate Indo-European Greek Latin Germanic English *bhrater fpdrrip frater *brothar brother *dhe, *dho dijvm faoio *don do *ghans- Xiiv (h)anser *gans goose *dwo 6vo duo *two two *genu y6vv genu *kniwa knee *pad- TToi; {TTod-dg) pes (ped-is) *fot foot *trejis Tpeig tres *thrijis three »kun- Kvav {kv-v6q) canis *hun-dos hound a. There are some exceptions to this law due to the operation of special causes. But a discussion of these, or of the changes undergone by the vowels and non-explosive consonants, would take us too far a-field for the ] present purpose. Consult Brugmann's Grundriss der vergleichenden Grammatik, vol. 1. 6. The High German Shifting of Consonants. If we examine in turn the consonantal system of High German, we shall find it to have undergone a second shifting of consonants, which differentiates High German more or less completely from all the other Germanic languages. This second shifting consists in the conversion of Ger- manic d into t, t into s or is, tli into d, and p into/or ji/. Thus Gc. *dago-, Eng. day, becomes Ger. ^og ; Gc. *t'wo, Eng. two, Ger. jrtiei ; Gc. *itan, Eng. eat, Ger. cffen ; Gc. *thrijis, Eng. three, Ger. brei ; Gc. *diupa, Eng. deep, Ger. tief. 1. The High German shifting began in the 7th century, or earlier, in South Germany, and spread thence northward with diminishing thoroness. Except the conversion of th into d, it did not afiect the Low German dialects. Even in South Germany the time at which the change began, and the thoroness with which it was carried thru, vary with the different dialects. a. The two shiftings described in this and the last section are often called, after one of their discoverers, ' Grimm's Law.' The first is know in German as tie germanifc^e, the second as bie {)oc^bcut|i:^e, SautDerfc^iebutig. 2. German words borrowed from other languages previous to the High German shifting shared in the general change, as tur3, from Lat. ENGLISH-GERMAN COGNATES 409 curtus, Eng. curt ; but words borrowed after tlie shifting retain their original consonants, as Sitel, from Lat. titulus, Eng. title. Thus the form of a word may give a clew to its provenience and the date of its adoption. 3. English, which has grown out of an amalgamation of Low Ger- man dialects carried into Britain in the 5th and 6th centuries, pre- serves unchanged the Germanic d, t, th, and p, wliich High German shifted to t, s or is, d, and / or pf. But in some other respects German has been more conservative than English. This will appear from the following detailed statements. 7. The Labials correspond, in English and German, as follows : 1. Eng. p = Germ, f, ff, :pf; e.g. up-auf; ripe-reif; sleep - |d)lafeti ; hope - t)offen ; plight - ^Pflic^t ; camp - j?omt)f ; plant - ^Pflanje. a. ^f is the regular representative of original p in words borrowed previous to the High German shifting, as in *PfIanje, from Lat. planta; ))fro))fcn, from Lat. propago. A Ger. p corresponding to an Eng. p is evidence of late borrowing ; e.g. *pein-pain; *}5ecf) - pitch ; ^Jtuni))- plump. b. A preceding \ prevents p from shifting; e.g. spin - jfjinnen ; lisp - lijpcln. 2. Eng. 6 initial = Ger. 6 ; e. g. bear- SBar ; break - Brci^en ; bid - Bictcn ; burst - Berften. a. While Eng. preserves an initial Gc. 6 unchanged, it converts a medial Gc. 6 into v and a final Gc. 6 into /, ff. Hence Ger. 6 medial = Eng. D, and Ger. 6 final (pronounced as p) = Eng./, #; e.g. ^aben- have ; ^nabe - knave ; fterben - starve ; ab - of, off ; ®ieb, thief ; balb - half. Exceptions are due to late borrowing on the one side or on the other; e.g. (Sbbe-ebb; @iebe( - gable. 3. Eng. / initial = Ger. f (sometimes written »); e.g. foot-gug; feather -geber; fly-f(icgen; father -Sater; fleece - SBIieg. a. Eng. /, ff, medial or final, may either preserve an original Gc. /unchanged, or it may come from Gc. 6 (see above, 2, a). In the former case it will appear in Ger. as f, ff, in the latter as b; e. g. hoof - §uf; stiff-fteif; wolf-ffiotf; wife-5Beib; Ufe-?eib; pf-ab; calf- «alb. 6. Eng. ft = Ger. ft; e.g. soft-fauft; drift -Stift; craft -«raft. 4. Eng. V initial hardly occurs except in borrowed words {vat and vixen should be/a« and^en), where it corresponds to Ger. o, some- times to f, rarely to w; e. g. verse- SJerS; vane-ga£)ne; vetch - Bide. 410 APPENDIX n a. Eng. I! medial usually represents Gc. 6, in which case it corre- sponds to Ger. b, in a few cases to f; e.g. over-iiber; salve -®atbe; live - leben ; devil - Eeufel ; oven — Ofen. Medial o = b is evidence of late borrowing ; e.g. slave - ©tlaue. 8. The Dentals correspond as follows : 1. Eng. t. = Ger. j, ^, ff, S, g; e.g. two-jtoei; twig-3n)fig; sit- fi^en; cat- fia^e; eat-ef|en; water- aSaffer; this-bie8; that-ba8;lot -So8; bite-beigen; foot-gug. a. Observe that j, ^, ff, 8, and g are five ways of writing two sounds, viz. the affricate ts and the voiceless sibilant s. The affricate is writ- ten j when initial, and also after t, n, t, but ^ after a short vowel, where it takes the place of jj from Gc. tt. Hence, tin-^inn; salt- ©alj; mint-SKiinje; heart - §erj; heat-§i^e (Gc. *hittja); cat- Sa^e (Gc. *katta). The simple voiceless sibilant is written ff when medial after a short vowel, but g when final, or medial after a long vowel. In a very few words, however, final 8 takes the place of g. Hence, let -faff en; mete-meffen; write-reigcn; shoot -fc^itgcn; shot- @(f|ug; vat-f^og; that-bo8; Iot-So8. 6. A preceding spirant (f, f, 6)) prevents t from shifting ; e. g. craft- ^roft; oft-oft; strong- ftteng; breast -SBnift; might -3KacI)t; plights ipf(idit. So, too, the combination tr does not shift ; hence, true-treu; tread - treten; bitter - bitter (Gc. * bitr) ; otter - Otter (Gc. * 6tr). Other exceptions are due to late borrowing ; e. g. temple - Ztmpe\ (from Lat. templum) ; senate - ©enat (from Lat. senatus). Bottom - 53oben pre- sents an irregularity that has not yet been fully explained. 2. Eng. (Z = Ger. t; e. g. daughter -Sodjtet; day-Sag; ford-gitrt; hard-^art; hold-|aIten; heed-pten; side-®eite; door-Xiir; do- tun; dale -Sal. a. A preceding n, and sometimes a preceding I, prevented Gc. d from shifting in Ger. ; hence, bind- biiiben; send-feiiben; wild-nitlb; bold-balb (but old -alt, and oold-talt). Notice that in unb-and, altho the final b is pronounced as t, and can not occur medially (as the b of itiitb may in irilbeS), we have no real case of Gc. d shifting to t. It comes under the general rule that all voiced final consonants have become voiceless in Ger. — Except after n and I, Ger. b corresponding to Eng. d is evidence of late borrowing; e.g. 3)ogge-dog; Secte- deck. 3. Eng. tt = Ger. b; e.g. three-brci; thin-biinn; feather-J ioathe - teibett; both-bcibc; heath -§cibe. 1. A very few exceptions to this rule, as father -SBater, weather - SBctter, are due to the fact that Eng. th is an interloper, taking the ENGLISH-GERMAN COGNATES 411 place (under Norse influence) of an older d. The Old English ances- tors of father and weather are feeder and weder. Another small group of exceptions, as thousand -taufenb, thaw-tauen, are due probably to an early assimilation of the initial stop to the voiceless consonant which usually preceded it. 4. Eng. s=Ger. \, S, %; e.g. soap-@eife; send-^enben; glass - @la8; less-lo8; horse- Sijog; breast - S3tuft. a. But Gc. initial s before w is regularly converted in Ger. into ^ij; hence, swine- ©c^toein; swell -Jc^ioellen; sweat - ®cf)mei6. So, too, in the standard pronunciation before p and t, tho the sound is written \- hence, stead- ©tatt; steel -®taf|f; spin-f()inttcn; sprout - ©prog. For Eng. sh see below (§ 9, 1, a). 9, The Gutturals correspond as follows : 1. The Gc. voiceless stop k either remains unchanged, being written in Eng. as c, k, ck, and in Ger. as f, d ; or else it becomes in Ger. the spirant d) and in Eng. the affricate tsh (written sometimes as ch, again as teh). Hence, Eng. c, k, ck, ch, ic/j = Ger. f, cf, cf) ; e. g. kiss - fiiffen; cow- .Sut) ; bake - 6acEen ; seek- futt)cn ; weak - ireic^ ; chalk - ^ait; churl -^ert; lick-Iccfen; stick- ©tiicf ; watch -reat^en; ditch - Ztii) ; stretch - ftrecten. a. Gc. sk becomes Engl. sh. Ger. (d^ ; e. g. shape - fcfiaffen ; shoot- (d^ieBeu ; fish- gij^ ; rash - rofd^. 2. The Gc. voiced stop g remains unchanged in Ger. when initial; when medial or final, it is usually (but not in all dialects) converted into a spirant, tho still written as g. In Eng. it is generally un- changed when initial, tho in several words it has become, after pas- sing thru a spirant stage, a palatal semivowel (written y). When medial or final, it usually became first spirant, then semivocalic, and the semivowel combined with a preceding vowel to form a diphthong. Our spelling preserves it as 2/ or w. Examples : gebeu-give ; grog- great; gelb-yellow; gefteru -y ester- ; fagen-say; SEag-day; legen- lay; Sfugc-eye; fd^tug-slew; S3ogen-bow; SDJagcn-maw; SJogct-fowl; 3{egen-rain; folgen- follow; 2a(g- tallow; ©otge- sorrow. a. The Go. combination gj becomes in Eng. a voiced affricate, written dg(, in Ger. d; e. g. edge- Stfe; ridge- 9iu(fen ; bridge- SBriirfe. 3. The Gc. guttm-al spirant h appears initially both m Ger. and Eng. as the breath h-ii; e. g. heart -^etj; hom-§orn; have - tfaben. Medially it appears In Ger. as silent [), finally as silent ^ or as d§. In Eng. it has either disappeared entirely, or it appears in our 412 APPENDIX II spelling as gh, which is either silent or labialized to an /-sound; e. g. fet)cu - see ; jef)ri - ten ; nal) - nigh ; l)od) - high ; ro^ - rough ; grud^t- flight; buret) - through ; ladjen - laugh ; jfi^- tough. 10. The Liquids, Nasals and Semivowels t, r, m, it, ng, j, tn, usually correspond in the two languages, the Ger. j being the orthographic equivalent of Eng. y. Observe, too, that the old labial semivowel w has become spirant in modern Oer. Examples: learn- lernen; old -alt; red -rot; heart - ^erj; man-9}fann; stem-©tamm; lamb-Samm (the Eng. *is an othographic superfluity); nut-9Zufe; find-finben; sing-fingen ; long -tang ; year-Saf)r ; yoke-^oc^; wine- SBein ; wit - toiffen. a. A noteworthy difference is seen, however, in the fact that Ger. retains, while Eng. drops, an original n before a spirant in the ac- cented syllable ; e.g. anbcr- other; fuiif-five; ®an8- goose; janft- soft. h. In a few words Ger. final n corresponds to Eng. final m ; e. g. SBujen - bosom ; SBcjen— besom ; SBobcn- bottom. 11. The Vowels and Diphthongs. The correspondence of vowels and diphthongs is a much more difficult and complicated subject than that of the consonants. To the beginner it will seem altogether chaotic. Compare, e. g. the j)airs : 93ater - father ; ©■tamm - stem ; 9^acf)t - night ; ftfjiafen - sleep ; fanft - soft ; lac^eit - laugh. Here German a has six different representatives in English, and con- versely English a with its various sounds is diversely represented in German. 1. It must not be supposed, however, that the changes undergone by the vowels, in either language, are any less subject to law than those undergone by the consonants. It is only that the laws are very much more intricate, especially in Eng. with its deceptive historical spelling. There are no simple and general rules that would be of any value, and to give accurate detailed rules would carry us too far into the realm of historical phonetics. The vocalism of Eng. and Ger. can not be studied intelligently without a knowledge of Old and Middle English and of Old and Middle High German. APPENDIX ni 413 APPENDIX III THE GERMAN SCRIPT I. SELECTED WORDS SHOWING CAPITAL AND SMALL LETTERS WITH ROMAN EQUIVALENTS 1^ ■,^,-^C^f7^^zd€^^yty2^^^^ 414 THE GERMAN SCRIPT ^^^^e-^^-t^^f^ ^^^^4?^fc^g< cZ-c^/^^i^ '// cy'iy >-//- C-^€^ 6^^^^te■^'>^^^^il^ia^^^/^^^ ^■€i4'^<>/'^*^!a<^'^^ ^^^iif^^z.*^^ APPENDIX m 415 11 THE LETTER ON PAGE 147 OP THIS GRAMMAR ^f**^^^^j^ ^t/t^^ ^iJ^/^ y^Z^^li't-*^ se^^^. ,iS«#--i< ^^■*t^^*x:i*'»^. 416 APPENDIX III v-^^^^ ^.^^-ZT'T-^'f^C, ■^^ii^'»^--***-n'f'**^p^iyCi'A*i'^e'/^>>-»'f4i' APPENDIX III 417 III. THE SONG AT THE BEGINNING OF SCHILLER 8 WILHELM TELL EXPLANATIONS The following abbreviations are used in the grammar and vocahularieB- ace. accusative. adj. adjective. adv. adverb, or adverbial conjunction. art. article. aux. auxiliary. cf. compare. coTTip. comparative. conj. conjunction. dat. dative. def. definite. deiYi. demonstrative. Eng. English. Ex. Exercise. /. feminine noun, /em. feminine. Fr. French. fui. future. G. Goethe. Gc. Germanic. gen. genitive. Ger. German. Gk. Greek. Gr. Grimm, I.-E. Indo-European. impers. impersonal(ly). imv. imperative. indcl. indeclinable. indef. indefinite. ind(ic). indicative. inf. iofinitive. inter, interrogative, inter), interjection. intiians), intransitive. irr. irregular. Kl. Klopstock. L. Lessing. Lai. Latin. lit, literally. Im, Luther. m, mascuhne noim. mas(c). masculine. mx. mixed. n. neuter noun. neu(i). neuter. nom. nominative. num. numeral. perf. perfect. pers. person(al). pliu). plural. plup. pluperfect. poss. possessive. ppl. participial pple. participle. pres. present. prep, preposition. pret. preterit. pron. pronoun. rejl. reflexive. rel. relative. S. Schiller. s. strong. sing, singular. sub. subordinating. subj. subjunctive. subst, subs tan tive(ly). superl. superlative. s. V. sub voce, under the word. ir{ans). transitive. U. Uhland. V. verb. W. Wieland. w, weak. EngUsh words printed in heavy'-faced type are cognate with the German vocab- ulary-word preceding. A hyphen shows that only a part of the English word is cognate with the German, or vice versa. Brackets enclose cognates which are obsolete, imaginary, or such as do not now translate the German word. An English word printed in Italics is bon-otved from the same source as the corre- sponding German word. For the principal parts of strong verbs see § 331. 418-420 GERMAN-ENGLISH 9( 9(6(ilbung, bie, w. picture, illustra^ tion. aienb, ber, 8.2 evening ; —Matt, bo8, s.' evening paper; — effen, bo8, sA evening meal, supper. Slienteuer, ba?, s.i adventure. ain, conj. adv. but, liowever. aficeifett, «. w. {aux. (ein), depart, leave [-rise]. aifdilie|ett, v. s. close up. aifitireioen, v. s. copy. ^bttiefen^ett, bic, w. absence. aiSt, interj. oh ! ah ! ^brefje, bie, w. address. SlbVotar, ber, vj. lawyer [advo- cate}. 8(ffe, ber, w. ape, monkey. it^nltli^, adj. (dot.) similar (to). Sift, ber, S.2 act. oK, pron. adj. all, every ; aUc8 {used alone) everything. alletn', adj. adv. alone. alterbingS', adu. to be sure [of all things], ottertet', adj. (indcl.) all sorts of. ottetHeift', adj. (§ 294, 1, a) most charming or delightful. al§, Stt6. con;, than, when, as. olfe', ad«. so, then, accordingly [also] . olt, adj. old. Slltttr', ber, s.2 (pi. aiso a) aKar. Witt, bos, s.i age, old age. Wrtertum, ba8, 3.8 (§ 91) antiquity. Slmerifo, n. (§ 225, 3) America. Slmerito'ner, ber, s.i American. ' amei'ita'nifd), adj. American. nmilfieren (ftd)), v. w. enjoy, (amuse) one's self. on, prep. {dot. and ace.) on, by, at, to. anbieten, v. s. offer. Slnblitt, ber, s.2 view, sight. anber, adj. other, else. onberS, adv. other-wise, differ- ently. anbcrt^nlb, adj. one and a half (§ 118, 3, 6). Slnfaitjt, ber, 8.2 (pi. a) beginning; anfanga, in the beginning, at first (§ 251, 2). anfangeit, v. s. begin. Slngelegenljeit, bie, w. affair. angeiieqm, ad/, pleasant, agree- able. Slngft, bie, s.^ (pi. is.) anxiety, apprehension, fear. ottgftigen (fid)), v. w. torment one's self, be anxious. anfommett, v. s. (aux. fein) arrive. attnet)men, v. s. take (on) assume, accept ; ^16) — (gen.) interest one's self in, take charge of. 9Infid)t, bie, w. view, opinion, [-sight]; — Stavte, souvenir card. attftatt, prep, (gen.) in-stead of. anftcifen, v. w. light, ignite. ^(ntniort, bie, w. answer. antniorten, v. w. (intr.) answer. mnja^t, bie (no pi.) number, quantity. SHnsttg, ber, s.^ (pi. ii) suit (of clothes). apfel, ber, 8.1 (pi. 2i) apple; — fcE|u6, bet, 8.2 (pi. -iiffe) apple- shot. Sl^rtl', ber, s.^ April. Slrbeit, bie, w. wo»k, labor. arbetteit, v. w. work. Slrbeiter, ber, s.i workingman. argent (ficf)), v. w. be vey.ed, angry. arm, adj. poor. 9lrm, ber, 8.^ arm. atrmee', bic, w. army. Strt, bie, w. kind, sort. artig, ad/, good, well-behaved. Slrpei', bie, to. medicine. 421 422 VOCABULARY IHrjt, bcr, s:^ (pi. S) physician. atmen, v. w. breathe. oudj, adv. also, too [eke]. ailf, prep. [dat. and ace.) on, upon; adv. up. Slufbtucft, ber, s.2 {pi. fl) depart- ure, start [up-break]. oufeinonber, adv. one after an- other. Stnfent^nlt, ber, s.^ stay, sojourn. 9tufgo6e, bie, w. exercise. Uluffloitg, ber, s."^ {pi. n) rising, rise. oufflcljeit, V. s. (avx. fetu) go up, rise. Ollffialten (ftcE)), v. s. stay. aufpren, v. w. stop, cease. OUfri(I)ttfl, adj. sincere, frank, candid [upright]. 9(nffn»!, ber, s." {pi. fi), essay, com- position. mtffparen, v. w. save up [-spare]. oufftel)eii, V. s. (aux. fein) get up, rise. auflua^fen, v. s. {aux. fein) grow up. Slufittfl, ber, S.2 (pi. ii) act (of a play), [up-tug, i.e. of the cur- tain]. Stuge, baS, mx. eye; -nbtitf, ber, S.2 moment, instant ; -nlran{= l^eit, bie, w. -nieiben, baS, s.i malady of the eyes ; -nf(|cin, bcr, S.2 view [eye-shine]. Sluguft', ber, s.^ August. anS, prep, {dat.) out of, from. StuSbvuit, ber, s.^ {pi. u) expres- sion. nuS'etnan'ticrfeben, v. w. explain. 9lu§flug, bcr, s.^ {pi. ii) excursion [out-fly-ing]. SluSgnbe, bie, w. edition. auSlttubifrfl, adj. foreign [out- landish]. auSru^Cll (ftd)), v. w. rest one's self. Stugfctinfj, ber, s.^ {pi. -uffe), com- mittee. OJtSfefjCIl, V. s. look, appear. au^cr, prep, (dat.) except, out- side of [outer] ; ougerft, adv. exceedingly, extremely. nil^erbem', adv. besides. SluSfitftt, bie, w. view, prospect [out-sight] . Stu^f^rat^e, bie, w. pronunciation. anS^pte^ttt, "■ «• express, pro- nounce. SluSftettung, bie, w. exposition. nuSWenbig, adv. by heart. ougjicften, v. s. take off (a gar- ment). Silutor, ber, mx. author. S3ttd^, bcr, s.''{pl. a) brook [beck]. Sob, bag, S.3 bath. SBa^ntliif, ber, s.^ {pi. o) station, depot. Balb, adv. soon [bold]. SBoJl, bet, S.2 (pi. a), ball. SBaitb, bai, s. 2, 3 (§ 90, 1), band, bond, ribbon. fiaug(c), adv. anxiously ; — nitt« d)cn, with dat. ofpers.to trouble. Sanf, bie, s.^ (pi. fi) bench. SBnrt, bcr, s.^ (pi. fi) beard. Sou, ber, s.2 (§ 275, 2, a), building. Iiaiten, v. w. build. SSouer, bcr, mx. peasant [boor]. Saunt, ber, s.2 {pi. fiu) tree [beam]. beantworten, v. w. (tr.) answer, bebauern, v. w. pity. bebeuten, v. w. signify, mean; Bebcutctib, ppl. adj. significant ; as adv. notably. S3ebtenung, bie, w. service. SBebinguiig, bie, w. condition. SBebiirfniS, baS, s.2 need, neces- sity. beeilen (ftd^), v. w. hurry. Sefcljten, v. s. command, order. bcfiubcn (ftd)), d.s. find (one's self), 'do.' begcgucit, v. w. {aux. jcin, dat.) meet. bcgcljeit, v. s. commit. ficgierig, adj. eager. bentnncit, v. s. begin, ficgfeitcn, v.w. accompany [-lead]. Begreifeu, v. s. comprehend [-gripe]. GERMAN-ENGLISH 423 iegrctflili), idj. comprehensible [-gripe-]. SBcgriff, ber, s.^ idea, conception [-grip]- Bcptten, v.s. keep, retain [-hold]. JBe^anbluitg, bie, w. treatment [-handling]. Maupttn, V. w. assert. icpilflidj, adj. help-ful. iei, prep, {dat.) by, at, with, at the house of. ieiie,pron. adj. both, two (§ 148). Eieiiia^e, id«. almost [-nigh]. SBeifpiel, ba«, s.^ example [-spell]. 6ci|eit, V. s. bite. bc{aiint, adj. known ; as noun, acquaintance (§ 290, 2). Sefamttf(J|Oft, blc, w. acquaint- ance. Sefciinett, v. w. irr. (§ 330) ac- knowledge, confess. fiefommen, v. s. get, obtain, re- ceive. fielo^licn, V. w. reward, repay. iemerfeit, v. w. notice, re-mark. kiui^eu, V. w. employ, use. kqitent, adj. comfortable [quetn = come] . icrcit, adj. -ready, prepared. bereneit, v. w. regret, -rue. SBerg, ber, s.^ mountain [barrow]. SBett^t, ber, s.^ report, informa- tion. Scriiljmt, adj. famous. kfdjoftiflt, ppl adj. busied, occu- pied, busy. tef(^ret6eit, v. s. describe [-shrive, ■scribe]. SBefi^ietbung, bie, w. description. Jc e^en, "• s. look at, examine, [be-see] . ic e^cil, V. w. occupy, fill [beset]. Be i^en, «■ s. possess. iefonlier, adj. special ; — S,. adv. especially, particularly. SeforgniS, bie, s.^ care, anxiety, fear, solicitude [-sorrow-]. SBef^jrc^Ultfl, bie, w. discussion. Scftelieit, V. s. irr. (§ 185) last, endure ; consist (of, au8; in, in); insist (upon, auf, dat). ficfteioeit, v. s. [tr.) climb. 6eftimntcit, v. lo. destine, intend. fieftrofen, v. w. punish. SBefut^, ber, s.^ visit [-seek]. befudien, ». w. visit, attend [-seek, beseech]. Betriii^tli^, adj. considerable. betragcn, u. s. amount to. SJetragen, bo8 (no pi) conduct, behavior. SSctreff, ber {no pi.) reference, regard; in betreff {with gen.), in regard to, in the matter of. Setreffen, «. s. concern ; tons . . . fietrifft, as far as ... is con- cerned, as for . . . Sett, bag, mx. (§ 280, 1) bed. Settler, ber, s.i beggar. Seutel, ber, s.' purse. SBetveiS, ber, s.? proof [-wise]. bewetfeit, v. s. prove [-wise]. SBeraoljner, ber, s.^ inhabitant, oc- cupant. ieja^ten, v. w. pay. Sejug, ber, s." {pi. ii) reference, regard. SBibel, bie, w. bible. 33i6(iot^eI', bie, w. library. btegett, v. s. bend [bow]. bieteil, v. s. offer, bid. SBilb, ba8, s.' picture. bilbett, V. w. form, fashion ; culti- vate, refine. Stlberbud), bas, s.' picture-book. Sillet', bas, s.2 {pi. -a or -te) ticket. biUtg, adj. cheap, moderate. biUtactt, V. w. approve. binbett, «• s. bind. biltnen, prep, {dat.) within. bt§, prep, {ace.) up to, until; — an, clear to, as far as ; — ga, until ; sub. conj. until. bi^dften, ein, a little [bit-]. biSloet'Ien, adv. at times. SBitte, bie, w. request [bid-]. bitten, v. s. ask, request [bid]; (ic^) bitte, please. binfen, v. s. blow [cf. blast]. aSIott, has, S.3 leaf [blade]. bfoit, adj. blue (§ 290, 1, o). bleiben, v- s. {avx. fein) remain stay [-leave]. 424 VOCABULARY Sleifrift, bcr, s." lead-pencil. blettbeu, v. w. blind, dazzle [blend]. SSHrf, bet, s.^ glance, look. SBIi^, ber, s.^ flash, lightning. 6(of , adj. mere ; adv. merely, only. Blutne, bie, w. flower [bloom]. f&int, bo8 (no pZ.) blood. Iihttiii, adj. bloody, fierce. fBoien, ber, s.^ {pi. b), ground, floor [bottom]. ftSfe, adj. bad, ill, evil. fBote, ber, w. messenger. itauOjen, v. w. need [brook]. htamt, adj. brown, breiiien, v. s. break. 6rett, adj. broad, wide. SBreiie, bie, w. breadth [bread-th]. Srief, ber, s.2 letter [brief]; — traget, ber, s.^ letter-carrier, postman. firiUBen, v. w. irr. (§ 330) bring. Srot, bag, S.2 bread. SBritde, bie, w. bridge. Sruber, ber, s.^ (pi. ii) brother. S3riinnen, ber s.i well, spring, [bourn, burn]. SBudi, bag, S.8 book ; — l^onbet, ber, s.i book-trade ; — fianblung, bie, w. book-store. JBiit^etfi^roitf, ber, s.^ (pi. a) book-case. SBii^ne, bie, w. stage (of theater). JBurfl, bie, w. castle, stronghold [borough, bury] . SBiirger, ber, s.' citizen [burgher]. »uf$, Ber, s.2(j3i. ii)bush. Sutter, bie (no pi.) butter; — Brot, bag, S.2 bread and butter. €cnt, ber, s. (pi. -g) cent. centrol', adj. central. e^nrn'ftcr, ber, s." {pi. -te're) character. (S.f)Ot, bog, S.2 (pj. ij) choir. Goufi'ne, bie, to. coMsin {fern. only). tin, adi). there; sub. conj. as, since. baSet', o'ii'- in connection with that [there-by]. Docft, bag, S.3 roof [thatch], bafiir', adv. for that [there-for]. bage'gen, adu. against it, on the other hand. ba^er', adv. therefore. Same, bie, w. lady, dame. bantit', adv. therewith, with that, with it ; sub. conj. in order that. Sompfer, ber, s.i steamer, (steam-) boat. bane'ben, adv. besides. Sanf, bet, s. {no pi.) thanks. banfbar, adj. thank-ful, grateful. Santbarfett, bie {no pi.) thank- fulness, gratitude. bnnfen, v. w. {dot.) thank, bann, adv. then, baran', adv. thereon, of that. borauf , adv. thereup-on. barbieten, v. s. offer. borin', adv. therein, in it. barfteUen, v. w. represent. baru'ber, adv. about that, about it [thereover]. barum', adv. therefore. barun'ter, adv. under that, under it, among them [thereunder]. has, art. the ; dem. that; rel. which, that; bag finb, those are. iaff, subj. conj. that, bauerii, v. w. last, continue [dure.] batian', adv. of that, of it, from that, from it. boju', adv. besides, withal, for that [thereto]. beflatnieren, v. w. declaim, recite. S)cmofrt«t', bet, w. democrat. benfeil, v. w. irr. (§ 330) think. Senhnal, bag, s.^. s monument. beitn, conj. for ; adv. then, ber, Die, ia§, art. the ; dem. that ; rel. who, which, that. befto, adv. so much the, the {with compar.) beStuegett, adv. on that account, therefore. beuteu (auf, ace.) v. w. point (to). beutltd), adj. plain, distinct; as adv. plainly, distinctly. GEKMAN-ENGLISH 425 ©eutfl^l, bne (indcl.) German, [Dutch, of. §1, 1] ; beutfcl), ad/. German. ®etttf(iftla«b, n. (§ 225, 3) Ger- many. !!>ege'mlier, ber, s.i December. btr^t, adj. close, dense, thick [tight]. 2)i(^ter, ber, s.i poet. Sii^tniig, bie, jo. poetry. bitt, adj. thick. Sieb, bev, s.^ thief. ^iebtn, bie, w. (female) thief. ^ieuer, ber, s.i servant. 2>ienft, ber, s.^ service ; —mobi^en, baS, s.i servant-girl. ©icnftog, ber, s.^ Tuesday. bieS, pron. (iero.) this. bieSma(, adv. tiiis time [-mole] . ' 2)ing, bag, s.^ thing. 2)ii;ct'tor, ber, mx. (§ 98), director. bodi, od». yet, still, tho, surely, really. ®»Kor, ber, mx. (§ 98) doctor; — titel, ber, s.i doctor's title. 'ZoUat, ber, s. (pi. -g) dollar. ®om, ber, s.^ cathedral, dome. 2)onner§tOg, ber, s.^ Thursday. Sorf, ba8, s.* village [thorp]; — = ben3ol)ner, ber, s.i villager ; — = bruimen, bee, s.i village-v^ell. 2)iirfr^cn, baS, s.^ little village. bott, adv. yonder, there. !£irama, bai, mx. drama. brama'ttf(4, adj. dramatic. ivaiiffcn, adv. outside (br for bar, aii^tn from ou«). btet, num. three. brcintnl, adv. three times [-mole] . bnnneit, adv. therein, inside. broben, adv. up there. briibett, adv. over yonder, over there. bit, pron. thou, you (§ 301). buntm, adj. stupid [dumb]. blinfel, adj. dark. burd), prep, {ace.) thru, by. 2)itr^fd)»iitt, ber, s.^ average [thru-c'ut]. bflrfen, v. w. (§ 189) be permitted (§§ 191, 1, 333). Su^eitb, bai, s.^ dozen. ebcn, adv. even, just ; — jo . . . ali, just as ... as. ©bene, bie, w. plain [even]. ebe(, adj. noble [Ethel]. Sbelmann, ber, «.» (§ 238, 2, a) nobleman. el)e, sub. conj. before. e^er, adv. sooner, rather. Sftre, /. w. honor. ebreii, v. w. honor. eqrltcq, adj. honorable. (£t, bai, S.3 egg. Sifer, ber, s. {no pi.) zeal. eiflen, aiJ;. own. ei'getttlil^, adj. real, actual; as adv. really, properly, anyway. @igeiitum, ba«, s.^ property, [owndom]. @tgentiimer, ber, s.i own-er. (Eile, bie {no pi.) haste. eilen, v. w. {aux. fein) hurry. ein, art. a, an; num. one; pron. cf. § 116, 1, § 149. eiuan'bcr, pron. {indcl.) eacl» other, one another. ©inbriirf, ber, s.^ {pi. u) impres- sion. etnfad), ae?;. simple. einfattcit, v. s. {aux. jein) come into one's head, occur to {dat. of per s.). @t)tflu^, ber, S.2 {pi. il) influence. etttige, pron. adj. some. (Sililauf, ber, s.^ {pi. ciu) pur- chase; ©inMiife nia(f)en, to shop. etttlaben, v. s. invite. (Stitlabung, bie, w. invitation. etnlaffen, v. s. with fic^, enter upon, go into (auf, ace). ctn'ntal, adv. once ; einmot', one time {indef.), even, just, pray. ctiifditiinteu, v. w. limit. ©inftdjt, bie, w. insight. etilft, adv. once, one day, some time. (Silrtritt, ber, s. {no pi.) admission, entrance [-tread]; — gbiHet, bai, s.^ ticket of admission. einjig, adj. single, only [one-ly]; as adv. solely. 426 VOCABULARY ©tfeit, bo8, s.i iron ; — Ba^n, tie, w. railway, railroad [iron-way]. eleitb, adj. wretched, miserable. (SItern, pi. only, parents [elders]. em))fe^lett, ». s. recommend. empfitltien, '»• s. feel, be sensible of. (Sntie, baS, mx. {gen. -«) end. enbltO), adv. finally, at last, [end-]. eng, adj. narrow. gnglfinber, bet, s.i EngHshman. englifd), adj. English. eiltbedmig, bie, w. discovery, [-thatch-]. entfernt, adv. distant, far away, (from fern, far). entgegen, prep, (dat., follows gov- erned word) toward, in the di- rection of. entgegenfomnteu, v. s. {aux. fein) come toward, come to meet. entgeften, v. s. {aux. tein) {dat.) escape. tntitalten, v. s. contain [-hold] . entfAeibeit, v. s. decide. entp'iefecit (ftdj), v. s. resolve, determine. Sllttiiuf^ung, bie, w. disappoint- ment. enttverfen, v. s. outline, plan. er, pron. he. @rt)e, bie, w. earth. erfa^ren, v. s. ascertain, learn, [-fare]. @rfa^ning, bie, w. experience [-faring]. erfiniien, v. s. invent [find]. @rflubuug, bie, w. invention [-find- ing]. etfuKen, v. w. ful-fiil. ergo^en (fid)), v. w. delight in, take pleasure in (an, dat.) erlialten, «. s. keep, preserve; re- ceive [-hold]. crinnerii, v. w. remind; — fti^ {with gen. ) remember. erliiUeu (rtd)) v. w. take cold. @rt(i(tung, bie, w. cold. erKiiren, v. w. explain, make clear. @rltiintttg, bit, w. explanation. erfrait!eii, v. w. sicken, hti taken sick. erfaufieii, v. w. allow, permit. ertiigcn, "■ s. invent for deception [-lie]. ermiibcn, v. w. tire, fatigue. eriiettuen, v. w. irr. (§ 330) ap- point, -name. erreicfien, v. w. -reach, come to. erfi^ii^jft, ppl. adj. exhausted, worn-out. erft, adj. first [erst] ; as adv. first, not until. (Srftounen, ba8 {no pi.) astonish- ment. erftaunt, ppl. adj. astonished. tvroaitten, v. w. {intr.) a-wake. crtvarteu, v. w. expect [-ward]. ernieden, v. w. {tr.) a-wake. erwibern, v. w. reply [wiber = with]. tti&ffUn, V. w. relate, -tell. Sr^aljluiig, bie, w. story, narra- tive, -tale. erjie^eit, v. s. bring up, edu- cate. tSj pron. it, there (§ 303). efjen, v. s. eat. etlic^, pron. adj. some. tttott, adv. about, approximately. ttWaS, pron. {Indef.) sometliing, anything ; as adv. somewhat. euer, pron. {poss.) your. ®urn'<)n, n. (§ 225, 3) Europe. ewig, adj. everlasting, eternal [aye-]. Gjn'nteii, bo8 {pi. -a'mina) exam- ination. fd^ig, adj. capable (of = grew.) fit, suited (for, ju). fnljrcn, v. s. {aux. jein) travel, go [fare] . fjnfirrnb, baS, s.' bicycle [fare-; 9tab = wheel]. Ifa^rt, bie, w. journey, trip. jjnll, ber, s.^ {pi. a) case [fall]. faUeit, V. s. {aux. fcin) fall. ftt(ftf), adj. false, wrong; — ei yJame, assumed name. GERMAN-ENGLISH 427 §amt'Ke, hk, w. family ; — nbilb, ba6, s.s family portrait; -nieben, ba8, s.i family life. foffett, V. w. grasp, seize. toft, adv. almost, nearly. faui, adj. lazy, idle [foul]. I^aul^ett, bie (no pi.) laziness, idleness. ^tivmt, ber, s.^ February. fedjteii, V. s. fight. I^eber, bie, i«. pen, feather. fe^Ien, v. w. fail, "be lacking, miss- ing ; inaS fe^It {with dat. of pers.) what is the matter (with)? ^e^Ier, ber, s.i mistake [fail-]. feierit, v. w. celebrate. >¥eiertag, ber, s.^ holiday. peinb, ber, s.^ enemy [fiend] . fcinb, adj. hostile (to = dot.). gclb, ba8, s.n field ; — Iierr, ber, w. (§ 94, 1) commander-in-chief. gelfeit, bet, s.i (§ 279, 2, a) rock. ffcnjter, baS, s.i window. jjcricu, bie (pi. oni)/) vacation. g^Ctne, bie, w. distance [far-]. fcttig, adj. ready, finished; — init, thru with. %txt\glttxt, bie, w. skill, profi- ciency. fcft, firm, strong ; as adv. firmly, fast. Sfcft, baS, S.2 festival, feast, feuer, bo«, s.i fire. ■ic6er, ba8, s.^ fever. ttitn, V. s. find; — fiif), find one's self, be. fjiltgcr, ber, s.i finger, ftnfter, adj. dark. 51eif4, baS, s. (no pi.) meat, flesh. JJIet|, bet, s. {no pi.) industry. ^eifitg, adj. industrious. jlieReit, V. s. {aux. fein), flow [to fleet]. flut^tiilfCKii- hasty, cursory; asadv. hastily, hurriedly [flight-y]. jjliigcl, ber, s.^ wing. lyiuf;, ber, a.^ {pi. -iiffe) river. y'olge, bie, w. consequence, result. folfleit, V. w. {aux. fein, dat.) follow. fort, adv. away, forth. fortnit', ado. hence-forth, here- after. fortfaftren, v. s. {intr. aux. ^oBen) continue. fortfe^eii, v. w. {tr.) continue. Soffit', bag, mx. (pi. -itn) fossil. Ijroge, bie, w. question. frageu, v. w. ask, inquire. fronjiififii^, adj. French. O'rnu, bie, w. wife, lady, woman, Mrs. Sriiuleilt, ba8, s.i young lady. Miss. frei, adj. free. frcigeBig, adj. generous, liberal, [free-giv-ing]. {(rei^ett, bie, w. free-dom, liberty. f reitic^, adv. to be sure [freely] . p^rcitag, ber, s.^ Friday. fiemb, adj. strange, foreign ; as noun, stranger (§ 290, 2). {^rembe, bie, zo. {no pi.) foreign land ; in ber — , abroad. ^reitbe, bie, w. joy, pleasure. freuett, v. w. rejoice; es freut mid), I am glad. f^reuitb, bet, s.^ friend ; —in, bie, w. friend, lady friend. freunblt(i^, adj. friendly, kind. Ifreunbfd^aft, bie, w. friendship. ^■riebe, bet, mx. (gen. -ni) peace. frifd), adj. fresh. frol), adj. happy. lixu^t, bie, 8.2 (pi. ix) fruit. frui^ttiat, adj. fertile, /ruit-ful. frii^, adj. early; — er, formerly. j?rtlfilinn, bet, s.s spring. grit^ftiid, ba8, s.^ breakfast [-stick]. fftfileu, V. w. feel. fitqten, V. VI. lead, conduct, car- ry on (as conversation, war, etc.) ^viVit, f. w. {no pi.) abundance, plenty [fuU-ness]. fitnf, num. five. fitt, prep, {ace.) for. jjur^t, bie (no pi.) fear [fright]. fitr(f|teit, V. w. fear. fltr^tfont, adj. timid [fright- some]. 428 VOCABULARY ^n%, ber, s.2 {pi. -ufie) foot; — 6aII, in, S.2 {pi. a) football; —toan^ betimg, bie, w. pedestrian tour, tramp. &aid, bie, w. forlt. ©oUeric', bie, w. gallery. flttllj, adj. all, whole (§ 109, 3); adv. quite, entirely ; im — en, on the whole ; — unb gor, alto- gether, utterly. gnr, adv. quite, altogether ; — nic^t, not at all. ©nrtcn, ber, s.i {pi. a) garden [yard] ; — tor, ba«, s.^ garden- gate [-door]. (Sfirtner, ber, «.' gardener. @nft, ber, s.^ [pi. a) guest; — 5au8, baS, S.8 inn. dJebdube, bo8, s.i huUding. gebeii, i). s. give ; eg gibt {with ace. § 340), there is, there are. (Seitrge, bag, s.i mountains. Se'bi)ttn,pple.-botn{froinQtbaven). geliraudien, v. w. use. ®tintt, bie, to. -birth; — gl)aug, bag, S.3 birth-place; — gtog, ber, S.2 birthday. (SeSiifA, bag, s.^ bush-es, thicket. @cban!e, ber, mx. {gen. =ng) thought, idea. geiienfen, v. w. irr. (§ 330) intend, purpose. ©ebidht, bag, s.'* poem. ©ebulb, bie {noplu.) patience. @efal)r, bie, w. danger, risk [-fear]. gefa^rUl^, adj. dangerous, peril- ous. gefaKeit, v. s. {dat.) please. ©efnilen, ber, mx. (§279, 2) fa- vor. nefa^t, ppl. adj. composed, calm. @efjtl)(, bag, S.2 feel-ing. gegeit, prep, {ace.) against, to- wards, to [a-gain]. (Segcitb, bie, w. region, country. ^egenfat;, ber, s.'' {pi. a) contrast. ®egeiiteil, bag, s.^ (§ 236, 3) con- trary, reverse ; tm — , on the contraiy. gegenJi'Scr, prep, {dat, usually follows governed word) opposite. ©egncr, ber, s.i opponent, adver- sary. ge^cn, v. s. irr. (§ 185, avx. fciii) go; bag ge^t nid^t, that won't do. ge^iiren, v. w. {dat.) belong to. @>etft, ber, S.3 intelligence, spirit, ghost. geliinfig, adj. fluent, ready; as adv. fluently; {from laufen). gelb, adj. yellow. ®elb, bag, S.3 money [yield.] ©elegciifteit, bie, w. opportunity. gelelirt, ppl adj. learnt; as noun, scholar (§ 290, 2). gelingcn, v. s. {aux. fein, impers. with dat.) succeed, be success- ful ; eg geliiigt inir, I succeed. gelten, v. s. be at stake, involve, be a question or matter of [yield]. gemein, adj. common, ordinary [-mean]. @emiit, bag, s.' feeling, soul {from flJhit, mood). genaii, adj. exact, accurate, care- ful. geneigt, ppl. adj. inclined. genic^en, v. s. enjoy. geitng, adj. {indcl., usually follows noun) enough. grniigi.-n, v. w. be enough, suffice. gernbc, adv. exactly, just [-rath- er], gent, adv. gladly, willingly; id) inocf)te gem, I should like ; — Ijaben, like, be fond of ; — (efen, like to read (cf. § 375, 1). ®criir()t, bag, s.^ rumor. ©ef^iift, bag, s.2 business (from fdjaffeii, to do). gefr^el)eit, v. s. {aux. fein, Sd pers. only) happen : used as passive of mod)en, tun, be done. ©efd^cnl, bag, s.2 present (from fdjenfen). 65cfd)idjtc, bie, w. story, history {from gefd)ct)en). gcfil)td)t(irf), adj. historical. fleftdirft, adj. skillful GERMAN-ENGLISH 429 ©efc^maif, ber, s.^ (pi. a, rare) taste [-smack]. @efeQfd)af<, bie, w. society, com- pany. ®«fi(^t, bas, S.8 (§ 276, a) face, countenance, -sight. @tiptn% bag, 8." ghost, spook. @e{f)ro(^, ba§, s." conversation (from (ptedtjen). ie^ett, V. s. irr. (§ 185) confess. tern, adv. yester-day. ge uni, adj. well, healthy [-sound]. @efunb4ett, bte, w. health [sound- hood] . gettio^reH, v. w. aSord, grant. OemoldB, adj- powerful. geWiltnen, v. s. gain, -win. geWi^, adj. certain; adv. certain- ly ; to be sure [-wit]. Remitter, iai, s.i thunder-storm, [-weather] . jcwo^neu (fi(^), v. w. accustom one's self (to, on, ace.) aewS^nU^, adj. usual, ordinary ; adv. usually. geino^itt, ppl. adj. accustomed. «ie§en, «. s. pour. @i|vfel, ber, s.i peak, summit. glSnjen, v. w. glitter, gUsten [glance]. ®Iri§, baS, S.8 glass. @lou6e, ber, nix. (gen. -ii8) belief, faith [be-lief], fllottfien, D. 10. be-lieve (§ 257, 1, a). flJei^, adj. -like, a-like; adv. directly. fikWfaUS, adv. like-wise. gleililtitel', adv. no matter, just the same. ®t»de, bie, w. bell [clock]. @Iutf, ba« (nopJ.) -luck, fortune; jum — , fortunately. flliirfli^, adj. -lucky, fortunate, happy. fltutflic^crttctfe, adv. fortunately [lucky-wise], flttobig, adj. gracious, flotben, adj. golden, gold. (Solbftiitf, bag, s.^ gold-piece [-stick]. Qtaien, v. a. dig [graye]. 3rab, ber, s.^ degree, grade. ®rof, ber, w. count [-grave in margrave]. @ramntat'it, bie, w. grammar. ®taS, ba8, S.3 grass. grau, adj. gray. gvcifen, v. s. grasp, seize, grip(e). gne^ifA, adj. Greek. ffco^, adj. great, large; (of stat- ure) tall. ©ro^mutter, bie, s.i (pZ. ii) grand- mother. griin, adj. green. ©runb, ber, s.^ (j>J. ii) reason, ground, foundation. gjiinbtic^, adj. thoro [ground-]. @ru^, ber, s.^ (pi. -fi^e) greet-ing. gut, adj. good ; ad». well. ®itte (no pi.) good-ness, kind- ness. ©tjmttofium, ba8, rox. gymnasium. fioar, ba8, s.^ hair. ^aben, v. w. irr. (§ 171) have. ^afen, ber, s.i {pi. a) harbor [haven]. ftolb, adj. half (§ 109, 3). ^alS, ber, s.^ (pZ. o) neck, throat [halse]. ^oHen, u. s. hold, consider (§265, 3, c); — tton, think (much, little) of; SBort — , keep (one's) word. tonb, ill, s.^ {pi. a) hand, onbel, ber, s.i (no pi.) trade, commerce [handle]. ^anbedt, v. w. act [handle] ; e8 ^anbelt ftd) urn, it is a question of. taubeJSfreilieit, bic,«;. free-trade. nnbhmg, bie, w. shop, store [handling] . Jponbfc^ul), ber, s.^ glove [hand- shoe] . ^(ingematte, bie, w. hammock. jiongeu, »• s. hang. ^jiu^g, adj. frequent ; adv. often ■ [heap-]. ^anpt, ba8, S.8 head (cf. § 276). ^auptfiid|It(i^, adv. chiefly. 430 VOCABULARY ^au))tftabt, bic, S.2 {pi. a) capital [head-stead, i. e. chief city], ^aiiS, ba8, S.8 house; — l^erv, ber, w. — tnirt, ber, s.^ man-o£-the- house, landlord ; — lefjrerin, bie, w. governess ; tiai^ — c, home (homeward); ju — c, at home. £iauSr^eit, little house, cottage. qeftig, adj. violent. hegen, «■ w. cherish [hedge]. flettig, adj. holy, sacred. ^eitnat, bie,it'. home, native place or country [home-] . ^tixat, bie, w. marriage. " ei^, adj. hot. ei^eu, u. s. be called [be hight]. etter, adj. cheerful. ' tlb, ber, w. hero. elbilt, bie, w. heroine. elfen, v. s. (dat.) help ; baS ^ilft ni(J)t8, that avails nothing, does no good. cU, adj. bright, clear, light. et, adv. hither, along. J^erbft, ber, s.2 autumn [har- vest] . herein', adv. in hither, in here (§210,2). V. s. (intr., aux. I 94, 1) gentleman, l^ercinfireri^en, jein) set in. Jperr, ber, w. (< sir, Mr. Serirtit^, adj. glorious, splendid. eruntfle^eit, v. s. irr. (§ 185, auz. fein) walk about, ^erj, ba«, mx. (§ 97, 2, a), heart; — eiiSfreinib, bet, bosom-friend. ^erslirfj, adj. heart-y, sincere, cordial. ?eulcu, V. w. howl. elite, adv. to-day; ^eutjutage, nowadays. tjeutig, adj. of to-day, to-day's. ^ejc, bic, w. witch [hag]. tliet, adv. here. tilfe, bie {no pi.) help, tmmel, ber, s.i heaven, sky. I)ittauS', adv. out thither, out there (§ 210, 2). ^tnouSflc^cit, V. s. {aitx. fein) go out (there). ^inberii, v. w. hinder, prevent. ^inberniS, bo8, s." hindrance, difficulty [hinder-ness] . ^infidjt, bie, w. respect [-sight]. Ijinter, prep. {dat. and ace.) be- hind. ^iiitergntnb, ber, s.2 {pi. ii) back- ground. ^iuteriuiitbler, ber, s.i backwoods- man. ^iuitbcrfiic^en v. s. {aux. fein) flee over. Iliniibcrfle^eit, v.s. irr. (§ 185, aux. fein) go over. fitfto'ttflfl, adj. historical. l)0rf|, adj. high (§ 109, 1). tloc^l'teitS, adv. at the most. ^of, ber, S.2 {pi. o) court ; — leBen, baS, s.i court-life. l^of^eii, V. w. hope. ^9tf"«ng, bie, w. hope [hoping]. ^Bjiirfj, adj. polite. fiifltd|fett, bie, m. politeness. ii^e, bie, to. height, lioten, V. w. fetch, get [hale]. toXff, bag, S.3 wood, forest [holt]. onornt;', baS, s.^ fee. ])i)rett, B. w. hear. i)ii{ifd|, adj. pretty. ^iigei, ber, s.^ hill, ©nitb, ber, S.2 dog [hound]. minbcrt, num. hundred, ijungrtg, adj. hungry, fiut, ber, 8.2 {pi. it) hat [hood]. Pteit (fid)), t!. «). be on one's guard [heed]. ic^, 'pron. I. t^r, poss. pron. her, their ; 3^r, your. immer, adv. always. in, prep. {dat. and ace.) in, into. inbem', sub. conj. while, since. inbef'fen, adv. meanwhile, how- ever. ^n^dlt, ber, s.^ {no pi.) contents [in-hold]. 3ittfet, bie, w. island. iutercffnnt', adj. interesting. 3intcrcf'fe, baS, mx. {gen. -8) in- terest. GERMAN-ENGLISH 431 iraenb, pron. (indcl.) any, some (§ 152). ^rrtunt, bcr, s.s error [err-aom]. ttntie'tlifti), adj. Italian. jo, adv. yes; of course, you know (§ 380, 1, d). ^iiger, ber, 8.i hunter. 3nflr, ba«, s.^ year; — e«feft, bag, «.2 annual festival; — e«tag, ber, S.2 anniversary; — egjf it, bie, w. season. ^O^r^mt'tiert, bag, s.^ century. ^anuar, ber, s.^ January. ieb-, pron. every, each. jebeitfoIIS, adv. at any rate. tebermanit, pron. (indcl.) every one (§ 153). iebod), adv. nevertheless, yet. jctnanti, pron. indef. some one, any one (§ 154). jen-, dem. pron. that [yon] . je^t, adv. now [yet]. je^ig, od;. present (from je^t). Sugeub, bie [no pi.) youth. ^tt'Ii, ber, s. July. jUng, adj. young. 3mtge, ber, w. boy, lad. :3ttttgfratt, bie, w. maid. giiugting, bev, s.^ youth, young man. Su'nt, ber, s. /wne. fioffee, ber, s. {no pi.) coffee. ffittjlt, ber, S.2 (pZ. o) hoat, row- boat. fidfer, ber, s.^ emperor [Ccesar]. folt, adj. cold. fittlte, bie, to. {no pi.) cold. fi'amcrob', ber, w. comrade, com- panion. Snnbibot', ber, w. candidate. i^nnjel, bie, w. pulpit, chancel. ^apxtaV, ba«, s.2 (pZ. aZso -ien) capital, principal. fiopttftn', ber, s.'^ captain. fiorte, bie, to. card. Soften, ber, s.i box. ffotljebto'Ie, bie, w. cathedral; ifatf)ebrat'tirc^e, bie, w. cathe- dral-church. Soitf, ber, S.2 (pi. fill) purchase, [chap, cheap]. faufcit, V. w. buy. Snnfmnim, ber, s.s (§ 238, 2, a) merchant [chap-man]. fount, adv. scarcely, hardly. fcjn, adj. no, not a, none (§ 155). feineSniegS, aciu. by no means, in no way. fennen, v. w. irr. (§ 330) know, be acquainted with [ken] . ^enntntl, bie, s.^ knowledge. Serl, ber, s.2 fellow [churl]. Serlt^en, bag, s.i little fellow. Stub, bag, S.3 child. Stltb^ett, bie (no pi.) child-hood. Stride, bie, w. church [kirk]. Stffen, bas, s.i cushion. Ilor, ad/. cZear. Slflffe, bie, w. class. SJoBiei:', baS, s.^ piano [clavier]; — ftiinDe, bie, w. piano-lesson. Sleib, bag, s.^ garment, dress ; pi. clothes [cloth]. Sleibuug, bie, w. clothing, ap- parel; — gftiicf, bo?, s.'^ article of clothing. Iletn, adj. small. Sleiutgfcit, bie, w. trifle, small matter. Siima, ba«, s. (pi. -ta or -te) cli- mate. nimnten, v. s. (aux. fein) climb. fdngen, v. s. sound [clink]. {(o^iren, V. w. knock. Stofter, bag, s.i (pi. o) convent, cloister. Ifug, adj. clever, ingenious. fflngljett, bie (no pi.) prudence, cleverness, shrewdness. Sna6e, ber, w. boy [knave] ; — ii((f|ule, bie, w. hoys' -school. fioffer, ber, s.i trunk [coffer]. {ommen, v. s. (aux. fciti) come. Sam))anift', ber, w. composer. Stoitig, bcr, s.^ king. Sputgtn, bie, w. queen. fiintBlic^, adj. royal, kingly. fiinnen, v. w. (§ 189) can, be able. 432 VOCABULARY Sottjeft', ba8, S.2 concert. Jfopf, bet, S.2 (p^ b) head [cup]. Sojjffd)mers, bet, mx. headache [-smart]. Sopfiuclj, ba8 {no pi.) headache [-woe]. fioft, bie, w. fare, hoard [cost]. foften, V. w. cost. Soften, bie {pi. only) cost{s), ex- pense. ftroft, bie, S.2 (pJ. fi) force, strength [craft]. frnfttfl, adj. strong, pithy [crafty] . fraftuoll, oty. powerful [craft- full]. Irant, adj. sick, ill. Srmrtljeit, bie, w. sickness, illness, disease ; — 8folI, bet, s." {pi. a) case of sickness. firieg, bet, s.^ war ; — 8fd)iff, ba8, 8.2 war-ship, man-of-war. Sroite, bie, w. crown. ^rDn))t:tnj, bet, w. crown-prince. ^it^e, bie, w. kitch-en. fii^t, adj. cool. filmmern, »• w. trouble, concern ; — fi(^, care (about = urn). fiittftig, adj. coming, next, future. Smtf<, bie, S.2 {pi. ii) art; — ge= fc^mod, bet, s.'' artistic taste. luticten, v. w. cure, treat. SurfuS, bet ( pi. SurfuS or Surfe), course. lutj, adj. short [curt]; as od«. {of time) shortly. liitjUl^, adv. lately, recently. ^tfc^e, bie, w. coach. tarfien, i>. w. laugh. finbcn, bet, s.i (p!. a) store, shop. fioge, bie, w). situation, location, position [lay]. Sonb, bag, s.^.a (p. 49, n. 7) land, country ; auf bent — e, in the country. Snnbgmaiiii, bet, s.' {pi. -teute, but see § 238, 2, o) country- man, fellow-countryman. Initg, adj. long ; feit —em, for a long time (past). lange, adv. long, for a long time. fionge, bie, w. length [leng-th]. ISngS, prep, {gen.) along. langfant, adj. slow ; as adv. slow- ly [long-some]. Ittngft, adv. long since. iBiigweittg, adj. dull, tedious [long-while-y] . loffen, V. s. let, cause; (ettraS) tun — , have (something) done (§366, 1, a). fioteiu', ba8, s. (§ 290, 1), Xafin. latei'ntft^, adj. Latin. laufen, v. s. {aux. fein) run [leap]. lauteit, V. w. purport, run. (outer, adv. exclusively, none but. leBen, v. w. live, fiefien, bas, s.i life [live]. le&^aft, adj. live-ly ; as adv. keenly. legen, v. w. lay. Se^nftU^I, bet, s.^ {pi. ii) easy- chair [lean-stool]. SeArfiuA, bo8, s.^ text-book. Seflretj bet, si (man) teacher; — in, bie, w. woman teacher. lejlirreic^, adj. instructive [-rich]. leili^t, adj. light, easy ; as adv. easily, readily. leib, adj. disagreable ; e6 tut mit — , I am sorry [loath], leiben, v. s. suffer [loathe]." Seiben, ba8, s.i suffering, trouble. letber, adv. unfortunately, alas. teife, adv. softly, in low tone. Seitil'rc, bie, w. text for reading [Zectwre]. lerncn, v. w. learn, fiefebitc^, ba8, s.' reading-book, reader. lefeit, V. s. read. SJefcr, bet, s.i reader. le^t, adj. last. Scute, bie {pi. only) people. Stli^t, bas, S.3 (§ 276, a) light, (ieb, adj. dear [lief] ; — I|aben, to like, be fond of [have lief]. Stebe, bie, w. love ; — 8jceue, bie, love-scene ; — 8brief, bet, s.» love-letter. liebeu, v. w. love. GERMAN-ENGLISH 433 lie6ett§tt)urbig, adj. lovely [love- worthy] . tteier, adv. rather, preferably [liefer]. Heoaehtinnen, v. s. grow fond Keblicf), adj. lovely, sweet(-sceiit- ed). Sieb, ba8, s.' song. lienett, V. s. lie, be situated. linf, adj. left. Sifte, bie, w. list. Siterotur', bie, w. literature. loien, V. w. praise [love]. So(^, baa, S.8 hole [lock]. Siiffel, ber, s.i spoon [to lap], lo^nett ifvij), v. w. be worth while. US, adj. rid of, free from, loose, -less. loS'&rec^ett, v. s. (intr., aux. jein) break loose, burst. Suft, bie, S.2 (pi. ii) air, breeze; — fc^tog, bo8, s.^ castle-in-the- air. (tigen, V. s. lie, tell a falsehood. Suft, bie, S.2 {pi. ii) desire [lust]. Ittftig, adj. jolly [lusty]. fiuftfpiet, ba8, S.2 comedy. an ata^en, «. w. make ; jtc^ auf ben SEBeg — , set out, start. SMoc^t, bie,. S.2 (pi. o) power, might. aHiib^eil, bag, s.i girl, maiden [maid-kin]; —\ijnU, bie, girls' - school. aWngb, bie, s.^ (jjJ. a) maid, maid- servant. SffJoi, ber, s.^ Jlfa?/. ffljol, ba«, s.2.3 (§ 276, a), time, [mole] ; ein'mat, once ; ein (jaarmal, a few times. SJlnter, ber, s.^ painter, artist. a«0leret', bie, w. painting. mon, pron. indef. one, they, people (§ 156) [man]. mnnii^, pron. adj. many, many a; — mat, many a time, often. SiBann, ber, s.^ man. tnannigfaltig, adj. manifold. 9Rante(, ber, s.^ {pi. a) mantle, cloak. 3Rorl, bie, w. mark. Mati)tmatil' , bie, w. {no pi.) mathematics. Wantv, bie, w. Wall [mure]. SWebijin', bie, w. {nopl.) medicine. 9Keer, bag, s.^sea [mere]. ntcljr, adj. more; as adv. more; tiidfit — , no longer. Jtte^rere, pron. adj. several (§ 158) [more-] . SWel)r^ett, bie, w. majority [more- hood, i.e. more-ness]. mtf)tmttiS, adv. several times, frequently. SMeite, bie, w. mile. meilenMeit, adv. for miles. mein, pron. pass, my, mine. mettten, v. w. mean. meifteitS, adv. most-ly. SBletfter, ber, s.i master. SRenge, bie, w. mass, multitude, great number [many]. SJlenfdj, ber, w. man, mankind (from gjiann). ntenfefilicfi, adj. human. merfen, v. w. notice, mark. merfwiirbig, adj. remarkable [mark-worthy]. 9Bcffe, bie, w. fair, mass. 5Keffer, bag, s.i knife [meat]. 9Ket^o'be, bie, w. method. SDliete, bie, w. hire, rent [meed]. mtlb, adj. mild, gentle. ininbeffcnS, adv. at least. SWiiterol', bag, mx. {pi. -ien) min- eral. SJWimt'te, bie, w. minute. mit, prep, {dot.) with [mid in ^mid-wife]; adv. along. . areUtog, ber, S.2 mid-day, noon. jnitteilen, v. w. impart, tell, in- form of [-deal]. mtttel, adj. middle. aWtttelaltcr, bag, s. (no i)i.) Middle Ages. W\ttilpnn% ber, s.^ central poinf, center. aWtttelnicg, ber, s.^ middle way or course. 434 VOCABULAKY aKittmot^, bet, s.^ Wednesday [mid-week]. Wloie, bie, w. fashion, mode. ntoflen, v. w. (§ 189) may, wisli, like (§ 191, 3). jniiflUdj, adj. possible {from ntogen). Wonat, bet, s.^ month ; — sfcf)rift, bif, w. month-ly (journal or magazine). Wl'onij, ber, s.^ monk. 9Honb, ber, s.^ moon, monbliell, adj. moon-light. SWoutag, ber, s.^ Monday. SKorgcit, ber, s.i morn-ing; — « Btatt, bo«, S.3 morning paper; — luft, bie, S.2 (pi. ii) morning air or breeze. morgeit, adv. to-morrow ( = 2JJor= gen, morn). Jltitbc, adj. tired. 9KitI)e, bie, w. pains, trouble; ber — (gen.) luert, worth while. SRuilb, ber, s. 2. s (pi. rare) mouth, fflhife'iim, ba8, mx. (pi. -fe'en) museum. 3KuftI', bie, w. music. ntiiffen, v. w. (§ 189) must, be obliged, be compelled, have to. 3Kut, ber, s. (no pi.) courage, mood. 9K«ttcr, bie, s.i (pi. ii) mother; — fljrache, bie, w. mother-tongue, native language. Itodj, prep, (dat.) after, to, to- ward, according to [nigh]. 92acl)6ar, ber, mx. neighbor. liaiAiiem', sub. conj. after. tta^^ei'', adv. aftei'ward, subse- quently. 92ad)mittag, ber, s.^ afternoon [-mid-day] . 97ad|nd)t, bie, w. report, news, tidings. niic^ft, see under nal). 9tna)t, bie, s.^ (pi. a) night. naif, adj. near, nigh (§ 114, 2) ; nfidjft, superl. nearest, next. SBfillc, bie, w. vicinity [nigh-ness]. SKotne, ber, mx. (gen. -n8) name ; — n8Better, ber, mx. namesake; namenS, by name. niim(ir^, adv. namely, that is to say. 9laxr, ber, w. fool. SWafe, bie, w. nose. itn^, adj. wet [nas-ty]. 'Station', bie, w. nation. 9lotur', bie, w. nature; — fc5on= f)eit, bie, w. beauty of nature ; — totffenfci^aft, bie, w. natural science. 92atura'tien, bie (pi. only) natu- ral curiosities. itatiir'Iit^, adv. naturally, of course. SWe6cI, ber, s.^ fog, mist. ne&eit, prep. (dat. and ace.) be- side, close by, next to, along- side, along with. 9Zefienftut, ber, s.2 (pi. -uffe) trib- utary. 9?effe, ber, w. nephew. uet)meu, v. s. take. ncilt, adv. no [none]. itenneii, v. w. irr. (§ 330) name. 9Jeft, bo8 S.3 nest. nctt, adj. neat, nice. licit, adj. new. 9Jeilflterbe, bie, w. curiosity. ticitgierig, adj. curious (gierig, eager for). iteilUti), adv. lately, recently [newly] . niillt, adv. not [naught]. lltd|t§ (§ 320, 2), indcl. nothing. ilic, adv. never. ttieoct', adv. down [nether]. iiicberbrciiiieit, v. w. irr. (§ 330) burn down. lticbcrfc. w. sit down [-set]. ittcbrig, adj. low [nether-y]. tliemolS, adv. never. ntetltailti, pron. indef. no one, no- body (§ 160). nod), adv. yet, still ; — iiic^t, not yet ; conj. nor. llodima{$, adv. again, once more. 92at:beii, ber, s.i north. ^{orbfeite, bie, w. north side. GERMAN-ENGLISH 435 SWorbfidit, bos, s.^ North-ern Light-s. Wet, tie, S.2 [pi. a) need, distress. Jtotfall, ber, S.2 (pi. (i) case of need, emergency. noH|), adj. need-ful, necessary. 92lltig', bie, jo. note, notice. 9}umero (indcl.) at No. nun, adB. now, well. nur, ad». only, just. 3Ju|, bie, S.2 ( pi. ii) nut. O 0, imierj. 0, oli. oi, sub. conj. whether ; al8 — , as if (§ 359, 3). 06borf|, boS, 8.8 shelter [-thatch]. »6en, adJi). above [ab-ove]. ober, acy. upper. oiaUidf', sub. conj. altho. 06ft, ba8, s. (wopZ.) fruit. gbmo^l', subj. conj. altho. ober, con/, or. Of en, ber,s.i(pi. 6) stove [oven]. offenbor, adj. evident, plain; as adv. evidently, clearly [open-], iiffnen, v. w. open, ofi, adv. often, oft. ofterS, adv. [comp. of oft) often, frequently. ojne, prep, [ace.) without. Djr, baS, mx. ear. £)nte(, ber, s.i uncle. Oper, bie, lo. opera. Qtt, ber, s.^. s (§ 275, 2, a) place. Oftern {vl- only), Easter. ^aar, baS, s.2 pair; ein })aar, a few. $a(aft, ber, s.^ (pi. a) palace. Si5o<)ier', bos, s." paper. ijSorf, ber, s." (pZ. also <|5art«) parA;. Paffen, u. w. (dat.) fit, suit. fPttftor, bet, mx. pastor. !^aufe, bie, w. pause, recess. $enftan', bie, w. board, boarding- house; — tjaben Bei, to board with. ilJcrfon', bie, w. person. SPfob, ber, S.2 path. $fetfe,_ bie, w. pipe. pfennig, ber, s.2 penny. !j5ferb, bag, s.^ horse [palfrey']. $ftn8ficn {pi. only), Whitsuntide, Pentecost. qSflic^t, bie, w. duty [plight]. $4i(ofii)j^ie'^ bie, w. philosophy. ^notograpljie', bie, w. photo- graph. SPlon, bet, S.2 (pi. a) plan. $(a^, ber, s.2 (pi. &) place, seat. ))Ianbern, b. ro. chat. pVd^\iif, adj. sudden ; adv. sud.. denly. SPoltti!', bie (no pi.) politics. goltttfc^, adj. political. SPoIijei', bie, w. police. ^olijift, bev, w. policeman. $oft, bie, w. mail, post. tiriicqtig, adj. splendid. ^rofibettt', ber, w. president; — enwa^t, bie, w. presidential election. 35retS, ber, s.^ price. ijjreffe, bie, w. press. fprcRfret^eit, bie, w. freedom of the press. ^rinj, ber, w. prince. ^rofef'for, bev, mx. professor. prolog , ber, s.^ prologue. ^rofa, bie (no pi.) prose. iProsent', bo«, s.^ per cent. ^riifitng, bie, w. trial, test, prov- ing. iPnlt, ber (and ba«) s.2 desk I pulpit] iguntt, ber, s.^ point. quii(en (M), v. w. be tormented, be bored. (jner, adv. across [queer]. m 9tai, bas, s.^ wheel. !Hanb, ber s.^ edge, border [rand]. 436 VOCABULARY taf^, adj. fast [rash]. SJJnt, ber, s. {no pi. in this sense) advice, counsel. tttteu, V. s. guess, advise [read, rede]. 9iiiu&er, ber, s.^ robber; @tra= ^eii — , footpad. roudjen, b- «)• smolce [reek]. : tatif), adj. rough, liarsh. rec^neu, v. w. reckon, count (on, auf, ace). rcd)t, adj. right, right-hand ; adv. right, very. SKed^t, baS, s.^ right, rcd^t fjoBeti, to be right (of persons only). yitie, bie, w. speech, address ; — fret^eit, bie, w. freedom of speech. reben, v. w. talk. rebUq, adj. honest, candid. JHcblicqfeit, bie (no pi.) honesty. OJeform', bie, w. reform. SHegel, bie, w. rule. regeltna^ig, adj. regul-ax. IKegen, ber, s.i rain ; — jdjirm, ber, S.2 umbrella ; — tag, ber, s.^ rainy day. rejneit, v. w. rain, ret*, adj. rich. 9Jei4, ba«, s.^ empire [rich], rei^en, «. if. reach, hand. reic^Ul^, adj. plentiful, abundant; as adv. richly. iHeit^tum, ber, s." rich-es. reif, adj. ripe, mature. 9iei6e, bie, w. row. SReife, bie, w. journey, trip [rise]; — tomerab', ber, w. trav- eling companion (comrade); — (Jlon, ber, s.^ (pi. a) route. rcifen, «. ■»• (awa;. §323, 1, c) travel [rise]; ber 9ieiienbe, pres. pple. as noun (§ 290, 2) traveler. Tcitett, «. s. (aux. fein) ride. OJcttet, ber, s.i rider, horseman. Keit^jferb, bas, s.^ saddle-horse. !Hetj, ber, s.^ charm. teijciib, ppl. adj. charming. SHe^iiIilit', bie, w. republic. 'Jiepublifa'ncr, ber, s.i republican. teferuieren, «. w. reserve. tetten, v. w. rescue, save [rid]. SReue, bie (no pi.) regret, repent- ance [to rue]. SR^eitt, ber, s. Rhine ; — fal^rt, bie, trip, or sail, on the Rhine. 9ifltumati§mnS, ber, s. (no pi.) rheumatism. riidten, v. w. judge (from red^t). ri^tig, adj. right, correct. JHirfltung, bie, w. direction. riet^en, v. s. smell [reek]. SHing, ber, s.2 ring. SHitter, ber, s.i knight [rider]. !Hotf, ber, s.2 (pi. o) coat; (of women's apparel) skirt. O'IpQc, bie, w. rdle, part. 92aman', ber, s.2 novel, romance. tiimifd), adj. Roman. SRofe, bie, mj. rose. rot, adj. red. iHitrffe^r, bie, w. return. SKtitfretfe, bie, w. return journey. 9!itdtt)eg, ber, s.^ return, way back. rttfen, v. s. call, summon. fRvitie, bie (no pi.) rest. nt^en, «. jo. rest. ru^ig, adj. quiet. ©ttol, ber, S.2 (pi. ©file) hail, (large) room ; . fionjert — con- cert-hall. @ad|e, bic,M!. affair, thing [sake]. ®nge, bie, w. tradition, legend, story [say]. fagen, v. w. say, tell. (Snlamau'ber, ber, s.^ salamander. @amm(mtg, bie, w. collection. @am§tag, ber, Saturday. fonft, adj. gentle, soft. fnuer, adj. bitter, sour. (Scene, bie, w. scene. (Sdjabe, ber, mx. (pi. ©djaben) in- jury, loss ; ba8 ift fc^abe, that is a pity [scathe] . fdjiintcti (fii^), V. w. be ashamed (of = gen.) [shame] . fd^iinbUd), adj. shameful, disgrace- ful. Sc^ntten, ber, s.^ shade, shadow^ f^iiijeii, V. w. value, esteem. GEKMAN-ENGLISH 437 fdioulelit, V. w. rook. bi(jtctt, bie, w. sight, object, or place, of interest [something worth seeing] . fe^ncu (fid)}, v. w. long (for, nod^). e^r, adv. very, much [sore] ein, V. irr. (§ 171,2) be. ctlt, pron. pass, his, its, one's. tit, prep, (dat.) since, (duration of time) for. ©ette, bie, w. side, page. !el6ft, pron. self, myself, etc. cltCIt, adj. rare ; adv. seldom. fettfam, adj. strange, quaint. ©emmet, bie, w. roll (bread). fcnben, v. w. irr. (§ 330) send. September, ber, s.i September. fc^eit, V. w. set, seat, put ; fid) — , to sit down. fill), pron. refl. Mmself, herself, itself, themselves. fidjer, adj. secure, sure, certain; as adv. surely. ©te, pron. you ; fie, she, they, her, them. ©ieg, ber, s.^ y'.ttory. ©tiler, ba8, s. {no pi.) silver. fil6eni, adj. silver. fingen, v. s. sing. finicn, V. a. (aux. fein) sirk. ©inn, ber, s.^ sense, mind. ©ttte, bif, w. habit, custom. fittlitq, adj. moral. ©i^, ber, S.2 seat [sit]. fi^en, V. s. sit. fo, adv. so, thus ; in exclamations and questions, indeed! ? io . . . at?, as ... as (§381, 1, h); fo introducing principal verb after subordinate clause usually not translated; cf. p. Ill, n. 2. foefien, adv. just now, just [so- even]. ©of a, ba?, s. {pi. -?) sofa, lounge. fofort', adv. at once. fognr', adv. actually, even. Oflenonnt', adj. so-called. ©oljn, ber, s.^{pl. o) son. foldft, pron. adj. such (§ 135). ©olbot', ber, w. soldier. foUcn, V. w. (§ 189) shall, ought, be to, be said to (§ 191, 5). ©ammcr, ber, s.'- summer. fonberbar, adj. strange, peculiar^ [a-sunder, sundr-y]. fonberu, conj. but (§379, 1). ©onnabeub, ber, s.^ Saturday,. [eve of Sun-day]. ©onue, bie, w. sun; — naufgang, ber, s.^{pl. a) sunrise; — nftra^I, ber, mx. sunbeam. ©anntag, bet, s.^ Sunday. fonft, adv. else, otherwise. ©orge, bie w. care, concern anxi- ety [sorrow]. forgfiiltig, adj. careful. ©^la'uier, ber, s.i Spaniard. ^panijti), adj. Spanish. f^areu, v. w. save, spare. flpatfam, adj. saving, economical [spare- some]. ®))arfam{eit, bie, w. economy. ©j)0§, ber, S.2 {pi. ix) jest, joke. fpfit, adj. late. f^SteftenS, adv. at the latest. fpojie'rcn, v. w. {aux. fein) walk, saunter ; — ge^en, take a walk, go walking. ©pajier'gaug, bev, s.^ {pi. fi) walk ; eineii — ntotf)cn, take a. walk. ©JJiegel, ber, s.i mirror. fVielcn, V. lo. play. ©^ieltamerob', ber, w. playmate- {-comrade']. ©iJi^C, VI. point, top [spit]. ©jjrome, bie, w. language. ©prad)(e^rer, ber, s.i language- teacher. ©|)rad)ftunbe, bie, w. language- lesson. fprcdjcn, v. s. speak. @))rta)niort, bas, «.» proverb. fpringcn, v. s. {aux. fein) spring,, jump. ©^rn^, ber, s.^ { pi. ii) saying. ©tant, m. mx. state. GERMAN-ENGLISH 439 ©tnbt, bit, S.2 {pi a) city [stead, i. e. place]; — f)auS, bo«, s.^ city- hall; — firdjc, bic, w. city church; — mufeum, baS, mx. (pZ. -je'en) city museum ; — pad, bet, S.2 (pj. a;so -6) city park; — fd)u(e, bie, ?«. city school ; — Itia^I, bie, w. city election. ©tiibtc^en, baa, s.i little city. ftnrt, adj. strong, stout, {of dis- ease) severe [stark]. ftattfiniien, v. s. take place [find stead, i. e. place]. ftctfen, V. w. put, stick. ftelieii, V. s. irr. (§ 185) stand. ftcljlctt, V. s. steal. fteirjen, v. s. {aux. fein) climb, mount [to sty] . ©telle, bie, w. place. Stcitogtap^', ber, w. stenographer. fterbeii, V. s. {aux. fein) die, [starve] . ftetS, adv. always [stead-ily]. Siinime, bie, w. voice, vote. ftimmeit, u. w. vote, tally, coin- cide. ©ttramung, bie, w. mood. StDtt, ber, S.2 (pi, ij) stick, cane [stock]. ffolj, adj. proud [stout]. ©trofe, bie, to. punishment. ©rtafil, ber, mx. beam, ray. Strop, bie, w. street; — nrouBer, bet, s.i footpad [sireet-robber] . Strctfe, bie, w. stretch, dis- tance. Streiii^, ber, «.^ prank, trick, stroke. Strett, bet, s.^ strife, conflict, quarrel. ftteilB, adj. strict, severe [strong]. Stroi, baS, s. {no pi.) straw; — = |ut, ber, s." {pi. ii) straw-hat [head]. ©twm, bet, S.2 {pi. 6) stream, torrent. ©tiirf, bag, S.2 piece, play [stick]. Stitbeitt', w. student; — in, bie, TO. woman student. ftubic'reit, v. w. study. Stubium, ba8, mx. {pi. ©tubien) ©tufil, ber {pi. ii) chair [stool]; Se^n— , easy chair ; ©c^autcl— , rocking-chair. @tunbe, bie, w. hour, lesson. ©turm, ber, s.^ {pi. ii) storm, ftiirmtfdi, adj. storm-y, violent. ©tii^e, oie, w. prop, support. fttil)en, V. w. seek, look for. ©ubbeutfi^lnnb, bos, s. South Germany. Siiben, ber, s. {no pi.) south. Suntme, bie, w. sum. Bnmpf, ber, s.- {pi. ii) swamp. «, s.2 (pi. -iiffe). address, (discourse) 8iebe, bie, w.; (place of residence) Slbreffe, bie, w. admire, beWunbern, w. admission, (Sintritt, ber, s.^ advance, in — , im boraus. advantage, SJortett, ber, s.^; a5or= jug, ber, s.2 (pi. ii). adventure, Stbenteuer, baS, s.^ advice, 8iat, ber, s. (no pi. in tfds sense). advise, raten, s. affair, Stngelegen^eit, bie, io. ; ©ad|e, bie, w. afford, gereo^ren, w. after, prep, nad) (dat); — all, am @nbe; sub. conj. nodjbem. afternoon, SJadjmittag, ber, s.^; this — , t)eute nad)mittag; — per- formance, 3'Jad)mittag8Borffef= tuiig, bie, w. afterward, nad^^er. again, toieber, nodjmals. against, gegen (ace.) age, Sllter, ba8, s.i; old — , (^obe«) atlter. age, V. altern, w. (aux. ^aben or fein). ago, Bor (dat); an hour — , Bor einer ©tunbe. agreement, SSerabrebung, bie, w. ah, ad|. aid, §ilfe, bie (nopl.) ail, leibeii, s. aim, 3"'/ ^^^t ^-^ air, Suft, bie, s.^ (pi. ii). akin, Berloanbt (to = dat) alas, ac^; ( = unfortunately, un- happily) leiber. 445 446 VOCABULARY alike, gteid^. all, all ( = all of); (whole) ganj; all sorts of, aEcrlet (indcl.); ( = exclusively, none but) tauter. allied, uerbiiiiDet, ppl. adj. allow, erlaubcn, w. {dot. ofpers.); to be— ed to, biirfen (§§ 189, 1, 191, 1). almost, bcina^e, faft. alone, attcin. along, adv. ^n, mit ; come — , fonimen ®te tnit: — with, ju= gtcic^ mit ; prep. langS (gen.) alongside, neben (ace. and dat.) already, fd)on. also, aud). altar, Wltor, ber, s.^ (pi. also a). altho, obgleic^, obtt)ol)l, sub. conjs. altogether (utterly), burdjauS, gar, ganj imb gar. always, immer, Jtets. am, bin; am visiting, Bcfuc^e; am going, gel)e. (See §348, 1.) America, ?linerita, bo8 (§225, 225, 3). American, 3tmeri!aner, ber, s.i American, adj. ameriJanifd). amiss, iibct ; to take — , iibel nct)= men. among, unter, jTOifc^en (dat. and ace); — them, barunter. amount, — to, betragcn, s. ample, reic^tld). ancient, alt ; (primeval) uratt ; the aucients, bie 21Iten. and, unb. angel, (Sngel, ber, s.i animal, Sier, bo8, s.^ annihilation, 93eniid)tung, bie, w. anniversary, 3ol)re8tag, ber, s.^ another, (additional) iiot^ ein ; (different) ein anberer ; one ^, einonber (indcl.) answer, 3Intiuovt, bie, w. answer, antiuorten (dat. ofpers.); (trans.) beantmorteu ; (reply) ucvfi'lsfn ; — in the negative, Bcrneiiien (trans.) antiquity, Slltertum, ba9, s.' anxiety, (fear) Stngft, bie, s.^ (pi. ai) ; (care, solicitude) SBeforgniS, bie, S.2, ©orge, bie, w. anxious, be — , fiif angftigen, w.; to make — , to trouble, bang(ej [adv.] iiiadjen, with dat. any, irgciib (§ 152) ; have you — money, fiaft bu etwaS ®elb ? — one, jemanb, irgenb jemonb ; — thins, ctroa?, irgenb etroaS ; not — tiling, niifitS ; — thing but, nid)t8 lueniger als ; — such thing, fo ctluaS ; — way, eigent» ltd), adv. apartment(s), 2Bo^nung, bie, to. ape, 3tffe, ber, w. apparel, jfteibitng, bie, w. apparent(ly), fd)einbar. appear, (look) auSfetjen, s.; (seem) fd)einen, s.; (make one's appear- ance) erid)eineu, s. (avx. fein). appearance(s), ©c^ein, ber, s.^ apple, apfel, ber, s.i (pi. S) ; —shot, 3It)felfd|u6, ber, s.2 (pi. -iiffe). appoint, ernennen, w. (§ 330). approve, billigen, w. April, ai:ril, ber, s.2 Aristotle, StriftoteleS. arm, Strni, ber, s.- army, SIrmce, bie, w.; §eer, ba«, around, urn (occ.) arrangement, I'erabrebung, bie, w. arrive, anfommfn, s. (aux. fein). art, jlunft, bie, s.- (pi. ii). artistic, — taste, ^imftgejt^madE, ber, s. as, (temporal) als, ba, Wie (§ 381, 1, a, b, I) ; (modal) Wit ; (caus- al = since) ba; all sub. conjs.; not so good as, nid)t (o gut mie; as you say, une bu fagft; as . . . as, so . . . as, fo . . . ah (§ 381, 1, h) ; as if, ol8 ob, al8 menu (§ 359, 3); as for me, InaS mid) betrifft. ascend, intr. binaufftetgen, s. (ava. feiu); tr. befteigeu, s. ascertain, erfal)rcu, s. ashamed, to be — , ftc^ jd^omen, w. (gen.) ashes, %\ijt, bie, w. aside, bei ©eite ; — from, oufier (dot.) ENGLISH-GEKMAN 447 ask, (question) fragen, to.; (re- quest) bitten, s.; (demand) ■on. long en, w.j _ for, bitten urn (ace.) asleep, fail—, einfd^Iafen, s. (aux. |cin). assemblage, SSerfammlung, tie, w. assemble, (trans.) oetfommein, w. assert, be^anfjten, w. assumed (name), fal[d|. assure, nerftc^ern, w. astonished, erftannt. astonishment, grftonnen, ba«, s. (no pi. ) at, an (dai. and ace), ju (dat.); (of time) nm (ace); (with, at the house of) bet (dot.); — the window, an bem genfter; — a table, an einem %i\(tjt ; — home, gu §anfe ; — ten o'clock, um je^n U[)r ; — at your house, bei 3^nen 311 §anfe ; — any rate, iebenfallS; — No. 2, 5rjumero jwei ; — once, fofort ; — the most, ^bd)ffen8. athletics, Surniibitngen, bie, pi. attach, — oneself to, ftd^ ^angen an (ace.) w. attack, anfatlen, s. attend (visit), befntfjen ; — to, be» f org en, w. audience, Qu\ci)a\iex, bie, pi. August, Wnguft, ber, s." aunt, SEante, bie, w. author, (in the sense of ' writer by profession ') @(f|riftftener, ber, s.i; (otherwise) Slutor, mx., SSerfaffer, ber, s.i autumn, §erbft, bet, s.^ ; — time, §erbftjeit, bie, w. avail, ^elfen (with dat.); it — s nothing, eS ^ilft nid)t8. average, ®urc()fd)nitt, bet, s.^ ; on an — , im ®ur(i)f(f|nitt. avoid, bermeiben, s. ; (evade) um» gef|'en,s. (§185). await, marten (§ 248, 1, a). awake, adj. trad). awake, u. intrans. ertt)ad)en, w. awake(n), v. trans, ermerten, w. away, fort ; far — , weit ent« fcrnt. B back, adv. juriid. background, ^intergrunb, ber, s.« (pi. it). backwoodsman, §interh)ofbIer, ber, s.i bad, fi^[e(^t, f(^limm ; (evil, wicked) bbfe. ball, iBall, ber, s.2 (pi. a). band, Sanb, bag, s.2 bank, Ufer, ba«, s.i barbarian, Sarbar, ber, w. base, unebel. bath, i8ob, ba8, s.a bathe, baben, w. battle, ©diladit, bie, w. be, fein, s. irr. (§ 171, aux. fein) ; (=:be present, involved) bor= Ijanben )ein ; — (= fare) with, fte^en um. beam, ©tra^l, ber, mx. bear, Siir, ber, w. beard, ©art, ber, s.2 (pi. a). beast, Sier, bo8, s.^ beat, fc^Iagen, s. beautiful, fc^on. beauty, ©dbon^eit, bie, w.; — of nature, 9foturic^on^eit, bie. because, meil, sub. eonj. become, merben, s. irr. (§ 171, aux. fein). bed, S8ett, bag, mx. bedroom, @(^taf;ilmmer, baS, s.i bee, S3iene, bie, w. befit, jiemen, w. (dat.) hetore, prep, vox (dat. and ace); sub. eonj. beoot, c^e ; adv. (= hitherto) bi8f)et ; there are four days — Christmas, eg ftnb bier Sage bis SSBei^nud^tcn. beg, (request) bitten (for, um, ace.) beggar, Settler, ber, s.i begin, beginnen, s., anfatigen, s. beginning, Slnfang, ber, s.^(pl. a); from the — , Bom 3tnfang an; in the — , anfangS, adv. behavior, SBetragen, ba8, s.i behind, binter (dat. and ace.) being, aSefen, ba«, s.i ; human — , ajtenfc^, ber, w. 448 VOCABULABY belief, (StouBe, ber, mx. {gen. -n8\ believe, gtauben, w. (dat. ofpers.); — in, glauben an (ace.) bell, OIodEe, bie, w. belong, gepteti, w. {dat. = to) ; — to (be a part of), ge^bren ju ; — to (be the duty of), jein {with dat.) below, prep, untcr {dat. and ace.) ; the picture — , ba8 S3itb batunter. bench, Sonf, bie, s.^ {pi. a). bend, biegen, s. beneficial, jutrciglic^. beside, neben {dat. and ace.) besides, aufierbem, bajii. best, beft, om befteit ; as adv. am bcften, aufs befte (§ 375, 2). betray, Berraten, s. better, beffer ; make — , bcffetn, w. between, jmifd^en {dat. and ace.) beyond, jeiifeits {gen.) bible, sBibet, bie, w. bicycle, gal)trab, ba8, s.' bind, binben, s. bird, SBogcI, bcr, s.i {pi. o). birth, ©eburt, bie, w. birthday, ®eburt6tag, ber, s.^ birthplace (i. e. the house), ®e= butt8t)au«, ba8, s.^ bite, beifeen, s. . bitter, fauer. black, fcbmarj. blame, to — for (i. e. to be to blame for), fi^ulb fein an {dat.) blessing. Out, baS, s.^ blind, adj. btinb. blind, V. blenbcn, w. blood, ®tut, ba8, s. {no pi.) bloody, bluttg. bloom, blii^en, w. blow, V. blafen, s. blue, blau. board (fare), ^ofl, bie, w. board, v. 5penfion ^aben. boarding-house, *Penfion, bie, w. boast of, fid^ riitjmcn, w. {gen.) boat, (row-boat) Saf)n, bcr, s.^ {pi. a); (= steamboat) San^jfer, ber, 8.1 body, Seib, bet, s.^ boil, tod)en, w. bold, frlfi^. bond, SSanb, ba8, s." book, iButfi, ba8, s.^; — case, i8fl« dietfd^ranf, ber, s.^ {pi. a); — store, sBuc^bonblung, bie, w.; — trade, S8u(^banbel,ber, 8. (JiopZ.) border, 5Ranb, ber, s.^ bore, qualen, w. born, geboren. bosom, — friend, ^etjenSfreunb, ber, 8.2 both, beibe; both . . . and, fohJO^t . . . al8 {mi)). box, Soften, bcr, s.i boy,.ffnabe, ber, w., Sunge, ber, «)., SBube, ber, w.; — s' school, kna' bcnfc^ule, bie, w. branch, ^WeiQ, ber, s.^ brave, ta|)fer. bread, !i3rot, baS, 8." breadth, SBreite, bie, w. break, bred)en s.; — loose, Io8= buiftn {intr. auz. jein). breakfast, griil)ftiicf, ba8, s.^ breathe, otmcn, w. breeding, „Sud)t, bie {no pi.) breeze, Suft, bie, s.^ {pi. u). bridge, 93rucfc, bie, w. bright, ^ell, flar. bring, bringen, w. irr. (§ 330); — up (hither), ^erauffli^rcn, w.; — up (educate), erjiel)eu, s. broad, breit. brook, iBact), ber, 8.^ {pi. a). brother, SSruber, bcr, s.i {pi. ii). brown, braun. build, bauen, w. building, (act of — ) 33au, bcr, s.* (§ 275, 2, a); (stmcture) ®e« baubc, bo8, 8.1 burn, brennen, w. irr. (§ 330); — down, nieberbrenncn. burst, loSbre^cn, s. {irttr. aux. fein). bush, SSuIdj, bcr, s.^ {pi. ii). bushes, (thicket) ®ebii(d), bo8, s.^ busied, be((^oftigt. business, ®e|cf)aft, ba8, s.^ on — of state, in @taot8gcf(^aften. busy, bcidjaftigt. but, abcr, fonbetn (§ 379, 1), bo^; (= only) nur. butter, SButter, bie {no pi.) ENGLISH-GERMAN 449 buy, laufen, w. by, an (dat.); bet (dat); with the passive, oon (dat); = by means of, burrf) (aoc); — the window, am genftcr; by tbe train, tnit bem 3ufle; by rail, niit ber (Sifen= Ba[)n ; by a messenger, burcfi cinett SBoten. C «all, (summon) rufen, s.; — on, rufen; — away, abvufen; (cry) f^teien, s.,- (name) nennen, w. irr. (§ 330); be called (named), ^eigen, s. call, (= visit) SBefuc^, ber, s." calm, gefagt, ppl adj.; ru^ig. can, tonnen (§§ 189-191). candid, oufriiI)tiB. candidate, ^anbibat, ber, w. cane, ©todf, ber, s.2 (pZ. o). capable, fai)ig (of = ju). capital (-city), §auptftabt, bie, s.^ pi. a). capital, (principal) ^a})ital, ba8, S.2 (pi. also -iett). capital, adj. trefflicti. captain (of asbip), ^a^itfin, ber, s.^ card, Sarte, bie, w. care, S3eforgtii8, bie, s.", (gorge, bie, w. ; take — , forgen, w. care, to — about, \id) tiimmern, w. urn (ace.) careful, forgfattig. careful, to be — , fii^ "^uten, w. carefully, forgfolttg; (exactly) ge= nau. carriage, SBagen, bet, s.^ carry, tragen, s.; — on (a conver- sation, a war,) fii^ren; {= em- ploy), treiben, s. case, j^aU, ber, s.^ (pi. a); (= suit) bet ^^tojeg, S.2 cast, hjctfen, s. castle, @^(o6, ba8,s.8 (pi. -offet); SSurg, bie, w. cathedral, ®om, bet, s."; ^at^e» btale, bie, w. ; — church, Sat^e» btalfirc^e, bie, w. cause, (reason) ®runb, ber, s.^ (pi. ii); (agency) Utjai^e, bie, w. ; (affair) ®aiit, bie, w. cause, D. laffen, s. ; betutfoc^en, w. cease, aufljbren, w. celebrate, feicrn, w. cent. Sent, ber, s. (pZ. -g). central, central ; — station, Sen= trolbot|nl)of, ber, s.^ (pi. b). century, 3a()rt)nnbert, ba8, s.^ certain, getDijj ; to know for — , gelDig (or ftdjft) reiffen. chain, ^ette, bie, w. chair, ©tu^i, ber, s.2 (pi. u). change, intr. ftc^ beronbern. character, Sfjaratter, ber, 8.2 (pi. -tere). charge, take — of, ftd^ anne^men, s. (gen.) charge (of a weapon), ©cbufi, ber, S.2 (pi. ii). Charles, ^orL charm, 9lei;i, ber, s.^ [adj. charming, reijenb, bejaubernb,pi3Z. chat, plaubern. cheap, biUig. cheerful, l)etter. cherish, ^egen, w. chief, in compounds, ^aupt- ; — reason, .©auptgrunb, ber, 8.2 (pi. ii) ; — study, §aut)tftubium, bo8, mx. (pi. -ien). chiefly, bauptfdc^Iidj. child, ^inb, ba8, s.«; Uttle — , fiinbcijen, bo8, s.i (pi. also Sinberc^en). childhood, ^inb^eit, bie, w. choice, 3Bat)l, bie, w. choir, S^ot, ba8, s.^ (pi. 0). choose, roolilen, w. Christian, Shrift, ber, w. Christmas, i![Beit)nai^ten, bie, pi. ; — gift, S!Bei^nad^t8gefc^en!, ba8, church, Sir^e, bie, w. [s.^ citizen, Siitger, ber, s.i city, ©tabt, bie, 8.2 (pi. a) ; on — business, in @tabt8gef(^dften; — clock, ©tobtu^r, bie,«).; — elec- tion, ©tabtmal)!, bie, w.; — hall, ©tabt^auS, ba«, 8.8 ; — library, ©tabtbibliotf)ef, bie, w. ; — park, ©tabtparf, bet, s.^(pl. also —8); — school, ©tabtfc^ule, bie, w. ; — theater, ©tabttt)eater, baS, s.i ; little — , ©tfibtcfien, ba8, s.i 450 VOCABULARY claim, they — to have seen. . . , man toifl . . . gefel^En ^aben. class, Moffe, bie, w. clear, tlav ; make — , erttarcn, w.; (evident) offenbar ; (tright) f|eU. clearly, offenbor. clever, f(ug. cleverness, ^(ug^eit, bie, w. climate, Mima, bag, s. (pi. -to or -te). climb (intrans.) fUmnien, s. (aitx, fetii), fleigen, s. (aux. fein) ; (irons.) bcfteigen, s. cloak, SDtantet, ber, s.i {pi. a). clock, Uf)r, bte, w. ; city — , @tabt« ut)r. close, @(f)tu6, ber, s.2 {pi. -iiffe). close, adj. bicfjt, natie (near) ; — hy, ueben, prep, {dot.) close, 1). (ct|lic(jeii, s.; — up, ab» fi^licBeu, s. cloth, Xud), ba«, s.2. s (Suiijer in compounds ; cf . § 276, a). clothes, Jfteibev, bie, pi. clothing, JTleibung, bie, w.; article of — , Stcibung«ftiict, bo«, s.^ cloud, SSolte, bie, w. coach, .f utfd)e, bie, w. coat, SRoct, ber, s.^ {pi. b). cobbler, @d)ufter, ber, s.i coffee, ifaffee, ber, s. {no pi.) coincide, ftimmen, w. cold, adj. talt. cold, (weatlier) ^iilte, bie {no pi.); (sickness) SrMltuttg, bie, w.; to take — , fid) ertolten, w. collection, ©onimlung, bie, w. color, garbe, bte, w. come, tommen, s. {aux. fein); — by, !ommeu3n; — hefore, treten Oor (ace); — between, treten jn)i= f^en (aoc); — toward, — to meet, entgegenfomnien; come- to-be, UJerbeu. comedy, 8uftf)jiel, baS, s.^ comfort, tcoften, w. comfortable, beqncm. coming, adj. tiinftig. command, befel)(en, s. ((iat)gebie= ten, s. {dat.) commander-in-chief, ge(bbcrr, ber, w. (§ 94, 1). commerce, §anbel, ber, s. {no pi.) commit, bege^en, s. irr. (§ 185). committee, 3tu8fii)u§, ber, s.2 {pi. -iiffe). . . common, gemein. companion, fiamerab, ber, w. company, ©efellfd^aft, bie, w. compare, Bergleic^cn, s. compel, 3tt)ingen,s.,- be compelled, muffen (§§ 189-191). complete, Boltenben, w. complete, adj. Doniommcn. completely, BoHenbS. composed, gefa^t, ppl. adj. composer, .Sontponift, ber, w. composition, 2luffo4, ber, «.* {pi. a). comprehend, begreifen, s. comprehensible, begreiflic^. comprehension, SBerftSnbniS, baS, 8.2 comrade, Samerab, ber, to. conceal, Berbergen, s. conception, S3egriff, ber, s.^ concern, ©orge, bie, w., Unru^c, bie w. concern, v. betreffen, s. ; so far as I am — ed, >ua8 mic^ betrifft; (= trouble) fiimmcrn, w. concerned, in ®orge ; not — , o^ne ©orge ; be — , care about, ftd) fiimmern urn (ace.) concerning, (about) iiber (occ); {= in reference to) in Betreff, with gen. concert, Sonjert, baS, s.^ ; — hall, jfonjertfaot, ber, s.^ {pi. -ffile). conclude, fdjliefien, s. condition, (terms) SBebingung, bie, w. condition, (state) 3ufionb, ber, s.^ {pi. a). conduct, fiiljren, w. conduct, (behavior) SBctvogen, baS, s.i confess, belennen, w. irr. (§ 330) ; gefteljen, s. irr. (§ 185). confidently, getroft. conflict, ©treit, ber, s.^ connection, ,3u|iitnnKnSong, ber- S.2 conquer, erobern, w. ENGLISH-GERMAN 451 consecrate, einirci^en, w. consequence, gotge, bie, w. consider, (deem) I)atten ... fur (§265, 3, c), betro(i)ten (ats) w.; (reflect, think over) iibcrtegen, w. considerable, betracl)tlic^. consist (of), befte^en (ou8), s. irr. (§ 185); —in, befte^en in (dat.) consumption, ©djroinbfuc^t, bie, w. contain, entbalten, s.; contains, ent^olt. €ontent(ed), jufricben. contents, ynljalt, ber, s.^ continue, (last) bauerii, w.; trans. fortfe^en, w.; intrans. {= keep on) fortfa^ren, s. {aux. |abeii). contradict, iriberfprccften, s. contrary, ©cgenteil, ba8, s.^; on the — , im ©egcnteil. contrast, ®cgenfa^, ber, s.^ (pi. q). control, able to — , mfidjtig {with gen.) convent, jilofter, baS, s.i {pi. o). conversation, ©ef^jrod), ba«, s.^ convince, iiberjeugen, w. cool, fiim. copy, abfcftreiben, s. cordial, ^erjlid). correct, adj. ridjtig. conect, V. oerbeffern, w. cost, toften, w. cost, (expense) Soften, bie, pi. cottage, Jpau8d)en, ba8, s.i could, tonutc, fbnnte (§ 191, 2); — have done, ptte tun fbnnen (§ 192 and 1). counsel, 9tat, ber, s. {no pi. in this count, (reckon) vetfinen, w. (on = auf, ace); (enumerate) joblen, w.; intr. { = be reckoned or considered), gclten, s. count, (title) @vaf, ber, w. countenance, ®efic^t, ba8, s.' country, Sonb, ba8, s.^. ^ (§276, a); (go) to the — , auf bn« Sanb; in the — , auf beni ?anbe; (= native country) 58ater(onb, baS, s. ; (region) @egenb, bie, w. countryman, (= fellow—) Sanb8= monn, ber, afi{pl- -Icute, § 238, 2, a). couple, a — , ein Jiaar; a — of times, ein paarmal. courage, 2Kut, ber, s. (no pi.) course, (of study) ifurfuS, ber (pi. fiurfu8 or ^urfe); SreiS, ber, s.; in the — of, im SSerlouf, ber, S.2 {pi. fiu). course, of — , natiirtlc^. court, §of, ber, s.^ {pi. o); — life, §of(eben, ba«, s.i courtesy, §ofIid)tcit, bie, w. cousin, masc. SBetter, ber, mx. cousin, fem. Soufine, bie, w. cover, beden, w. crime, S8erbred)en, ba8, s.i crowd, aHenge, bie, w. crown, j?rone, bie, w. crown-prince, Sronprinj, ber, w. cry, (call) fd^teien, s.; (weep) mei= neu, w. cultivate, bilben, w. cup, Eaffe, bie, w. cure, turieren, w. curiosity, S^Jeugicrbe, bie, w. curiosities, natural — , 9taturaUen, bie, pi. curious, npugierig. current, ©trom, ber, s.^ {pi. o). cushion, ^iffen, ba9, s.i custom, ®itte, bie, w. D daily, tcigUc^. dame, grau, bie, w. dance, tonjen, to. dance, Sanj, ber, s.2 {pi. a); — music, Sanjnnift!, bie, w. danger, ®efot)r, bie, w. dangerous, gcfSbrtid). dark, buntel, finfter. dart, fd)tefjen, s. daughter, Soditer, bie, s.i {pi. o). day, Sag, ber.s.^ ; in the daytime, am SEage; one — (= some day, some time), einft. dazzle, btenben, w. dead, tot; to be a — man, be8 SobeS fcin. dear, teuer, lieb. death, Sob, ber, s.^ (§ 238, 1, 6). debt, ©d^ulb, bie, vi. 452 VOCABULARY deceased, tiei'ftotien, ppl. adj. deceive, (mislead) Bcrfii^ren, w. December, ©ejjember, btx, s.i decide, eiitfc^eibcn, s. deed, Sot, bic, w. deep, tief; — black, tieffdjroarj. defend, Bevteibigcn, w. definite, beftiimnt. degree, ©raft, bcv, s.^ delight, greube, bic, w. delight, to — in, fid) ergb^en(w.) an {dat) demand, uevtaiigfii, w.; forbern, w. democrat, ®einoErat, bcr, w. denote, bfjcidjiien, w. dense, bid)t. dentist, ^al)naviit, ber, s.^ {pi. -drste). depart, abreiietl, w. (aux. fein). departure, Slufbrud), ber, s.^ {pi. ii). depend, ab^aiigcn, s. (on = Bon, dat.); — upon (rely), fid) t)er= laffen (s.) aiif (ace.) depth, Siefe, bic, w. describe, bejdjreibcn, s. description, i^efd)reibung, bic, w. deserve, ucrbtcnen, w. desire, ?uft, bie, s.'^ {pi. ii). desk, '!|3u[t, ber {and baS) s.^ despise, «erad)ten, w. destination, *jiel, ^a?, s." determine, fid) entfdjlie^en, s. devil, Kcufel, bcr, s.i dictionary, SGBbrterbnti^, bo8, s.s die, fterben, s. {aux. fcin). differ, abH)eid)cn, s. difference, Untcr(d)ieb, bcr, s.^ different, t>erf(f|iebcn; (otherwise) onbers. differently, anbcvS. difficult, fd)WicriB, (d)it)cr. difficulty, ®d))tiictigtcit, bie; (ob- stacle) ^inbcrntS, baS, s.^ ; (trouble) 2Jiiil)e, bie, w. dig, graben, s. diligent, flcigig. direction, 3iid)tung, bic, w.; in the — of, entgcgen {dat.) directly, gteid). director, ®irc!tor, bet, mx. disagreeable, nnangcnc^m. disappear, Berf(f|ttiinben, s. (aux. fcin). disappointment, (Snttoufc^ung, bie, w. discovery, Entbcdung, bic, w. discussion, S3ciprcd)ung, bie, w. disease, iirant^cit, bie, w. disgrace, ®d)rnad), bie (no pi.) disgraceful, jd)(inb[id). displease, migfatten, s. (dat.) distance, (remoteness) gctnc, bie^ w.; (stretch) ©tredc, bic, w. distant, cntfcrnt. distasteful, raiberWartig. distinct, bcntlid). distinguish, nnterf^fteibcn, s. distress, Jfot, bic, s." (pi. a). divide, tcitcn, w. divided, be — into, jcrfallen tit (ace.) do (as aux. untranslated, e. g. do you know, !enncn @ie); tun, s. irr. (§ 185); mac^eii, w.; to — an exercise, cine Stufgabe ma= d)en; that won't do, ba« gc^t nic^t; (of the health) ftd) Bcfln= ben, s.; how do you do ? ttiie befinben tebet, ber, s.i ilk, SSott, ba«, S.3;— song, S!5oIt«= lieb, ba«, S.8; —lore, ajoIKfagcn, pi. Uow, intr. fotgen, w. (aitx. fein, dat); tr. befotgen, w. llowing, fotgenb, ppl. adj. Uy, S'Jarrfieit, bie, w. nd, be — of, lieb ^aben; grow — of, liebgeroinnen, s. ol, 9Jarr, bet, to.; 5Eor, ber, w. ot, %n%, ber, s.2 (pi. ii); on — , ju gug ; set — upon, betreten, s. otball, J^upaU, ber, s.^ {pi. a). otpad, ©tra^enrfiuber, ber, s.i r,prep. fiir (ace), ju (dai.); (o/ iimg since) jeit (dat.); time how long expressed by ace. without prep.; — example, — instance, jum SSetfpiet; to know — cer- tain, gett)i6 (or (Id^er) ioiffen. r, conj. beitn. rbid, uerbieten, s. (dai. ofpers.) rce, mouK, Sraft. bie, s.^ (pi. a); ©eroalt, w. rce, V. iiitiingen, n reign, fremb, austnnbifd^; — land or country, greatCe, bie, w. renoon, in the — , BormittogS. rest, SSalb, ber, a/; ©olj, ba«, s.= rget, Bergeffen, 3. fgive, Bcrgebett, s. (aat. ofpers.) rk, @abel, bie, w. rm, ®eftatt, bie, w. former, frii^er, Borig; ber erflere, jener (§ 130, 1). formerly, friiber. forsake, Bettoffen, s. fortunate, gliicflid^. fortunately, g(iicE(i(^etiBeife, jum ©liicf. fortune, Oliid, ba8, s. (no pi.); (property) iBermogen, ba« s.^ forty, Bierjig. forward, BorlBortS. fossil, goffil, bag, 7nx. (pi. -icn). foundation, @runb, ber, s." (pi. ii). four, Bier. fourteen, Bicrjebn. franc, Jrnnf, ber, mx. frank, oufricbtig. Frederick, griebri(^. free, frei; — from, lo8 (ace.) freedom, grei^eit, bie, w.; '— of speech, 9{ebefreibeit. free-trade, §anbel?frei^eit, bie, v>. French, adj. fronjbfid). French (language), grangoftlci^. frequent, bl. ii). H habit, @ittc, bie, w. habitation, SBoljuimg, tie, w. hail! l)cU! hair, §aar, baS, s.2 half, %a.\h; §a(ftc, bie, w.; the first — , bie cvftc Jpolfte; — past nine, Ijatb jetjti ; two and a lialf , jiuei unb ein t)oI6, or brittc^alb ; one and a half, onbertf)a(6. hall, @aat, bet, s.^ (pZ. @afe); concert — , ji'onjevtfaal. ham, ®(^in!en, ber, s.i hammock, §angenmttc, bie, w. hand, §anb, bie, s." (pi. a); right at — , gteiii) in bet S^a^e. hand, u. reic^en, w. handsome, \ifou. hang, inir. Ijangen, s. happen, gefqel)en, s. (auz. fein); fta) gutragen, s.; as it happened, adv. phrase, juffiUigcrltieife. happiness, Oliitf, ba8, s. (no pi.) happy, frol), gliidiii^. harbor, §afeit, ber, s.i (pZ. a). hard, jdjiDer. hardly, faum, fc^toerli^. harm, ©c^abe, ber, mx. (gen. -n8, pi. ©d^aben); do — , fdiaben, w. harsh, raitl). Harz Mts., §arjgeBirge, ba8, s.^ haste, ©ile, bie (no pi.) hasten, eilen, w.; fic^ beetteii, refl. w. hastily, fiiid^tig. hat, §ut, ber, s.2 (pi. ii). have, ^aben, w. irr. (§ 171); to — to, miiffen (§§ 189-191); to — done, tun toffen (§ 366, 1, a). he, et. head, topf, ber, s.^ (pi. o); §aupt, ba8, s." headache, SD)3fjdf|nierj, ber, ma;.; totjfwe^ ba«, s. (?M) pZ.) health, ®efunbi)eit, bie, w. healthy, gefunb. hear, pren, w.; Betnel)men, s. ieart, ^erg, baS, mx. (§ 97, 2, a); by — , augwcnbig. hearth, §erb, ber, s.^ hearty, IjtVjUcS:). heaven, ©imtnel, ber, s.i heavy, fcJ|lDet; — rain, ftar!er 3te» gen. heed, odE)ten, bcoJjten, w. (§ 396, 1). height, §o^e, bie, w. hell, §o(le, bie, w. help, lelfen, s. (dat); — one's self (at table), fic^ bebienen (gen.) help, §tlte, bie, w. helpful, be^ilflid^ (to = dat.) henceforth, fortan. her, ace. fte; dat. if)v; pass. i^r. here, ^ier; — below, Ijtenieben; (= hither) l)iev^er. hereafter, fortan. herewith, i)iermit. hero, §elb, ber, w. heroine, §clbin, bie, w. hide, Berbergen, s. high, l)Ocfi (§ 109, 1); — wind, ftarter SBinb. Highness, (title) §o^eit, bie, w. hill, Jpiiget, bet, s.i him, ace. it)n; dat. it|m. himself, emphatic, jeibft; rejl. ftc^, hinder, I)inbetn, Oertjinbevn, w. hindrance, §tnberni8, bo8, s.^ hire, Syjiete, bie, w. his, fein. historical, geftfiicfitli^, ^iftorif(^. history, @ef(J)id)te, bie, w. hit, — upon, treffen, s. hither, '^er, ^ierl)cr. hold, [)a(ten, s.; — back, juviicfs fatten. hole, ioi), ba«, s.' holiday, geiertag, bet, s.2 ; — s (collective) gerten, pi. holy, ^ctlig. home, §eimat, bie, w.; adv. nad) §aufe; = at home, ju §aufe. home-land, §eimot, bie, w. honest, rcbti^. honesty, 9teb(i(j^feit, bie, w. honor, @^re, bie, w.; man of — , S^renmann, ber, s.^ honor, v. e^ren, w. 458 VOCABULARY honorable, el|t(i(f|; (bringing hon- or) eljreuBott. hope, §offnung, tie, w. hope, V. ffoffen, w. horror, Entie^en, baS, s. {no pi.) horse, $fetb, baS, s.2 host, SBirt, ber, s.^ hostile, feinb (to = dat.) hot, ^eig. hour, ©tunbe, tie, w. house, §nii«, bo«, s.'; little — , §au8d)en, bag, s.^; at the — of, bei {dat.) how, mie; — about ? hiie Berptt e8 fi(^ mit ? however, inbeffen, jebod). howl, t)eulcn, to. human, menfc^lii^; — life, Tltri' fc^cnlebcn, baS, s.i human being, 3Keii|i^, bet, to. hundred, ^mibert; a — times, ^un= bevtmal. hungry, ^utiflrig. hunter, 3l); what's the — ? maS gibt'8 SfcueS ? newspaper, 3eitung, bie, w. next, iiiidjft (§ 114, 2), funftig; adv. mcitcr. nice, l)iibfd), nctt. nickname, ^pi^wame, ber, mx. {gen. -nS). night, 9tad)t, bie, s.2 {pL a) ; i:i the — , beg 9?nd)t8. nightingale, 9Jac^ttgaU, bie, w. nine, itenn. ninety, nenn^ig. Wo., at — , gjumero, m. (indcl) no, adj. tein; neg. adv. nein; — worse, ntd)t id)lcd)tcr; once and — more, finmal unb nid)t micber; — dflubt one needs a long time, man l)rand)t n)ol)( cine lange 3eit. ENGLISH-GERMAN 463 no one, niematib. noble, ebel. nobleman, gbelmann, bcr, s.^ (§ 238, 2, a). none, fcin, — but, tauter. nonsense, Unfura, ber, s. {no pi.) noon, SJiittog, ber, s.^ nor, nod); — I either, ii) aui) ni(I)t. north, 9}orbcn, ber, sA northern lights, Jforbtid^t, baS, 8.3 nose, D'Jafe, bie, w. not, nid)t; — a, fein; — at all, gat ni^t. notably, bebeutenb. note, 9^oti5, bie, w. note, merten, w. nothing, nirt)t8. notice, merten, bcmerlen. novel, 9iontau, ber, s.^ now, nun, jc^t (§ 380, 1, /); — and then, bann unb maun; — here is something, l)ict ift nun etwaS; — guess, raten @ie ein= niaf, or nun einmat. nowadays, tjeutjutage. number, Stnjal)!, bie (no pL); (= great — ) ajlenfle, bie, w. Number, at — , jfJutnero, m. (indcl.) numerous, ja'^treic^. nut, D^ufi, bie, s. (pi. 5Kiiffe). O obedience, @e!|or(am, m. s. (nopl.) obey, gel^ord^en, w. (dat.) object, Breed, ber, s.^; — of inter- est,. ®el)en8tt)iirbigteit, bie, w. obliged, be — to, miiffen (§§ 189, 1.91). obtain, befommen, s. occupant, Setuo^ncr, ber, s.i occupy, (take possession of, fill) iefe^en, w.; (busy) 6efcf|afti= gen,w. occur, Borloinmen, s. (aux. fein); — to, etnfallen,s. (dat. ofpers.) ocean, See, bie, w.; — voyage, ©eercife, bie, w., @eefal)rt, bie, w. of, usually translated by genitive; Don (dat.) especially before pro- per names or where the case would not otherwise be clear ; a majority of 200 votes, eine a)fel)rt)eit »on 200 ©timmen ; a quantity — minerals,eine SJfengc SJiineratien (§ 246, 1, a) ; — course, natiirlid) ; — it or that, boBon. offer, (tender to a person) bieten, anbieten, s.; (present) barbieten. ofB.ce, 2lmt, baS, s.' often, oft, t)oufig. oh, 0, atfi ; — that's it ! acf| jo ! old, alt. olden, fitter. Olympus, OIt)mt), bcr, s. on, an (dat. and ace. ) ; auf (dat. and ace.) ; — the river (of a boat), auf bem gtuffe ; (of a house, city, etc.), on bem S'luffe; — the side, auf ber ©eite ; — the study (^ concerning), iiber bag ©tubium ; — your head, auf bem A^pfc ; — the first of May, am erffen SJf ai ; — busi- ness of state, in ©taat8gefc^Qf= ten ; — account of, iregen (gen.) ; — my account, meinet= megen. once, (= one time) ein'mal ; (= just, pray, once upon a time) einmat'; (= sometime) einft ; — more, loieber, nodjmats ; at — (= immediately) fofort, fo= gleic^ ; all at — (= suddenly), auf einmat. one, adj. ein ; indef. pron. man, einer (§§ 149, 156). only, adj. einjig ; adv. nur, btog, ottein ; (of time) erft. open, adj. off en. open, V. Bffnen, w. opera, Oper, bie, w. opinion, Stuftdji, ajjeinung, bie w. opponent, ®cgner, ber, s.^ opportunity, ®elegenf)eit, bie, w. opposite, gegeniiber (dat. usually follows governed word). oppression, ©rang, ber, s. (no pi.) or, obcr. 54 VOCABULARY der, in — to, um ju, with inf. dinary, (= common) gemein ; _(= usual) QtrooijnUi). igin, Urf)3rung, ber. 8.2 (pi. ii). her, anbet ; each — , einanbcr (inded.) herwise, (= differently) anber8; (= else) jonft. ight, I — , id) fottte, id) ptte JoUcn (§§ 189, 191). ir, uti^et. it, — of, ou8, (dat.y, — there, brau6en. itrageous, unBerfc^cintt. itside, braupen. ■er. prep, iibet (dat. aiid ace); adv. (= past) Boriiber; — night, bic 9'Jad)t iibet ; — yonder, btii» ben, bort briiben. ■er, adj. (= left, remaining) iibtig. ve, f(^utbig fein (dat. ofpers.) 7n, eigen. yner, Sigentiimer, ber, s.i 7neTship, gigcntuni, ba8, s.' ; @igetitum«tei^t, bo8, s.^ ige, ©eite, tie, w. lin, ©c^merj, ber, mx. ; !pein, /. (no pi.) lin, V. ((^mcrgen lo. lins, 2)Jii^e, bie, w. linter, SWaler, ber, s.i tinting, (picture) ©etnatbe, baS, s.i; (the art of — ) SOJalerei, bie. lir, $aar,,bas, s.^ ilace, 5palaft, ber, . s.^ (pi. fi) ; @^Io6, bo8, s.o lie, blcii^. iper, !Bat3ier, ba8, s.^; (= news- paper) 3eitung, bie, w. irdon, Ber3etl)en, s. (dat. of pers.) irents, (SItcrn, bie, pi. only. irk, $arf, ber, s.2 (pj. also «pavt8). irt, jEeil, ber, s.^;(= share) ba6, S.2; (= role) SRottc, bie, w. irticularly, bcfonberS. irtly, tetl8. pass, inir. (away) berge^en, s. ir,-. (§ 185, avix. fein); — by, Borbet« geficn; tr. (of time, = spend) Bcrbringen, jubtingen, w. irr. (§ 330). passage (in a book), ©telle, bic, w. past, adv. Boriiber; half — nine, balb jebn. pastor, ^aftor, ber, mx. path, *|5fob, ber, s.2 patience, ®ebulb, bic(nopZ.) pause, 58aufe, bie w. pay, So^n, ber, s.^ (pi. 0). pay, V. be?at)leii, w. peace, ^tifi'^ r ^^^, ™*- (ff^"- -n*)- peak, ©ipfel, ber, s.i peasant, SSauer, ber, mx. peculiar, fonbetbar. pen, geber, bie, w.; — drawing, gcbergcid^nung, bie, w. penalty, ©trofe, bie, w. pencil, SBIcifiift, ber, s.2 penny, ^Pfennig, ber, s.2 people, (= persons) Seute, pi. only, fKcnld^en, w. pi.; (= na- tion) 515oIt, ba8, s."; — live, bie Seute leben. per cent, ^tojent, ba8, s.^ perfect, BoUEommeii. perform (a task), tiifen, w. performance, SSorjlellung, bie, w. perhaps, BieUeicf)t; — I ought to, i&l joute h)o^t. perilous, gefaJ)tIid^. perish, untcrgel^en, s. irr. (§ 185, aux. fein). permit, eriauben, w. (dat. ofpers.) permitted, be — , biirfen (§§ 189- 191). person, ^crfon, bie, to. pfennig, pfennig, ber, s.2 philosophy, $t)i(ofot)^ie, bie, w. photograph, ^^otogropl)ie, bie, to. physician, Sirjt, bet, s.^(pl. S). piano, JtlaBtet, ba8, s.^; — lesson, ^loBterflunbc, bie, i«. picture, 58itb, ba8, s.S; — gallery, Sifbergatterie, bie, to.; — book, SBilberbiidft, ba8, s.S; (illustra- tion) Slbbilbitng, bie, to. pick, bre(f)en, s. piece, ©tiid, ba8, s.^ ENGLISH-GERMAN 465 piece-of-luck, OtiicE, ba?, s. {no pi.) pious, fronitn. pipe, *^feifc, bie, w. pithy, fraftig. pity, it is a — , e8 ift fiabe. pity, V. bebauern; ftc^ crbatmen {with gen.) place, 5plat5, ber, s.2 ( pi. o); @teHe, bie, w.; (gtStte, bie, lu.; (town) Ott, ber, s.2.8; — of interest, ©e^engitiiirbigfeit, bte, w.; in tlie first — , erften8. place, take — , ffottfinben, s. plain, Sbene, bie, w. plain, adj. {= evident) offenbar; (= distinct) beutU(^. plan, 'ipian, ber, s.^ {pi. a). plan, V. entnierfen, s. ; !piane ma= ^en. plate, 2;cller, ber, s.i play, V. jpielen, w. play, (= game) @))iel, ba8, s.^ ; (= drama) ®rgfilo, bag, mx. ; playma^, @))ieptmei-ab, ber, w. pleasant/imgene^m. please, gefatteii, s. {dot.) ; = if you please, (ii^) bitte. pleasure, greiibe, bie, w. ; SSergnit= gen, bag, s.i ; take — in, fti| er= gbfeeti an {dot.) plentiful, reic^tidfi. plenty, giittc, bie, w. plumbing, SBafferleitung, bie, w. pocket, Eajd^e, w. ; — money, Safdjengelb, baS, s.° poem, ®ebi(^t, tiai, s.^ poet, ®icl)ter, ber, s.i poetic, poettfc^. poetry, ®td)tung, bie, w. ; Stc^t= fuiift, bie, s. (nop2.) point, ^uiilt, ber, s.^; (= sharp — ) Spi^e, bie, w. ; it is on the — of striking, eS tDill eben fcl)fa« gen ; — of view, Oeftd^tSpunft. point (to), beuten (ouf, ace.) w. police, ^olijei, bie, w. policeman, ^olijift, ber, w. polite, pfliif). politeness, §BfIi(^Ieit, bie, w. political, potitifd). politics, *13oIitit, bie, w. poodle, ipubel, ber, s.i poor, arm ; (= bad, inferior) f(i)led)t. position, (location) Sage, bie, w. ; (employment) SteHung,, bie, w. possess, befi^en, s. possession, take — of, ftd^ bemfic^s ttgen((7em.) possible, megtid^. post, (= maU) ^ofl, bie, w. pound, *Pfunb, baS, s.^ pour, giegen, s. powder, ^Puttter, ba§, s.i power, j?raft, bie, s.^ {pi. a). powerful, traftig, gemaltig. practice, libnng, bie, w. practice, v. iiben, w. praise, toben, w. prank, ©treic^, ber, s.^ pray, interj. nur (p. 45, n. 10); — come along, lommen @ie nur mlt: how old are you, — ? tote ott finb @ie benn ? prefer, tieber f)oben, w. irr.; tieber tnogen(§§ 189-191); Bor;iie^en, s. preparation, SSorbereitung, bie, w. preparatory, — school, Sorbereis tunggfi^ule, bie, w. present, (= gift) @et(^en(, baS, present, v. fcfienfen, w. present, for the — , Bortfiufig. preserve, er^alten, s. president, ^raftbent, ber, w. presidential, — election, ipro)t= bententtJol^l, bie, w. press, ^Preffe, bie, w.; freedom of the — , $re_6frei^eit, bie, w. press, V. — in, einbringen in, s. {aux. jein). presume, I — , tnof)!. pretty, adj. pbfif). pretty, adv. jiemlic^. prevent, ^inbern, ber^inbern. prey, fall a — to, oerfallcn (to = dat.) s. {aux. fetn). price, ^reia, ber, s.^ prince, $rin?, ber, w. principal, tapitat, bo8, s.^ {pi. also -ien). principal, adj. in compounds = $aupt-. 66 VOCABULARY risoner, ®efangene(r), decl. like adj. (cf . § 290, 2). rivate, — teacher, ^riDatle^rer, ber, s.i rize, $rct?, ber, s.^ robable (probably), ft)al)rfil)ein= lic^; that is probably an inven- tion, bag mog ino^I eine ©tfinbung fein. rofessor, ifrofeffor, ber, ?nx. roficiency, gcrtigteit, bie, w. rolog, ^^ro(og, ber, s.^ romise, v. t)eri))red)en, s. romise, i^crfpredKiif bo8, s.' ronunclation, SuSfprac^e, bie, w. roof, SBelueiS, ber, s.^ rop, ©tiige, bie, «). roper(ly), eigentlit^. roperty, (= possession) (Siflen> turn, bog, s.'; (= wealth) a5er= tnbgen, ba«, s.i; (= character- istic) (Sigen[rt)oft, bie, w. rophet, iprot)l)et, ber, w. ropose, »otfd)Iagen, s. rose, ^profa, bie (no pi.) roud, jtotij. rove, betneifert, s. foverb, ©pric^trort, ba8, s.' russia, ^reugen, baS. iblic, $iibUtiim, bag, s. (no pi.) ilpit, ^anjel, bie, w. inish, beftrafen, w. inishment, ©trafc, bie, to. ipil, @d)iiter, ber, s.i irchase, Sauf, (Sinfauf, ber, s.^ (pi an). irpose, 3*''^'^' ^^'^' ^■'^ irse, Seutel, bet, s.^ it, (= set) feljen, w.; (= stick) fteden; to — up with (some- thing), ftd) (etWaS) gefotlen la\= |en, s. Q laint, fettfam. lality, ®igen|c^oft, bie, w. lantity, aJienge, bie, w. (§ 246, 1, larrel, ©treit, ber, s.^ [a) larter, S>tcrtel, bag, 8.^; (= 25 cents) SBlertelbolIar, ber, s. (pi. -8); a — to 10, brei ^letter (oiif) 10. queen, fionigin, bie, to. question, grage, bie, w.; It is a — of, eg banbeit ftd^ um (ace); in — , adj. phrase, bettcffenb, ppl. adj. quick, (djneU. quiet, tu^ig, ftiU; (soft) fanft. quite, gang. R rail, (= railway) gifenbal^n, bie, w.; by — , niit bet et(enba^n. rain, v. regnen, w. rain, 9tegen, ber s.i ; — y day, Dtegentog, bet, s.^ rainy, tegiierifd). range, Uinfang, ber, s.^ (pi. fi). rapid, fd^netl. rare, felteii. rate, at any — , jebenfoltg, menig= fteng. rather, oietme^r; (= preferably) lieber. raw, (of weather) raul^. ray, ©trabi, bet, mx. reach, reid)eii; (= arrive at) errei= d)en, w. read, iefeti, s. reader, Selcr, ber, s.i; (= reading- book) tefebuc^, bag, s.s readily, leidjt. reading, Settiire, bie, to.; — book, Sefebud), bag, s.s ready, (prepared) bereit; (finished) fertig. real, ivittlit^, eigentlic^, mabr. really, irirHid), wof)rl)aft, etgent= lid). reason, Onmb, ber, s." (pi. ii); Urjac^e, bie, to. receive, betommen, s.; et^olten, s.; (guests) cnttifangen, s. recently, neulid). recess, '■$au\e, bie, to. recite, befianiieteu, to. reckon, red)nen, to. (on = aiif, ace.) recommend, einpfeblen, s. red, tot; — with, rot Bon. redound, geteirfjeit, to. (§ 259, a). reference, SSt\\lCf, bet, s.^ (pi. ii); in — to, in SBejug auf (ace.) reform, Sieform, bie, to. ENGLISH-GERMAN 467 regard, SBetreff, bcr, s. (no pi.) ; SBejug, ber, s.^pl. it); 9{a(frt(i)t, bie, w.; in — to, in betreff or bc» treffS [with gen.)\ in SSejug auf (ace); mit StiicEfid^t auf {ace); iiber (ace). regard, v. Ijaltett fiir (cf. § 265, 3, c). region, ®cgenb, bie, w. regret, Steue, bie, w. regret, v. bereiten, w. regular, regelm(i|ig; (= thoro) BoUEotnmcn. rejoice, trans, freueil, w.; intrans. fii) fteuen, w. relate, erjatjten, w. related, be — , fic^ Berl)otten, s. relation, 9?etl)altni8, ba8, s.^ relative, SSertt)anbte(r), decl. like adj. (cf. § 290, 2). rely (upon), fid) oerlaffen (auf, ace.) s. remain, bteiben, s. {aux. fein); (be left) iibrig bteiben; I — (at close of a letter) id) oevbleibe. remaining, iibrig. remark, bemerfen, w. remarkable, merfraiitbig. remember, ftc^ ciinnern, w. (with gen.) remind, erinncra, w. (of = an, ace.) renounce, entfagen, w. (dat.) rent, SOliete, bie, w. repay, beIo{)nen, w. repeat, irieberl^oten, w. repeatedly, raieber^olt. repentance, 9}eue, bie, w. reply, erffiibern. report, SBetii^t, ber, s.^ ; (= news) 9Jadirid)t, bie, w. report, v. berid)ten, w. represent, barfteHen, w. republic, 9iepubtil, bie, w. republican, SRe^ublitaner, ber, s.i repulsive, obftogenb, ppl. adj. reputation, 9iu^m, ber, s. (no pi.) request, v. bitten, s. request, SBitte, bie, w. require, berlangcn, w. rescue, retten, w. resemble, gteid)en, s. (dat.) reserve, rcferbietcn, w. residence, SBo^nung, bie, w. resolve, fid) entfci)tie6en, s. respect, iBetreff, ber, s. (no pi.); §infic^t, bie, w.; in — to, in Be= treff (with gen.); in tMs — , in biefev §infid)t. rest, 5Rii§e, bie (no pi) rest, B. rufjen, M.,- — one's self, fid) auaru^en, refl,. w. rest, the — (remainder), baS iibrige. restless, unru^ig. result, ^oiQt, bie, w. resume, mieberaufne[)nien, s. retain, be^alten, s. return, v. loieberfe^ren, jurudle^- ren, w. (aux. fein). return, SJiidte^r, bie, w.; (= way back) gUidreeg, ber, s.^; — jour- ney, gjiidreife, bie, w. reward, So^n, ber, s.^ (pi. o). reward, v. bclobnen, w. rheumatism, 5R^eumati8mu8, ber, s. (no pi.) Rhine, 5R^ein, ber, s. ribbon, Sanb, baa, s.' rich, rei^. riches, 5Reid)tum, ber, s.' rid of, (oS (with ace.) riddle, atcitfet, baS, s.i ride, (in a conveyance) fa^rcn, s. (aux. fein); (on horseback) rei= ten, s. (aux. fein, cf. § 323, 1, c.) rider, 3teiter, ber, s.i right, adj. (= proper) rec^t; (= correct) ric^tig ; right hand, rec^t; to be — , red)t l)aben; adv. — before, gerabe Bor; — at, fd)on an ; ( = very) — good, red^t gut. right, 5Red)t, bag, s.2 rightly, mit 9lei^t. ring, Ming, ber, 8.2 ripe, rcif. rise, ( = mount) fteigen, s. (aux. fein); (= get up) ouffte()en, s. irr. (§ 185, aux. fein) ; (of the sun) aufge^ien, s. irr. (§ 185, aux. fein). rise, (= rising) Stufgong, ber, s.^ (pi. a). 168 VOCABULARY risk, Ocfafir, bie, w. river, glug, bcr, s.2 {pi. -flffe). rob, rauben, w).; — of (tr.) berau^ ben. robber, 9Jauber, ber, s.i rock, getien, ber, s.i (§ 279, 2, o). rock, D. jd)aute(n, w. rocking, — chair, @ci)outelftu^I, ber, 8.2 (pi. ii); horse, @(^ou> W^ferb, ba«, s.^ rogue, i»cS)e(m, bcr, s.^ role, 3iotte, bie, w. roll (bread), ©enimet, bie, w. Soman, roniifil). roof, 'S)adt), ba8, s.^ room, ( = space, place) ^Inlj, ber, s.^(pl. a); (apartment) dimmer, bo8, s.i; adjoining — , 9?eben= jimmer. rose, 9?ofe, bie, w. rough, rau^. ■oute, SReifeplon, ber, s.^ (pi. a). ■ow, 9{eil)e, bie, w. row-boat, ifol)n, ber, s.^ {pi. a). •oyal, foniglit^. ruin, Berberben, s. •ule, 5Rege(, bie, w.; as a — , in ber aiegel. rule, V. I)errf(i)cn, w. rumor, Oeriidjt, ba8, s.^ •un, (of motion) laufen, s.; — away, bauontaufen; — to meet, entgegenlaufen ; (of water) rin= nett, s. (all with aux. fein); ( = purport) lauten, w. 8 lad, traurig. saddle, ©attel, ber, s.i {pi. a); — horse, 9}eit})fcrb, ba8, s.^ iafe, ft(I)er. Saint (title), ber $eilige. >ake, for the — of, utn . . . (gen.) . . . VBiUeu; for your ^, um beinetmiUen, um SbrctttiiUen (§§ 127, 306, 1). ialamander, ©autmanber, ber, s.i iame, the — , ber|elbe (§ 134); just the — , g(eid)Oiet, adv. sapling, S8fiumd)en, ba«, s.i satisfied, jufrieben. satisfy, Befriebigen, w. Saturday, ©antstag, ©onnaBenb, ber, S.2 save, (= rescue) retten; (of money) fparen, erfparen, w.; — up, ouf« fparcn, w. saving, fparfani. savior, 9tetter, ber, s.i say, fagen, w. ; often to be trans- lated by a form o/foUen (§ 191, 5); that is to — , nfimlic^, adv. saying, ®pxuii, ber, s.^ {pi. ii). scamp, @i|etm, ber, s.^ scarcely, laum, id)ivierlid). scene, (of a drama) (Scene, bie,w.; (place of occurrence) @4ou= i)(afe, ber, s.^ {pi. a). scholar, (pupU) ©(filler, ber, s.i; (learned man) ©efe^rtefr), decl. like adj. (cf . § 290, 2). school, @d)n(e, bie, w.; — build- ing, ©djuIgebSube, ba8, s.i — director, ©i^ulbirettor, ber, mx.; — year, ©c^ulia^r, baS, s.^ schoolmate, @d^ul!amerab, ber, w. science, S!Bifi'en|d)aft, bie, w. scream, (c^reien, s. sea, aiJeer, bo8, S.2; @ee, bie, w.; — voyage, ©eerelfe, ©eefa^rt, bie, w. seasick, (ee!ronf. season, SfafireSjeit, bie, w. seat, $(a^, ber, «.= {pi. ix); Sift, ber, S.2; to take a — , ifla^ ne§= men, s. seat, V. — one's self, ftc^ fe^en, refl. w. second, (ber) jiueite; — ly, jlueitenS. secret, adj. gcljeini. secure, ftdjer. see, fe^en, s.; — again, ttiieberfe^en, s.; (catch sight of) erbtitfen, w.; — to it, 3ufel)cn. seek, (itrfien, w. seem, jdieineu, s. seeming(ly), jd)einbar. seize, greifen, ergreifen, s.; faffen, w. seldom, (etten. self, ielbft, fctbcr (§ 124). self-possessed, Be^onnen, ppl. adj. sell, uertaufen, w. ENGLISH-GERMAN 46£ send, fifiiden, w.; jenben, w. irr. (§330). sense, ©inn, ber, s.^ sensible, Berftanbtg, be — of, enHJ= finben, s. September, ©etJtember, ber, s.i serious, fd)n)er; (earnest) crnft. servant, ®iener, ber, s.i ; — girl, S)ienftmob(^en, ba«, s.i serve, bienen (dat.) service, S)ienft, ber, s.^ ; (attend- ance) SBebtenung, bie, w. set, jc^en, w.; — in, I)ereinbtec^e:i, s. (aux. fein); — out, ft(^ auf ben SBeg madden, w. several, me^xttt (§ 158) ; — times, me^ttnote. severe, (= strict) ftreng ; (of sick- ness) ftarl. severity, ©trengc, bie (no pi.) shade, shadow, @rf|atteii, ber, s.i shall, future, ircrben (§ 168, 2) ; modal, joUen (§§ 189, 191). shameful, fdianblic^. share, Seil, ba«, s.2 share, v. tetlcn, w. she, fie. shelter, Obboci^, bo8, s.' shine, fcftcinen, s. ship, ©iiff, bag, s.^ shoe, ©i^ut), ber, s.^ shoemaker, ©^uljmai^et, ber, s.i shop, §anblung, bie, w.; Soben, ber, s.i (pZ. a). shop, V. gtn!aufe maiden, w. shoot, fdjiegen, s. shore, Ufer, ba8, s.i short, furg; — ly, fur?, shot, ®*u6, ber, s.2 (pi. -iiffe). show, jeigeti, jo. shrewdly, Bcrfi^mijjt. shrewdness, Slugt)elt, bie, w. shut, fd^Iiegen, s. sick, !ronf; be taken — , erfran= fen, w. sicken, eriranten, w. (aux. fein). sickness, firanf^eit, bie, w. , side, @eite, bie, w. sight, (spectacle) 3tnbli(f, bet, s.^ ; (thing worth seeing) ®et)en8= Wiirbigfeit, bie, w. sign, untetf^tfiieti, s. significant, bebeutenb. signify, bebeuten, w. silence, @d)Weigen, bo8, s. (§ 365), silent, be or become or keep — , ji^lBeigen, s. silver, ©ilber, baS, s. (no pi.) silver, aci/. fttbern. similar, fi^nlic^ (to = dot.) simple, simply, einfac^. sin, ©iiube, bie, w. since, prep, (ctt (dat.); conj. (= because) ba, tnbetn, sub. conj. sincere, (candid) aufridjtig ; (hearty) ^erglic^. sincerely, ^erglid). sing, ftngen, s. single, eingig. sink, ftnlen, s. (aux. jein). sir, meln §crr. sister, @d)njefier, bie, w. sit, fl^tn, s.; to — down, fid fe^en, r^. w .; let us — down! je^en mir unS (p. 45, n. 4). sitting, — ■ -room, SGBo^njimmer, ba8, s.i situated, be — , Uegen, s. situation, Sage, bie, w. six, fec^S. skate, @c^tittid)ub, ber, s.^ skate, V. ©c^littf^u^ laufen, s. skill, gertiflteit, bie, w. skillful, gefi^idt. sky, §immet, ber, s.i slave, ©tlaoe, ber, w.; ^necf)t, ber, sleep, ©cblof, ber, s. (no pi.) sleep, n. fc^tafen, s. slow(ly), longfont. small, {lein. smell, riecfien, s. smoke, rauc^en, w. snow, ©c^nec, ber, s. (no pi.) snow, V. f^ncien, w. 80, fo; (= accordingly, then) atfo: — far as I am concerned, IraS ittid) bettifft; — have I (in an- swers), ba8 iiabt ic^ au^; — verj strange, fo feltfatn; referring U a foregoing verb, often trans lated by ei: . . ■ but I cannol do so, . . . aber id^ tann e8 ni(t)t so-called, fogenannt. 70 VOCABULARY )ciety, ®c|clljcf|aft, bie, w. ifa, @ofa, bag, ». (pi. -8). >ft, (of the voice, of light) fanft. iftly, leife. (journ, 3tufentf)alt, ber, s.^ tidier, ©olbat, bet, w. (le(ly), einjig. live, Ibfen, w. ime, irgenb ein (§ 152); in the sing, and collectively [of things), ettt)a« (§ 151); pi. eintg-, etlid^- (§ 150); — bread, etiuoS Srot; — friend, irgenb ein greunb; — • friends, eintge gtennbe; refer- ring to something before men- tioned, WtXif (§ 162); — more, {sing.) nod) etrcaa, {pi.) nod) einige. ime one, jenianb, irgenb jemanb (§§ 152, 154). imething, etttiaS. imetimes, bl6h3ei(en, juttscilen. mewhat, etreoS. m, @o^n, ber, s.'^{pl. 5). ing, Sieb, baS, s.s ngstress, ©angerin, bie, w. on, batb; as — as, jobalb, tub. conj. re, (= grave, serious) (diwer. rrow, Seibcn, ba8, s.i rrowful, tvaurig. rry, I am — , e8 tut mir Icib. rt, 2ltt, bie, w.; what — of, roaS fur (§ 146); all sorts of, attertei {indcl.) ul, ©eele, bie, vi.; {= feeling) ©emiit, ba«, s.s und, ttingen, s. uth, ©iiben, ber, s. {no pi.); South Germany, @iibbcutfd)= fonb. uthward, nadj ©iiben. uvenir card, ainftc^tstarte, bie, w. pain, ©(jauie*, ba8. paniard, ©(jonier, ber, s.i panish, fpanifd). peak, fprec^en, s.; to — pieces, bettamiereu, w. lecial, bejonber. lectator, 3u|il)(iuer, ber, s.i leech, (address) ajebe, bie, w.; (= language) ©(jrod^e, bie, w. speed, §aji, bie {no pi.) spirit, ®eift, ber, s.' spite, in — of, tro^,i)rep. {gen. or dot.) splendid, prSditig; (= glorious) f|crrlid). spoil, Bcrberben, s. spook, ©efpenft, baS, s.^ spoon, Coffel, ber, s.i spring, (season) grii^ting, ber, s.'^ spring,!). fpringen,s. (aus. fein). stage, iBii^ne, bie, w. stairs, stairway, 2reppe, bie, w. stake, be at — , gelten, s. stand, ftet)eu, s. irr. (§ 185). star, ©tern, ber, s.^ start, Stufbrud), ber, s.^ {pi. u). start, V. fid) ouf ben iffieg mae^en, refl,. w. state, ©taat, ber, mx. state, V. angeben, s. station, Sa^u^of, ber, s.2 {pi. B). stay, (= remain) bleiben, s. {aux. fctn); (= tarry, sojonrn) Ber» meilen, w.; ftc^ autf)a(ten, s. stay, S(ufentl)a(t, ber, s.^ steal, ftel)len, s. steamer, Sam^jfer, ber, s.i stenographer, ©tenograpt), ber, w. step, treten, s. {aux. |cin); fi^rei= ten, s. {aux. jcin); — back, 3u= riidtretcn. step, @(^ritt, ber, s.^ stick, ©tod, ber, s.^ {pi. o). stick, (= put) fteden, w. still, adj. ru^ig. still, adv. {time, degree) nodi; ad- versative) bod). stock, (supply) SBorrat, ber, s.^{pl. a); (race, family) ©tantm, ber, s.^{pl. ii). stop, intrans., aufboren. store, Saben, ber, s.i {pi. a)- §onb= lung, bie, w. storm, ©turnt, ber, s.^ {pi. ii)- (= thunder — ) ©emitter, ba8, s.i stormy, ftiirmifd). story, ®e(d)id)te, bie, w.; grjfi^' lung, bie, w. stout, ftart. stove, Cfen, ber, s.i {pi. £)). straight, (direct) bireJt. ENGLISH-GERMAN 471 strange, (peculiar) jonberBar, felt. fam; (foreign, unwonted) fremb. stranger, gtembc(r), decl. like adj. (cf. § 290, 2). straw, ®tro[), baS, s. {no pi.); — hat, @trof)^ut, ber, s.^ (pi. it). stream, ©trorn, bet, s.^ [pi. B). street, ©trafif , bie, i«. strength, traft, bie,'«.2 (pi. fi). strict, ftreng. stride, fc^veiten, s. (aux. fein). strife, ©treit, ber, s.^ strike, (djlagen, s. stroke, ©tretif), ber, s.^ strong, ftart, ftciftig; (= effective) rairtimggBolI; (= firm) feft. stronghold, Surg, bie, w. student, ©tubent, ber, w.; woman — , ©tubcntiti, bie, w.; — life, ©tubcntenteben, bas, s.i study, ©tubiunt, ba«, mz. study, V. ftubierett, w. stupid, bunim. style, @ti(, ber, s.2 subject, Untertan, bet, mx. subject, V. imtetttietten, s. submit, firf) unterwetfen, s.; — to (put up with), fic§ bequemen, w. (dot.) subsequently, naiJ)^er. succeed, be successful, getingen, impers. s. with dat. (aux. ^eitt); I did not succeed, eg gelang mit nii^t. such, fotifi (§ 135); — a, fo ein; any — thing, fo ettoaS. sudden(ly), plo^Uifi, auf einmal. suffer, [eiben, s. suffering, Seiben, bas, s.^ suffice, geniigen, w. suit (of clothes), Stnjug, ber, s.^ ipl- ii). sum, ©utntitc, bie, w. summer, ©ommer, ber, s.i; — day, ©otnmertag, bet, s.^ ; — term, ©ommertermin, ber, s.^ summit, ©ipfcl, bet, s.i summon, rufeii, s. sun, ©onne, bie, w. sunbeam, ©onnenftra^'!, bet, mx. Sunday, ©oniitag, bet, s.^ "'inrise, ©onnenaufgnng, bet, s. supper, 3I£ienbeffen, ba«, sA supply, SUottot, bet, s.^ (pi. a), support, V. ftii^en. support, ©tii^e, bie, w. sure, ftd)er; to be—, ftetlic^, aUeV' bingg; — ly, gemig; they — ly know, man >t>ci6 bod) ttiol^I, man tneig ja. surround, umgebeu, s. swamp, ©umpf, ber, s.2(pZ. ii). sw^rm, ©c^ttiarm, bet, s.^ (pi. a). swear, fc^tDoren, s. sweet, fii6; a — girl, ein IieBIi= d)e8 Wiib^en ; ( = fragrant) liebltdi. swift, fi^nell. swim, fc^iDimmcn, s. (aux. fein). Switzerland, bie ©c^weij (§226, sword, ©djmert, baS, s.s [3). sympathy, ©^mpatljie, bie, w. table, S:ifd|, ber, s.2 tailor, ©djnetbet, bet, s.' take, ne^mcn, s.; to — cold, fii) ettolten, w.; to — a seat, ^la^ ne^men ; to — a walk, etnen @pa5tetgang maiden, w.; to — off (a garment), auSjie^en, s. tale, ^tja^tung, bie, w. taler, Eater, bet, s.^ talk, teben, w.; there is much — about, man tebet Biel libet (or bon), e8 luitb Biel getebet iibet. tall, \)oi); (of persons) gto^- tally, ftimmen, w. tarry, oermeilen, w. task, Stufgabe, bie, w. taste, (Sefc^macE, bet, s.^ (pi. a, rare); artistic — , ^unftge= fdjntod. teach, untettidjten, te^tcn, w.; — to (show), bele^ten. teacher, Sebrer, bet, s.i; woman — , Sef)retin, bie, iv. tear, Stone, bie, xo. tear, jerreifeen, s. tedious, longiucitig. tell, fagen, w.; (= relate) erjaJi' len, to.; (= inform of) miU teilen, w. :72 VOCABULARY en, je^n. endency, Eenbettj, blc, vi. erm, SEetmin, ber, s.^ Brrible, fc^teitid). Bst, ^Jriifung, bic, w. Bxt (for reading), Seltiire, bte, w. art-book, it\)xh\ii), ba8, s.^ ian, ota. [you, banle. lank, banfen, w. (dat.) ; (I) — tiankful, ban!bar. ianks, 3)on!, ber, s. (no pi.) dat, (iem. pron. ba8 ; jener (§ 129) ; rel. pron. bet, bie, baS; toelc^er, melcfie, ttetdjeS (§§ 136- 139) ; with neut. pron. or adj. or a sentence, as antecedent, was (§ 141, a, 2). iat, conj. bo§, sub. conj. ie, def. art. ber, bie, bag (§ 72); MiiJA comp.: — more, befto tncbr; in 'proportional'' clauses: — more ... — better, je me^r . . . je (or befto) beffet (§ 381, 1,/). Iieater, 'I^eater, bas, s.i ieir, itjr. iem, dat. il)nen, ace. fte; there are six of — , e8 finb beren (or il)ter) fe(i)8. den, (m/erewiioZ) bettn, olfo; (iem- por-ai) baiin; just — , jut 3eit. iere, ba, bott; — is, — there are, e« gibt, aiso e8 ift, e8 finb (§ 340); in — , br'innen. ierefore, barum, batiet. terein, btinnen, batin. lereupon, batouf. ley, fie; indef. man. lick, bid; ( = dense) bii^t; a — book, ein bides 53ud) ; a — wood, ein bic^tev SBalb. licket, ©ebiifd), bas, s.^ lief, ISieb, ber, s.^; (woman) — , ®iebtn, bie, w. ling, ®ing, bag, s.^; ( = matter, affair) @a(^e, bte, w.; any such — as,(o etmaS ttiie. link, bcn!en, w. irr. (§ 330); mei= nen, w.;(= believe) glauben, w.; to — of, an (ace.) . . . benten; — of (remember), gebenten (gen.); to — much of (i. e. es- teem) one, Dtcl Bon einem fatten. third, (ber) btitte. this, bie8 (§§ 129, 130); — time, bie8ma(; — evening, ^eute abenb. thoro(ly), gtiinblidt|; {= complete) Bollfommen. those, — are, baS fmb (§ 131, 1). tho, sub. conj. obgleic^, obwo^l; adv. bod^; wasn't it warm — , rear eg bocft tDorm. thought, ©ebonte, bet, mx. (gen. thousand, taufenb. ' [-nS). threaten, btof)en, w. (dat.) three, btei; — times, breimat. throat, §al8, bet s.^ (pi. fi). thru, buri^ (ace); — with, fettig throw, nietfen, s. [mit (dat.) thunder, — storm, ©eWittet, ba8,8.i Thursday, SonnerStag, ber, s.^ thus, fo, alfo. ticket, SBiUet, ba8, s.2 (pi. -tte, also 58iIIet8). time, (duration) 3eit, bie, w.; (oc- casion) Wai, ba8, S.2; this — , bie8ma(; at the — , bamalS; (at) what — , (urn) WieBiet Uf)t; for a — , eine ^^itlang ; for a long — , tange; once upon a — , ein» mal'; some — , cinft; for the — being, BotlSufig. times, at — , biStBeilen. timid, fut(f)tfain. tire, etmitbcn, w. tired, tiiiibe. title, Eitet, ber, s.i to, often translated by the dative, esp. with indirect object of a verb and with some adjectives (§§ 268, 260); ju (dat), nail (dat), on (ace), gegen (ace.) cf. § 377, s. v.; — and fro, ^in unb ^er; — the concert, in8 Songett; — the edge, biSonben 9ianb; to step — the window, an8 genftct treten ; — London, — the station, nat^ Sonbon, nac^ bem 93a^nf)ofe; go — bed, ju iBett gef)en; go — church, gut (or in bie) ^irc^e gel)en; write — , an (ace.) . . . fc^reiben ; kind — , ftcnnbtid) ge» gen; with inf. — , in order — , gu, urn gu (§ 367, 1 and a); omitted with certain verbs, § 366, 1, 2. ENGLISH-GERMAN 473 tobacco, Sabaf, ber, s.^ to-day, f)eutc. to-day's, ^eutig, adj. together, jufammen. tolerably, sietnlic^. to-morrow, morgen; — evening, morgen abenb; — morning, mor= gen friifi; day after — , iiber= morgen. to-night, ^eute abenb. too, {of degree) ju; (= also) auc^. tooth, 3"^n, ber, 8.2 {pi. a). toothache, 3nt)nfil)mer3, ber, mx. top, Oijjfct, ber, s.i, @pi^e, bie, jo. tormented, tie — , ftcf) quaien, w. torrent, ©trom, ber, s.^ {pi. 0). toward(s), gegen (ace), nai) {dat.), entgegen {dat.) § 377. tower, Surnt, ber, s." {pi. u). town, @tabt, bte, s.2 {pi. 0); little — , ©tfibtdien, ba8, s.i trade, §anbei(, ber, s. {no pi); by — (calling), jeineS ^tid^tni. train, gug, bet, s.2 {pi. fl); ex- press — , ©d^neltsi'S- tramp, (pedestrian tour) gu§tt)an= berung, bte, w. translate, iiberfe^'en, w. translation, (act of translating) fiber jcl^en, ba«, s. (§365). travel, fabren, s. {aux. fein); reifen {aux. § 323, 1, c). travel(s), 9ieife, bie, w. ; S3i5on= berung, bie, w. traveler, 9ieiienbc(r), decl. like adj. (§ 290, 2). tread, intr. tteten, s. {avx. fein); tr. betreten. treat, bebanbetn, w. treatment, ffie^anblung, bte, w. tree, iBauin, ber, s.^ {pi. flu). tremble, jittern, w. trial, (test) ^riifutig, bie, w. tributary, SJebenflu^, ber, s." {pi. -iiffe). trick, ©treidi, ber, s.^ trifle, fileinlateit, bie, to. trip, 5Ret(e, %a.%xi, bie, to. triviality, tteinig!eit, bte, to. trouble, (difficulty) SRiilje, bte, to.; (suffering) Ceiben, ba8, s.i; (dis- tress) SSloi, bte, s.^{pl. 0). trouble, v. (worry), battge malfiep. to. {with dat. of pers.); (con- cern) liimmern; he doesn't — himself about it, cr liimntert fid, nic^t botum. true, roa^r; (= faithful) treu. truly, wabtbaft. trunk, Coffer, ber, s.i trust, Bertrauen, to. {dot.) truth, Sabtbcit, bie, to. truthful, reabtbaft. try, Berfucben, to. Tuesday, ©ienStag, ber, s.2 turn, Wenben, w. irr. (§ 330). turn out, rocrben, irr. {aux. fein). twelve, jttibtf. twenty, jmonjig; twentieth, (bet) jraanjigfte; the — first, ber etn= unbjroanjigfte. twice, jroetmat. two, ;ittiet: the — , bie beibcn (§ 148). tyrant, %\)xmva, bet, to. U umbrella, SRegenfd^ttm, bet, s.^ unamiable, unfreunbliii^. unanswered, unbeontirortet. unbearable, unerttfiglidb. uncle, Ontel, bet, s.i; Cfieim, ber, S.2 under, untct {dat. and ace.) ; — it, — that, boruntet. understand, Betfteben, s. understanding, SJerftfinbniS, bo8, s.", SBetftanD, bet, s. {no pi.) undertake, untenie^men, s. undisturbed, ungetriibt. undoubtedly, unjmeifel^aft. uneasy, untu^ig. unfortunately, leiber (p. 101, n. 1) ; unglucfltcber»etfe. unfriendly, unfreuublid^. ungrateful, unbantbat. unhappiness, Ungliid, baS, s. (no pi.) unhappy, ungliidlid^, ungliicffeHg. united, Bereinigt. university, UntBet|itat, bie, to. unkind, unfteunblitb. unpleasant, unangene^m. '4 VOCABULARY irest, Unru^c, bte, w. isatisfactory, iinBeniigenb, ithankful, unban'tbor. itil, bis ; not — (this evening), erft (tjeute obenb). iwelcome, unmitttommcn. ■well, umiiobl. I, aiif; • — there, broben; further — , ineitet Ijinoiif or auftt)ort«. lOn, auf (dot. and ace.) ; once — a time, etnmal' ; — the whole, im ganjen. iper, ober-. , dat. and ace. un8. e, V. gebraudjeu, w.; benu^en, w.; (= spend, as time) 3u6rin= gen, w. irr. (§ 330). e, make — of, braitc^en, w. {gen.) ual(ly), gelBb^ntid). terly, »oIIenb«, gans unb gar. ■cation, gerien, bic, pi. only. in, in — , tiergebenS. lley, Za.\, ba8, s.s lue, (djaijen, w. nish, ic^minbeit, tierf(J)lt)inben, s. [aux. fein). ngeance, 3toc^e, bie {no pi.) mice, 35enebig. nture, mogcn, vj. rb, SBevbum, baS, s. {pi. -ba). ritable, ttiai)v!)aft. ry, fe^r; — much {of degree), fe^r; — well (= agi-eed, 'all right '), fefir gem; he is doing — well, e8 geqt i^m jef)v gut. isuvius, ffiefuB, ber, s. xed, be — , fid) argern, r^. w. :inity, 9?a^e, bie, w. :tory, @ieg, ber, s.^ 5w, (sight of) atiiblicf, ber, 8.=; (opinion) 8lnfid)t, bie, w).; (pros- pect) 3lu«fid)t, bie, w.; take a — of, in 3lugciifd)ein netjmen, s.; in — of all that, mi) alle (§ 317, 1) bem. Uage, ®orf, ba8, s.8 ; little — , Sorfd^en, ba8, s.i llager, S)orfbelT)or)ner, ber, s.i violent, ^eftig. violet, 9?eild)en, baS, s.i visit, V. befudjcn, w. visit, SBeiud), ber, s.^ voice, ©tinnne, bie, w. vote, ©tinime, bie, w. vote, V. ftimmen, w. vow, getobcn, w. voyage, ©ecretfe, ©eefa^rt, bie, w, vulgarity, ©emein^eit, bic, w. W wagon, Sffiagen, ber, s.i wait, maxten,w. (for = auf, ace.) wake, n)od)en. walk (for pleasure), ©pajiergang, ber, S.2 {pi. d) ; take a — , einen ©pajiergang mad)en. walk, V. geljen, s. irr. (§ 185, aux. fein) ; — about, l)eruni= ge^en; go walking (forpleasure), fpajicren gel)cn. wall, (of a room) SBanb, bie, s.2 {pi. fi); (brick or stone — ), SJiauer, bie, w.; — of rock, gelsroanb, bie, s.2 {pi. a). wandering, SSJanbernng, bte, w. want, (= desire) tnogen (§§ 189, 191), iniinfdien, w.; { = need) braut^en. w. ; {= require, de- mand) toerlangen, w. war, Srieg, ber, s.^ war-ship, ^riegSfc^iff, baS, s.^ warm, Warm; grow — , erttiarmen, w. {aux. (cin). warn, marnen, w. (of = tiov, dat.) warning, SSarnung, bie, w. waste, Bergeuben, w. watch, S:ofd)enut)r, Ubt, bie, w. water, SBaffer, ba8, s.i way, SBeg, ipfab, ber, s.^; (= man- ner) 3{rt, SSSeife, bie, w.; the — home, the — back, ber Jpcitn= tt)eg, Siiicfroeg; by — of, iiber (ace); in tlie — of, in {dat); lose one's — , fid) oerirren, refl. w. we, mtv. weak, fc^tnai^. wealth, i'cntiogen, ba8, s.'; 8ieic^< turn, ber, s.^ ENGLISH-GERMAN 475 wear, tmgen, s. weather, SBetter, ba8, s.i Wednesday, ptttmod) ber, s.2 week, SBot^e,' tie, w. weekly, tt)6ct)ctttlicf). weep, reeinen, w. weigh, mlegeit, s. welcome, rciUfommen. welfare, S!Bol)I, baS, s. (no pi.) well, ad/, (in good health) gcfunb. well, adv. gut; very — (= agreed, 'all right'), ief)r gern; he has done that — , baS ^ot ex gut ge= madjt; (of the health) wo^t; I am — , I am doing—, i(f| Befinbe mid) ttio^I; Idonotfeel — , mlr ift nit^t iooiji. well, interj. (as an introductory, word), nun. well-behaved, artig. well-known, wo^fbetannt. west, SBeften, bet, s. (no pi.) west, adj. ttieffllcl). westward, Weftlti^. wet, na%. what, inter, pron. foaS, Weld); . inter, adj. tveld) (§§143, 144); rel. pron. and antecedent (= whatever), nai (§ 141); — sort, kind of, was fiir (§ 145);— for, tDOJU. wheel, 3iab, ba«, s.^ when, inter, irann; rel. tomn (of pres. and fut. and repeated ac- tion in past); ate (of simple past), sub. conj. (§381, 1, a, b, i, k, I). whence, roofer. where, roo. whether, ob, sub. conj. which, rel. x'^on. ber, inelcf) (§§ 136-138); inter, pron. Irelc^ (§ 144); with neut. pron. or adj. or a sentence, as ante- cedent, Was (§ 141, a, 2). while, 3eit, bie, w.; (for) a — , eine ^eittang; (= pains), 5Iftut)e, bie, w.; worth — , ber SJfii^e ttiert. while, inbem, ino^renb, sub. conj. white, tneig. Whitsuntide, «Pfingftcn, pi. only. who, rel. pron. ber, Weid) (§§ 136- 138) ; whoever, he — , ttjer (§140) ; inter, pron. toer (S§ 143, 144). whoever, racr, ttier aui). whole, gang ; on the — , im gan= gen. why, inter, ftaruin, h)e«^aIB ; in^ terj. bod). wide, meit ; (= broad) Brett ; far and — , rpeit unb Brett. wife, gran, bte, w.; SffieiB, btt«, s.* wild, milb. will, future, itjerben (§ 186, 2) j modal, molten (§§ 189, 191). will, SBilte, ber, mx. (gen. -n8). willingly, gern. win, gewinuen, s. wind, 2Binb, ber, s.^ window, geitfter, ba8, s.i wine, SBein, ber, s.^ wing, gtiigel, ber, s.i winter, SB inter, ber, s.i ; — even- ing, aSinteraBcnb, ber, s.2 wisdom, SBeiSfieit, bie, w. wise, nieife. wish, miinfcfien, w.; tnoKen (§§ 189, 191). wish, SBunft^, ber, s.^ (pi. ii). witch, §eye, bie, w. with, mit (dot.); — it, bamit ; (= in the family or at the house of), Bei (dot.) withal, baju. withdraw, jurMjie^en, s. within, (of time only) Binnen (dat.) without, o^ne (ace.) ; do — , ent> be^ren, w. (gen.) woe ! met) ! woman, ®ame, bie, w.; J^^au, bie, Seib, ba«, s.a wonder, SBunber, baS, s.} wonder, v. \\i) rounbern, r^. w.; I wonder (am surprised) that, tnii^ rounbert'6, bag ; I — ■whether, id) mbi^te roiffen, oB ; how late is it, I — ? itiie \pat ift e« »ot)I? wonderful, rounberBar. wood, §o(g, bag, S.8; 'woods', SBatb, ber, s.s 176 VOCABULAEY RrOrd, i^Jort, bas, s. ^' ^ (§ 276, a). RTork, (aisiraci, = labor) Slrbeit, bie, It).; (of an author) SBett, ba8, S.2 ; {collectively in the abstract, = activity) SBirfett, baS, s. (§ 365); v. atbettcn, w. r^orkman, workingman, 9(rbeiter, iex, s.i ivork-of-art, ^unftroerf, ba8, s.^ world, aBclt, bie, w. RTorld-famous, rocltbcriit)mt. worn-out, etfc^S^jft. wor^h while, to be — , fitf) loljnen, r^. w. worse, worst, icf)le(^tfr, fiJjtei^teft-; jc^limmer, jc^limmft-. worth, inert (gen.) worthy, Iniitbig (of = gen.) wretched, cletib. write, (d^reiben, s.; — to, fc^reibcn an (ace.) writer, (author) ©c^tiftpeHer, ber, writing, ©thrift, bie, w. [s.i wrong, adj. uiirei^t; ( ^incor- rect) falfi^. wrong, Unrec^t, bas, s.^ rear, Sa^r, bpS, s.^; — in and — out, 3a^r au8 3a^r ein; for a — and a day, auf 3at|v unb Eog. yellow, gelb. yes, ja; — indeed, jattJO^I. yesterday, geftcrn; — morning, ges ftern morgen; day before — , Borgeftetn. yet, (temporal) no(^; (adversative) bod) ; not — , nod) nii^t. yonder, bort; over — , briibcn. you, bu (§ 301, a, 1, 4); i^r (pi. of bu); @te (polite address, § 301, 3, 4); ace. bid), tiii), @ie; dat. bir, euci^, Sbnen; the forms of bu and itfx are capitalized in letters (§ 301, 5); indef. man (§§ 156, 149, 1). young, jung; — lady, groulein, ba«, s.i; — man, 3ungling, ber, youngish, jiinger. your, bcin, euer, 3f)r (§§ 125, 301,5.) yours (ber) beinige, eurige, 3f)rlge, etc. (§126, 1) ; a friend of — , ein greunb Don bir, 3^iien. yourself, emphatic, fclbft ; rejl. §§ 123, 201, 202. youth, (abstract or collective) 3u= genb, bie (no pi.) ;' (concrete) Sunge, ber, w.; 3iingltng, ber, Z zeal, (Sifer, ber, s. (no pi.) INDEX Th^ numbers refer to sections. For strong verbs consult the list in § SSI. ft, pronimciation of, 15 ; written in- stead of aa, App. I, 3, 4. H, pronunciation of, 23 ; as umlaut of aa, 85, 1, a ; St and Me, App. I, 3, 1. ab, prep. 377. abet, 379, 1 ; ober ater, 379, 3. ablaut, 338, 2 ; classes, 339 ; in deri- vation, 384, 1, 386. abstract nouns, use of art. with, 226 ; plu. of, '338, 1, a. accent, 61-4= ; in compound verbs, 307, 4 ; in compound nouns, 399 ; in compound particles, 408. accusative, use of, 363-9 ; with verbs, 263-5 ; cognate, 264 ; two objects, 265, 345, 1 ; adverbial, 366 ; absolute, 267, 369, 3 ; with preposi- tions, 368, 376, 2 ; with adjectives, 269: in impersonal constructions, 205, 1, 2, 263, 3. active voice, 71, 164; with passive force after lofjen, eto., 366, 1, a and 2, b. address, nom. in, 343 ; pronouns of, 121, 301. adjective clauses, 414. adjectives. Inflection, 101-9, 286-9 ; comparison, 111-14, 293-6 ; deriva- tion, 389-91 ; composition, 404-6 ; syntax, 386-96 ; without inflection, 101, 386, 109, 2-4 ; strong, 103-5 ; weak, 106-7 ; strong or weak, 288 ; as substantive, 108, 290 ; in predi- cate, 110, 289 ; irregularities of in- flection, 109; of comparison, 114, 296; with gen. 352; with dat. 360; with ace. 269; with prepositions, 291; repetition necessary, 333, 2; orthography of proper adjectives, 4, 3, and App. I, 3, 13, b. adverbial clauses, 415. adverbs, 316 ; classiflcation, 371 ; primitive, 373 ; relation to adj. 37.3; from nouns, 374; compari- son, 375 ; ordinal, 399, 1 ; relative, 316; prepositional, 376, 5, a; posi- tion of, 96, 434; Combined with substantive inf. 366, 2, a ; with par- titive gen. 353, 3 ; for rel pron. 139, 2. aiftet-, 388, 1. -age, 334, 2. at, pronunciation, 37; limited use, App. I, 3, 3. -at, pi. of nouns in,'375, 4, a; neuter nouns in, 380, 2. nH, 146, 317 ; aUt, 317, 1 ; aUi, 317, 2 ; allwo, 316, 3. aBctrt, 379, 1. aUeitfaa^, 388, 1, a. alter-, 394, 1; allertieSft, 294, 1, a. Alphabet, German, 2 ; script, 7. af§, 381, 1, a; with predicate nom. 243, 2, 371 ; with appositive, 265, 3, 271, 1-3 ; with following rel. 314, 3 ; for a[§ ob, 359,3, a; in comparisons, 381, 1, a; omitted after fo, 381, 1, h. nt§ ob, atS iBenn, with unreal sub]. 359, 3. ot§ tuic, in comparisons, 381, 1, a. om, with superl. 112, 394, 5 ; in su- perl. of adv. 375, 2. ait, 377. anbcc, 147; anHxi = else, 253, 2, c; anbertljaia, 118, 3, b. attflft, 260, 2, b. anftott, 377 ; with inf. 367, 6. Slttt-, 388, 2 ; Mntlooct, 235, 2. anttuortcn, construction with, 257, 1, a. apostrophe, in gen. 284, 1, b; cf. also App. I, 3, 14. apposition, 370-2, 385 ; immediate, 270 ; mediate, 271 ; spurious, 272. appositional, gen. 346, 4, a; predi- cate, 110, 1, 389, 1, 368, 2, 369, 2. airmut, 335, 1, a. -ottia, 300, L 477 178 INDEX irticle, 73-3 ; use, 383-33 ; See under def. and indef . art. Itlns, pl. of 281, 1,11. :U, pronunciation, 38. It, pronunciation, 31 ; S, not Sle, App. 1,3,1. llrf), 380, 1, a,b; in indef. rel. clauses, 140, 2, 381, 1, m. :Uf , 377 ; out idii, 381, 1, c. ufcrftcljcn, 343, l. ;Uf§, in super 1. of adv. 113, 2, 375, 2. ;u§, aujec, aufeer^allj, 377. USCttcffll, 343, 1. mxiliaries, of tense, lTl-3; use, 168, 1-2, 333 ; omission, 334 ; peri- phrastic and causal, 33.^ ; modal, 188-94, 333-8 ; of voice 195, 344, It), 39, 1. I, pronunciation, 35; in Eng. cog- nates, App. II, 7. 2. Snttb, pl. of, 376, a. initBC 860, 2, 6. 9anf, 875, 1, a. 6ar, 390, 2. Salt, pl. of, 875, 2, a. le-, 208, 1, 0,396, 1. iCBCBUCn, 863, 1, b. ici,377. letic, 148 ; 6eibe5, 148, 1. iCttOt, 341, 1, 381, 1. iCJttfilcn, 363, 1, c. liiincn, 377. it§, prep. 377; sub. oonj. 381, 1. ittten, "With double object, 365, 1, a. ileibcit, with inf. 366, 3. Boot, pl. of, 375, 3. >orro-wed, -words, accent, 64 ; gen- der, 330; declension, 381-8. irauAicn, inf. for perf. pple. 336,2, b. Brett, pl. of 376, a. Buififtaftc, gen. of, 879, 2, o. :, pronunciation, 36; in new spelling, 36, 1, App. I, 3, 12. capital letters, use of, 4 ; in pro- nouns of address, 301, 5 ; in verbal phrases, 343, 2, b and 3, a ; of. also App. I, 3, 13. ?afte, 70 ; see under nom. gen. etc. 3ausal clansos, dependent, 415, 5. J), pronunciation, 37. f), as intensive stem suifix, 395, 1. .«cn, 79, 387, 1. Elior, gender and dec! 875, 3. Christian names, pl. of, 384, 3, 6. tfiS, pronunciation of, 37, 5. if , 3, 2 ; pronunciation of, 36, 2. cognates, Eng. and Ger. 1, 2, and App. 11. collective nouns, congruence of verb with, 346, 1. comma, use of, 6. comparative clauses, 415, 7. comparison of adjectives, 111-14, 293-6 ; of adverbs, 316, 2, 375. composition of nouns, 399^03 ; adjectives, 404-6; verbs, 306-14, 341-3 ; particles, 63, 1, 408. concessive clauses, 415, 4. conditional mode, 168, 3, 363. conditional sentences, 359, 415, 3. conjugation, 171-93, 383-31; weak, 174-8; strong, 179-85, 388; mixed, 186. conjunctions, 318, 378-81 ; general connectives, 379 ; adverbial, 380 ; subordinating, 381, 415. connecting voivel, use of, 169, 176, 387 ; dropped in strong verbs, 183, consecutive clauses, 415, 9. consonants, classification, 33 ; pro- nunciation, 34-60; representation in !Eng. cognates. App II. b, pronunciation, 38; in Eng. cog- nates, App. II, 8, 2. brt(v), in compounds, with prep. 183, 2, 138, 310, 413, 1, c, 367, 6, a; *ith verb, 341, 1. ia, added to rel. 316, 2 ; with rel. force, 316, 3 ; as sub. conj. 381, 1, 6. bamit, 381, l, c bantcn, 857, 1, a. bag, as absolute subject, 131, 1 ; re- ferring to persons, 309, 4; for tuaS referring to sentence, 315, 2. bnfi, 381, 1, d; omission of, 360, o. dative, formation, 77, 2, 81, 2, 84, 2, 89, 94 ; meaning, 70, 356 ; use, 356-63; 'n'ith verbs, sole object, 357; secondary object, 358; of in- terest, 359; ethical, 8."«9. 4; with adjectives, 360; with nouns, 361; with interjections, 361, 1, a; with prepositions, 376, 3, 4 ; = possessive, 227, o, 859, 1, o; with t)on = gen, 347. -be, 387, 2. INDEX 479 declension, 66 ; of articles, 73-3 ; nouns, 76-100, 873-85; foreign nouns, 881-3; proper names, 99- 100, 884-5 ; adjectives, 101-18, 286-8; of pronouns, 120-63. definite article, 72; use, 383-33; contractions, 823; omission, 884; use with proper names, 885 ; gene- ric, 826 ; = possessive, 837 ; dis- tributive, 888 ; in phrases, 339 ; repetition, 838. demonstratives, 129-35, 309-11; = personal pron, 188, 2, a. Sentmat, pL of, 376, a. itxin= for, 379, 2; = then; 380, 1; = than, 381, 1, a; with concessive sub] . 356, 1, a. denominative verbs, 394. dependent clauses, 413-15. dependent order ; see "word-order, itx, art. 73 ; dem. 189, 131, 309 ; rel. 136, 138, 314. terct, 309, 2. derivation, 384-98; general prin- ciples of, 384 ; nouns, 385-8 ; ad- jectives, 389-91 ; verbs, 398-6 ; pro- nouns and particles, 397-8; see further under composition. ietieniBf, 133, 311. Scto, 309, 5. tevfetic, 134, 311, 1, 397. its, 309, 1, a. ic§6tttl<' beSweBen, 132, l. befto, 381, 1,/. determinatives, 139, 133-5, 311. dialects, 8, 381 ; loss of pret. in, 351, 1, c. bic§, inflection, 189; use, 130; ab- solute subject, 130, 2. ticSteUS, 377. btettiett, derivation, 408, 2. digraplis, 2, 2. dimidiatives, 118, 3, b, diminutive suffixes, 79, 387, 4, 395, 2. Sing, pl- of, 876, a. diphtbongs, 8, 2, 26-31. bod), 380, 1, a, c. Sow, pi. of, 379, 1, a. StUll, pi. of, 875, 2, a. bit, orthography, 4, 2, 301, 5 ; use in address, 301, a, 1 ; declension, 180. titttfen, 363, 1, b, 330, a. tmdj, as prep., 377; as prefix, 313, 341, 3. biitftlt, 188, 189, 191, 1, 333. Dutch, relation to German, 1, 1, App. 11,3. e, pronunciation, 16 ; dropped in in- flection of adjectives in el, en, er, 887 ; dropped in comparison, 113, 3, 398, 2 ; use as connecting vowel, 176, 183, 387. -t, as nominal suffix, 387, 3 ; in ad- verbs, 373, 3 ; omission of, in imv. 183, 2, 387, 2 and 2 a. t\tt, cfter, 396,3. ci, pronunciation, 89. -ei, 93, 387, 4. Ciu, indef . art. 73 ; num. 116, 897 ; pron., 116, 1, 149, 1, 318. clitunber, 304, 2. cinin-, 150, 319. cin§, 897, 318, 1 and 1, a. eimmbbctfclOe, 3ii, l, c. ciiiuerleificn, 343, 1. citct, 880, 5. ctcin, 863, 1, b. -el, nouns in, 79, 387, 5; as verbal sufittx, 395, 2. CmJJ-, 396,2, 0. -Ctt, nouns in, 79 ; as adjective suflx, 390, 8 ; as verbal suflx 302, 1 ; in sing, of Aveak feminines, 877, 1. -eiti, in gen. 97, 2, 379, 2 ; in ordinal adverbs, 899, 1 ; in absolute super- latives, 375, 2, a. ent-, 808, 1, b, 396, 2. eiitflCBcn, 377. cnttoffcn, 349, 2, a. entiocbcr, 379, 3. cv, inflection, 120 ; use in address, CV-, 208, 1, c, 396, 3. [301, 2. -cr, nouns in, 79, 387, G ; adjectives in, 390, 4 ; as verbal suffix, 395, 3. -cret, 387, 4. etiitnent, 249, 3, a. -crtci, 399, 1, 390,5. -cnt, weak verbs in, 177 ; as adjective suffix, 390, 3. crft, 114, 5, 396, 3. erj-, 388, 3, 391, 1. t§, special uses of, 183, 3, 303 ; omis- sion with impersonal verbs, 804, 2 ; as gen. 853, 1, a, 865, 1, d, 300, 2. ettitfl-, 150, 319, 1, a. cth)B§, 151 ; with adj. 105, 2, 853, 2, a ; as adv. 330, 1. cu, pronunciation, 30 ; for ie in archaic verb forms, 388, 3, tt. 180 INDEX jxclamation, nom. in, ^343; gen. in, 355; dat. in, 361, 1, a; inf. in, 367, 7. ixclaxnatory sentences, 410, 1, 420, 2. :|), 39, 1. , pronunciation, 39 ; InEng. cognates, App. II, 7, 3. frnJj, 399, 1, 390, 6. 'actitive verbs, 393, 1 ; factitive ob- ject, 363, a, 364, 1 ; predicate, 110, 1,6. aftt-cn, Tvitli inf. 366, 4. faltlB, -fSltia, 390, 7. aft, feft, 373, 3. Jets, 3etfen, 379, 2, a. 'eminine nouns, uninflected in sing. 77, 1 ; exception, 377, 1 ; -with -S in compounds, 400, 2, a. inal clauses, 415, 8. inSeit, with inf. 366, 3. JtoB, pl. of, 376, 3. raflcn, 365, 1, a. JrSuUin, gender, 333, 2, a; -with name, 3S5, 1, b. rei, 253, 1, b. itftlen, Trith inf. 366, 2 and 2 6. iir, 377 ; with verbs of regarding, 265, 3, c. Jiirft, 278, 1, !>. 'uture, 168, 353 ; present used for, 349, 1 ; not expressed by rtJoUen, 338, 3, a. 'uture perfect, 168, 353. 1, pronunciation, 40 ; inEng. cognates, App. II, 9, 2. (nnj, uninflected, 109, 3. $tc-, as prefix of nouns, 388, 4 ; of ad- jectives, 391, 2 ; of verbs, 396, 4 ; as augment of pple. 167, 1, 336. IcSorcn, 344, 2. KBcn, ncit, 341, 1, 377. leamnbet, 377. SIcftitU, pl. of, 276, a. 5)cIlcim(ct)rot, inflection, 401, a. jcfien, with inf. 366, 4, 369, 5. IcmSft, 377. jender, 69 ; determination of, 75 ; rules for, 333-7 ; by meaning, 333 ; by form, 334 ; in compounds, 335 ; in borrowed words, 336; variable, 337. genitive, formation of, 80, 84, 1, 89, 94, 97, 2, 99, 1, 100, 1 ; use, 245- 55 ; with nouns, 346 ; with verbs, sole object, 348; with verbs, sec- ondary object, 349; partitive gen. with verbs, 350 ; with adjectives, pronouns and adverbs, 353 ; ad- verbial (place, time, manner), 251, 374 ; with adjectives, 353 ; in ex- clamations, 255 ; with prepositions, 376, 5 ; substitutes for, 100, 1, 247. German languag^e, relation to Eng. 1 and App. II ; historical periods, 320 ; literary language and dialects, 221 ; good German, 8, 333. Germanic languages, App. II, 3 ; shifting of consonants in, App. II, 5, Bern, comparison of, 375, 1. gerundive, 370. ©cfltfit, pl. of, 276, a. axbt (e§ glBl), 263, 3, a, 303, 1, a, 340. B(au6cn, 257,1, o. -Btcidien, 127, 2, 132, 2, 306, 2. Grimm*B Law, App. II, 6, 1, a. . ©ttnft, 3U @uttftcn, 275, 1, a. 15, pronunciation, 41; in Eng. cognates, App. II, 9, 3. Iloben, conjugation, 171-2; use as aux. 168, 1, 323, 301, 1; impersonal use of, 363, 3, a ; with inf. 366, 3 and 7. -Soft, 390, 8. 5ol6, uninflected, 109, 3 ; ^alber, 389, 2,6. -Snlb, -Aalbeit, -Datfier, 127, 306, 1, 377. -J}alb, in dimidiatives, 118, 3, 6. ©onb, 240, 1; su ^anben, Sor^anben, etc. 275, 1, a. ©nupt, pl. of, 376, a. ficiften, perf. pple. of, 336,2, 6; with dat. 265, 1, 6; with inf. 366, 2 and 2, a ; with predicate inf. 366, 5 ; with predicate perf. pple. 369, 6. -fielt, 93, 387, 7. Ijrtfcii, with ace. 263, 1, 6; perf. ppl. of, 326, 1,6; with inf. 366, 2 and 2, a. tin, 210, 2. ©«r, pl. of, 94, 1 ; as title, 378, 1, 6; once used in address, 301, 2. ©erj, 97, 2, a. fticr-, 133, a. High German, 330 ; High German shitting of consonants, App. II, 6. Bin, 310, 2. INDEX 481 (inter, as prep. 377 ; as prefix, 818, 1. doit, 109, 1,114,2. eoliejiriefter, eoI)e(ieb, inflection, 401, a. Sown, use of inf. for pert ppl. 188, 3, a, 336, 2,6; with inf. 366, 2 and 2, S. Siinbert, 115, 1, 897, 4. hyphen, use of, 6, 400, 4. i, pronunciation, 17 ; never doubled, 14, 1, a. id), inflection, 180; omission, 308, 3. -ii\i, 387, 8, 390, 9. ic, pronunciation, 17, 2. -ic, nouns in, 93, 2. [395, 4. -icten, verbs in, 174, 1, a, 386, 2, a, -ig, as sufttx of adjectives, 390, 10; of verbs, 395, 5. tjt, in address, 301, 1 ; omission of, 308, 2, 363, 1. 3ftr«, 308, 1. imtttcr, in indef. rel. clauses, 140, 2, 381, 1, m. imperative, 71"; tenses 'of, 168, 4 ; omission of t in, 327, 2 ; use of, 363 ; substitutes for, 363, 3 ; passive im.v, with, fein, 344, 1. impersonal verbs, 204-5, 339-40 ; with secondary object in gen. 849, 4 ; with dat. 259, 2, a, b ; with ace. 863, 3 ; use of ti with, 303, 1. in, 377, 341, 1. -in, 93, 94, 2, 387, 9 ; names of women in, 285, 1, 0. indefinite article, 73 ; use, 230 ; omission, 231. ittbcm, 381, 1, e. indefinite pronouns, 146-63, 317- 88. indicative, 71; use, 354; for imv., 363, 3, c. indirect dLiscourge, 360-1 ; indirect question, 142, 1, 360, 4. lndo-!European lang^uages, App. 11,8. infinitive, 74, 166; declension, 274; use, 364-7; nature of, 364; sub- stantive, 365, without gu, 366 ; with BU, 367 ; for imv., 366, 6 ; after prep. 817, 3; omission with modal aux. 193 ; position of, 425. innevfian, 377. inseparable prefixes, 808, 396. interjections, 819, 388-3; natur* of, 383 ; list, 383. Interrogative pronouns, 143-5 318-13. intransitive verbs, 164, 1 ; aux. with, 323 ; passive of, 198, 345, 2. inversion, see word-order. irgcnti, 152. -Ifft, 390, 11 ; superL of adjectives in, 898, 2. Iterative numerals, 299, 1 ; pret. 350, 1 ; verbs, 395, 2, 3. 1, pronunciation, 42; in cognates, App. II, 10. }a, 380, 1, d. ie, 381,1,/. iebcnfallS, 288, l, a. icb-, iebermann, Uatii), 153. jemanb, 154, 321, 2. ittt-, 189-30. icnfdts, 377. iiingft, 376, 3. I, ' pronunciation, 43 ; in cognates App. II, 9, 1. Icin, 155; feine^tcegS, 888, 1, a. -Uit, 93, 387, 7. Stima, pi. of, 281, 1, a. (ommen, with pert pple. 369, 5. fb'nnen, 188-9, 191, l, 334. (often, 263, 1, t. Iraft, 377. -funft, 275, 1, a. I, pronunciation, 44; in cognates, App. II, 10. laAen, with gen. 248, 1, a. fiaben, pi. of, 874, l, a. Snnb, pi. of, 876, a. litngS, 377. Sanglueiie, inflection, 401, o. laffen, as aux. 385, 1 ; pert pple. of, 386, 2, 6 ; with reflexive = passive, 199, 805, 3, a; with int and object in dat. 865, 1, b; with int 366, 1, a, b ; with act. int = pass. imv. 344, 1, 363, 3, d. Xatin, relation to German, App. II; inflections, 281, 1, 284, 2 and 2, a. laut, 377. lauter, 886, 5. leftren, 265, 1, a; in pass. 345, 1, o; with inf. 366, 2 and 2, a ; inf. of, used for perf. ppl. 326, 2, 6. t82 INDEX clb, «60, 2, 6. [cllt, TO, 387, 1. [Ct, 387, 6. tvncn, with inf. 366, 2 and 2, a ; inf. for perf. pple. 336, 2, 6; used for le^ten, 865, 1, c. •M, 114, 5, 396, 3. [iXlH, in compounds, 338, 2, a. [tdl, 373, 1, 390, 12. tSit, pl. of, 376, a. CBCn, with inf. 366, 3. [htB, 83, 387, 10; -lings, 374, 6. )I)ncn, 349, 4, a. )§, 353, 1, a, b; -I»3, 390, 13. ,o-w German, 330. iinctt ftrafcn, 365, 1, d. unm, pl. of, 375, 2, a. [, pronunciation, 46; in cognates, App. II, 10. [adicn, as aux. 335, 1, b; with inf. 366, 2 and 2, a; inf. for perf. ppl. tUBCn, pl. of, 374, 1, a. [336, 2, b. mftneit, 349, 1, a. Int, 376, a. ittH, 150, 331, 199. itiitcfi, 157. Jonn, pl- of, 376, 1, a. iaxi, after num. 340, 1. llSftiB, 390, 14. leasure, nouns of, 340 ; ace. of, 366, 3. leftv, 158; in comparison, 113, 395. iclltcr, 158, 319, 3. icincr, comparative of mein, 308, 2. icift, mctftcnS, 395, 3. [iddle German, 330, 2. lift-, 313, 2, 388, 5. lit, 377. \ttMS, mtltctft, 377. littttt, 396, 2. vixed declension, 76, 3, 97-8, 379- 80 ; conjugation, 186. lodal auxiliaries, 188-94, 336, 2, b, 333-38. lodes, 71, 165 ; use of, 354-63. lOBCtt, 188-9, 191, 3,193, 2, 335. totb, pl. of, 375, 2, a. lultiplicatives, 399, 1. nut, in compounds, 336, 1. liiffen, 188-9, 191, 4, 336. , pronunciation, 46; In cognates, App. II, 10. Jtodi, nfi(ftft, 377. naftolimctt, 363, 1, c. !«i>(f)t, narfttS, 375, 1, a. jteSen, ncbft, 377. negation, double, 410, 6 ; pleonastic, 410, 1, c. ttennen, construction with, 365, 2. -ner, 387, 6. ttfl, pronunciation, 47. ut(f)t, with gen. 330, 2 ; pleonastic use of, 410, 1, c. ntcftlS, 159, 330, 2 ; with adj. 105, 2, nicmmtt), 160, 331, 2. [353, 2, a. -«t§, 83, 85, 2, 337, 2, a (1), 387, 11. noifl, 380, 1, e. nominatlTe, 341-4 ; as subject, 341 ; as predicate, 343 ; in address, 343 ; absolute, 344. normal order, see under word-order. nouns, 74-100, 373-85. number, of nouns, 69, 338-40 ; plu. sing, lacking, 338 ; duplicate forms in plu. 339 ; sing, for plu. 340 ; con- gruence of verb in, 346; see under plu. and sing. numerals, 115-18, 297-99; cardi- nals, 115-7, 397; ordinals, 118; with part. gen. 353, 1 ; derivatives, 118, 399. nun, 380, 1, /, g. nut, in relative clauses, 140, 2, 381, 1, 0, pronunciation, 18. b, pronunciation, 33. Ob, prep. 377; sub. conj. 381, 1; ali ob, 359, Bands, a. obBlcid), abfiftan, obwotl, 381, 1, g. obcrftalb, 377. object-clauses, 360, 361, 413. obcr, 379, 3. ofltte, 377; with inf. 367, 6. Old German, 330, 1. -ot, nouns in, 97, 3, 379, 3. Dtt, pL of, 375, 2, a. Ortliography, 3, and Appendix I. (J, pronunciation, 48; in Engl, cog- nates, App. II, 7, 1. Iiaar, tPanr, 319, 1. ¥arf, pl. a75,2. o. participle, 71, 167 ; used as adj. 101, 3; when compared, 393, 1; syntax ot, 368-70; pres. ppl. 368; perf. ppL 369; gerundive, 370. INDEX 483 passive^ 195-9, 344-5 ; conjugation , 196 ; impersonal use of, 198, 345, 2 ; substitutes for, 199; formed with fein, 344, 1. perfect, 168, 349, 3 ; use of, 351. person, congruence of verb in, 347; in rel. clause, 137, 2. persons, names of, 99, 384-5. personal pronouns, laO, 300-4; omission of, 303; place taken by mart, 331, 1 ; adjectiye after, 105, 4, 388,4. Jif, pronunciation, 49; in cognates, App. n, 7, 1, a. ))fle(ien, construction with, 348, 1, a. j)^, pronunciation, 48, 1 ; use in new spelling, App. I, 3, 8. plural, of nouns, formation, 81, 86, 90, 94, 97; lacking, 338; re- dundant, 339 ; sing, used for, 340 ; umlaut in, 374, 1, 375, 1, 2. 3, 4, a, 376 ; double plurals, 274-6 ; of ab- stracts, 338, 1, a ; pi. verb with sing, subject, 346, a. possesslves, 135-8; 306-8; strong forms, 135 ; weak, 136 ; compounds, 137, 306; congruence, 138; am- biguous, 307,1; postpositive, 308; repetition, 332, 2. predicate, nom. 343; after taffen with inf. 366, 1, a; appositive, 271, 368, 2, 369, 2 ; predicate adj. 110, 389 ; inf. 366, 5. prefixes, inseparable, 208, 396 ; sepa- rable, 210, 341-3; doubtful, 213, 341, 3 ; of derivation, 384, 2, 388, 391. preposition, 317, 376-7; with gen. dat. etc. 376 ; list, 377. present, 168 ; use, 349. preterit, 168; use, 350; pret.-pres. . verbs, 188. pronouns, 119-63, 300-23; see under ^er.sona/, relative y etc. pronunciation, 8-64 ; standard of, 8. proper names, inflection, 99-100, 284-S. punctuation, 6. fl, qu, pronunciation, 50. quantity of vowels, 14, quotation-marks, 6. t, pronunciation, 61; in cognates, App. n, 10. reciprocal pronoun, 123, 3, 304, 2. reflexive pronoun, 133, 201, 304 | verbs, 301-3 ; with gen. 349, 3. reiten, with inf. 366, 4. relative pronoun, 136-41, 314-16; substitutes for, 139 ; never omitted, 137, 1 ; compound, 314, 2 ; adverbs, 316 ; clauses, 137, 413-14 ; compari- son, 394, 375, 2. roots, 384, 2. rufen, 363, 1, c. f, pronunciation, 53; f, S, fl, %, App. II, 8, 1, a. -§, as plural-sign, 383, 384, 3 ; as ad- verbial suffix, 374, a. fctgen, construction after, 358, 1, a. -f nt, 83, 334, 3, a, 387, 12. -ftttn, 390, 15. fnmt, 377. fdj, pronunciation, 53; in Eng. cog- nates, App. II, 8, 4, a, 9, 1, a. -(Illttft, 93, 387, 13. ®(Sttb, pi. of, 378, z, fdjmeiftetn, 363,1, i. Siftmud, pi. of, 275,2, o. fdjon, 372, 1; relation to WiJn. 373, 3. script, German, 7, App. III. fejen, with inf. 366, 2 and 2, 6; perf. pple. of, 326, 2, S. fcfjr, comparison, 375, 1. fctlt, verb, 171-2; use of as aux. of tense, 323 ; of voice, 195, 1, 2, 344 ; with predicate inf. 366, 5. f tilt, poss. 138, 2, 307 ; feiner 3cit, 307, 2, a. fcit, 377; as sub. conj. 381, 1. fcitenS, 376, 6, a. -feitS, 306, 3. fi:t6,fri5anber, 399,2. f e(6et, felfiff, 124, 389, 2, 6, 304, 3, 311,3,397,1. -fetiB, 390,16. sentence, 409-12 ; dependent clauses, 413-16. separable prefixes, 206-7, 310-11, 341-3. sequence of tenses, 361. rid), 301; orthography, 4, 2 ; in sub- ordinate clause, 304, 1 ; as reciprO' cal, 133,3, 304,2. ©U, 301, 3, 4, 5 ; with imv. 173, 3. singular, for plural, 340 ; with more than one subject, 346, 3. 484 INDEX fo, as resuming particle, )500, 2, 380, i, h ; as sub. conj, '381, 1, h ; as rel. 316, 1; fo ein, 135,1, a; fo ettoaS, 151, 1. [dllii, 136, 311,2; inflection, 135,1. foUen, 188-9, 191, 5, 337. fonbcr, 377. fonbetn, 379, l. Stiotn, pi. of, a79, 1, o. iUottcn, 348, 1, a. ft, see under f. ilott, 377 ; with inf. 367, 6. ftcfien, with inf. 366, 3. Itctfien, with gen. 348, 1, 6. strong declension, of nouns, 273, 78-91, 874-6; first class, 79-88, 874 ; second class, 83-6, 875 ; third class, 88-91, 876; of adjectives, 108-5. Itroug conjugation, 388, 174, 179- 85 ; list of strong verbs, 331. lubject accusative witli inf. 367, 3, a. iubjunctive, 71, 172 ; use of, 355- 61 ; kinds of, 355 ; imperative, 356 ; concessive, 356, 1 ; optative, 367 ; potential, 358 ; diplomatic, ;358, 1 ; dubitative, 358, 2; unreal, 359; dependent, 360, for conditional, 362, 1. lubstantive adjective, 108, 890, 2 ; inf. 365 ; clauses, 413. ^ufilxes, in general, 384; of nouns, 387 ; of adjectives, 390 ; of verbs, 395 ; of adverbs. 374. nperlative, 111-14, 894-6; predi- cate superl. with am, 112, 894, 6 ; uninflected superl. as adv. Ill, 4, a, 373, 2, b, 375, 3 ; of adverb, 118, 2, 113, 1, 376. yllabication, 5. yllables, open and closed, 14, 2, a. , pronunciation, 64; in cognates App. II, 8, 1. !ell, gender, 835, 3. tcitS, 306, 3. tcl, 118, 3. emporal clauses, 416, 2. "Cttor, pi. of, 375, 4, a, 279, 3, a. ensea, 168 ; use of, 348-53 ; progres- sive tense forms lacking in Qer. 348, 1 ; sequence of, 361. \), pronunciation, 55 ; limited use of, 'n new spelling, App. I, 3, 10. time, expression of, 398; gen. ot, 851, 2 ; ace. of, 366, 2. titles, 847, 1 ; inflection of, 878, 1, 6; in connection with names, 885 ; sing. title with plural verb, 346, a. Sob, pl. of, 875, 2, a. transitive verbs, 164, 1 ; inflected with ^aben, 323; compounds, 263, 2. trigraphs, 8, 2 and 2, a. tt0(»,377. Sud), pl. of, 376, a. -turn, 88, 234, 3, a, 387, 14. tun, as aux. 325. <), 8, 2 and App. II, 8, 1 ; pronunciation, 56. u, pronunciation, 17. ii, 2, 2 ; pronunciation, 84, iiBet, 377. Um, as prep. 377 ; as doubtful prefix, 212, 341, 3 ; with inf. 367, 1, a, 5, h. um . . . totHcn, 127, 377. -um, Latin nouns in, 880, 2. umlaut, nature of, 31 ; how written, 31, 1 ; as sign of plu. 81, 1, 274, 1, 85, 1, 876, 1, 2, 90, 276 ; in compari- son, 111, 293 ; caused by sufix, 373, 3, 384, 2, 387, 389, 2 ; in pres. of strong verbs, 188, 388, 3 ; in pret. subj. of strong verbs, 179, 338, 4, a; as a factor in derivation, 384, 2. un-, accent of words in, 63, 3, 388, 6, 391, 3. unangcfcjen, 377. unb, with invefsion, 379, 4. unBefAobct, 377. unfern, untucit, 376, 5, h. imBntditet, 377. -UHB, 93, 387, 15. unter, as prep. 377 ; as doubtful prefix, 818, 341, 3. unUrftotS, 377. Ut-, 388, 7, 391, 4. -uS, Lat. nouns in, with pl. in -en, 881, 1, a; pl. of proper names in, 384, 3, d. b, pronunciation, 67 ; in cognates, App. II, 7, 4. bcr-, 808, 1, e, 396, 5. verb, 71, 164-215, 323-70; see mice, mode, etc.; irregular strong verbs, 186; list of strong verbs, 331; ir- regular weak verbs, 330 ; verbs with gen. 848-50; with dat. 867-8; with aco. 263-5. INDEX 485 ttetlaten ge^en, 369, 5. ttemtoge, 377. tierfidietn, 349, 1, a, a63, l, a. titet, 161, 388 ; tjieleS = oielerlct, 388, 2. voice, active and passive, 71, 164, 344-5. tjoH-, 81», 2 ; BoBer, 389, 2, b. tIDtt, 377 ; with dat. as substitute for gen. 347 ; "with passive verbs, 197 ; gen. of names in, 385, 3, a. Wr, 377. vowels, 11-35 ; quantity of, 14 ; modi- fication (umlaut), 31. vowel-change in strong verbs, in pres. 179, 188, 388, 3 and 3, a; in pret. (ablaut), 179-80, 388-9. tti, protiuneiation, 58; In cognates, App. II, 10. aSSaBMt, pl. of, 374, 1, a. toafttenb, 377, 381, 1. toann, 381, 1, i, m. tootten, 348, 1, a. -WijrtS, 373, 2, a. Uiig, inter. 143, 318 ; as rel. 141, 315'; as indef. 163, 330 ; = ioarum, 313, 3. bias fiir, 145, 313. weak declension, of nouns, 373, 76, 2, 93-6, 877-8; of adjectives, 106- 7, 388. weak verbs, 174, 175-8; use of connecting vowel In, 176, 387 ; in -ein, and -em, 177 ; Irregular w^ak verbs, 330. totBen, 377 ; -tocgen, 137, 306, 1. WtUinmhttn, 876, 1, a. toell, 381, l,i. -Wcife, 351, 3, a, 374, 2. tvcllt, rel. 136, 138; inter. 144, 313 ; indef. 163, 319, 1, a ; derivation, 397, 2. tVCKis, 163, 388. Menn, 381, 1, k, 369, 359, 3, a. tatt, inter. 143-4, 313 ; rel. 140, 315 ; indef. 168. tnerben, conjugation, 171 ; usa as aux. of tensa. 168; of voice, 196, 1, 2, 344 ; of conditional, 168 ; tnarb and Uurbe, 388, 4 ; toorben, 386, 2, c. UtS, 143, 1, a, 318, 1, 315, 3. tteS-, 139, 1. ttiber, 8i8, 1, 377. Joie, 843, 2, 871, 2, 366, 3, a, 381, 1, 1, m. tuiebetr, 814, 1, 341, 3. Wiffcn, 188, 190. Wo, 381, 1, m, 316; Wo(r)-, 139. ttioftt, 378, 1, 376, 1, 380, 1, g. WaUen, 188-9, 191, 6, 338, 344, 1. word-formation, 384-98 ; see under derivation and composition. word-order, 87, 96, 148, 173, 187, 194, 315, 416-436; the normal order, 416, 1, a, 417 ; the inverted order, 416, 1, a, 418; the inter- rogative order, 416, 2, 419 ; the de- pendent order ,'416, 3, 430 ; position of adjuncts, 481, 6; of the noun, 481 ; of the verb, 488 ; of objects, 483 ; of adverbs, 434 ; of depend- ent infinitives, 435 ; of dependent clauses, 486. gBort, pl. of, 376, a. JEBunber, e3 nimmt tnii^, 365, 1, d; Uai SBunber, 853, 2, b. jj, pronunciation, 69. Ij, pronunciation, 80. J, pronunciation, 60 ; in cognates App. II, 8, 1. -jen, in verbs, 395, 6. jer-, 308,/, 396, 5. JU, 377 ; with inf. 364, 367 : position in inf. of compounds, 807, 2 ; with dat. for predicate nom, 843, 1, b ; forming gerundive, 367, 4, 370 ; with dat. after verbs of making, etc., 865, 2, a. jtoeeit, 897, 1, a. }toi(«en, 377. iWO, JWOt-, 897, 1, a. MODERN GERMAN TEXTS Arnold: Einst im Mai. Edited by George B. Lovell of Yale University. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Fritz auf Ferien. Edited by F. W. J. Heuser of Co- lumbia University. Vocabulary and Exercises. (In preparation.) Baker's German Stories. Edited by G. M. Baker of the Wilham Penn Charter School, Philadelphia. A collec- tion of seven short stories by modern German vi'riters. Vocabulary. 40 cents. Baumbach: Das Habichtsfraulein. Edited by M. C. Stew- art of Union College. Vocabulary. 40 cents. Der Schwiegersohn. Edited by Otto Heller of Wash- ington University, St. Louis. Vocabulary and Exer- cises. 40 cents. Die Nonna. Edited by A. N. Leonard of Bates Col- lege. Vocabulary and Exercises. (In preparation.) Frau Holde. Edited by Laurence Fossler, University of Nebraska. 30 cents. Sommermarchen. Edited by E. S. Meyer of Western Reserve University. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Chamisso: Peter Schlemihl. Edited by Frank Vogel of Massachusetts Institute of Technology. 25 cents. Ebner-Eschenbach: Lotti die Uhrmacherin. Edited by G. H. Needler of the University of Toronto. 35 cents. Eichendorff: Aus dem Leben eines Taugenichts. Edited by G. M. Howe, Colorado College. Vocabulary. 40 cents. Fontane: Grete Minde. Edited by H. W. Thayer of Princeton University. 60 cents. Fouque: Undine. Edited by H. C. G. von Jagemann of Harvard University. Vocabulary. SO cents. Frenssen: Peter Moors Fahrt nach SUdwest. Edited by Herman Babson of Purdue University. Vocabulary. 40 cents. Freytag: Die Journalisten. Edited by Calvin Thomas of Columbia University. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Karl der Grosse. With Aus dem Klosterleben im Zehnten Jahrhundert. Edited by A. B. Nichols. Vocabulary by E. H. P. Grossmann of Simmons Col- lege. 75 cents. Fulda: Der Dummkopf. Edited by W. K. Stewart of Dartmouth College. 35 cents. Der Talisman. Edited by E. S. Meyer of Western Reserve University. 40 cents. HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY ^ new"yo^^'^' MODERN GERMAN TEXTS— (Continued) Fulda: Unter vier Augen, and Benedix: Der Prozess. Edited by William A. Hervey of Columbia. Vocabu- lary. 35 cents. German Poems for Memorizing. New Edition. With vocabulary by Oscar Burkhard of the University of Minnesota. 35 cents. Gerstacker: Germelshausen. Edited by L. A. McLouth of New York University. Vocabulary and Exercises. 35 cents. Irrfahrten. Edited by Marian P. Whitney of Vassar College. Vocabulary and Exercises. 40 cents. Grillparzer: Die Ahnfrau. Edited by F. W. J. Heuser of Columbia University, and G. H. Danton. Vocabulary. 80 cents. Des Meeres und der Liebe Wellen. Edited by Mar- tin ScHUTZE, University of Chicago. 70 cents. .^— Konig Ottokars Gluck und Endfe. Edited by C. E. Eggert, University of Michigan. 60 cents. Gtitzkow: Uriel Acosta. Edited by S. W. Cutting and A. C. VON NoE, University of Chicago. 35 cents. Hauff: Das Kalte Herz. Edited by N. C. Brooks, Univer- sity of Illinois. Vocabulary and Exercises. 35 cents. Lichtenstein. Edited by J. P. King, University of Rochester. 80 cents. Hauptmann: Die versunkene Glocke. Edited by T. S. Baker of the Tome Institute. 80 cents. Hebbel: Herodes und Mariamne. Edited by E. S. Meyer of Western Reserve University. 70 cents. Heine: Die Harzreise. Edited by R. H. Fife of Wesleyan University. Vocabulary. 50 cents. Die Harzreise and Das Buch Le Grand. Edited by R. H. Fife of Wesleyan University. 60 cents. Heyse: Anfang und Ende. New Edition. Edited by L. A. McLouTH of New York University. Vocabulary and Exercises. 40 cents. Das Madchen von Treppi. Edited by C. F. Brusie. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Die Blinden. Edited by W. H. Carruth, Stanford University, and E. F. Engel of the University of Kan- sas. Vocabulary and Exercises. 40 cents. LArrabbiata. Edited by Mary A. Frost. Vocabu- lary. 35 cents. Vetter Gabriel. Edited by Robert N. Corwin, Yale Uni- versity. Vocabulary. 35 cents. HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY '' ^e^^^y^'ork''- MODERN GERMAN TEXTS— (Continued) Hillern: Hoher als die Kirche. Edited by Mills Whit- LESEY. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Hoffmann: Das Fraulein von Scuderi. Edited by Gustav Gruener of Yale University. 35 cents. Meister Martin der Kiifner. Edited by R. H. Fife of Wesleyan University, Conn. 40 cents. Keller: Legenden. Edited by Margarethe Muller and Carla Wenckebach of Wellesley College. Vocabu- lary. 35 cents. Romeo und Julia auf dem Dorfe. Edited by R. N. CoRWiN of Yale University. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Leander: Traumereien. Edited by Idelle B. Watson. Vocabulary and Exercises. 40 cents. Lewisohn's German Style. Edited by Ludwig Lewisohn, Ohio State University. 75 cents. Loening and Arndt: Deutsche Wirtschaft. Edited by John A. Bole, Eastern District High School, Brooklyn, N. Y. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Ludwig: Der Erbforster. Edited by M. C. Stewart of I Union College. SO cents. Meissner: Aus deutschen Landen. Von M. Meissner. With notes by C. W. Prettyman of Dickinson College, and Vocabulary by Joseph Schrakamp. . 45 cents. — Aus meiner Welt. Von M. Meissner. Edited. by Carla Wenckebach., Vocabulary. 40 cents. Meyer: Der Heilige. Edited by C. E. Eggert of the Uni- versity of Michigan. 80 cents. Mogk: Deutsche Sitten und Brauche. Edited by Lau- rence FossLER, University of Nebraska. Vocabulary. 35 cents. . Moltke: Die beiden Freunde. Edited by K. D. Jessen of Bryn Mavsrr College. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Moser: Der Bibliothekar. Edited by H. A. Farr of Yale University. Vocabulary. 40 cents. Ultimo. Edited by C. L. Crow of the University of Florida. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Nichols: Two German Tales (Goethe's Die neue Melusine and Zschokke's Der tote Gast). Edited by A. B. Nichols. Vocabulary. 40 cents. Modern German Prose. Edited by A. B. Nichols. $1.00. Riehl: Burg Neideck. Edited by Arthur H. Palmer of Yale University. Vocabulary. 35 cents. HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY ^^new^york^" MODERN GERMAN TEXTS— '((Continued) Riehl- Der Fluch der Schonheit. Edited by Francis L. Ken- 'dall. Vocabulary by George A. D. Beck. 3a cents. Rosegger: Die Schritten des Waldschulmeisters. Edited Dy L. FossLER, University of Nebraska. 40 cents. Saar: Die Steinklopfer. Edited by Charles H. Handschin * of Miami University, and E. C. Roedder of the Uni- versity of Wisconsin. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Scheifel: Der Trompeter von Sakkingen. Edited by Mary A. Frost. New Edition. Prepared by Carl Osthaus of Indiana University. 80 cents. Ekkehard. An Unabridged Edition. Edited by W. H. Carruth of Stanford University. $1.25. Schwarzwaldleut'. Edited by E. C. Roedder of the Uni- versity of Wisconsin. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Storm: Immensee. Edited by A. W. Burnett, with exer- cises by H. J. Lensner. Vocabulary. 30 cents. Auf der Universitat. Edited by R. N. Corwin of Yale University. Vocabulary. 35 cents. In St. JUrgen. Edited by Otto Heller of Washing- ton University. Vocabulary and Exercises. {In press.) Pole Poppenspaler. Edited by Eugene Leser of Indi- ana University. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Karsten Kurator. Edited by P. H. Grummann of • the University of Nebraska. Vocabulary. {In press.) Sudermann: Frau Sorge. Edited by Gustav Gruener of Yale University. Vocabulary. 90 cents. Teja. Edited by Herbert C. Sanborn, Vanderbilt Uni- versity. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Werner: Heimatklang. Edited by M. P. Whitney of Vas- sar College. Vocabulary. 40 cents. Wichert: Die verlorene Tochter. Edited by Eugene H. Babbitt of Tufts College. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Wilbrandt: Jugendliebe. Edited by Theodore Henckels. Vocabulary. 35 cents. Wildenbruch: Das edle Blut. Edited by A. K. Hardy of Dartmouth College. Vocabulary and Exercises. 35 cents. Kindertranen. Edited by A. E. Vestling of Carletou College, Minn. Vocabulary and Exercises. 35 cents. Wilhelmi: Einer muss heiraten, and Benedix: Eigensinn. Edited! by William A. Hervey of Columbia University. Vocabulary. 35 cents. HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY ^^ new york ^- GERMAN GRAMMARS Bierwirth's Beginning German. By H. C. Bierwirth of Harvard University. 90 cents. Elements of German. By H. C. Bierwirth. $1.25. Gohdes and Buschek's Sprach- und Lesebuch. By W. H. GoHDES of the Horace Mann High School, New York City, and H. A. Buschek of the Brooklyn Polytechnic Preparatory School. $1.00. Howe's First German Book. By George M. Howe of Colo- rado College. 90 cents. Otis's Elementary German Grammar. Eighth edition, thoroughly revised and provided with new exercises, by W. H. Carruth of Stanford University. 90 cents. Prokosch's Introduction to German. By Eduard Prokosch of the University of Texas. $1.15. German for Beginners. By Eduard Prokosch. $1.00. Spanhoofd's Das Wesentliche der deutschen Grammatik. By A. W. Spanhoofd, Director of German in the Wash- ington (D. C.) High Schools. 75 cents. Thomas's Practical German Grammar. By Calvin Thomas of Columbia University. $1.25. Supplemen- tary or Alternative Exercises. By William A. Hervey. 25 cents. Vos's Essentials of German. By B. J. Vos of Indiana Uni- i^ varsity. Fourth edition, Revised. $i.oo. Concise German Grammar. By B. J. Vos. {In press.) Whitney's Compendious German Grammar. By William D. Whitney. Revised. $1.30. Supplementary or Alternative Exercises. By Robert N. Cokwin of Yale University. 25 cents. ——Brief German Grammar. By William D. Whitney. Revised and enlarged. 75 cents. GERMAN READERS Allen's Herein! By P. S. Allen of the University of Chi- cago. 70 cents. Daheim. By P. S. Allen. 70 cents. — ^ German Life. By P. S. Allen. (In press.) Harris's German Reader. By Charles Harris of Adelbert College. $1.00. Nichols's Easy German Reader. By A. B. Nichols. 40 cents. Prokosch's Lese- und Ubungsbuch. By Eduard Prokosch of the University of Texas. 50 cents. Schrakamp's Das deutsche Buch fur Anfanger. By JosEPHA ScHRAKAMP. Revised. 75 cents. Thomas and Hervey's German Reader and Theme-book. By Calvin Thomas and William A. Hervey of Columbia University. $1.00. HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY ^ Siw'yoR'/^- GERMAN READERS— (Continued) Tuckerman's Am Anfang. By Julius Tuckerman of the Central High School, Springfield, Mass. SO cents. Whitney's Introductory German Reader. By W. D. Whit- ney and Marian P. Whitney. $1.00. GERMAN COMPOSITION AND CONVERSATION Allen's First German Composition. By P. S. Allen of the University of Chicago. 90 cents. AUen and Phillipson's Easy German Conversation. By P. S. Allen and P. H. Phillipson of the University of Chicago. 90 cents. Boezinger's MUndliche und Schriftliche Ubungen. By Bruno Boezinger of Stanford University. 75 cents. Bronson's Colloquial German. With a summary of gram- mar. By T. B. Bronson of the Lawrenceville School. 75 cents. Jagemann's Materials for German Prose Composition. By H. C. G. VON Jagemann of Harvard. 90 cents. Elements of German Syntax. With special reference to translations from English into German. By H. C. G. VON Jagemann of Harvard. 90 cents. Jagemann and Poll's Materials for German Prose Com- position. By Max Poll of the University of Cincin- nati. With the vocabulary to Jagemann's Materials for German Prose Composition. 90 cents. Pope's German Composition. By Paul R. Pope of Cornell University. 90 cents. Writing and Speaking German. By P. R. Pope. 90 cents. Prokosch and Purin's Konversations- und Lesebuch. By Eduard Prokosch of the University of Texas, and C. M. PuRiN of the University of Wisconsin. (In press.) Schrakamp's Exercises in Conversational German. By Josepha Schrakamp. 55 cents. Vos's Materials for German Conversation. By B. J. Vos of Indiana University. 75 cents. Wenckebach's German Composition based on Humorous Stories. By Carla Wenckebach, late of Wellesley ■ College. $1.00. Whitney and Stroebe's Advanced German Composition. By M. P. Whitney and L. L. Stroebe of Vassar Col- lege. 90 cents. Easy German Composition. By M. P. Whitney and L. L. Stroebe. 90 cents. HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY ^* new^york^' MODERN LANGUAGE DICTIONARIES Bellows's German Dictionary 806 pp. i2mo. Retail price, $i.7S- On the same general plan as Bellows's French DlotionaiT (Larger type edition). See below. Whitney's Compendious German and English Dictionary viii + 538 + ii + 362 pp. 8vo. Retail price, $1.50. Arranges definitions in historical order, prints cognates In heavy type, gives brief etymologies. Case's Student's French and English Dictionary 600 + 586 pp. l2mo. Retail price, $1.50. Comprehensive, inexpensive. Popular with students. Case's Pocket French and English Dictionary x + 647 pp. l8mo. $1.00. Case's Library French and English Dictionary 956 pp. 8vo. $4.00. An expansion of the larger of the foregoing dictionaries, comparing favorably both for completeness and convenittnce with any French and English dictionary extant. Case's Concise Dictionary of the French and English Lan- guages 941 pp. i6mo. Retail price, $1.25. Abridged from the foregoing. The most complete of the portable dictionaries. Case's Little Gem French and English Dictionary 279 pp. Vest-pocket format. Cloth, soc. Leather, $1.00. Bellows's French and English Pocket Dictionary 60s PP- 32mo. Roan tuck, $2.55. Morocco tuck, $3.10. French-English and English-French on same page; gender shown by distinguishing types; verb-forms at a glance: liaison marked; hints on pronunciation, customs, and usage; rich in idiomatic and colloquial renderings in both languages; tables and maps. Carefully printed from type specially cast. Bellows's French Dictionary. Larger Type 689 pp. i2mo. Retail price, $1.50. Revised and enlarged. Larger type. For the use of students. Retains all the features and devioesi of the Pocket Dictionary ex- cept the maps. Edgren and Burnet's French and English Dictionary 1252 pp. 8vo. Retail price, $1.50. Gives pronunciation and etymologies, with date of first oc- currence of each word. Scholarly and practicaL Edgren's Italian and English Dictionary viii + 1028 pp. 8vo. Retail price, $3.00. WENRY HOLT AND COMPANY 34 Wbt 33D Street NEW YORK /I- Ox 7 V/ / &. ;a^ (x.^, '^^^ /. }yi/M/^^, 1 1 .1 jeA-/ qoijkM'OSi- i ■I